Agilent Technologies E5071C Manual Download Page 658 | Manualshive

Page: 658 / 2685

background image

Product Information

885

By pressing

Display

>

Data -> Mem

, the contents of the corrected data array

will be copied to this array. The user is allowed to read/write data from/to
the corrected memory array.

Equation Editor

Equation Editor is a function available in Firmware revision A.08.0x or later
that allows users to use a custom equation to display data in the E5071C.
Equation Editor can be accessed through

Display

>

Equation Editor

.

Data Math

Data processing is carried out using the corrected data array and the
corrected memory array. Four types of data processing addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division are available.

Electrical Delay/Phase Offset

An electrical delay and a phase offset are applied to each trace. By setting
an electrical delay, a linear phase that is proportional to the frequency will
be added or subtracted. On the other hand, setting a phase offset adds or
subtracts a phase that is constant throughout the frequency range.
Incidentally, data processing performed from this point on in the flowchart
is applied to both the data array and the memory array.

TDR Data Array

The results from all data processing done up to this point are stored in this
array. The user is not allowed to access (read/write) this data array.

TDR Memory Array

By pressing Display > Data -> Mem, the contents of the TDR data array
will be copied to this array. The user is not allowed to access (read/write)
this memory array.

Data Format/Group Delay

Complex data consisting of the real parts and the imaginary parts are
converted into scalar data according to the data format of user's choice.
Group delays are also calculated here.

Smoothing

By enabling the smoothing function, each point in a sweep measurement
will be replaced by a moving average of several measurement points
nearby. The number of points used in calculating a moving average is
determined by the smoothing aperture set by the user. The smoothing
aperture is defined by a percentage against the sweep span.

Formatted Data Array/Formatted Memory Array

All results from data processing are stored in the formatted data array and
the formatted memory array. The marker functions are applied to these

«
...
656
657
658
659
660
...
»

Summary of Contents for E5071C

Page 1: ...his Help 1 What s New in E5071C 8 Precautions 9 Quick Start 21 Measurement 69 Measurement with Option 489 Setting Control Functions 717 Product Information 749 Using Windows 943 Programming 958 Controlling Multiport Test Set 2881 ...

Page 2: ...s Setting Control Functions Quick Start Using Windows Measurement Programming Measurement with Options Controlling Multiport Test Set Specifications Product Information Using this Help Read me first What s New To understand the conventions and navigation system used in this help system refer to Using this Help To know about the new features of the E5071C refer to What s New E5071C Firmware Revisio...

Page 3: ...format for the E5071C Network Analyzer This section describes the usage of this help system Opening E5071C Help Closing E5071C Help Viewing E5071C Help on PC Context Sensitive Help Switching between E5071C Help and Measurement View Navigating E5071C Help Conventions used in E5071C Help E5071C Online Help ...

Page 4: ... a local hard disk drive on your PC then double click it to view Context Sensitive Help Context sensitive help is a special feature of the E5071C help in firmware revision A 08 0x or later It allows User to get information about the selected softkey by pressing the Help key in the E5071C or by pressing F1 in a keyboard attached to the E5071C or by clicking the help button in a dialog box This spec...

Page 5: ...h tab can be used to search any term phrase in the E5071C online Help Toolbar The toolbar can be used to navigate through the help The Home option can be used to return to the home page of the E5071C help containing Quick Access to chapters in the help The Back and Forward option can be used to toggle between visited topics The Print option can be used to print the selected or all topic of the E50...

Page 6: ...pt size C Documents and Settings test txt example2 xls Hard keys Hard Keys Keys located on the Front panel of E5071C are displayed in Blue color Bold in Verdana with 12 pt size Trace max Focus Marker Softkeys Also knows as menu keys are the names of menu appearing in the Firmware Software of E5071C and are displayed as Bold in Arial with 12 pt size Auto Scale All S22 Target Transition ...

Page 7: ... Graphical Popup windows can contain graphics as well as text 2 Text Only Popup Text only Popup windows can contain only text and are displayed with a yellow background In real images of the E5071C all the text marking are Graphical Popup links Click here to see an example of a graphical popup window Click here to see an example of a text only popup window ...

Page 8: ...k STIMULUS Block Note This Note sign denotes important information It calls attention to a condition that is essential for the user to understand This is a Note Caution This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or condition that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the instrument This is a Caution Wa...

Page 9: ...8 What s New in E5071C The E5071C with A 09 61 comes with the following new features S6P S8P are supported See the revision history for more information ...

Page 10: ...9 Precautions Precautions Safety Notices Installing Software Protecting ENA System Before Contacting us ...

Page 11: ...cabinet must be grounded with the supplied power cable s grounding prong DO NOT Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of inflammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment clearly constitutes a safety hazard Keep Away from Live Circuits Operators must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal ad...

Page 12: ...ructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltage levels capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument Safety Symbols Instruction Manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instrument manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Of...

Page 13: ...titute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or by the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Documentation Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent d...

Page 14: ... liable for the quality performance or behavior of the SAMPLE PROGRAMS Agilent Technologies especially disclaims any responsibility for the operation of the SAMPLE PROGRAMS to be uninterrupted or error free The SAMPLE PROGRAMS are provided AS IS AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for a...

Page 15: ...shall not be liable for any infringement of any patent trademark copyright or other proprietary right by the VBA macros or their use Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the VBA macros are free from infringements of such rights of third parties However Agilent Technologies will not knowingly infringe or deliver software that infringes the patent trademark copyright or other proprietary right...

Page 16: ... or installing software refer to Windows Support Information in http www agilent com find ena_support for more information Installing User Application Software Users can install commercial application software for Windows on the E5071C with their responsibilities Some application software may affect the measurement performance especially measurement speed ...

Page 17: ... of the E5071C 3 Do NOT Modify or Reconfigure the Operating System The Microsoft Windows operating system has been modified and optimized by Agilent to improve the performance of the ENA Do NOT install a standard version of the Windows operating system on the ENA Do NOT change advanced performance settings or group policies Do NOT add or delete any hard disk drive partitions on the ENA Do NOT dele...

Page 18: ...o recover Hard Disk Drive space See the Windows Help file for more information about Disk Defragmenter To run error check and defragmenter follow the procedure below 1 On the desktop double click My Computer 2 Select System OS 3 Click File then Properties 4 Click the Tools tab Error checking 1 Click Check Now 2 Check Automatically fix file system errors 3 Click Start 4 Click Yes to run disk check ...

Page 19: ...ternally connected items are properly supported not freely suspended from the input Do NOT bend cables repeatedly as this may damage the cable instantly Limit the number of connections and disconnections to reduce wear Inspect connectors prior to using look for dirt nicks and other signs of damage or wear A bad connector can ruin a good connector instantly Clean dirty connectors to prevent poor el...

Page 20: ...odically check and clean the cooling vents of the ENA Inadequate airflow can result in excessive operating temperatures which can lead to instrument failures When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted See the installation guide in detail 13 Precautions for Proper Grounding Proper grounding prevents building up of static charge whic...

Page 21: ...nt screen appears but Power on test fail or Calibration data lost is displayed in the instrument message warning area against a red background in the lower left part of the screen The system enters the service mode The instrument status bar in the lower right displays SVC in red Unstable Operation The system hangs up while the instrument is controlled from VBA or external PCs The blue screen appea...

Page 22: ...Quick Start Quick Start helps you to understand the E5071C operation quickly Overview Front Panel Rear Panel Screen Area Three Methods of Operation Basic Measurement Procedures Measurement Example of a Bandpass Filter ...

Page 23: ... and hardware necessary to turn off the power supply This will put the E5071C into the standby state 2 Next if necessary turn off power supply to the Power Cable Receptacle to LINE on the rear panel Under normal use never directly interrupt the power supply to the power cable receptacle on the rear panel when the power supply is on Always keep the Line Switch Always ON at Never turn it off O If yo...

Page 24: ...n or red are not regarded as failure 3 ACTIVE CH TRACE Block A group of keys for selecting active channels and traces For more on the concepts of channels and traces see Setting Channels and Traces Key Name Description Channel Next Key Selects the next channel as the active channel Each time the key is pressed causes the active channel to step up from the channel with the currently designated numb...

Page 25: ... trace Format Key Displays the Format Menu on the right side of the screen Manipulating the Format Menu enables you to specify the data format data transformation and graph formats for each trace Scale Key Displays the Scale Menu on the right side of the screen Manipulating the Scale Menu enables you to specify the scale for displaying a trace magnitude per division value of the reference line etc...

Page 26: ...er source You can specify the trigger mode for each channel 6 Hard Disk Drive Option 017 User only The E5071C comes with a removable hard disk drive For removal procedure see Removing Mounting Removable Hard Disk 7 NAVIGATION Block The keys and knob in the NAVIGATION Block are used to navigate between softkey menus tables limit table segment table etc or selected highlighted areas in a dialog box ...

Page 27: ... displayed in blue the NAVIGATION Block keys work as described below Key Name Description Knob turned clockwise or counterclockwise Increases or decreases the numeric value in the data entry area in small steps Keys Increases or decreases the numeric value in the data entry area in large steps Keys Moves the cursor in the data entry area laterally back and forth Use it together with the ENTRY Bloc...

Page 28: ...ated by the NAVIGATION Block keys and ENTRY Block keys include softkey menus data entry areas tables e g segment tables limit tables and marker tables and dialog boxes When two or more of these are displayed on the screen and need selecting use this key to change the selection focus among the objects to be manipulated When a softkey menu is selected the menu name area at the top of the menu is dis...

Page 29: ...setup state called the preset setup 10 MKR ANALYSIS Block A group of keys used for analyzing the measurement results by using the markers fixture simulator etc For more on the functions of the keys in the MKR ANALYSIS Block see Overview of Functions Key Name Description Marker Key Displays the Marker Menu on the right side of the screen Manipulating the Marker Menu enables you to turn the markers ...

Page 30: ...V The test ports comply with Installation Category I of IEC 61010 1 12 Front USB Port Two USB Universal Serial Bus ports are provided that can be used for connecting to ECal Electronic Calibration module USB Multiport test set or a printer Connecting a designated ECal module to this port enables ECal measurements to be taken Connecting a compatible printer to this port enables screen information o...

Page 31: ...r monitor display device can be connected By connecting a color monitor to this terminal the same information shown on the LCD screen of the main body can be displayed on an external color monitor Connector type 15 pin VGA connector female 4 GPIB Connector The connection of an external controller through General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB connector allows you to configure an automatic measurement ...

Page 32: ...uts off power supply of the E5071C When the power supply must be cut off to avoid such danger as electric shock pull out the power cable plug on the power outlet side or device side of the cable For the procedure for turning off the mains in normal use see the description in Standby Switch For more on the power supply see the Installation Guide 9 High Stability Frequency Reference Output Port Ref ...

Page 33: ...h stability frequency reference connect this connector to the High Stability Frequency Reference Output Connector Ref Oven Option 1E5 only by using the BNC m BNC m cable included with the option 11 Internal Reference Signal Output Port Ref Out A connector for outputting the internal frequency reference signal from the E5071C By connecting this output connector to the external reference signal inpu...

Page 34: ... 17 Mini DIN Keyboard Port A port to which a mini DIN type keyboard is connected The keyboard can be used to edit VBA programs inside the E5071C or to enter file names Since the arrow keys and numeric keys on the keyboard work in the same way as the arrow keys and numeric keys on the front panel of the E5071C you can use it instead of front panel operation Though E5071C comes with a Mini DIN Keybo...

Page 35: ...Output Port can output the pulse with the specified polarity either before or after the measurement of each point The External Trigger Output Port can safely handle a maximum Output Current of 50mA Symbol Parameter Typical Value Unit Condition Pulse Width 1 µsec VOH HIGH Level Output Voltage 5 Volt Iout 50µA VOL LOW Level Output Voltage 0 Volt Iout 50µA 21 Bias Input Ports This BNC female connecto...

Page 36: ...ions 235 435 285 485 The fuse holder has been changed The current fuse case has the black color There is no functional differences Fuse holder in Black color Specification Description Fuse Rating 0 5A 125V Part Number 2110 0046 23 Aux Input Ports The Aux Input Ports are used to input DC signal for DC signal measurement ...

Page 37: ...the following figure Channel 1 the upper window is the active channel To make a channel active use Channel Next or Channel Previous key Clicking inside a channel window will also make the channel active Channel 1 Window and Channel 2 Window describes different measurement parameters available in the channel measurement window The measurement parameters described in the Channel 1 and 2 Window corre...

Page 38: ... trace for which setup is being performed To make a trace active use Trace Next Key or Trace Prev Key Clicking the line where the trace name is placed the mouse pointer changes from to also makes a trace active 5 3 Data Format The data format of each trace is displayed here For more on setting up data formats see Selecting a Data Format 5 4 Scale Settings The scale setting for each trace is displa...

Page 39: ...onse calibration ER Error correction ON Enhanced response calibration F1 Error correction ON 1 port calibration F2 Error correction ON Full 2 port calibration 2 port TRL calibration F3 Error correction ON Full 3 port calibration 3 port TRL calibration F4 Error correction ON Full 4 port calibration 4 port TRL calibration Turning on off traces Nothing Data trace ON Memory trace OFF M Data trace OFF ...

Page 40: ...ting ON Parameter conversion Zr Conversion ON Impedance Reflection measurement Zt Conversion ON Impedance Transmission measurement Ztsh Conversion ON Impedance Transmission Shunt measurement Yr Conversion ON Admittance Reflection measurement Yt Conversion ON Admittance Transmission measurement Ytsh Conversion ON Admittance Transmission Shunt measurement 1 S Conversion ON Inverse S parameter Conj C...

Page 41: ...erence Position You can also move the position of the reference line by placing the mouse pointer on either of the two reference line indicators the pointer changes from to moving the indicator vertically with the left mouse button kept pressed and then releasing the button at the desired location i e a drag and drop operation 5 7 Trace Number In the rectangular display format the trace number is ...

Page 42: ...ime exceeds 1 5 seconds is displayed at the point on the trace Invalid traces The measurement conditions have changed but the traces on the channel currently displayed have not been updated to match the new conditions No display The measurement has not been executed 5 11 Error Correction Status Displays the execution status of error correction on the channel For details see Execution status of err...

Page 43: ...19 Graticule Labels Y axis divisions in the rectangular display format When traces in the rectangular display format are overlaid the Y axis divisions for the active trace are displayed The value of the reference line the division line between and is entered numerically by opening the data entry bar using the keys Scale Key Reference Value You can change values of the reference line at one divisio...

Page 44: ...s The marker response value for each marker the measurement value at the marker point is displayed here Two or three response values are displayed for data in Smith chart or polar display format 5 24 Markers The markers used for reading values on a trace Up to 10 markers can be displayed for each trace Active marker the one for which setup and analysis are being performed Non active marker Here n ...

Page 45: ...f the pointer changes from to moving the indicator vertically with the left mouse button pressed and then releasing the button at the desired location 5 26 Statistics Data Turning on the statistics data function displays statistics data here For more on the statistics data function see Determining the Mean Standard Deviation and p p of the Trace ...

Page 46: ... the ENTRY Block enables you to move the focus to the desired object 2 1 Parameter Name Displays the name of the parameter for which data will be entered 2 2 Data Entry Area When the data entry bar is displayed for the first time the current settings are displayed on it You can change numeric values by typing from the keyboard or in the ENTRY block on the front panel You can hide the frequency inf...

Page 47: ...ntry area by using the keyboard or the numeric keys in the ENTRY Block on the front panel press this button to finish the entry Use the mouse to manipulate this button 2 6 Close Button Closes the data entry area turns off the display Use mouse to manipulate this button ...

Page 48: ...ing of information displayed on the LCD screen is turned off this indicator is displayed 4 3 RF Output OFF Indicator When RF signal output is turned off this indicator is displayed 4 4 Measurement Status Displays the measurement status of the E5071C Value Description Setup Setup for measurement in progress Hold Measurement on hold idling Init Measurement being initialized Man The trigger source is...

Page 49: ... gray Measurement signal is not phase locked to the external reference signal Even when the High Stability Frequency Reference Output Connector Ref Oven Option 1E5 only and External Reference Signal Input Connector Ref In are connected phase locking may not occur immediately after power on in a low temperature environment The ExtRef display remains gray not blue In such a case wait a few minutes u...

Page 50: ...tify the Customer Contact listed at the end of this manual or the distributor from whom the unit was purchased SVC displayed in gray The E5071C is in normal mode 4 8 Date and Time Displays the date and time generated by the internal clock The display format is as follows YYYY MM DD HH MM Where YYYY Year AD MM Month DD Day HH MM Time 0 00 to 23 59 You can turn the date and time display on off by Sy...

Page 51: ...face operations that are equivalent to those of the keys in the ACTIVE CH TRACE Block RESPONSE Block STIMULUS Block MKR ANALYSIS Block and INSTR STATE Block on the front panel of the E5071C The menus on the menu bar correspond to the key blocks and their submenus to the hardkeys inside the key blocks ...

Page 52: ...lled by the softkeys and menu bars You can manipulate these keys by using the NAVIGATION Block keys on the front panel the mouse or the keyboard You can perform manipulations by directly touching the screen with your finger instead of using a mouse Softkey Menu Bar ...

Page 53: ...ted as the object to manipulate with the focus placed on it When the focus is placed on a menu bar the menu title area at the top is displayed in blue Pressing or clicking on Focus Key in the ENTRY Block enables you to move the focus to the desired object ...

Page 54: ...er key on the keyboard causes the highlighted selected softkey to be executed You can change which softkey in the menu is highlighted by turning or pressing on the front panel or by pressing on the keyboard Pressing the key on the front panel or the key on the keyboard brings up the upper level softkey menu and pressing the key on the front panel or the key on the keyboard brings up the lower leve...

Page 55: ... the button at the desired location The length and position of the scroll box indicate the length and position of the currently displayed part of the softkey menu relative to the entire menu 3 9 Scroll Arrow Small Using this button you can scroll the menu one softkey at a time Both upward and downward scroll arrows are available Use the mouse to manipulate these buttons ...

Page 56: ...een This section illustrates these three operating methods through the example in which the channel window layout is set to the four channel display as shown in the following figure In the next section and those following it a series of operations is expressed as follows Display Allocate Traces Four Trace Display Operating Method Using Keys 1 Press the DISPLAY key in the RESPONSE Block ...

Page 57: ...E5071C 56 2 Press or key to move the cursor to the Allocate Traces then press Enter or key 3 Press or key to move the cursor to then press Enter key Operation Method Using a Mouse ...

Page 58: ...onse menu press Display key 2 Click Allocate Traces 3 Click Operation Method Using the Touch Screen 1 Press Display key after presetting the E5071C Executing Preset key 2 Click Press Allocate Traces 3 Click Press any desired setting ...

Page 59: ...g measurement conditions Presetting the E5071C Select S parameter Data format Frequency range Number of measurement points Power level IF bandwidth 2 Calibration Specify calibration kit Select calibration type Measure calibration data Make error correction ON Save calibartion data 3 Connecting the Device Under Test DUT Connect DUT Adjust the scale 4 Analyzing measurement results Analysis using mar...

Page 60: ...e reverse transmission characteristics set the S parameter to S12 3 Set the data format to the log magnitude format Format Log Mag 4 Set the center frequency to the bandpass filter center frequency Next specify the span frequency which is set to 200 MHz in this measurement example Center 9 4 7 5 M m Span 2 0 0 M m 3 When entering the frequency unit using the keyboard type G for GHz M for MHz and k...

Page 61: ...ion Kit 85032F is selected Cal Cal Kit 85032F 2 Set the calibration type to the full 2 port calibration using the test port 1 and 2 Cal Calibrate 2 Port Cal Select Ports 1 2 3 Connect the OPEN standard included in the calibration kit to the other end of the measurement cable that is connected to the test port 1 as shown in the following figure and measure the open calibration data at the test port...

Page 62: ... the THRU standard included in the calibration kit between the measurement cables as shown in the figure below and measure the thru calibration data After measuring the thru calibration data a checkmark appears is displayed to the left of the Port 1 2 Thru button Cal Calibrate 2 Port Cal Transmission Port 1 2 Thru Connecting the THRU standard ...

Page 63: ... is to be saved before saving the calibration factor calculated based on the calibration data Save Recall Save Type State Cal 8 Store the calibration file to the disk of the E5071C The symbol X appearing in the operations below represent the assigned numbers to be used when the file is saved Save Recall Save State State 0X STEP 3 Connecting the Device Under Test DUT 1 Connect to the DUT to the E50...

Page 64: ...et the appropriate scale by executing the auto scale See the below figure Scale Auto Scale You can also adjust the scale by entering arbitrary values in the Scale Div button Reference Position button and Reference Value ...

Page 65: ...dB bandwidth Measuring the Insertion Loss 1 Display a marker Marker Marker 1 2 Using one of the following methods move the marker to the center frequency of the bandpass filter On the entry bar press 9 4 7 5 M m Turn the rotary knob on the front panel to set it to the center frequency 947 5 MHz 3 Read the marker value displayed as shown in the figure below In this example the response value denote...

Page 66: ...wing table If the two cutoff frequency points are not found all data items except the insertion loss revert to zero Parameter Description BW Bandwidth Stimulus width between two cutoff frequency points low and high cent Center Frequency Center point between cutoff frequency points low and high low Left side Cutoff Frequency The lower frequency of the two cutoff frequency points high Right side Cut...

Page 67: ... entry bar press 9 4 7 5 M m Turn the rotary knob on the front panel to set it to the center frequency 947 5 MHz 3 Specify the bandwidth definition value that defines the pass band of the filter In this measurement example it is set to 3 dB Marker Search Bandwidth Value 3 x 1 4 Set the bandwidth search function ON Marker Search Bandwidth 5 The bandwidth data items BW cent low high Q loss will be d...

Page 68: ...n CSV file format extension csv Since the CVS formatted data to be saved is a text file you can analyze the data using Microsoft Excel Follow the step below to save the trace data Save Recall Save Trace Data Saving the Display Screen You can save the screen displayed on the E5071C to the disk of the E5071C in Windows bitmap file format extension bmp or Portable Network Graphics format extension pn...

Page 69: ...E5071C 68 The image on the LCD display memorized in the volatile memory clipboard the image on the LCD display when the Capture System key is pressed is saved ...

Page 70: ...is chapter provides information related to the measurements done through E5071C Setting Measurement Conditions Calibration Making Measurements Data Analysis Data Output Optimizing Measurements Measurement Examples Fixture Simulator ...

Page 71: ...ions Setting Measurement Conditions Initializing Parameters Setting Channels and Traces Setting the System Z0 Setting Stimulus Conditions Selecting Measurement Parameters Selecting a Data Format Setting the Scales Setting Window Displays ...

Page 72: ... method Preset state Press Preset OK the front panel or Execute the SYST PRES command RST state Execute the RST command Factory default setting E5071C factory default settings The user can set items to be preset freely For more information see Setting the user preset function Other topics about Setting Measurement Conditions ...

Page 73: ...rement conditions and execute calibration for each channel you use for measurement With the E5071C you can change the number of available channels and the upper limit of the number of traces If you change the upper limit setting you need to restart the firmware of the E5071C Therefore first set the upper limit appropriately depending on the numbers of channels and traces necessary for your measure...

Page 74: ...quired to save recall the instrument state file since this takes longer with other configurations More channels and traces requires longer measurement time 2 4 1601 4 16 1601 9 9 1601 12 6 1601 16 4 1601 16 16 1601 24 12 1601 36 9 1601 2 8 1601 From A 09 50 2 8 10001 From A 09 20 to A 09 4x 2 16 10001 From A 09 50 1 4 20001 ALL ...

Page 75: ...stem Service Menu Channel Trace Setup for some settings 2 Press the desired softkey to select the upper limits of the number of channels and the number of traces 3 The dialog box that prompts New Channel Trace configuration will take effect after firmware restart appears 4 Click OK 5 Press any softkeys or hardkeys besides Preset key 6 The dialog box that prompts Do you want to restart now appears ...

Page 76: ...re not displayed can be measured For information on executing measurement for each channel trigger mode and trigger source refer to Making Measurements The procedure for setting the window layout is as follows 1 Press Display key Allocate Channels 2 Press the desired softkey to select the window layout shown below Windows Layout From Firmware revision A 09 10 channel display configuration of 10 16...

Page 77: ...ou want to set the number of traces 2 Press Display Number of Traces 3 Press the desired softkey to set the number of traces Setting trace layout graph layout Traces are laid out and displayed in the order of the trace number from graph 1 according to the graph layout in the channel window You can select the graph layout from the windows layout If the number of traces is less than the number of gr...

Page 78: ...he graph layout is as follows 1 Press Channel Next or Channel Prev to select the channel for which you want to set the graph layout 2 Press Display Allocate Traces 3 Press the desired softkey to select the graph layout shown below Graph Layout ...

Page 79: ...E5071C 78 ...

Page 80: ...e trace name on the screen for example Tr3 of the current active trace is highlighted and indicated with to the left To change the settings specific to a certain trace you must first activate the trace To select the active trace use the following hardkeys Hardkey Function Trace Next Change the active trace to the next trace with the larger trace number Trace Prev Change the active trace to the pre...

Page 81: ...els Single Continuous Continuous Disp Channels Response Settings Measurement parameter x Meas Data format x Format Scale Electrical delay Phase offset x Scale Memory trace and data math x Display Display Data Mem Data Math Window title x Display Edit Title Labe Title Label ON OFF Graticule label in rectangular form x Display Graticule Label ON OFF Color inversion x Display Invert Color Frequency d...

Page 82: ...x Analysis Fixture Simulator Time domain x Analysis Gating Transform Parameter conversion x Analysis Conversion Limit test x Analysis Limit Test Saving and recalling data x Save Recall Macro x Macro Setup Macro Run Macro Break System Printing Saving display Screen Beeper GRIB settings Network Settings Date Time Key Lock Backlight Firmw are Revision Service menu x System Preset x Preset ...

Page 83: ...82 Setting the System Z0 The procedure for setting the system characteristic impedance Z0 is as follows 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Set Z0 then input the system Z0 Other topics about Setting Measurement Conditions ...

Page 84: ... following four types SoftKey Description Linear Freq Sweeps frequencies in linear scale Log Freq Sweeps frequencies in logarithmic scale Segment Performs a sweep with linear sweep conditions segments combined For more information refer to Performing a Segment by Segment Sweep segment sweep Power Sweep Sweeps power levels in linear scale The procedure for selecting the sweep type is as follows 1 P...

Page 85: ...2 Click Start then input the lowest value 3 Click Stop then input the highest value Setting the Sweep Range with the Center Value and a Span 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel whose sweep range will be set 2 Click Center then input the center value 3 Click Span then input the span value Setting the Sweep Range Using the Marker 1 In the channel window whose range must be s...

Page 86: ...the currently active trace Marker Center Sets the center value to the stimulus value of the active marker on the currently active trace If the reference marker is on and the stimulus value of the active marker is expressed by a value relative to the reference marker the absolute stimulus value will be used to set the new sweep rang ...

Page 87: ...E5071C 86 ...

Page 88: ... port If the power output is automatically turned off by the power trip feature remove the cause of the over input and turn on the power output according to the above steps to restart the measurement Setting power level 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the desired channel 2 Press Sweep Setup key 3 Click Power Port Couple then select the on off setting of the level coupling for all ...

Page 89: ...ect the desired channel 2 Press Sweep Setup key 3 Click Power Slope xxx dB GHz xxx represents the current set value 4 Enter the correction coefficient using the ENTRY block keys on the front panel Setting fixed frequency at power sweep The procedure for setting the fixed frequency CW frequency at the power sweep is as follows 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the desired channel 2 P...

Page 90: ...e selected in multiple channel measurement settings In this case an error message is displayed to avoid source attenuator damage For example if Channel 1 power is at 35 dBm with the power range of 35 dBm to 0 dBm and Channel 2 power is set at 5 dBm with the power range of 25 dBm to 10 dBm this will causes an error because each selected power range is different In such a case turn OFF the Auto Rang...

Page 91: ...elow describes the relation between source power level and step attenuation Source Power Range Step Attenuation 25 10 dBm 0 dB 35 0 dBm 10 dB 45 10 dBm 20 dB 55 20 dBm 30 dB 65 30 dBm 40 dB 75 40 dBm 50 dB 85 50 dBm 60 dB For Auto Power Range setting the minimum value of step attenuation is selected according to the available source power level The table below describes the step attenuation select...

Page 92: ...ecified maximum available power level is as follows and reduces in proportion to inserted Attenuator range Frequency Power Level 300 kHz to 1 MHz 8 dBm 1MHz to 6 GHz 10 dBm 6GHz to 8 GHz 9 dBm 8GHz to 10 5 GHz 7 dBm 10 5GHz to 15 GHz 3 dBm 15 GHz to 20 GHz 0 dBm Correcting attenuation of power level using power slope feature You can use the power slope feature to correct the attenuation of a power...

Page 93: ...s set to 1Ch 4 Tr 20001 Points the maximum number of measurement points will be 20001 Setting the number of points 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the desired channel 2 Press Sweep Setup key 3 Click Points then input the desired number of points Setting the Sweep Time Sweep time is the time it takes to complete a sweep for each stimulus source port Two modes are available for sett...

Page 94: ...ss Sweep Setup key then Click Sweep Time 3 Using the ENTRY block keys on the front panel input the desired sweep time in seconds If the previous operation mode was automatic sweep time mode entering a new sweep time forces the analyzer to switch to manual sweep time mode Switching to Automatic Sweep Time Mode 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the desired channel 2 Press Sweep Setup ...

Page 95: ...T An S parameter is defined by the ratio of two complex numbers and contains information on the magnitude and phase of the signal S parameters are typically expressed as follows Sout in out port number of the DUT from which the signal is output in port number of the DUT to which the signal is input For example S parameter S21 is the ratio of the output signal of port 2 on the DUT with the input si...

Page 96: ...ort 4 reference receiver where n in the parentheses is the stimulus port number For example R1 1 means the reference level while the signal is output from the port 1 and A 2 means the received signal level into port 1 while the signal is output from the port 2 AUX Input The AUX Input Ports can be used to input DC signal for DC signal measurement This is useful in cases where the DUT Device Under T...

Page 97: ...ey 2 Select Range 1V or 10 V 1 in the figure below 3 Select Sweep Port 1 4 2 in the figure above 4 Click Format Real 5 Perform measurements as per normal 6 Sweep Port 2 in the figure above specifies the signal output port For example if sweep port is set to 1 the AUX input signal is measured while port 1 on the front panel outputs the RF signal ...

Page 98: ...ns Rectangular display formats Rectangular display formats draw traces by assigning stimulus values linear scale to the X axis and response values to the Y axis Eight different formats are available depending on the selection of data for the Y axis Type Y axis Data Type Y axis Unit Application Examples Log magnitude format Magnitude dB Return loss measurement Insertion loss measurement or gain mea...

Page 99: ...ient Abstract number Measurement of standing wave ratio Real format Real part of measured complex parameter Abstract number Imaginary format Imaginary part of measured complex parameter Abstract number Polar format In the polar format traces are drawn by expressing the magnitude as a displacement from the origin linear and phase in an angle counterclockwise from the positive X axis This data forma...

Page 100: ...s are plotted at the same spots as in the polar format The Smith chart format allows users to select one of the following five data groups for displaying the marker response values Linear magnitude and phase Log magnitude and phase Real and imaginary parts Resistance ohm Reactance ohm and inductance H or capacitance F Conductance S susceptance S and capacitance F or inductance H ...

Page 101: ... which the data format will be set 2 Press Format 3 Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired data format Softkey Function Log Mag Selects the log magnitude format Phase Selects the phase format Group Delay Selects the group delay format Smith Lin Phase Selects the Smith chart format with linear magnitude and phase as the marker response values ...

Page 102: ...sceptance as the marker response values Polar Lin Phase Selects the polar format with linear magnitude and phase as the marker response values Polar Log Phase Selects the polar format with log magnitude and phase as the marker response values Polar Real Imag Selects the polar format with the real and imaginary parts as the marker response values Lin Mag Selects the linear magnitude format SWR Sele...

Page 103: ...nnel 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which the auto scale function will be performed 2 Press Scale Auto Scale Manual scale adjustment on a rectangular display format For a rectangular display format four parameters are used to manually adjust the scales Adjustable feature Description Divisions Defines the number of divisions on the Y axis An even number from 4 to 3...

Page 104: ...nnel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace prev keys to select the trace for which scale features will be adjusted 2 Press Scale key 3 Select the softkey that corresponds to the particular feature that needs to be adjusted Softkey Function Divisions Defines the number of divisions on the Y axis Scale Div Defines the number of increments per division on the Y axis Reference Position Defines the position o...

Page 105: ...xt Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace prev keys to select the trace for which the scale will be adjusted 2 Press Scale key 3 Click Scale Div then input the displacement of the outermost circle Setting the value of a reference line using the marker When using a rectangular display format it is possible to change the reference line value to be equal to the response value of the active marker on ...

Page 106: ...erence line value to the marker response value 4 If the reference marker is on and the stimulus value of the active marker is expressed using a value relative to the reference marker the absolute stimulus value will be used to set the new reference line value ...

Page 107: ... 1 Press Channel Next or Channel Prev to select the channel whose window will be maximized 2 Press Channel Max to maximize the channel window 3 Press Channel Max one more time to reduce the window to its previous size Maximizing a trace display 1 Press Channel Next or Channel Prev to select the channel to which the trace belongs 2 Press Trace Next or Trace Prev to select the trace whose display wi...

Page 108: ...e frequency information from the measurement screen which changes the frequency information displayed in the Stimulus softkey and the data entry area for Hz unit to asterisks 1 Press System key 2 Click Service Menu then click Security Level and select any of the following options for the frequency display Softkey Function None Displays the frequency information Low Hides the frequency information ...

Page 109: ...black or inverted display background white In normal display the colors of items are preset so that you can recognize them easily on the display of the instrument On the other hand in inverted display they are preset to colors obtained by nearly inverting the default settings of the normal display so that you can use data easily when storing it into a graphic file The selection procedure is as fol...

Page 110: ... 0 Light yellow 5 5 3 Yellow 5 5 0 Dark Yellow 2 2 0 Light green 3 5 3 Green 0 5 0 Dark Green 0 2 0 Light cyan 3 5 5 Cyan 0 5 5 Dark cyan 0 2 2 Light blue 3 3 5 Blue 0 0 5 Dark Blue 0 0 2 Light magenta 5 3 5 Magenta 5 0 5 Dark Magenta 2 0 2 The setting procedure is as follows 1 Press System Misc Setup Display Setup Color Setup 2 Click Normal for normal display or Invert for inverted display 3 Clic...

Page 111: ... factory state You can reset the display colors in normal display and inverted display to the preset factory state The selection procedure is as follows 1 Press System Misc Setup Display Setup Color Setup 2 Click Normal for normal display or Invert for inverted display 3 Click Reset Color OK Setting Display Magnification You can reset the display magnification to Small Normal or Large The selectio...

Page 112: ...Full 4 Port Calibration Calibration with ECal Electronic Calibration ECal Electronic Calibration ECal Driver Installation 1 Port Calibration Using a 2 Port ECal Module Calibration Using 4 port ECal If you have 2 port Ecal Full 2 Port Calibration Using the 2 Port ECal Module Full 3 Port and Full 4 Port Calibration using 2 Port ECal Advanced Calibration with ECal Improving Calibration Accuracy along...

Page 113: ...tion Power Calibration Partial Overwrite Simplified Calibration Adapter Removal Insertion Unknown Thru Calibration Performing 8 term Calibration using External PC Mixer Calibration Scalar Mixer Calibration Vector Mixer Calibration TRL Calibration 2 port TRL calibration 3 port TRL calibration 4 port TRL calibration ...

Page 114: ...t temperature during the course of a measurement Random Errors Random errors occur irregularly in the course of using the instrument Since random errors are unpredictable they cannot be eliminated by calibration These errors are further classified into the following sub categories depending on their causes Instrument noise errors Switch repeatability errors Connector repeatability errors Instrumen...

Page 115: ... time it is possible to eliminate them mathematically at the time of measurement by determining the characteristics of these errors through calibration There are six types of systematic errors as follows Errors caused by signal leaks in the measuring system Directivity Isolation cross talk Errors caused by reflections in the measuring system Source match Load match Errors caused by the frequency r...

Page 116: ...oupler When a certain port is a stimulus port this error can be defined as a constant value for each stimulus port because the state of the termination at the other ports does not change The number of directivity errors of the E5071C is the number of stimulus ports you use Ed1 Directivity error of port 1 Ed2 Directivity error of port 2 Ed3 Directivity error of port 3 Ed4 Directivity error of port ...

Page 117: ... is a stimulus port this error can be defined as a constant value for each stimulus port because the state of the signal source switch does not change The number of source match errors in the E5071C is equivalent to the number of stimulus ports you use Es1 Source match error of port 1 Es2 Source match error of port 2 Es3 Source match error of port 3 Es4 Source match error of port 4 Load match erro...

Page 118: ... Reflection tracking error of port 4 Transmission tracking error Et A transmission tracking error is caused by the difference in frequency response between the test receiver of a response port and the reference receiver of a stimulus port in transmission measurements When a certain port is a stimulus port a transmission tracking error is defined for each of the other ports Therefore the number of ...

Page 119: ...m level accuracy Quick calibration Isolation calibration improves the accuracy in a reflection measurement of a DUT with high return loss THRU LOAD Following 2 error terms Transmission Tracking Et Isolation Ex S21 1 direction transmission characteristics at 2 ports Medium level accuracy Quick calibration Isolation calibration improves the accuracy in a transmission measurement of a device with hig...

Page 120: ...response calibration Full 2 Port Calibra tion ECal module 2 port 4 port Following 12 error terms Directivity Ed1 Ed2 Isolation Ex21 Ex12 Source Match Es1 Es2 Load Match El12 El21 Transmission Tracking Et21 Et12 Reflection Tracking Er1 Er2 S11 S21 S12 S22 All S parameters at 2 ports Highly accurate 2 port measurement Quick calibration with low chance of operator error OPEN SHORT LOAD THRU Highly ac...

Page 121: ...Source Match Es1 Es2 Es3 Es4 Load Match El1 El2 El3 El4 Transmission Tracking Et21 Et31 Et41 Et12 Et 32 Et42 Et13 Et23 Et43 Et 14 Et24 Et34 Reflection Tracking Er1 Er2 Er3 Er4 S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S44 All S parameters at 4 ports Highly accurate 4 port measurement Quick calibration with low chance of operator error OPEN SHORT LOAD THRU Highly accurate 4 port m...

Page 122: ...l device measurement Simplif ied 3 port TRL calibra tion Reflection open or short Thru Line Match Same as 3 port TRL calibration S11 S21 S31 S12 S22 S32 S13 S23 S33 Part of thru or line and line or match measurement can be skipped High accuracy 3 port measurement Effective for non coaxial device measurement Simpler procedure by skipping thru line mat ch measurement 4 Port TRL Calibra tion Reflecti...

Page 123: ...ame as 4 port TRL calibration S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S44 Part of thru or line and line or match measurement can be skipped High accuracy 4 port measurement Effective for non coaxial device measurement Simpler procedure by skipping thru line mat ch measurement Other topics about Calibration ...

Page 124: ...abled for all traces Cor displayed in gray Error correction On enabled for some traces Off displayed in gray Error correction Off displayed in gray Error correction On no calibration data C displayed in blue Error correction On Interpolation is being executed or the IF bandwidth power level power range sweep time sweep delay time sweep mode or sweep type is different from that when the calibration...

Page 125: ...ort calibration 4 port TRL calibration If none of the symbols described above is displayed error correction is not executed for the trace Acquisition Status of Calibration Coefficient for Each Channel You can check the acquisition status of the calibration coefficient for each channel with the calibration property The calibration property displays the acquisition status of the calibration coeffici...

Page 126: ...ars all calibration coefficients If S parameters required to calculate the calibration coefficient for the specified calibration type and test ports and those required for the existing calibration coefficient overlap executing the acquisition of the calibration coefficient measuring necessary data and then clicking the Done softkey clears the calibration coefficient for which necessary S parameter...

Page 127: ...ears the user calibration data When Calibration is done for a particular DUT the data get stored in the E5071C To clear this data Clear Calibration can be used which removes the User calibration data from the E5071C Other topics about Calibration ...

Page 128: ...If you select a predefined calibration kit m and f in the name label of the standard displayed in the softkey indicate male m and female f for the analyzer s connector respectively System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before calibration when using waveguide calibration kit and measuring waveguide devices Procedure 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to s...

Page 129: ...tion test using that port 1 Port error model OPEN SHORT response It is also possible to carry out isolation calibration with a LOAD standard during OPEN SHORT response calibration An isolation calibration will eliminate the directivity error from the test setup in a reflection test using that port 1 Port error model OPEN SHORT response isolation 1 System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before calibr...

Page 130: ... SHORT to the selected test port connector to which the DUT is to be connected 9 Click Open or Short to start the calibration measurement 10 If an isolation calibration must be performed using a LOAD standard follow the procedure below 11 Connect a LOAD standard to the selected test port connector to which the DUT is to be connected 12 Click Load Optional to start the measurement on the LOAD stand...

Page 131: ...E5071C 130 ...

Page 132: ...U response It is also possible to carry out an isolation calibration using a LOAD standard in the process of THRU response calibration An isolation calibration will eliminate isolation error crosstalk error from the test setup in a transmission test using that port 2 Port Error model THRU response isolation 1 System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before calibration when using waveguide calibration ...

Page 133: ...en the connectors to which the DUT will be connected 6 Click Thru to start the calibration measurement o The sweep is performed twice in the one thru measurement 7 If an isolation calibration must be performed using a LOAD standard follow the procedure below 6 a Connect a LOAD standard to each of the two selected test ports connectors to which the DUT is to be connected ...

Page 134: ...alibration measurement 7 Click Done to terminate the response calibration and the LOAD isolation calibration process Upon pressing this key calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved The error correction function will also be automatically enabled ...

Page 135: ... This calibration effectively eliminates the directivity error crosstalk source match error frequency response reflection tracking error and frequency response transmission tracking error from the test setup in a transmission or reflection test using those ports 1 System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before calibration when using waveguide calibration kit and measuring waveguide devices 2 Port Err...

Page 136: ...r each gender m and f in the name label of the standard displayed in the softkey indicate male m and female f for the analyzer s connector respectively 8 Disconnect the OPEN calibration standard and replace it with a SHORT calibration standard 9 Click Short to start the calibration measurement 10 Disconnect the SHORT calibration standard and replace it with a LOAD standard 11 Click Load to start t...

Page 137: ...e calibration measurement c Click Return 14 Click Done to terminate the enhanced response calibration process Upon pressing the key calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved The error correction function will also be automatically enabled ...

Page 138: ...ation when using waveguide calibration kit and measuring waveguide devices Procedure 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to perform the calibration 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Calibrate 1 Port Cal Select Port 4 Select a test port and corresponding S parameter on which 1 port calibration will be performed 5 Connect an OPEN calibration standard to the selected...

Page 139: ... calibration standard to the selected test port connector to which the DUT is to be connected 10 Click Load to start the calibration measurement 11 Click Done to terminate the 1 port calibration process Upon pressing this key calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved The error correction function will also be automatically enabled Connecting the standard for 1 port calibration ...

Page 140: ...n tracking error and frequency response transmission tracking error from the test setup in a transmission or reflection test using those ports This calibration makes it possible to perform measurements with the highest possible accuracy A total of twelve error terms six each in the forward direction and the reverse direction are used in a calibration 1 System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before c...

Page 141: ...replace it with a SHORT calibration standard 9 Click Port x Short to start the calibration measurement x denotes the test port to which the standard is connected 10 Disconnect the SHORT calibration standard and replace it with a LOAD standard 11 Click Port x Load to start the calibration measurement x denotes the test port to which the standard is connected 12 Repeat the above procedure for port y...

Page 142: ... to which the LOAD standard is connected 22 Click Return 23 Click Done to terminate the full 2 port calibration process Upon pressing this key calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved The error correction function will also be automatically enabled Connecting standards in full 2 port calibration ...

Page 143: ... the test setup in a transmission or reflection test using those ports As in full 2 port calibration this calibration method also makes it possible to perform measurements with the highest possible accuracy There are unique error terms for directivity source match and reflection tracking for each stimulus test port 3 3 ports 9 As for isolation load match and transmission tracking errors there are ...

Page 144: ...tkey indicate male m and female f for the analyzer s connector respectively 4 Disconnect the OPEN calibration standard and replace it with a SHORT calibration standard 5 Click Port x Short to start the calibration measurement x denotes the test port to which the standard is connected 6 Disconnect the SHORT calibration standard and replace it with a LOAD standard 7 Click Port x Load to start the ca...

Page 145: ...h the DUT is to be connected 9 Click Port x y Isol to start the calibration measurement x and y denote the port numbers to which the LOAD standard is connected 10 Click Return 11 Click Done to terminate the full 3 port calibration process Upon pressing this key calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved The error correction function will also be automatically enabled Connecting standard...

Page 146: ... test setup in a transmission or reflection test using those ports As in full 2 port calibration this calibration method also makes it possible to perform measurements with the highest possible accuracy There are unique error terms for directivity source match and reflection tracking for each stimulus test port 3 4 ports 12 As for isolation load match and transmission tracking errors there are uni...

Page 147: ...d replace it with a SHORT calibration standard 5 Click Port 1 Short to start the calibration measurement 6 Disconnect the SHORT calibration standard and replace it with a LOAD standard 7 Click Port 1 Load to start the calibration measurement 8 Repeat the above procedure for ports 2 3 and 4 9 Click Return Transmission 1 Click Transmission 2 Make a THRU connection between ports 1 and 2 3 Click Port ...

Page 148: ...ment 14 Perform the each calibrations by clicking Port 1 3 Isol Port 1 4 Isol Port 2 3 Isol and Port 2 4 Isol 15 Click Return 16 Click Done to terminate the full 4 port calibration process Upon pressing this key calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved The error correction function will also be automatically enabled Connecting standards in full 4 port calibration ...

Page 149: ... are used for the exceeding frequency range and extrapolation is being executed When using Ecal with the E5071C options 2D5 4D5 2K5 and 4K5 wait time is inserted automatically for stable calibration results Approximate calibration time is described in the support ECal page Refer the following section for ECal calibration Connecting ECal to E5071C 1 Port Calibration Using a 2 Port ECal Module Calib...

Page 150: ...er topics about Calibration with ECal ECal Driver Installation When the ECal is connected with USB ports at the first time ECal driver installation is required 1 Connect a Ecal to the USB port of the E5071C 2 Select No not this time then click Next 3 Select Install the software automatically Recommended then click Next ...

Page 151: ...E5071C 150 4 Click Finish ...

Page 152: ...odule Calibration Using 4 Port ECal Full 2 Port Calibration Using the 2 Port ECal Module Full 3 Port and Full 4 Port Calibration using 2 Port ECal Connecting Multiple ECal The ECal module connected to E5071C is listed here Cal ECal ECal If a single ECal is connected only one ECal is listed here When multiple ECal are connected E5071C all the connected ECals are listed here The first line indicates...

Page 153: ...rm calibration using your preferred ECal module select the desired ECal from the list and perform 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port or 4 Port calibration just as its performed in single ECal Once completed you can select another ECal connected to E5071C and repeat the procedure Other topics about Calibration with ECal ...

Page 154: ...o the test port to be calibrated 4 If you don t use all of the ECal module s ports connect terminations to the unused ports 5 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to perform the calibration 6 Press Cal key 7 Click Ecal 1 Port Cal 8 Perform a 1 port calibration by clicking the softkey of selected port 1 You can connect the ports of the ECal and the test port...

Page 155: ...E5071C 154 Other topics about Calibration with ECal ...

Page 156: ...nection while the E5071C s power is on 2 Allows the ECal module to warm up for 20 minutes until the module indicates from WAIT to READY 3 Connect the ports of the 4 port ECal module to the test ports you want to calibrate 4 If you don t use all of the ECal module s ports connect terminations to the unused ports 5 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to perf...

Page 157: ...he ECal and then measurement starts If the selected test ports to be calibrated is not connected to the ECal module an error occurs Connecting 4 port ECal module for full 4 port calibration You can connect the ports of the ECal and the test ports of the E5071C arbitrarily Connected ports can be manually specified although they are automatically detected before data measurement For more information...

Page 158: ... module to warm up for 15 minutes until the module indicates from WAIT to READY 3 Connect port A and port B on the ECal module to the test ports to be calibrated 4 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to perform the calibration 5 Press Cal key 6 Click ECal 7 Click 2 Port ECal When using a 2 port E5071C pressing this key performs a 2 port ECal When using a 3...

Page 159: ...and the test ports of the E5071C arbitrarily Connected ports can be manually specified although they are automatically detected before data measurement For more information Turning off ECal auto detect function Other topics about Calibration with ECal ...

Page 160: ...erform isolation calibration Procedure 1 Connect the USB port of the ECal module to the USB port on the E5071C with a USB cable The connection may be made while the E5071C s power is on 2 Allows the ECal module to warm up for 15 minutes until the module indicates from WAIT to READY 3 Press Macro Setup key 4 Click Load Project 5 From the Open dialog box select the VBA project file D Agilent ECalAss...

Page 161: ...he 3 Port button either 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 3 4 or 2 3 4 12 In the Select Channel area select the channel to be calibrated one of channels 1 to 9 13 Click the Next button 14 The following dialog box appears 15 Following the connection diagram shown in the dialog box connect ports A and B of the ECal module to test ports on the E5071C The connection diagram shown in each dialog box that appears in each s...

Page 162: ...ppears 20 Re connect the ECal module following the instructions given in each dialog box and continue the calibration process 21 When all calibration data have been collected a dialog box with the Complete sign appears as shown in the following figure click Done to finish the calibration If you wish to cancel the calibration click Cancel ...

Page 163: ...E5071C 162 ...

Page 164: ...ibration 1 Execute full 2 port calibration with ECal and save the calibration coefficients 2 Execute Partial overwrite procedure with the Thru standard of the calibration kit Unknown Thru Calibration E5071C allows you to perform Thru calibration of ECal as the unknown Thru calibration In this function the Thru calibration is performed with the Thru standard in ECal however the stored Thru calibrat...

Page 165: ...splaying the data and memory traces or displaying the math operation results between the data and memory traces This enables you to verify the correctness of measurement for each measurement parameter when the obtained calibration coefficients are used Procedure 1 Connect the USB cable between the USB port of the ECal module and that of the E5071C You can make this connection while the E5071C s po...

Page 166: ...he memory trace a Press Display key b Click Display Data Mem c Press Scale key d Click Auto Scale e Determine whether the difference between the traces is acceptable The difference should be read in terms of linear values instead of dB error If we consider the magnitude of the linear error as compared to the dB delta the value is very small So to evaluate the difference between the traces a linear...

Page 167: ...E5071C 166 ...

Page 168: ... 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to turn off the auto detect function 2 Press Cal key 3 Click ECal Orientation and select Manual 4 Specify a test port of the E5071C 5 Specify an Ecal port for the port of the E5071C you specified Even if the connection is wrong with the auto detect function turned off no error is displayed Other topics about Calibrati...

Page 169: ...nd store them to the built in flash memory of the ECal module as the user characteristics Use the following VBA macro to acquire user characteristics and store them to the ECal module s built in memory Storage folder VBA macro name project name D Agilent EcalCharacterization vba Precautions to take in using VBA macros Never connect disconnect the USB cable while executing the VBA macro In particul...

Page 170: ...aracteristics For optimal accuracy set the IF bandwidth to 1 kHz or less 3 Executing Calibration For the channel for which you have set the stimulus condition execute full 2 4 port calibration with a mechanical calibration kit when characterizing 2 4 port ECal Define the calibration surface as the connector surface connected to each port of the ECal module in the state used to measure characterist...

Page 171: ...in the figure below to update the information if you have connected another ECal module after the macro has been started 5 Measuring User Characteristics a Select Characterize ECAL 3 in the figure below to display the User Characteristic Measurement screen b After connecting the adapter to the ECal module as necessary connect each port of the ECal module and the test port of the E5071C ...

Page 172: ...onnected ports before measurement 6 Storing the User Characteristics to the Memory a When the measurement is complete the User Characterization Info screen appears b Enter the following information Designation Category Description 1 Number Specify a user number a location number in the memory where you want to store the user characteristics If the specified location number is not used for storage ...

Page 173: ...pters connected to each port as necessary The information you have entered is displayed when checking the user characteristics information by using the key strokes Cal Ecal Characterization Info d Click Write e At this time if user characteristics are already stored for the specified user number a dialog appears to confirm overwriting Click OK a Although the maximum number of user characteristics ...

Page 174: ... ECal s built in flash memory Doing so may damage the ECal module g The following dialog box appears while the VBA macro is storing data to memory Storing the user characteristics takes a few minutes depending on the amount of data h Another dialog box is displayed to notify completion of data storage Click OK 8 Closing the VBA macro a Click Close No 5 in Figure to close the macro Backup and recov...

Page 175: ...ck Open If the serial number information stored in the file does not match that of the ECal module connected to the E5071C a confirmation dialog box appears Click OK to continue the recovery only if a mismatch between these serial numbers is allowed 3 The dialog box is displayed to confirm execution Click OK to start the recovery of the flash memory The dialog box appears while the VBA macro is st...

Page 176: ... 4 Select a user characteristic which is specified by User Characterization Info screen 5 To check the information on the user characteristics you have selected click Characterization Info The following dialog box appears 1 The date when the user characteristics were measured 2 The information you entered in Characterization 1 of User Characterization Info screen 3 The stimulus conditions when the...

Page 177: ...E5071C 176 5 The information you entered in Connectors 3 of User Characterization Info screen ...

Page 178: ...gger is also applied to the trigger for calibration When the trigger source for calibration is set to System and the trigger source for measurement is set to External or Manual with the point trigger function set to ON a trigger is required for each measurement point during calibration When the averaging trigger function is set to ON the sweep is performed the number of times specified by the aver...

Page 179: ...E5071C 178 System Selects System ...

Page 180: ...ned by making multiple measurements of the device with the sliding load element positioned at various marked positions of a long transmission line The transmission line is assumed to have zero reflections and the load element has a finite reflection that can be mathematically removed using a least squares circle fitting method A sliding load calibration can be very accurate when performed perfectl...

Page 181: ...r female load OR Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Load 5 for male load The assignment of female and male loads varies from one calibration kit to another In the case of 85052B load 2 is a female and load 5 is a male load 14 Slide the load to the desired position and click Sliding Load Repeat this step for at least 5 times till Sliding Load 5 then click Done This step can be repeated at most 10 times only...

Page 182: ... X11644A X Band 90 Calibration Kit P11644A P Band WG 62 Calibration Kit K11644A K Band WG 42 Calibration Kit The K11644A K Band WG 42 Calibration Kit is not verified Procedure Follow these steps to perform calibration using offset load The example demonstrates re calibration for full 1 port calibration 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to perform the c...

Page 183: ...ort Open and Load should have check mark on their left 20 Click Done The sweep range setting and Thru Offset frequency range should match the frequency range of the offset load Else the load process is not executed hence no check mark appear on the Load softkey Similarly if the frequency range is extended the load process is also not executed Refer to redefining a calibration kit to learn more abo...

Page 184: ...r correction and the system error model A user defined calibration kit may be used in the following circumstances When the user wants to use connectors other than those pre defined in the calibration kits for the E5071C e g a SMA connector When the user wants to use different standards in place of one or more standards pre defined in the E5071C For example when three offset SHORT standards are use...

Page 185: ... For example the offset delay 32 ps of the SHORT standard in the 3 5 mm calibration kit is a standard coefficient Standard class A group of standards used in a calibration process For each class the user must select the standards to use from the 21 available standards Subclass You can register up to 8 standard types This capability lets you specify a different standard for each frequency range You...

Page 186: ...Measurement 185 Transmission Standard Model THRU ...

Page 187: ...ng the length one way of the coaxial cable Loss is defined using the unit of ohm s at 1 GHz If you select waveguide as the media type this parameter is ignored In many applications using the value 0 for the loss should not result in significant error The loss of a standard is determined by measuring the delay sec and the loss at 1 GHz and then substituting them in the formula below C0 C1 C2 C3 It ...

Page 188: ... Hz3 In most existing calibration kits THRU standards are defined as zero length THRU i e the delay and loss are both 0 Such a THRU standard does not exist however Calibration must be done with two test ports interconnected directly The measurement accuracy depends on the conformity of the calibration standard to its definition If the calibration standard has been damaged or worn out the accuracy ...

Page 189: ...type and define standard coefficient 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Modify Kit 3 Click Define STDs and select the standard to be redefined from among standards numbered 1 through 21 4 Click STD Type then select the type of standard Softkey Function Open Selects the OPEN standard Short Selects the SHORT standard Load Selects the LOAD standard Delay Thru Selects the delay THRU standard Unknown Thru Selects...

Page 190: ...oss Sets the offset loss Arb Impedance Sets an arbitrary impedance Min Frequency Sets a start frequency Specify cutoff frequency when Waveguide is set for the media type Max Frequency Sets a stop frequency Specify cutoff frequency when Waveguide is set for the media type Media Selects a media type Coaxial or Waveguide Length Type When the standard type is Load this softkey can be selected from Fix...

Page 191: ...ts a subclass you want to use Open Selects the OPEN class Short Selects the SHORT class Load Selects the LOAD class Thru Selects the THRU class TRL Reflect Selects TRL Reflect TRL Line Match Selcts TRL Line Match 4 5 For TRL Thru select ports Select Set All to use the same standards for all test ports Softkey Function Port 1 2 Selects port 1 and port 2 Port 1 3 Selects port 1 and port 3 Port 1 4 S...

Page 192: ...lick Label Kit and input a new label for the calibration kit by using the keypad displayed on the screen You can save the definition See Saving Definition File of Calibration Kit Example of defining the TRL calibration kit You need to enter the definition of the TRL calibration kit to perform TRL calibration Follow these steps to define the following calibration kit given as an example THRU Delay ...

Page 193: ... 2 1 Click 4 No Name Label 2 Type in LINE 7G 3 Click STD Type Thru 4 Set Offset Delay to 54 ps 5 Set Min Frequency to 2 GHz 6 Set Max Frequency to 7 GHz 7 Click Return to return to the Define Std menu 8 Click 5 No Name Label 9 Type in LINE 7G 10 Click STD Type Thru 11 Set Offset Delay to 13 ps 12 Set Min Frequency to 7 GHz 13 Click Return to return to the Define Std menu 14 Click Return to return ...

Page 194: ...impedance and measurement data of the standard used for calculating the calibration plane for TRL calibration 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Cal Kit then select a calibration kit 3 Click Modify Cal Kit TRL Option 4 Click Impedance to select the reference impedance Softkey Function Line Calculates the calibration coefficient using the characteristic impedance of the line standard as the reference impedanc...

Page 195: ...ion kit You can set a media type for the standard you use 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Cal Kit then select a calibration kit 3 Click Modify Cal Kit Modify Cal Kit 4 Click Define STDs and select a standard 5 Click Media and select a media type Softkey Function Coaxial Selects coaxial as the media type Waveguide Selects waveguide as the media type 6 7 If you select waveguide as the media type set the sys...

Page 196: ...oth male female are set using subclass in advance the gender which is used for the calibration can also be changed programmatically using SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SUBClass The gender setting option using subclass is defined from the E5071C connector type and not from the standard calibration kit gender type Saving Definition File of Calibration Kit You can save the definition file ...

Page 197: ...er enter a file name and click Open Restoring Definition File of Calibration Kit 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Cal Kit then select a calibration kit 3 Click Modify Cal Kit Restore Cal Kit 4 Click OK to restore the definition of the calibration kit selected by Cal Kit to factory default settings ...

Page 198: ...calibration kit you want to define 4 Click Modify Kit Define STDs 5 Select 1 click Label and enter Open 3G using the character input pad that appears on the screen 6 Click Open as the standard type STD Type 7 Set a necessary standard coefficient 8 Enter 1G as the minimum frequency for Min Frequency 9 Enter 3G as the maximum frequency for Max Frequency 10 Click Return 11 In the same way select 2 pr...

Page 199: ...orts 11 Select 2 Open 6G 12 Click Return Disabling Standards Defined for a Subclass The following procedure shows how to disable a standard defined for a subclass You cannot disable subclass 1 because at least one standard must exist The following procedure shows how to disable an OPEN standard of subclass 2 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Cal Kit 3 Select a calibration kit you want to use 4 Click Modify ...

Page 200: ...t frequency range Possible Example 1 When frequency ranges specified with subclasses overlap For the measurement frequency range 1 GHz 8 GHz if you execute calibration with a standard of subclass 1 1 GHz 5 GHz and then with a standard of subclass 2 4 GHz 8 GHz the standard last executed is applied for the overlapping portion 4 GHz 5 GHz Example 2 When frequency ranges specified with subclasses do ...

Page 201: ...s however are disregarded There is no check mark on the softkey Note that because the standard of subclass 1 covers the measurement frequency range Done is available Example 4 When a part of a frequency range specified with a subclass lies outside the measurement frequency range For a measurement frequency range 1 GHz to 6 GHz if you define a standard of subclass 1 1 GHz 5 GHz and a standard of su...

Page 202: ...Measurement 201 ...

Page 203: ...ion ON OFF The receiver calibration data are acquired for each channel test port so the gain error correction can be turned ON OFF independently for any channel or port The status of the gain error correction for each channel is indicated by one of the symbols in the channel status bar in the lower part of the window as shown in the following table Symbol Status of receiver error correction RC dis...

Page 204: ...error correction of the receiver is automatically turned on when the calibration data are measured You can also turn this ON OFF explicitly by following the steps below 1 Press Cal key 2 Press Receiver Calibration 3 Select a port see Selecting target port for error correction 4 Click Correction Each time the key is pressed ON and OFF switches over alternately Selecting Target Port for Error Correc...

Page 205: ...crease if power calibration is implemented for both the receiver port and the source port before starting receiver calibration For information on power calibration refer to Power Calibration 1 Press Cal key 2 Press Receiver Calibration 3 Select a port see Selecting target port for error correction 4 Click Source Port 5 Select the stimulus port for which you want to perform power calibration 6 Conn...

Page 206: ...ied offset is 10 dBm then Source Power Reading after calibration would be 20 dBm 10 The value of offset is independent for each channel 8 The E5071C provides an option to calibrate both the Receiver and Transmitter end or only the Receiver end or only the Transmitter end Click Receiver Calibration Calibrate Both to start measurement of calibration data for both receiver and transmitter end This st...

Page 207: ...ly When Calibrate R is selected the Select Port setting is used and the Source Port setting is ignored Click Receiver Calibration Calibrate T to calibrate the transmitter end only When Calibrate Both or Calibrate T is selected the source port should be different from measurement port ...

Page 208: ...rt and you can turn ON OFF the power level error correction independently for any channel or test port The status of the power level error correction of each channel is indicated by one of the symbols shown in table below in the channel status bar in the lower part of the window Symbol Status of power level error correction PC displayed in blue Error correction is performed for all stimulus ports ...

Page 209: ...evel error correction is automatically turned on when you execute the measurement of calibration data You can turn it on or off as necessary by using the following procedure 1 Press Cal key 2 Click Power Calibration 3 Select a port 4 Click Correction Each press toggles this selection between ON OFF Preparing Power Meter and Sensor To execute power calibration you need to prepare the power meter an...

Page 210: ...e ready to use When you connect them for the first time new hardware wizard runs For the procedure refer to Setting system controller USB GPIB interface The hardware wizard procedure for USB enabled power sensor is same At the last step in the procedure Assign USB device alias dialog box will be displayed Select When a new USB device is plugged in or Never show this dialog instead of Each time a U...

Page 211: ... 100 and then calibrate the power sensor When you use the 437B or 438A as the power meter you need to set the power sensor calibration factor table with the E5071C If you use a power meter other than the 437B or 438A refer to the following table Power sensor Setting of calibration factor table 8482A Set the calibration factor table with the E5071C only when you do not set the calibration factor ta...

Page 212: ... table 8 For a frequency other than one set in the table a value obtained by linear interpolation of the calibration factors at the 2 points adjacent to the frequency is used If a frequency is lower than the lowest frequency in the table the calibration factor at the lowest frequency is used if larger than the highest frequency in the table the calibration factor at the highest frequency is used 9...

Page 213: ...s not guaranteed under the following two conditions 1 you imported a CSV format file created edited on a spreadsheet program or 2 you imported a CSV format file that had been exported according to Saving power sensor calibration factor table but then modified Using USB power sensor Use the following procedure to select the USB power meter 1 Press System key 2 Click Misc Setup Power Meter Setup USB...

Page 214: ... Select Port 5 Click the softkey corresponding to the test port you want to select Setting Loss Compensation If you need to apply a signal with a more accurate power level to the DUT you can use the loss compensation feature to obtain calibration data for correcting the difference in power loss due to the difference in connection method cable adapter etc between the time when the power calibration...

Page 215: ... table the calibration factor at the lowest frequency is used if larger than the highest frequency in the table the calibration factor at the highest frequency is used 3 When setting the table by using the front panel keys or the keyboard you need to first set the focus on select the operation target table or softkey You can change the focus by pressing Focus key in the ENTRY block When the focus ...

Page 216: ... following two conditions 1 you imported a CSV format file created edited on a spreadsheet program or 2 you imported a CSV format file that had been exported according to Saving loss compensation table but then modified Setting a tolerance for power calibration The E5071C provides an option to set the tolerance value for power calibration This function is to save time for the power calibration by ...

Page 217: ...ment point averaging factor 7 Connect the power sensor for the selected channel to the selected port 8 Click Take Cal Sweep to start the measurement of calibration data 9 You can abort the measurement by pressing Abort during measurement 10 When the measurement is complete the power level error correction is automatically turned on 11 If the power meter GPIB address is not set correctly or if the ...

Page 218: ...eflection or isolation measurement The adapter removal and partial overwrite function is only available when calibration status is Corr and not for C or C Partial overwrite is not available if no calibration has been done You cannot append calibration coefficients to previous calibrations For example you cannot realize full 4 port calibration by performing additional calibration for 1 port after t...

Page 219: ... to which the DUT is connected 7 Click Port x y Thru x and y are the thru connected port numbers to start the re measurement of the calibration standard 8 Click Return 9 Click Overwrite to finish the re calibration for the full 2 port calibration At this point the calibration coefficients are re calculated and saved ...

Page 220: ...must pay special attention to the following points when measuring data for the simplified full 3 4 port calibration The standard used for measurement must match its definition value Use a standard that provides good repeatability stability Do not omit the length of the thru when defining the standard When using a user created standard verify the definition value For the N connector note the discri...

Page 221: ...ll 4 port calibration Recommended is displayed on the softkey of the type of thru measurement that can be omitted For example when the omissible thru measurement is 2 3 2 3 Recommended is displayed The display after the execution of the omissible thru measurement is the same as that for a required thru measurement and the display for the remaining omissible thru measurement is 2 3 Optional For the...

Page 222: ...ible thru line measurement For example when the omissible line match measurement is 2 3 2 3 Optional is displayed The display after the execution of the omissible line match measurement is 2 3 Line Match The softkeys Fwd and Rvs for forward measurement and reverse measurement for the omissible line match measurement do not change Omissible measurements at 4 port TRL calibration Required measuremen...

Page 223: ...maining omissible line match measurement is 2 3 Optional The softkeys Fwd and Rvs for forward measurement and reverse measurement for the omissible line match measurement do not change For the simplified 4 port TRL calibration up to three thru line measurements and line match measurements can be omitted but omitting all of them results in poor accuracy ...

Page 224: ...pter Removal Adapter Removal is a technique used to remove any adapter characteristics from the calibration plane The E5071C uses the following adapter removal process to remove adapter characteristics 1 Perform calibration with the adapter in use 2 Remove the adapter from the port and measure Open Short and Load values to determine the adapter s characteristics 3 Remove the obtained adapter chara...

Page 225: ...the port and measure Open Short and Load values to determine the adapter s characteristics 3 Insert the obtained adapter characteristics to the error coefficients in an embedding fashion Open Short and Load values measured with adapter attached In order to determine the adapter characteristics with four unknown parameters by making three measurements Open Short and Load the adapter must satisfy th...

Page 226: ...te System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before calibration when using waveguide calibration kit and measuring waveguide devices Some calibration kits such as the waveguide calibration kit have operational frequency range defined by Minimum and Maximum frequency When the E5071C stimulus setting is out of the operational frequency range you cannot click Done key or finish the calibration by remote c...

Page 227: ...E5071C 226 1 Using Adapter Insertion a Perform a SOLT F2P Calibration at Port 1 3 5mm using Z0 50 ohm b Perform Adapter insertion at Port 2 Z0 1 using P11644A ...

Page 228: ...Z0 1 b Perform Adapter removal at port 1 Z0 50 using 85052D 4 Using Port Extension a Perform a SOLT F2P calibration at Port 1 3 5mm with Z0 50 b Perform Port extension calibration at Port 2 manual with Coax length WG length Cut off System Z0 can be either 1 oh or 50 ohm both are fine to use ...

Page 229: ...e generated in the measurement For Adapter Removal the adapter length is Positive For Adapter Insertion the Adapter length is Negative To change gender of the calibration kit refer to Defining Calibration Kit Gender To use Adapter Removal Insertion follow the given procedure 1 Perform a full n Port calibration using your calibration kit so that the port used to conduct adapter insertion removal is...

Page 230: ...Adapter Removal menu Cal Calibrate Adapter Removal 3 Select the Port in from which you want to insert remove Adapter characteristics from Select Port e g 1 1 in the above figure A sign appears in front of the port is a valid port to conduct adapter removal insertion as the full n port calibration has been performed on the port ...

Page 231: ...l Waveguide Length type a value for Waveguide length with Negative or Positive sign 5 in the above figure For Adapter Removal the Waveguide length is Positive and for Adapter Insertion the Waveguide length is Negative 8 Change the system Z0 to 1 ohm before calibration when using waveguide calibration kit and measuring waveguide devices 8 Connect Open Short and Load of the selected Calkit e g 85033...

Page 232: ...removed or inserted to 180 degrees Difference between Traditional Network Analyzer E5071C Adapter Calibration Usually two port network analyzers removes adapter characteristics by performing two sets of Full 2 Port Calibration as shown below Calibration performed with the adapter connected to Port2 Calibration performed with the adapter connected to Port1 Removing adapter characteristics using two...

Page 233: ... a multi port network analyzer because it will require as many sets of Full 2 Port Calibration as twice the number of port combinations Therefore the E5071C uses an advanced method to remove Adapter characteristics described in About Adapter Insertion ...

Page 234: ...standard The Thru must satisfy the following requirements 1 Thru must be Reciprocal with S21 and S12 equal in nature It should have a consistent behavior independent of the direction from which it is used 2 The electrical length of the Thru should be known at an accuracy of 1 4 of the wavelength 3 Unknown Thru is NOT supported during the TRL calibration Procedure To measure the nominal electrical ...

Page 235: ...ne STDs No Name Label 4 Type a name for unknown Thru Cal standard e g Unknown Thru1 By changing the label to a different name e g Unknown Thru1 the No Name standard will adopt to the specified new name 5 Press Cal Modify Calkit Define STDs Defined Name STD Type Unknown Thru 6 Click Offset Delay then enter the approximate offset delay value of the unknown Thru standard 7 Press Cal Modify Calkit Spe...

Page 236: ...off the System Calibration In its default setting the E5071C applies system calibration to the measured S parameter data Because the system calibration is applied only to the S parameter measurement data and NOT to the absolute value measurement data it interferes with 8 term error model calibration when calculating error coefficients on external computer You need to turn OFF this state all the ti...

Page 237: ...feres with 8 term error model calibration when calculating error coefficients on external computer You need to turn off the RF ranging Auto mode The RF ranging mode can be changed by the command SERVice ADJust SENSe Ch SWEep RF RANGe PORT Pt AUTO ON OFF This command applies to each channel and measurement port This function only exist on frequency 3 GHz 4 5 GHz 6 5 GHz and 8 5 GHz options It s not...

Page 238: ...n and measurement SYSTem CORRection STATe OFF system correction off SERVice ADJust VIRTual BRIDge STATe OFF virtual bridge off SERVice ADJust SENSe1 SWEep RF RANGe PORT1 AUTO OFF RF ranging mode to manual on port1 SERVice ADJust SENSe1 SWEep RF RANGe PORT2 AUTO OFF RF ranging mode to manual on port2 SERVice ADJust SENSe1 SWEep RF RANGe PORT3 AUTO OFF RF ranging mode to manual on port3 SERVice ADJu...

Page 239: ... a new concept You can correct the following error elements by using the scalar mixer calibration The reflection between the output port of the network analyzer and the input port of the measured mixer vector error correction The reflection between the output port of the measured mixer and the input port of the network analyzer vector error correction Transmission frequency characteristics at diff...

Page 240: ... output and input frequencies in order to calculate the transmission tracking in the frequency offset ETF The transmission tracking of the receiver in the output frequency ERTF can be determined by dividing the transmission tracking ETF calculated based on the output frequency in full 2 port calibration by the receiver s transmission tracking ESTF Multiplying the signal source transmission trackin...

Page 241: ...off switches over to the normal calibration coefficient however the information on the scalar mixer calibration coefficient is retained Procedure Using Mechanical Calibration Kit 1 Before starting scalar mixer calibration verify that the frequency offset is activated by clicking Sweep Setup key Frequency Offset If the frequency offset is not valid you cannot start scalar mixer calibration 2 Press ...

Page 242: ...ngle direction scalar mixer calibrations Reflection Both x and y in the following steps are provided for the case where you have selected in the test port selection 6 Click Reflection 7 Connect the OPEN calibration standard to the test port x connector for the DUT 8 Click Port x Freq x Open to start measurement of the calibration standard 9 Click Port x Freq y Open to start measurement of the cali...

Page 243: ...Connect a THRU between the test ports x and y between the connectors for the DUT 20 Click Port y x Freq y Thru to start measurement of the calibration standard 21 Click Port x y Freq x Thru to start measurement of the calibration standard 22 Click Return Power Meter 23 Click Power Meter See Preparing to control the power meter for setup the power meter 24 Click Use Sensor Each time the key is pres...

Page 244: ...s to select the channel you want to calibrate 3 Press Cal key 4 Click Mixer Converter Calibration Scalar Cal ECal Select Ports 5 Select the test port for starting scalar mixer calibration 6 Click Power Meter See Preparing to control the power meter for setup the power meter 7 Click Use Sensor Each time the key is pressed Channels A and B switch over alternately If you are using a one channel power...

Page 245: ...error correction function automatically If the ECal module is not connected to the E5071C or power calibration have not been done yet the ECal Done menu item will not be not available In addition if the ECal module is not connected to the test port of the calibration target an error may occur ...

Page 246: ...Fixed IF measurement RF and LO Swept IF Fixed it is possible to perform vector mixer calibration and to measure conversion loss and return loss but NOT possible to measure group delay because IF frequency is fixed For Swept IF measurement RF and IF Swept LO Fixed it is possible to perform vector mixer calibration and to measure conversion loss return loss and group delay You can also perform balan...

Page 247: ...sured mixer DUT signifies an unknown target mixer of measurement However a measured mixer meeting the requirements for a calibration mixer can be used as a calibration mixer Calibration mixer with IF filter The calibration mixer is required for supporting the measurement system of the up down conversion You must also evaluate in advance the frequency response characteristics of the calibration mix...

Page 248: ...In vector mixer calibration you must characterize the calibration mixer with the IF filter As shown in the following figure connect the target mixer with IF filter to the port of the network analyzer on which vector calibration has been performed and then connect an OPEN SHORT or LOAD standard to the end of the IF filter to start reflection measurement The signals measured at the test port include...

Page 249: ...aracterizing the calibration mixer with an IF filter Storage Folder VBA Macro Project Name D Agilent MixerCharacterization vba Executing Characterization of Calibration Mixer 1 Setting Stimulus Conditions Set the stimulus conditions for the channel you want to calibrate For the necessary steps refer to Setting Stimulus Conditions You must also set the external signal source in advance For the nece...

Page 250: ... Characterization Macro 3 Selecting Measurement Port Select the 1 port calibration port 1 in menu Select any port if full 2 port calibration is set 4 Setting IF Frequency Select IF frequency from RF LO RF LO and LO RF 2 in menu depending on the IF frequency of the calibration mixer The number displayed in the Vector Mixer Characterization macro is the frequency set in the E5071C and read from it Y...

Page 251: ... connected to the E5071C ECal will be selected automatically 6 Measuring Calibration Mixer with IF Filter when using calibration kit Connect the calibration mixer to one of the test ports on which 1 port calibration has been done as shown in the following figure Connection of calibration mixer with IF filter 1 Select any port if full 2 port calibration is set 2 We recommend that you characterize t...

Page 252: ...ignificantly affected by the power level of the LO signal 1 Select CalKit 3 in menu 2 Select the type number of the calibration kit from CalKit menu 4 in menu 3 Click the Open button 5 in menu to start measurement in OPEN 4 Click the Short button 6 in menu to start measurement in SHORT 5 Click the Load button 7 in menu to start measurement in LOAD 7 Measuring Calibration Mixer with IF Filter when ...

Page 253: ... mixer measurement The characterizing procedures of the calibration mixer with IF filter used for balance mixer measurement are basically the same as those used for normal mixer measurement however two characteristic data of the calibration mixer with IF filter are required for balanced mixer measurement as shown in the following figure Connect the target calibration mixer with IF filter to the po...

Page 254: ...gth from the external signal source output port a to the extended calibration plane b and the electrical length from the calibration plane c to the extended calibration plane b Large electrical length differences between the two ports to which the calibration mixer is connected could raise 180 degrees phase value error between the two IF ports even though the Balanced Mixer Calibration Macro is ex...

Page 255: ...etailed information on full 4 port calibration see Full 4 Port Calibration 1 Press Macro Setup key 2 Click Load Project 3 Specify D Agilent MixerCharacterization vba for the file name in the Open dialog box and then press the Open button 4 Press Macro Run to run the macro 5 Select Port 1 1 in menu to characterize the calibration mixer 1 with IF filter In this case the data are saved to a temporary...

Page 256: ... If failure occurs when reading the data file for the calibration mixer with IF filter the characterization may have done by using only one port instead of using two ports Balanced Mixer Characterization Macro 1 Select the measurement port 2 in menu and then connect a THRU between the IF ports of the calibration mixers to correct the phase difference of the LO signals for the calibration mixers wi...

Page 257: ...ng the measurement port if the data file of the calibration mixer with IF filter s2p has not been set for the network removal function of the fixture simulator The phase error correction data reflects the phase difference of the LO signals for the phase information of the calibration mixer s data file which is registered in any two ports 3 Press the Close button 4 in menu to exit macro ...

Page 258: ...ing the Calibration Kit Definition Procedure 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to perform the calibration 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Calibrate 2 Port TRL Cal 4 Click Select Ports then select the test ports for which you want to execute TRL 2 port calibration In the following procedure test ports you select here are expressed as test ports x and y 5 Connec...

Page 259: ... equivalent to measuring both x y Fwd Syx and x y Rvs Sxy x y Fwd Syx Executes line match calibration for test ports x and y Use this to perform forward direction measurement only x y Rvs Sxy Executes line match calibration for test ports x and y Use this to perform reverse direction measurement only 3 4 Click Return 5 Click Done to finish TRL 2 port calibration At this point the calibration coeff...

Page 260: ...nnel for which you want to execute calibration 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Calibrate 3 Port TRL Cal Select Ports 4 Select test ports for which you want to execute TRL 3 port calibration In the following procedure test ports you select here are expressed as test ports x y and z 5 Click Thru Line to start the measurement of the calibration standard 6 Click Reflect to start the measurement of the calibra...

Page 261: ...rse direction measurement only y z Line Match Executes line match calibration for test ports y and z Use this to perform forward direction measurement and reverse direction measurement at the same time y z Fwd Szy Executes line match calibration for test ports y and z Use this to perform forward direction measurement only y z Rvs Syz Executes line match calibration for test ports y and z Use this ...

Page 262: ...Prev keys to select the channel for which you want to execute calibration 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Calibrate 4 Port TRL Cal Select Ports 4 Click Thru Line to start the measurement of the calibration standard 5 Click Reflect to start the measurement of the calibration standard Softkey Function Port 1 Reflect Executes reflection calibration for test port 1 Port 2 Reflect Executes reflection calibrati...

Page 263: ... Use this to perform forward direction measurement and reverse direction measurement at the same time 1 4 Fwd S41 Executes line match calibration for test ports 1 and 4 Use this to perform forward direction measurement only 1 4 Rvs S14 Executes line match calibration for test ports 1 and 4 Use this to perform reverse direction measurement only 2 3 Line Match Executes line match calibration for tes...

Page 264: ...calibration for test ports 3 and 4 Use this to perform forward direction measurement and reverse direction measurement at the same time 3 4 Fwd S43 Executes line match calibration for test ports 3 and 4 Use this to perform forward direction measurement only 3 4 Rvs S34 Executes line match calibration for test ports 3 and 4 Use this to perform reverse direction measurement only 7 Press Done to fini...

Page 265: ...Making Measurements Making Measurements Setting Up Trigger and Making Measurements Setting Point Trigger Setting Low Latency External Trigger Mode Setting Averaging Trigger Function Setting External Trigger Output ...

Page 266: ...her the channel is displayed Channels that have been activated can be measured even if they are not displayed For each channel a sweep is performed only for the stimulus ports needed to update the parameters of the displayed trace Sweep Order in Each Channel In a channel each test port is set to a stimulus port in the order of port number and updates each trace Sweep Order Stimulus Port Updated Tr...

Page 267: ...ed channel When this function is enabled with a value of ACTive only active channel is triggered When this function is enabled with a value of ALL all channels of the E5071C are triggered For example if Trigger Scope is set to ACTive when Trigger Continuous is selected for all channels a measurement channel is automatically changed by switching over the active channel Trigger Scope Function All Ch...

Page 268: ...annels Display Allocate Channels to continuous sweep mode Setup Procedure For Trigger 1 Selecting a Trigger Source Follow the procedure below to select a trigger source 1 Press Trigger 2 Click Trigger Source 3 Click the softkey that corresponds to the desired trigger source 4 When External is selected as a trigger source click Ext Trig Input to select trigger polarity Softkey Function Negative Edg...

Page 269: ...ion Hold Sets active channel trigger mode to hold sweep mode Single Sets active channel trigger mode to single sweep mode Continuous Sets active channel trigger mode to continuous sweep mode Hold All Channels Sets all channel trigger modes to hold sweep mode Continuous Disp Channels Sets trigger modes of all displayed channels Display Allocate Channels to continuous sweep mode 4 Generating the Tri...

Page 270: ...On Point On Point measurement is performed when trigger is applied On Sweep Off Measurement is performed for all measurement points when trigger is applied When the trigger source is selected as the internal trigger the point trigger does not work Setting Point Trigger 1 Press Trigger key 2 Click Trigger Event 3 Click the softkey that corresponds to the desired trigger event Softkey Function On Po...

Page 271: ...ernal trigger pulses and accurately set a trigger delay time at each point trigger point The time required for measurement at each measurement point varies depending on the settings of the E5071C and the type of measurement For more information see External trigger delay time and point trigger interval The low latency external trigger mode becomes available by turning on the point trigger function...

Page 272: ...lse supplied after the completion of the one point measurement The time until the next trigger can be accepted after the start of a one point measurement depends on the IFBW and other settings of the analyzer For example in the case of a frequency s zero span measurement the time until the next measurement is ready after the start of a one point measurement is obtained by dividing the time require...

Page 273: ... trigger mode is ON it goes to the High level only before staring measurement of the first sweep point and returns to the Low level after completing measurement of all measurement points Point Trigger Period Time until the E5071C is ready to accept a trigger for the next measurement point The value depends on the measurement conditions and the settings of the E5071C td1 Time set as the external tr...

Page 274: ...Measurement 273 frequency band and so on For zero span measurement td2 13 1 µs Typ ...

Page 275: ...o generate triggers based on number of measurement points averaging factor When the sweep averaging function is off sweep is performed only once even if the averaging trigger function is set to on The averaging trigger function is valid for all channels Note that you can set the sweep averaging function for each channel Averaging Trigger Function 1 Setting Averaging Trigger Function When the sweep...

Page 276: ...Output 1 Press Trigger key and then set the value of Ext Trig Output 1 as ON 2 Click Polarity and then select Positive Pulse or Negative Pulse 2 Polarity Property Description Positive Pulse Generates a Positive Pulse as a trigger Negative Pulse Generates a Negative Pulse as a trigger 3 Click Position and then select After Point or Before Point 3 Position Property Description After Point Generates ...

Page 277: ...se is generated after every measurement point Before Point Pulse is generated before first measurement point Rest of pulse are same timing as After Point Number of pulse is same as number of measurement point After Point Pulse is generated after every measurement point Before Point Pulse is generated before every measurement point ...

Page 278: ...ified Criteria Determining the Bandwidth of the Trace Bandwidth Search Determining the Bandwidth of the Trace Notch Search Determining the Mean Standard Deviation and p p of the Trace Comparing Traces Performing Data Math Performing Parameter Conversion of Measurement Results Limit Test Bandwidth Test Ripple Test Equation Editor ...

Page 279: ...rameter Using the value of the marker to change the stimulus sweep range and scale value of the reference line For the procedure used to change the sweep range and scale by using the marker refer to Setting the Sweep Range Using the Marker and Setting the value of a reference line using the marker The E5071C is capable of displaying up to 10 markers including the reference marker on each trace Eac...

Page 280: ...ormats refer to Selecting a Data Format Activating the marker on the Trace 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to activate the channel on which a marker is used 2 Press Trace Next Trace Prev to activate the trace on which a marker is used 3 Press Marker key At this point marker 1 is turned on and becomes active you can operate the marker When using marker 1 you can omit the next step 4 Select a...

Page 281: ... You can convert the marker reading into a relative value from the reference point Converting From a Reference Point to a Relative Value 1 Activate the reference marker 2 Move the reference marker at the point to be used as the reference 3 Click Ref Marker Mode to turn on the reference mode 4 With the reference mode turned on the stimulus values and response values are indicated in relative values...

Page 282: ...pecific marker stimulus value is specified as a numerical value the marker is placed at the measurement point closest to the specified value A marker that is placed between interpolated points with the discrete mode off automatically moves to the nearest measurement point when the discrete mode is turned on Turning off discrete mode Discrete OFF The marker can move from one actual measurement poin...

Page 283: ...operation for all traces in a channel or independently for each trace Value Description Marker Couple is on Coupling ON Markers are set up and moved in coupled operation on all traces in a channel Marker Couple is off Coupling OFF Markers are set up and moved independently for each trace Turning Marker Coupling On or Off 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to activate the channel on which the m...

Page 284: ...ng On the Marker Table Display 1 Press Marker Fctn key 2 Click Marker Table to turn on the marker table display The marker table appears in the lower part of the screen Specifying Display Position of Marker Values This section describes how to specify the marker value display position for each active trace ...

Page 285: ...isplay area as a percentage Operational procedure 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to activate the channel for which you want to set marker coupling 2 Press Marker Fctn key 3 Click Annotation Options 4 Click Marker Info X Pos to set the horizontal display position 5 Click Marker Info Y Pos to set the vertical display position Aligning Marker Value Display This section describes how to align ...

Page 286: ...of trace 1 Off Align OFF Displays marker values in the display position defined for each trace 1 Press Marker Fctn key 2 Click Annotation Options 3 Click Align to toggle ON OFF Displaying All Marker Values for Displayed Traces This section describes how to display all marker values for displayed traces ...

Page 287: ... all Active Only OFF Displays all marker values for displayed traces Displays active markers Active Only ON Displays markers for the active trace only 1 Press Marker Fctn key 2 Click Annotation Options 3 Click Active Only to toggle ON OFF ...

Page 288: ...sition Target on left hand side nearest to marker position Target on right hand side nearest to marker position Peak Maximum peak for a positive peak minimum peak for a negative peak Peak on left hand side nearest to marker position Peak on right hand side nearest to marker position Setting Search Range The Marker Search feature allows you to set part of the sweep range as the search target Partia...

Page 289: ... on the screen Setting Multiple Range The Multiple Range feature allows you to set up to 16 search range in a channel You can select more than one marker in a search range You can select to couple the search range among the traces in the channel The Marker Statistics value is calculated by using the search range of the active marker If no active marker is selected by default the search range of ma...

Page 290: ...er 4 5000 GHz the stop value upper limit of the search range 8 Similarly click Target Range 2 9 Start 5 0000 GHz 10 Stop 6 5000 GHz 11 The search range is set for both Trace 1 and Trace 2 Note that the search range is not displayed as no Marker is assigned to these search range Assigning markers to search range 1 Marker Marker 1 to turn it ON 2 Marker Search Search Range Multiple Range Target Rang...

Page 291: ...ker coupling is turned OFF marker 4 is activated for Trace 2 only To learn more about marker coupling refer to Setting up markers for each trace Setting up markers for coupled operations between traces 9 Activate search range 2 10 Marker Search Min Marker 4 is now placed at the minimum point within search range 2 However note that Marker 4 is not shown at Trace 1 Procedure to Show Statistics Value...

Page 292: ... and move a marker to that point Search for maximum Max Move active marker to point on trace where measured value is greatest Search for minimum Min Move active marker to point on trace where measured value is lowest Procedure 1 Activate the marker you are using to search for the maximum and minimum values 2 Press Marker Search key 3 Click the corresponding softkey to move the marker to the maximu...

Page 293: ...larger than the measured value that immediately precedes it on the left side Transition type Negative Negative When the value of the target is smaller than the measured value that precedes immediately it on the left side Executing a Target Search The following three methods are available for executing the target search Target search Search Peak The marker moves to the peak with maximum response va...

Page 294: ...on the definitions of the newly set target value and the currently set transition type 5 Click Target Transition 6 Select a transition type This sets the target search to be executed based on the definitions of the currently set target value and the newly set transition type 7 Press the corresponding softkey to move the marker to the target When the data format is in Smith chart or polar format ex...

Page 295: ...ve Negative peak Negative A peak whose measured value is smaller than those of the measuring points on either side of it peak polarity negative About Peak Excursion Value The peak excursion value is the smaller of the differences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of the opposite polarity Executing a Peak Search The following three methods are available for executing the peak search Peak ...

Page 296: ...t for the peak excursion value This sets the peak search to be executed based on the definitions of the newly set lower limit for the peak excursion value and the currently set peak polarity 5 Click Peak Polarity 6 Select a peak polarity This sets the peak search to be executed based on the definitions of the currently set lower limit for the peak excursion value and the newly set peak polarity 7 ...

Page 297: ...he lower frequency sides Q and insertion loss based on the position of the active marker The definitions of the parameters determined through the bandwidth search are shown in below Bandwidth Parameter Definition Insertion loss loss The measured value of the position of the active marker at the time the bandwidth search is executed Lower frequency cut off point low Lowest frequency of two measurem...

Page 298: ...y cut off points high low Q Value obtained by dividing the center frequency by the bandwidth cent BW Executing a Bandwidth Search 1 Place the active marker at the desired point on the trace on which the bandwidth search is executed The response value of this active marker itself is the insertion loss in the bandwidth search loss 2 Press Marker Search key 3 Click Bandwidth Value and enter the defin...

Page 299: ...E5071C 298 ...

Page 300: ...he active marker position The notch search function starts from the left side of the active marker position and ends when points that meet the conditions are found The figure and the table below shows the definition of parameters obtained by notch search function The notch value in figure below must be specified by the user Bandwidth Parameters Definition of bandwidth parameters Bandwidth paramete...

Page 301: ...igh low 2 Bandwidth BW Frequency difference between the higher cutoff point and the lower cutoff point high low Q Value obtained by dividing the center frequency by the bandwidth cent BW Executing a Notch Search 1 Place the active marker on the desired point on the trace on which the notch search is executed The response value of this active marker itself is the insertion loss in the notch search ...

Page 302: ...Measurement 301 5 For more information on displaying the notch search result see Notch Search ...

Page 303: ...er topics about Data Analysis Overview You can easily determine the statistics data for a trace mean standard deviation and peak to peak The definitions for the statistics data elements are shown below Statistics data element Definition Mean mean n number of points xi measured value at the i th measurement point ...

Page 304: ...ak to peak p p Max Min Max greatest measured value Min smallest measured value Displaying Statistical Data 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace Prev keys to activate the trace for which statistical data is required 2 Press Marker Fctn key 3 Click Statistics to turn on the display of statistics data ...

Page 305: ...e the ratio of two traces e g evaluating gain or attenuation Data Memory Multiplies the measured data by a memory trace Data Memory Subtracts a memory trace from the measured data This function can be used for example to subtract a vector error that has been measured and stored e g directivity from data subsequently measured on a device Data Memory Adds the measured data and the data in the memory...

Page 306: ... to convert the measurement results of the S parameter Sab to the following parameters Equivalent impedance Zr and equivalent admittance Yr in reflection measurement Equivalent impedance Zt and equivalent admittance Yt in transmission measurement Inverse S parameter 1 Sab where Z0a Characteristic impedance of port a Z0b Characteristic impedance of port b Z Y Transmission Shunt ...

Page 307: ...race Prev keys to activate a trace on which you want to use the marker 2 Press Analysis key 3 Click Conversion 4 Click Conversion to turn ON the conversion function Selecting Conversion Target Parameter 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace Prev keys to activate a trace on which you want to use the marker 2 Press Analysis key 3 Click Conversion Function 4 Click the softkey co...

Page 308: ...rement points only Parts interpolated between measurement points are not judged You define the limit line by specifying the stimulus value Begin Stimulus and response value Begin Response of the begin point the stimulus value End Stimulus and response value End Response of the end point and the type lower limit upper limit For more information refer to Defining the limit line When the limit test i...

Page 309: ... result of the trace is indicated by Pass or Fail displayed in the upper right part of the graph Judgment result of channels If a channel has a judgment result of fail the message below appears on the screen it will be judged as failed if one or more unsatisfactory trace exists in any of the limit test the ripple test or the bandwidth test within the channel Follow these steps to turn on off the d...

Page 310: ...st function will be used 2 Press Analysis key to display the Analysis menu 3 Click Limit Test to display the softkeys associated with the limit test 4 Click Edit Limit Line to display the limit table 5 Using the limit table create edit a segment Initially no segments are entered in the limit table At the same time the Edit Limit Line menu used to create edit the limit table is displayed 6 Click Ad...

Page 311: ...ine The range in which stimulus values can be specified is from 500 G to 500 G When a value outside the range is entered a suitable value within the range is specified Once the stimulus value is specified changing the sweep range of the E5071C does not affect the stimulus value The range in which response values can be specified is from 500 M to 500 M When a value outside this range is entered a s...

Page 312: ... or more limit values whose type is set to minimum MIN exist the largest one is used as the minimum Even if the span of the sweep range on the E5071C is set to 0 enter the two parameters of Begin Stimulus and End Stimulus When two or more response values are returned as a result of using the Smith or polar chart format the first response value of the marker provides the object of the limit test Sa...

Page 313: ...n the following format On the first line the channel number of the active channel that was valid when the file was saved is output On the second line the trace number of the active trace that was valid when the file was saved is output The third line provides the header showing the items for the segments to be output on the fourth and later lines Data on segments are output on the fourth and later...

Page 314: ...to display the Analysis menu 3 Click Limit Test to display the softkeys for the limit test 4 Click Limit Line Offsets to display the limit line offset function menu The following functions correspond to each softkey Softkey Function Stimulus Offset Adds a certain offset to the stimulus value of the entire segment in the limit table Stimulus offset Amplitude Offset Adds a certain offset to the resp...

Page 315: ...E5071C 314 Amplitude offset Initializing the limit table The following operations initialize the limit table ...

Page 316: ...Measurement 315 At power on When presetting When calling a limit table with zero segments When Clear Limit Table OK is pressed in the Edit Limit Line menu ...

Page 317: ...on each side of the passband at an amplitude below the peak specified in test setup The frequency between these two points is the bandwidth of the filter Then the obtained bandwidth is compared to minimum and maximum allowable bandwidth that you specify beforehand Displaying Bandwidth Test Results Test Result for Trace The test result of the trace will be indicated in the upper right area of the g...

Page 318: ...e limit test ripple test or bandwidth test within the channel You can also specify this On Off setting from the Fail Sign which is provided in the limit test menu and ripple test menu From the bandwidth test menu follow the steps below to turn it on off 1 Press Analysis key 2 Click Bandwidth Limit 3 Click Fail Sign This menu toggles between on and off In addition to the screen the following featur...

Page 319: ...enter the upper limit for the bandwidth The unit is Hz for both Min and Max bandwidths 6 If the data format is Smith chart or polar the limit test is performed for the main response value among the two marker response values Turning Bandwidth Test and Displaying Results ON OFF You can configure the on off setting of the bandwidth test function for each trace independently Operational procedure Fol...

Page 320: ...erwise it judges the measurement as Fail For the measurement points in a stimulus range without a specified ripple limit the test judges the measurement as Pass The measurement point alone is the target of evaluation for pass fail The interpolated part between measurement points is not evaluated The ripple limit is defined with the start point stimulus value end point stimulus value ripple limit v...

Page 321: ...d without the ripple value For example in the following figure Ripl1 Pass in the first line indicates the result for trace 1 The value following B3 is the ripple value at the third frequency band specified in the ripple test Similarly the second line indicates the test result for trace 2 showing the ripple value at the first frequency band For information on how to display the results see Turning ...

Page 322: ...ng that the result was fail Status register Configuring Ripple Limit You must configure the ripple limit before you can use the ripple test function You can specify a ripple limit table for each trace where up to 12 ripple limit bands frequency bands can be configured Operational procedure Follow the steps below to configure the ripple limits 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next T...

Page 323: ...ple limit table and then specify the following parameters for the frequency band Parameter Description Type Selects a frequency type either ON or OFF ON Band used for the ripple test OFF Band not used for the ripple test Begin Stimulus Specifies the start point for the stimulus value in the ripple test End Stimulus Specifies the end point for the stimulus value in the ripple test Max Ripple Specif...

Page 324: ...for the main response value among the two marker response values Saving Recalling Ripple Limit Table The ripple limit table can be saved in a file and recalled later for use on the screen The file is saved in the csv format with the extension csv and values are saved as a character string with the unit The csv formatted file can also be reused in spreadsheet software made for PCs Follow the steps ...

Page 325: ... at the time of file saving will be output In the second line the trace number for the active trace at the time of file saving will be output The third line is a header indicating the segment items that are output from the fourth line onward From the fourth line onward the segment data are output Operational procedure Channel 1 Trace 1 Type Begin Stimulus End Stimulus MaxRipple ON 933 0000000 MHz ...

Page 326: ...lue of ripple and ripple limit display Ripple Value Band Selects the band for which you want to display the ripple value Edit Ripple Limit Opens the ripple limit table for editing the ripple limit To use the ripple test function you must first define the ripple limit Initializing Limit Table The following operations initialize the limit table At power on When presetting When calling a Ripple table...

Page 327: ...is no need for off line processing in a separate program For example on entering the equation Example S21 1 S11 in the E5071C Equation Editor 4 in the Figure below the resulting trace is computed as each S21 data point divided by one minus the corresponding S11 data point For a 201 point sweep setup the computation is repeated 201 times once for each point As another example if you want the ENA to...

Page 328: ...to enter an equation 1 Press Display 2 Click Equation Editor 1 in the figure above The Equation Editor dialog box appears 3 Enter an equation in the equation field 4 in the figure above Referring to traces in a different channel is NOT available with Equation Editor on the ENA The equation can be entered with the software keyboard enabled by selecting Keyboard 3 and 3a in the figure above ...

Page 329: ...that is not measured in the measured channel annotation of Equ is displayed in the trace title area instead Equation Editor Examples The following examples may help you in getting started with Equation Editor Offset each data point in trace 2 from trace 1 by XdB The equation is entered into trace 2 as Offset data 1 pow 10 X 20 4 in the figure e5071c282 To multiply a trace by X times in log format ...

Page 330: ...ew the equations in the list follow this procedure 1 Open Equation Editor by Display Equation Editor 2 Enter an equation and click Apply in the Equation Editor dialog box Figure e5071c282 to save the defined equation in the directory of the ENA To view a list of saved equations click the button 5 in Figure e5071c282 to open the Equation History dialog box 3 To store an equation in the History List...

Page 331: ...y scalar x Function complex x means that the function requires a complex value If a scalar value is entered it is automatically converted to a complex value scalar x complex x 0 a b are arguments that are used in the function Basic Math Functions Function Description abs complex a returns the sqrt a re a re a im a im acos scalar a returns the arc cosine of a in radians asin scalar a returns the ar...

Page 332: ...zeroes the imaginary part sin complex a takes a in radians and returns the sine sqrt complex a returns the square root of a with phase angle in the half open interval pi 2 pi 2 tan complex a takes a in radians and returns the tangent Constants e 2 71828182845904523536 PI 3 14159265358979323846 Mutual transformation is automatically made for scalar and complex scalar x complex x 0 complex x y scala...

Page 333: ...r Function Description A complex a complex b complex c complex d F11 conversion 1 a 1 d b c 2 b A scalar i scalar j returns A Sii Sji Sij Sjj B complex a complex b complex c complex d F12 conversion Z0 1 a 1 d b c 2 b B scalar i scalar j returns B Sii Sji Sij Sjj C complex a complex b complex c complex d F21 conversion 1 Z0 1 a 1 d b c 2 b C scalar i scalar j returns C Sii Sji Sij Sjj D complex a ...

Page 334: ... sqrt kfac a b c d 2 1 MAPG scalar i scalar j returns MAPG Sii Sji Sij Sjj MSG complex a complex b complex c complex d maximum stable power gain abs b abs c MSG scalar i scalar j returns MSG Sii Sji Sij Sjj mu1 complex a complex b complex c complex d µ factor 1 abs a 2 abs d conj a a d b c abs b c mu1 scalar i scalar j returns mu1 Sii Sji Sij Sjj mu2 complex a complex b complex c complex d µ facto...

Page 335: ...complex a complex b complex c complex d Y21 conversion 1 Z0 2 b 1 a 1 d b c Y21 scalar i scalar j returns Y21 Sii Sji Sij Sjj Y22 complex a complex b complex c complex d Y22 conversion 1 Z0 1 a 1 d b c 1 a 1 d b c Y22 scalar i scalar j returns Y22 Sii Sji Sij Sjj Z11 complex a complex b complex c complex d Z11 conversion Z0 1 a 1 d b c 1 a 1 d b c Z11 scalar i scalar j returns Z11 Sii Sji Sij Sjj ...

Page 336: ...race i trace number xAxis x axis data xAxis scalar i x axis data of trace i trace number S11 S44 S parameter data When a trace number is out of range the ENA indicates an error message Equation runtime error and equation is not reflected on the trace The maximum number of traces can be set by System Misc Setup Channel Trace Setup Converting S Parameters to H Y Z F T Parameters The following sectio...

Page 337: ...E5071C 336 3 Impedance parameters Z Fundamental parameters F 4 5 Scattering transfer parameters T ...

Page 338: ...converted to Hybrid parameters H Admittance parameters Y Impedance parameters Z Fundamental parameters F and Scattering transfer parameters T using the following functions 1 Converting S parameters to H parameters 2 Converting S parameters to Y parameters ...

Page 339: ...E5071C 338 3 Converting S parameters to Z parameters 4 Converting S parameters to F parameters ...

Page 340: ...Measurement 339 5 Converting S parameters to T parameters Where Ds S11S22 S12S21 Operators used in Equation Editor ...

Page 341: ...0 Operator Description Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Power Open parenthesis Close parenthesis Comma separator for arguments Equal optional E Exponent as in 23 45E6 1 Priority of operators is 1 2 3 ...

Page 342: ...Data Output Data Output Saving and Recalling Instrument State Saving Recalling Instrument State for Each Channel into from Memory Saving Trace Data to a File Saving the Screen Image to a File Printing Displayed Screen ...

Page 343: ...ration data calibration coefficient array to reproduce the state when it was saved by recalling it later into the E5071C At this time you can perform error correction of measured values by using the recalled calibration data State and trace State Trace Saves the setting of the E5071C and traces error corrected data array and error corrected memory array to reproduce the state when it was saved by ...

Page 344: ...s follows Compatibility between different frequency models Recalling by E5071C Mo del O p t N o 2 3 0 4 3 0 2 3 5 4 3 5 2 4 0 4 4 0 2 4 5 4 4 5 2 6 0 4 6 0 2 6 5 4 6 5 2 8 0 4 8 0 2 8 5 4 8 5 2 D 5 4 D 5 2 K 5 4 K 5 Sa ve d Fil e by E50 71C 2 3 0 4 3 0 Y N Y N Y N Y N N N 2 3 5 4 3 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N 2 4 0 4 4 0 N N Y N Y N Y N N N 2 4 5 4 4 5 N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N 2 6 0 4 6 0 N N N N Y N Y N N N...

Page 345: ...ty of saving recalling the instrument state between options 2D5 4D5 2K5 and 4K5 and ENA B Other ENA C Option When state files with calibration data that are saved with E5070A B and E5071A B only states and trace data are recalled Compatibility between different number of ports models If the stored data is state only State Only files saved with a model having a smaller number of ports can be recall...

Page 346: ...prior firmware revisions Recalling the state file which is saved by prior firmware revision may cause a sweep time change and C is displayed In this case re calibration is recommended Compatibility when the system spec version available with SERV SREV is different When Files that are saved with different system spec versions include calibration data only states and trace data are recalled If you r...

Page 347: ...hidden channels In Firmware revision A 08 0x or later hidden channels are not made preset and results in a faster recall Saving Instrument State Follow the procedure below to save internal data from the E5071C 1 Press Save Recall key 2 Click Save State 3 Click the softkey corresponding to the destination you want to save Softkey Description State01 to State08 Save the instrument state into the sta...

Page 348: ...ight of the softkey indicates that the corresponding file of the softkey already exists If you save into the existing file the existing file is copied as backup sta and then overwritten Recall Procedure Follow the procedure below to recall internal data from the E5071C 1 If you recall a file that includes traces its content was set to State Trace or All when it was saved the trigger source is auto...

Page 349: ...a Firmware having different Frequency Option is recalled ch x tr y z pts required This message is displayed when the Recall Function cannot recall data with maximum channel or traces The number of channels traces should be higher than the recall state file to recover from the error More information is available in Setting upper limit of channels and traces The warning message listed above 1 May no...

Page 350: ... a file name only up to 12 characters are displayed on the softkey If a file name exceeds 12 characters the first 12 characters are displayed on the softkey and the remaining characters are omitted and replaced with Different files may be displayed on softkeys with the same name or a saved file is not displayed on any softkey because of the above limitations 1 Press Save Recall key 2 Click Recall ...

Page 351: ...E5071C 350 Executed when the preset operation mode is User and the file D UserPreset sta exists ...

Page 352: ... channel that was saved with this function from a different channel that the one used to save it this function is very useful for copying an instrument state between channels Unlike when saving the entire instrument state the instrument state for each channel is saved into volatile memory instead of a file so if you turn off the power this state is lost Saving Instrument State for Each Channel 1 P...

Page 353: ...e state you want to restore is saved This instrument state is recalled to the active channel Deleting Saved Instrument State Clearing all Registers 1 Press Save Recall key 2 Click Save Channel 3 Click Clear States The contents of all the registers are deleted ...

Page 354: ...1092E 002 6 09250514670E 004 1 70294000000E 008 1 41402155348E 002 8 05620003993E 004 The first line shows the number of the active channel at the time the data was saved The second line shows the number of the active trace at the time the data was saved The third line is a header line indicating the contents of each item of trace data written on the fourth line onward The fourth line onward shows...

Page 355: ... save user defined matching circuit information However no other type of file saved in Touchstone format can be recalled to the E5071C The port reference impedance value when outputs the touchstone format file has to be the same impedance value real to every measurement port You can output the measurement result when using complex port impedance conversion or when setting different port impedance ...

Page 356: ... FMT R Z0 Header of s4p Agilent Technologies E5071C ID FW Revision Date Date Data Calibration Information Freq Sww Method Stat Sxw Method Stat Syw Method Stat Szw Method Stat Swz Method Stat Sxz Method Stat Syz Method Stat Szz Method Stat PortZ PORT w R jX Port x R jX Port y R jX Port z R jX Above PortZ is port Z conversion or system Z0 setting when saving the data When reading reference impedance...

Page 357: ...a format RI Real number imaginary number MA Linear magnitude angle DB Log magnitude angle Z0 Reference impedance value The structure of the data part depends on the combination of the selected file type and specified port When the S parameter of a port on which calibration is not performed is specified if data measured with the S parameter exists that data are output to a Touchstone file If no mea...

Page 358: ...Measurement 357 2 port Touchstone file 3 port Touchstone file ...

Page 359: ...E5071C 358 4 port Touchstone file Restrictions when saving data in Touchstone format The following restrictions apply when saving measurement data into Touchstone format ...

Page 360: ...ess Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace prev keys to select the trace to be saved 2 Press Save Recall key 3 Click SnP SnP Format 4 Click the softkey that corresponds to the data format you want to save Softkey Function Auto Data format is automatically set according to the display format of the active trace When the display format of the active trace is set to one other than log ma...

Page 361: ...Specify the folder to which the file should be saved enter a file name and then press Save to save the file 9 When saving data in a sweep process the data during sweep is saved into a Touchstone file That is the previous sweep data is saved as data that has not been swept or if sweep was not performed previously zero data might be saved Therefore you should set the active channel to the HOLD state...

Page 362: ...to a file 1 Display the screen to be saved as a file If you want to save the screen with a white background set the display mode to inverted display before saving the screen For details about display mode see Setting Display Colors 2 Press System key The screen image at the time System key is pressed is the image that will be saved 3 Press Dump Screen Image to open the Save As dialog box Bitmap Fi...

Page 363: ... Print Procedure Preparation before printing Follow these steps to prepare for printing 1 Turns off the E5071C 2 Turn on the printer and connect it to E5071C 3 Turn on the E5071C 4 Press System key 5 Press Printer Setup The Printers window opens The icons of the printers that have been connected are displayed in the window When you connect a print for the first time it is automatically registered ...

Page 364: ...to toggle between OFF for printing in colors close to the actually displayed screen and ON for printing in inverse colors 4 Click Print to start printing 5 To cancel the printing in progress press Abort Printing If you start printing when the printer is not ready for example it is not turned on by mistake the Printers Folder dialog box may appear In this case click Cancel to close the Printers Fol...

Page 365: ...Optimizing Measurements Optimizing Measurements Expanding Dynamic Range Reducing Trace Noise Improving Phase Measurement Accuracy Improving Measurement Throughput Performing Segment by Segment Sweep segment sweep ...

Page 366: ...ass band and stop band of a filter for example it is important to increase the dynamic range Lowering Receiver Noise Floor Lowering the noise floor of the receiver enables you to expand the dynamic range The following methods can be used to lower the receiver noise floor Narrowing the IF bandwidth Turning on Sweep Averaging Narrowing the IF bandwidth Narrowing the receiver IF bandwidth enables you...

Page 367: ...th then Change the IF bandwidth in the data entry area Turning on Sweep Averaging Using sweep averaging also enables you to reduce the effects of random noise on measurements Sweep averaging averages data from each point vector quantity based on the exponential average of a continuous sweep weighted by the averaging factor specified by the user Sweep averaging is expressed in following equation wh...

Page 368: ...averaging factor an integer between 1 and 999 Define the sweep averaging by following the steps below 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel on which you want to define the sweep averaging 2 Press Avg key 3 Click Avg Factor then change the averaging factor in the data entry area 4 Click Averaging to turn ON the averaging 5 Clicking Averaging Restart resets n to 1 in Sweep Ave...

Page 369: ...opics about Optimizing Measurements Turning on Smoothing Smoothing can be used to reduce noise that has relatively small peaks By turning on smoothing the value of each point on a trace is represented by the moving average over the values of several nearby points The smoothing aperture percentage of sweep span defines the range of points to be included in the calculation of the moving average You ...

Page 370: ...ng the steps below 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace prev keys to activate the trace on which smoothing will be defined 2 Press Avg key 3 Click Smo Aperture then change the smoothing aperture in the data entry area 4 Click Smoothing to turn ON smoothing ...

Page 371: ... the media type the calculation method of the electrical delay which is required to correct the phase delay differs 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace prev keys to activate the phase trace for which you want to specify the electrical delay 2 Press Scale key 3 Click Electrical Delay 4 Change the electrical delay in seconds in the data entry area 5 Click Media and select a m...

Page 372: ...to 360 Using the Phase Offset Function 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys and Trace Next Trace prev keys to activate the trace for which you want to specify the phase offset 2 Press Scale key 3 Click Phase Offset then enter the phase offset in the data entry area Velocity factor The velocity factor is the ratio of the propagation velocity of a signal in a coaxial cable to the propagation veloc...

Page 373: ...the loss in and incorrect matching of cables adapters or test fixtures You can define port extension channel by channel Setting port extension for one particular channel does not affect other channels Auto Port Extension does not supports waveguide port extension Operational procedure 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to activate the channel for which you want to set port extension 2 Press Ca...

Page 374: ...on EXTension PORT Pt WAVeguide TIME SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt WAVeguide CUToff System Z0 should be changed to 1 ohm before calibration when using waveguide calibration kit and measuring waveguide devices Some calibration kits such as the waveguide calibration kit have operational frequency range defined by Minimum and Maximum frequency When the E5071C stimulus setting is out of th...

Page 375: ... key 3 Click Port Extensions 4 Click Extension Port n where n can be from 1 to 4 5 Click Loss to set a loss value 6 Click Loss1 OFF to toggle to Loss1 ON enabled and enter a loss value Loss1 and a frequency Freq1 7 If you want to set loss at two frequency points press Loss2 OFF to toggle to Loss ON enabled and enter a loss value Loss2 and a frequency Freq2 8 If you want to set loss values for othe...

Page 376: ...s Using the auto port extension function The auto port extension function measures port extension and loss values for each port using the OPEN SHORT standard connected to the port automatically calculates them and set them Softkey Function Auto Port Extension Select Ports Sets the Ports 1 to 4 Measure OPEN Performs a OPEN measurement Measure SHORT Performs a Short measurement Method Sets the Span ...

Page 377: ...nsion 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Port Extensions Auto Port Extension Select Ports to select the port s for which you want to use the auto port extension function 2 Setting frequencies used for calculation Set the frequency points with which you want to calculate a loss value 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to activate the channel to set auto port extension 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Port Extensio...

Page 378: ... result 3 Specifying a loss value as a calculation target Specify whether you want to include a loss value in the calculation result 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to activate the channel for which you want to set auto port extension 2 Press Cal key 3 Click Port Extensions Auto Port Extension Select Ports Include Loss to turn it on If the setting is not made before starting the measurement...

Page 379: ... 4 If you use the OPEN standard click Measure OPEN and select the port s for which you want to execute measurement Execution is restricted to ports selected in Selecting a port s 5 If you use the SHORT standard click Measure SHORT and select the port s for which you want to execute measurement Execution is restricted to ports selected in Selecting a port s If a port extension value or loss value h...

Page 380: ... Stepped Swept Measurement Reliability High Low Sweep Time Long Short Restrictions on measurement No Particular restriction DUT with long electrical delay cannot be measured correctly Procedure to select the sweep mode 1 Press Sweep Setup key 2 Click Sweep Mode 3 Select Stepped or Swept for your appropriate sweep mode Overview In the stepped mode the frequency is changed stepwise and sampling is p...

Page 381: ...he swept mode actually has a longer sweep time Although there is some difference depending on the IF bandwidth setting when the measurement point interval is approximately 30 MHz or less the sweep time in the swept mode is shorter than that in the stepped mode When you use the swept mode you should confirm that there is no measurement related problem before performing the actual measurement The sw...

Page 382: ... mode that should be used Turning off the updating of information displayed on the LCD screen Turning off the updating of information displayed on the LCD screen eliminates the processing time required to update displays within the analyzer improving measurement throughput If it is not necessary to check displayed information during measurements turning off real time updating is an effective means...

Page 383: ...ing time needed during measurement and thus improve measurement throughput When you turn ON OFF system error correction all calibration data set by user calibration is deleted 1 Press System key 2 Click Service Menu System Correction 3 Click OK to turn ON OFF system error correction ...

Page 384: ...ping the frequency range which does not need to be measured you can sweep and measure only the portions you need You can define the optimum measurement conditions for each of the segments you designate For example you can specify as many points as possible in a segment requiring high trace resolution and as few points as possible in a segment not requiring high resolution This shortens the measure...

Page 385: ...0 MHz 130 70 kHz Steppe d ON C 980 MHz 1 035 GHz 60 50 kHz Steppe d ON E 1 07 GHz 2 GHz 100 70 kHz Swept ON G 2 6 GHz 3 GHz 40 70 kHz Swept ON Conditions for Setting Segment Sweep The following conditions apply when setting up a segment sweep The frequency range of a segment must not overlap with that of another segment The start frequency of a segment must be higher than the stop frequency of the...

Page 386: ...e the number of points IF bandwidth power level sweep delay time sweep mode sweep time and segment ON OFF for each segment You can set the items in the following table to ON OFF for each segment If you enable the segment by segment setting you can make the setting for each segment in the segment table if you disable it the setting in the following table is used Item When segment by segment setting...

Page 387: ...ent can be turned ON or OFF individually The minimum number of points turned ON must be 2 If the total number of points turned ON are less than 2 the segments with the highest frequency ranges is automatically turned ON to meet the minimum number of points Frequency Order Base Display You can choose between frequency based and order based display as the method of displaying traces when executing a...

Page 388: ...Measurement 387 ...

Page 389: ...E5071C 388 ...

Page 390: ...layed as bright as the window frame of the active channel When the focus is placed on the softkey menu the softkey menu title area is displayed in blue Softkey Function Freq Mode Switches the frequency range setting mode start stop or center span List IFBW Toggles ON OFF the IF bandwidth setting for each segment the row for setting IFBW only appears in the segment table when this is ON List Power ...

Page 391: ...oints Sets the number of points IFBW Sets the IF bandwidth Power Sets the power level the power range is common to the settings for the linear log sweep Sweep Setup key Power Ranges Delay Sets the sweep delay time Sweep Mode Sets the sweep mode you need to select one of the following items STEPPED Stepped mode SWEPT Swept mode Time Sets the sweep time to specify the auto setting AUTO enter 0 as th...

Page 392: ...s the selected string Select All Selects the entire string in the cell Executing segment sweep To execute a segment sweep by using the segment table you have created you must specify the sweep type for that sweep operation by following the steps below 1 Press Channel Next Channel Prev keys to select the channel on which you will execute the segment sweep operation 2 Press Sweep Setup Key 3 Press S...

Page 393: ...og box first opens 3 Type the file name in the File Name area and Click Save to save the segment table Calling a segment table saved in CSV Format By importing a segment table file saved by E5071C you can set up the segment table It is possible to recall a file from a different channel where it was saved 1 Press Sweep Setup Key 2 Click Edit Segment Table Import from CSV File to open the Open dialo...

Page 394: ...andpass Filter Using the Segment Sweep Evaluating a Duplexer Measuring the Deviation from a Linear Phase Measuring an Unbalanced and Balanced Bandpass Filter Measuring Parameters with Cable Evaluating Transmission Characteristics of a Front End Module Executing Power Calibration ...

Page 395: ...the E5071C 3 Select the Segment Sweep as the Sweep Type The segment sweep is selected as the sweep type 4 Execute the Calibration A 2 port ECal is performed between the test ports connecting the DUT 5 Connect the DUT The DUT is connected 6 Execute the Measurement A trigger is applied to perform the measurement 7 Define the Setup for Display The choice is made between frequency base and order base ...

Page 396: ...he sweep conditions shown in the following table Frequency Range Measurement Conditions Start Stop Number of Points IF Bandwidth 440 MHz 915 MHz Marker 1 47 70 kHz 915 MHz Marker 1 980 MHz Marker 2 130 100 kHz 980 MHz Marker 2 1 035 GHz Marker 3 55 70 kHz 1 07 GHz Marker 4 2 GHz Marker 5 93 70 kHz 2 6 GHz Marker 6 3 GHz 41 70 kHz ...

Page 397: ... Focus Display of IF bandwidth setting column ON List IFBW turn it ON When setup items power level delay time sweep mode and sweep time in this case are not displayed in the segment table the setting for the channel in use applies to all segments 3 Enter the setup data in the segment table Setup Description Key Operation Moving the focus to the segment table select Focus Segment 1 Start frequency ...

Page 398: ...Hz 1 0 3 5 G n Number of points 55 5 5 x1 IF bandwidth 70 kHz 7 0 k m Segment 4 Start frequency 1 07 GHz 1 0 7 G n Stop frequency 2 GHz 2 G n Number of points 93 9 3 x1 IF bandwidth 70 kHz 7 0 k m Segment 5 Start frequency 2 6 GHz 2 6 G n Stop frequency 3 GHz 3 G n Number of points 41 4 1 x1 IF bandwidth 70 kHz 7 0 k m Completed segment table ...

Page 399: ...cted as the sweep type Setup Description Key Operation Sweep type Segment sweep Sweep Setup Sweep Type Segment 4 Execute the Calibration In this step a 2 port ECal is executed on the two ports to be used 1 Connect the ECal module across test ports 1 and 2 Connecting the ECal module ...

Page 400: ...Execute the 2 port ECal Setup Description Key Operation Executing a 2 port ECal between test ports 1 and 2 Cal ECal 2 Port ECal Port 1 2 5 Connect the DUT The DUT is connected across test ports 1 and 2 Connecting the DUT ...

Page 401: ... mode Single Trigger Single Or Continuous 7 Define the Setup for Display The choice is made between frequency base and order base as the segment display mode Setup Description Key Operation Segment display Frequency base or order base Sweep Setup Segment Display Frequency Base Order Base Segment display Frequency Order base ...

Page 402: ...Measurement 401 ...

Page 403: ...Type The segment sweep is selected as the sweep type 4 Execute the Calibration A full 3 port calibration is executed by using the 2 port ECal module 5 Connect the DUT The DUT is connected 6 Define the Setup for Display The number of traces to be displayed split display and measurement parameters are specified 7 Execute the Measurement A trigger is applied to execute the measurement 8 Define the Se...

Page 404: ...data in the segment sweep table In this step the IF Bandwidth power level delay time and sweep time are not entered segment by segment By turning off the display of those parameters on the segment table you can use in each segment without making a change the IF Bandwidth preset value 70 kHz of the channel specified by using Avg IF Bandwidth Power level preset value 0 dBm of the channel specified b...

Page 405: ... ECal module and 3 4 port module installed in the E5071C are used to execute calibration on the three ports used in the measurement 1 Connect the USB port of the 2 port ECal module and the USB port of the E5071C with a USB cable The connection may be made while the unit is powered 2 Load and execute the 3 4 port ECal programs Setup Description Key Operation Opening the VBA Project Open dialog box ...

Page 406: ...calAssistant start dialog box appears 4 Click Next to display the EcalAssistant port channel selection dialog box 5 Following the instructions in the dialog box select the type of ECal test ports and the channel Setup Description Key Operation Select Ports ...

Page 407: ...on 3 Port Test ports to be used for ECal 1 2 and 3 1 2 3 Select Channel Channel on which ECal is to be executed Channel 1 Channel 1 6 Click Next The EcalAssistant connection dialog box appears Select 3 port Channel 1 Connecting the ECal module ...

Page 408: ...Measure to Calibrate Port 1 2 settings After successful calibration of Port 1 2 a new dialog box appears 9 Click Next The dialog box for the calibration of port 1 3 appears 10 Click Measure to Calibrate Port 1 3 settings After successful calibration of Port 1 3 a new dialog box appears ...

Page 409: ...E5071C 408 11 Click Next The dialog box for the calibration of port 2 3 appears 12 Click Measure to Calibrate Port 2 3 settings After successful calibration of Port 2 3 a new dialog box appears ...

Page 410: ...terminate the calibration ECalAssistant complete dialog box 5 Connect the DUT The DUT is connected to test ports 1 2 and 3 6 Define the Setup for Display The setup for display is defined Setup Description Key Operation Number of traces to be displayed 5 Display Number of Traces 5 ...

Page 411: ...Single or continuous Trigger Single or Continuous 8 Define the Setup for the Segment Display and Scale The setup for the scale is defined Setup Description Key Operation Segment display Order base Sweep Setup Segment Display Order Base Reference Line Position Trace 1 10 Trace Next Scale Reference Position 1 0 x1 Trace 2 10 Trace Next Reference Position 1 0 x1 Trace 3 10 Trace Next Reference Positi...

Page 412: ... coupling OFF Marker Fctn Couple Turn it OFF Activating Trace 1 Trace Next Marker 1 ON Marker Search Tracking ON Marker Search Tracking Turn it ON Moving the marker 1 to the trace maximum Max Bandwidth search ON Bandwidth Turn it ON The insertion loss loss in this example is 1 243 dB and the 3 dB bandwidth BW is 85 53 MHz 2 Determine the insertion loss and 3 dB bandwidth for the Rx ...

Page 413: ...ker 1 ON Marker Search Tracking ON Marker Search Tracking Turn it ON Moving Marker 1 to the peak near 1 92 GHz Peak Search Left or Search Right press as many times as necessary The isolation response value of marker 1 in this example is 6 612 dB 4 Determine the return loss of Tx Setup Description Key Operation Activating Trace 4 Trace Next Marker 1 ON Marker Search Tracking ON Marker Search Tracki...

Page 414: ...ss band Peak Search Left Search Right press as many times as necessary The return loss response value of Marker 1 in this example is 13 80 dB 6 Turn on the marker table display Setup Description Key Operation Marker table display ON Marker Fctn Marker Table Turn it ON Activating Marker Table 10 Define the Setup for a Limit Table Follow the steps below to make entries in the limit table ...

Page 415: ...d limit table for trace 1 3 Display the limit table for Trace 2 S21 Setup Description Key Operation Activating Trace 2 Trace Next 4 Enter the setup data in the limit table for trace 2 Completed limit table for trace 2 11 Execute the Limit Test The limit test is executed 1 Turn on the limit line and limit test for Trace 1 Setup Description Key Operation Activating Trace 1 Trace Prev Limit Line ON A...

Page 416: ...Key Operation Activating Trace 2 Trace Next Limit Line ON Limit Line Turn it ON Limit Test ON Limit Test Turn it ON 3 Apply a trigger to execute the measurement Setup Description Key Operation Trigger Mode Single Trigger Single or Continuous Limit test results 4 Maximize the screen display of Trace 1 to examine its details ...

Page 417: ...e Prev Maximizing the display of Trace 1 Trace Max Enlarged display of trace 1 5 Maximize the screen display of Trace 2 to examine its details Setup Description Key Operation Activating Trace 2 Trace Prev The display of Trace 2 is maximized Enlarged display of trace 2 ...

Page 418: ...Measurement 417 ...

Page 419: ... the DUT The DUT is connected 2 Define the Measurement Conditions The measurement conditions are defined 3 Execute the Calibration The calibration is executed 4 Connect the DUT and Execute the Auto Scale The DUT is connected again to execute the auto scale function 5 Specify the Electrical Delay The electrical delay is specified 6 Measure the Deviation from a Linear Phase The statistics data funct...

Page 420: ...uency 1 09 GHz Center 1 0 9 G n Frequency span 20 MHz Span 2 0 M u Measurement parameter S21 Meas S21 Data format Expand Phase Format Expand Phase Executing the Auto Scale Scale Auto Scale 3 Execute the Calibration The THRU response calibration is executed Setup Description Key Operation Executing the THRU response A THRU standard is connected instead of a DUT Cal Calibrate Response Thru Thru ...

Page 421: ...the auto scale Scale Auto Scale 5 Specify the Electrical Delay The electrical delay is entered to flatten the phase trace Setup Description Key Operation Entering the electrical delay Scale Electrical Delay Up Down Arrow keys or Rotary Knob Flattening a trace 6 Measure the Deviation from a Linear Phase The statistics data is used to read the deviation from a linear phase peak to peak ...

Page 422: ...Measurement 421 Setup Description Key Operation Executing the auto scale Scale Auto Scale Displaying the statistics data Marker Function Statistics Turn it ON ...

Page 423: ...f 942 5 MHz The following figure shows the measurement circuit in the condition for evaluating a DUT Procedure Here the DUT is evaluated by following the steps Step Description 1 Connecting the DUT The DUT is connected 2 Setting the Measurement Conditions The measurement conditions are defined 3 Performing Calibration The full 3 port calibration is executed 4 Setting a Balance Conversion Topology ...

Page 424: ...Circuit A matching circuit is added 1 Connecting the DUT Connect the DUT to the E5071C by using the instrument s three test ports 2 Setting the Measurement Conditions Follow the procedure below to set the measurement conditions The measurement parameters for balanced measurements should be set after unbalanced balanced conversion Here set the measurement parameters for observing the characteristic...

Page 425: ...0 MHz Span 2 0 0 M u Number of traces 2 Display Num of Traces 2 Trace 1 measurement parameter S21 Meas S21 Trace 2 measurement parameter S31 Trace Next Meas S31 Allocate a trace to upper and lower displays Display Allocate Traces Auto scale all traces Scale Auto Scale All ...

Page 426: ... Ports 1 2 3 check only 2 Perform a reflection calibration Setting Description Key Operation Select reflection calibration Reflection Perform Port 1 calibration With the OPEN connected Port 1 OPEN With the SHORT connected Port 1 SHORT With the LOAD connected Port 1 LOAD Perform Port 2 calibration With the OPEN connected Port 2 OPEN With the SHORT connected Port 2 SHORT With the LOAD connected Port...

Page 427: ...ents Return Done This causes Correction to turn ON Calibration property display ON Return Return Property Turns it ON 4 Setting a Balance Conversion Topology Follow the procedure below to set the balanced conversion topology Setting Description Key Operation Set port 1 on the DUT to unbalanced and port 2 on the DUT to balanced Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Device SE Bal check only Set the co...

Page 428: ...t split Allocate Traces 2 Set the measurement parameter mixed mode S parameter and data format for trace 1 Setting Description Key Operation Fixture simulator ON Analysis Fixture Simulator Fixture Simulator turns it ON Unbalanced balanced conversion of trace 1 ON BalUn turns it ON Measurement parameter Sds21 Meas Sds21 ...

Page 429: ... trace 2 ON Trace next Analysis Fixture Simulator BalUn turns it ON Measurement parameter Scs21 Meas Scs21 4 Set the measurement parameter mixed mode S parameter and data format for trace 3 Setting Description Key Operation Unbalanced balanced conversion of trace 3 ON Trace next Analysis Fixture Simulator BalUn turns it ON Measurement parameter Sss11 Meas Sss11 ...

Page 430: ...er and data format for trace 4 Setting Description Key Operation Unbalanced balanced conversion of trace 4 ON Trace next Analysis Fixture Simulator BalUn turns it ON Measurement parameter Sdd22 Meas Sdd22 Data format Smith chart marker display R jX Format Smith R jX The following figure shows the setting results for each parameter ...

Page 431: ...etwork to be removed the network removal function allows you to remove the network and extend the calibration reference plane Follow the procedure below to set port extension for each test port Setting Description Key Operation Port extension of test port 1 260 ps Cal Port Extensions Extension Port 1 2 6 G n Port extension of test port 2 260 ps Extension Port 2 2 6 G n Port extension of test port ...

Page 432: ...de to be automatically set to 2Z0 1 Set the port reference impedance of port 1 on the DUT unbalanced to 50 ohm Setting Description Key Operation Reference impedance of test port 1 50 ohm Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Z conversion Port 1 Z0 Real 5 0 x1 2 In order to set the impedance of the differential mode of port 2 on the DUT balanced to 200 ohm set the impedances of two unbalanced ports befor...

Page 433: ... more information see Converting Reference Impedance of Balanced Port 8 Adding a Matching Circuit Here add an inductance of 47 nH in parallel to port 2 on the DUT balanced It is also possible to add a matching circuit to the port before unbalanced balanced conversion For more information see Determining the Characteristics that Result from Adding a Matching Circuit to a Differential Port The balan...

Page 434: ...Measurement 433 Inductance 47 nH L 4 7 G n C 0 G 0 R 0 checks that C G and R have been set to 0 Differential matching circuit function ON Diff Matching turns it ON ...

Page 435: ...measurement conditions 2 Executing Calibration Execute calibration 3 Connecting the DUT Connect the DUT 4 Auto Scale Execute auto scale 5 Setting the Time Domain Function Set the time domain function 1 Setting the Measurement Conditions Follow these steps to set the measurement conditions Setting Description Key Operation Presetting Preset OK Stop frequency 3 GHz Stop 3 G n Number of points 201 Sw...

Page 436: ...t Calibration reflection test execute 1 port calibration on port 1 3 Connecting the DUT Connect the DUT as shown below 4 Auto Scale Execute the auto scale function Setting Description Key Operation Executing auto scale Scale Auto Scale ...

Page 437: ...ng a small mismatch appears at the location of the connector Setting Description Key Operation Data format real Format Real Setting the transformation type to low pass impulse Analysis Transform Type Lowpass Imp Setting the window type to maximum Window Maximum Setting the display range from 0 s to 20 ns Start 0 x1 Stop 2 0 G n Enabling the transformation function Transform set to ON Executing aut...

Page 438: ...Measurement 437 ...

Page 439: ... figure by using the E5071C and the E5091A Procedure In this example a DUT is evaluated according to the procedure shown in table below Procedure Description 1 Determining Measurement Conditions Determine the measurement conditions such as the sweep conditions and measurement ports 2 Setting Channel Window Allocation Set the allocation of the channel windows on the screen 3 Setting the Test Ports ...

Page 440: ...ng Measurement Execute the measurement and perform auto scale 1 Determining Measurement Conditions In this example perform measurement under the measurement conditions in table below C h Start freque ncy Stop freque ncy N O P Test port assign ment Cont rol line Meas param eter Calibratio n Ty pe Po rt 1 400 MHz 1 4 GHz 20 1 Port 1 Port A Port 2 Port T1 Port 3 Port R1 Port 4 Port R1 Line 1 Low Line...

Page 441: ...Display Allocate Channels 3 Setting the Test Ports 1 Display the E5091A setup menu and select the 9 port model for ID1 Setting Description Key Operation Display the E5091A setup menu System Multiport Test Set Setup Select the 9 port model for ID1 Test Set 1 Select Test Set E5091_9 2 Display the E5091A properties Setting Description Key Operation Display the E5091A properties Property 3 Select the ...

Page 442: ... Control set it to ON 4 Setting Control Line 1 Set the bits of the control line for channel 1 Setting Description Key Operation Set channel 1 to the active channel Channel Next Line 1 Low Control Lines check only Line 2 High Control Lines Line 1 set it to High 2 Set the control line for channels 2 3 and 4 according to the same procedure of channel 1 5 Setting Sweep Conditions 1 Set the sweep condi...

Page 443: ...destination to which DUT port 1 unbalance is connected to test port 1 of the analyzer Port 1 se 1 Set the destination to which DUT port 2 balance is connected to test ports 3 and 4 of the analyzer Port 2 bal 3 4 Unbalance balance conversion for trace 1 ON BalUn set it to ON Fixture simulator ON Fixture Simulator set it to ON 7 Selecting Measurement Parameter 1 Select the measurement parameter for ...

Page 444: ...lay the Ecal menu Setting Description Key Operation Display the ECal menu Cal ECal 2 Set channel 1 to the active channel Setting Description Key Operation Switch the active channel Channel Next 3 Check the test ports assigned to ports 1 to 4 in the E5091A properties and connect the 4 port ECal module to those port 4 Execute the calibration ...

Page 445: ...ation for channels 2 3 and 4 according to the same procedure as in Step 2 to Step 4 Because the test port assignment setting for channels 1 and 2 and that for channels 3 and 4 are the same you need not change the ECal connection 9 Connecting DUT Connect the DUT as shown below 10 Executing Measurement 1 Display the trigger menu Description Key Operation ...

Page 446: ...el 1 to the active channel Channel Next Set the trigger mode to continuous Continuous 4 Set the trigger mode for channels 2 3 and 4 to continuous according to the same procedure as in Step 3 5 Execute the measurement Setting Description Key Operation Generate a trigger event Trigger 6 Repeat the following procedure to execute auto scale for all of the channels Setting Description Key Operation Set...

Page 447: ...nnecting Power Meter Connects the power meter to the E5071C 2 Selecting Power Meter a Setting Address of GPIB Power Meter b Setting USB Power Meter Configures the power meter s USB GPIB interface and GPIB address with the E5071C 3 Setting Stimulus Condition Sets conditions such as the power level and frequency 4 Executing Zero Adjustment and Calibration of Power Sensor Executes zero adjustment and...

Page 448: ...Setting Description Key Operation USB GPIB System Misc Setup Power Meter Setup Select Type USB GPIB Setting Address of GPIB Power Meter Follow these steps to configure the power meter s GPIB address Setting Description Key Operation GPIB address of the power meter 14 System Misc Setup GPIB Setup Power Meter Address 1 4 x1 You can also set the GPIB address of power meter by pressing System Misc Set...

Page 449: ...sor according to the E4418B Power Meter User s Guide 5 Setting Calibration Data Measurement Conditions Follow these steps to set the calibration data measurement conditions Setting Description Key Operation Selecting the test port 1 Cal Power Calibration Select Port 1 Selection of power sensor A Cal Power Calibration Use Sensor A Number of measurements at one measurement point 4 Cal Power Calibrat...

Page 450: ...Measurement 449 7 Measuring Calibration Data Follow this step to measure the calibration data Setting Description Key Operation Measuring calibration data Cal Power Calibration Take Cal Sweep ...

Page 451: ...t Result Determining Characteristics After Adding a Matching Circuit Obtaining Characteristics After Embedding De embedding 4 port Network Evaluating Balanced Devices balance unbalance conversion function Converting Reference Impedance of Balanced Port Determining the Characteristics that Result from Adding a Matching Circuit to a Differential Port Example of Using Fixture Simulator ...

Page 452: ...te various measurement conditions based on the measurement results The functions available in Fixture Simulator are as follows Network de embedding Port reference impedance conversion Matching circuit embedding 4 port network embedding de embedding Balance unbalance conversion Differential Common port reference impedance conversion Differential matching circuit embedding Data processing flow diagr...

Page 453: ...tion from the fixture simulator but if the fixture simulator function is on data processing is automatically executed as a function of the fixture simulator to improve the data processing efficiency Measurement result is the same as when the fixture simulator is turned off Port extension moves the calibration reference location by setting an electrical delay for a single ended port Port ...

Page 454: ... a value measured with an arbitrary impedance For the setup procedure of port reference impedance conversion see Converting the Port Impedance of the Measurement Result Matching circuit embedding A function for converting an original measurement result into a characteristic determined under the condition of inserting a matching circuit between the DUT and the test port single ended The matching ci...

Page 455: ...an balance unbalance conversion Balance unbalance conversion automatically converts the differential mode port impedance at the balanced port into 2Z0 and the common mode port impedance into Z0 2 compared with the two pre conversion port impedances of Z0 Differential port impedance conversion further converts a differential port impedance after balance unbalance conversion into an arbitrary port i...

Page 456: ...e can be correspondingly extended The network de embedding function can be used together with the port extension function Port extension and calibration plane extension using network de embedding Using Network De embedding Function 1 Prepare a two port Touchstone data file s2p format corresponding to the network to be removed A Touchstone data file is defined for a single normalized impedance valu...

Page 457: ...rk to be removed Once the file is selected the selection of Select Type automatically changes to User To cancel a user defined file that has been set up click Select Type None 7 Repeat the procedure to set up the Touchstone data file for each port from which a network is to be removed 8 Click De Embedding to turn the network de embedding function ON 9 Click Return 10 If Fixture Simulator is OFF pr...

Page 458: ...alue at an arbitrary port impedance When using balance conversion be sure to set the impedances of the two unbalanced ports equal to each other Port impedance conversion function Converting Port Impedance 1 Press Analysis key the click Fixture Simulator Port Z Conversion 2 Specify the port reference impedance for the required port Select Port 1 Z0 Real Port 2 Z0 Real Port 3 Z0 Real or Port 4 Z0 Re...

Page 459: ... 3 Z0 Real and Port 3 Z0 Imag or Port 4 Z0 Real and Port 4 Z0 Imag to set the port reference impedance in Complex format 3 Click Port Z Conversion to change the port impedance conversion function to the ON state 4 Click Return 5 If Fixture Simulator is OFF click the key again to turn it ON ...

Page 460: ...adding a matching circuit for each test port Matching circuit function Define the matching circuit to be added by one of the following methods Select one of the five predetermined circuit models and specify the values for the elements in the circuit model Use a user file in two port Touchstone data format that defines the matching circuit to be added The circuit models used for defining matching c...

Page 461: ...e 2 port Touchstone data file is different from the port reference impedance setting value of the analyzer it is automatically converted to adapt to the analyzer setting When a 2 port Touchstone data file is read in data for up to 3202 frequency points are read in using interpolation according to the measurement frequency point setting of the analyzer If ...

Page 462: ...cuit model consisting of a series inductor and a shunt capacitor Shunt C Series L Selects a circuit model consisting of a shunt capacitor and a series inductor Shunt L Series C Selects a circuit model consisting of a shunt inductor and a series capacitor Series C Shunt L Selects a circuit model consisting of a series capacitor and a shunt inductor Shunt L Shunt C Selects a circuit model consisting...

Page 463: ...cted circuit model Softkey Function C Specifies capacitance F G Specifies conductance S L Specifies inductance H R Specifies resistance ohm 1 When either of the two components of Series C C and G is set to 0 the component is defined as Open when both components are set to 0 they are defined as Short When either of the two components of Shunt L L and R is set to 0 the component is defined as Short ...

Page 464: ...mbedding de embedding feature allows you to add embed or remove de embed data of your desired 4 6 8 port network defined in a 4 6 8 port Touchstone data file to or from measurement values through software based processing The embedding de embedding supports three types of connection as shown below Connection that enables embedding de embedding network 4 6 8 port touchstone data ...

Page 465: ...and embed de embed a 2 port network on the other side using the 2 port matching circuit embedding feature or the 2 port network de embedding feature Selecting topology A will result in unexpected measurement Procedure 1 Prepare a 4 6 8 port touchstone data file s4p s6p s8p format corresponding to a network you want to embed de embed 2 Press Analysis key 3 Click Fixture Simulator De Embedding SnP T...

Page 466: ...o select embedding de embedding an error occurs and no processing None is automatically selected 9 10 Click De Embedding SnP to turn ON the 4 6 8 port network embedding de embedding feature 11 Click Return 12 If Fixture Simulator is OFF click the key to turn it ON At the firmware A 9 61 and above when the 4 6 8 port network embedding de embedding feature reads a 4 6 8 port Touchstone data file it ...

Page 467: ...mulator Overview The balance unbalance conversion function simulates a measurement under a balanced state based on measurement results obtained in an unbalanced state This function enables you to evaluate devices with balanced ports Be sure to set the impedances of the two unbalanced ports equal to each other For more details on setting up port impedance for unbalanced ports refer to Converting th...

Page 468: ...The types of devices that can be evaluated using the E5071C are shown below To evaluate a balanced device an E5071C with at least three test ports is required Types of balanced devices that can be evaluated with E5071C ...

Page 469: ...E5071C 468 ...

Page 470: ...nce unbalance conversion function to measure the following parameters Mixed mode S parameter Imbalance parameter CMRR Common Mode Rejection Ratio Mixed mode S parameter By turning on the balance unbalance conversion function you can obtain the S parameter of the balanced port separately for two modes the differential mode and the common mode The following figure shows the notation of the S paramet...

Page 471: ...E5071C 470 The following two figures show the mixed mode S parameter when measuring each balanced device Mixed mode S parameter when measuring a single ended balanced device ...

Page 472: ...Measurement 471 Mixed mode S parameter when measuring a balanced balanced device Mixed mode S parameter when measuring a single ended single ended balanced device ...

Page 473: ...he balance unbalance conversion function you can select the imbalance parameter of the balanced port as the measurement parameter The following three figures show the imbalance parameter you can select when measuring each balanced device Parameter when measuring a single ended balanced device Imbalance ...

Page 474: ...rameter when measuring a single ended single ended balanced device Imbalance1 Imbalance2 Imbalance3 Imbalance4 The balance matching circuit Differential matching circuit embedding is not applied to single ended S parameter results For example the balance matching circuit is not applied to the ...

Page 475: ...e for Balance Unbalance Conversion When using three test ports perform a full three port calibration on the test ports to be used When using four test ports perform a full four port calibration 1 Extend the calibration plane if necessary by using the port extension function or network de embedding function For more on the port extension and network de embedding functions see Extending the Calibrat...

Page 476: ... analyzer from among 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 4 4 1 4 2 and 4 3 for connection to logical port 1 Port a and Port b Port 2 bal Selects two ports on the analyzer from among 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 4 4 1 4 2 and 4 3 for connection to logical port 2 Port c and Port d When you have selected SE SE Bal Softkey Function Port 1 se Selects a port on the analyzer from among 1 2 3 and 4 for...

Page 477: ...Parameters that can be used differ depending on the balance unbalance topology specified in Balance Unbalance Conversion 1 Press Meas key or Analysis Fixture Simulator Measurement 2 Select the measurement parameter Checking Device Type and Port Assignment You can check the device type and the port assignment for the balance unbalance conversion by displaying the balance measurement topology proper...

Page 478: ...t to a value twice as large as the impedance of the two unbalanced ports before conversion and in common mode to a value one half as large Be sure to set the impedances of the two unbalanced ports equal to each other For more details on setting up port impedance for unbalanced ports refer to Converting the Port Impedance of the Measurement Result Port impedance after a balance unbalance conversion...

Page 479: ...y the port reference impedance in differential mode 3 Select the balanced port from Port 1 bal Real Port 2 bal Real or Port 3 bal Real to set the differential port reference impedance in Real format 4 Select Port 1 bal Real and Port 1 bal Imag Port 2 bal Real and Port2 bal Imag or Port 3 bal Real and Port 3 bal Imag to set the differential port reference impedance in Complex format 5 Ports 1 2 and...

Page 480: ... 2 bal Real or Port 3 bal Real to set the common port reference impedance in Real format 4 Select Port 1 bal Real and Port 1 bal Imag Port 2 bal Real and Port2 bal Imag or Port 3 bal Real and Port 3 bal Imag to set the common port reference impedance in Complex format 5 Ports 1 2 and 3 refer to the logical ports 1 2 and 3 ...

Page 481: ...ersion By using the matching circuit function you can obtain the characteristics resulting from the addition of an arbitrary matching circuit for each test port Balance matching circuit function The balance matching circuit Differential matching circuit embedding is not applied to single ended S parameter results For example the balance matching circuit is not applied to the imbalance parameter as...

Page 482: ... The setup steps are shown below 1 Press Analysis key then click Fixture Simulator Diff Matching 2 Click Select Port 3 Click 1 2 or 3 to select the port on the DUT to which a differential matching circuit will be added 4 To add a matching circuit defined in a user file perform the following operations a Press User File b Using the dialog box that appears select the 2 port Touchstone data file s2p ...

Page 483: ...es the capacitance F G Specifies the conductance S L Specifies the inductance H R Specifies the resistance Ω 6 o When either of the two components of Shunt L L and R is set to 0 the component is defined as Short when both components are set to 0 they are defined as Open 7 Repeat the procedure to set up the differential matching circuit to be added to the selected ports on the DUT 8 Click Diff Matc...

Page 484: ...ng figure shows an example of a measurement circuit used to evaluate a balanced SAW filter DUT port 1 is an unbalanced port connected to source impedance Rs and input matching circuit L1 DUT port 2 is a balanced port connected to an output matching circuit C1 C2 and L2 and load resistance RL Measurement circuit of balance SAW filter Evaluation Using Actual Test Fixture Generally a test fixture as ...

Page 485: ...g an actual test fixture Problems in Measurement with Actual Test Fixture Evaluating a balanced device with an actual test fixture involves the following problems Calibration cannot be performed at the DUT s terminals A DUT s terminals are in the test fixture and calibration standards cannot be connected to them In addition it is very difficult to obtain calibration standards that can be used to c...

Page 486: ...tor The E5071C s fixture simulator function simulates a test fixture by using internal software instead of using an actual test fixture for evaluating DUTs The following figure shows an example connection for evaluating a DUT with the E5071C s fixture simulator function The unbalanced port of the DUT should be directly connected to a test port of the E5071C and the balanced port of the DUT should ...

Page 487: ...6 The following figure shows the measurement circuit simulated by the fixture simulator based on actual measurement with the test fixture shown in figure above Measurement circuit simulated by fixture simulator ...

Page 488: ...ersion converts measured S parameters to those at arbitrary port reference impedance In the above figure Measurement circuit simulated by fixture simulator since the single ended port of the DUT is connected to the E5071C s test port 50 ohm single ended port reference impedance conversion is not required This function is performed for a single ended port even if balance unbalance conversion is app...

Page 489: ... 2 25 ohm Since the differential port is terminated with 200 ohm in the figure Measurement circuit of balance SAW filter differential port reference impedance Zd should be set to 200 ohm Advantages of Balanced DUT Evaluation using Fixture Simulator Balanced device evaluation using the fixture simulator offers the following advantages Calibration reference plane can be easily moved to the DUT s ter...

Page 490: ...een Backlight Calibration of the Touch Screen Others Initial Source Port Control function External Test Set Mode Checking the product information Activating Software Option Locking the Front Keys Keyboard and or Mouse Touch Screen Setting the Beeper Built in Speaker Setting the preset function Overload Detection and Power Trip Feature Exit Restart E5071C Measurement Application ...

Page 491: ... to make this setting 1 Press System key 2 Press Misc Setup GPIB Setup Talker Listener Address 3 Enter the address using the ENTRY block keys on the front panel Setting system controller USB GPIB interface When controlling an external device from the E5071C connect the USB port of the E5071C and the GPIB port of the external device through the USB GPIB interface Do not connect two or more USB GPIB...

Page 492: ...Setting Control Functions 719 2 Select No not this time then click Next 3 Select Install the software automatically Recommended then click Next ...

Page 493: ...E5071C 720 4 Click Finish ...

Page 494: ...Setting Control Functions 721 5 The Found New Hardware Wizard appears again Repeat the step 2 to 4 again ...

Page 495: ...E5071C 722 ...

Page 496: ... plugged in Changing the setting of the USB GPIB interface If you need to check change the setting of the USB GPIB interface after connecting the USB GPIB interface follow these steps 1 Press System key then click Misc Setup GPIB Setup System Controller Configuration 2 The Agilent Connection Expert appears You can also execute Agilent Connection Expert from Task bar or Start menu in Windows ...

Page 497: ...hange Propetries 5 Change the setting of USB GPIB interface 6 It is required to connect the USB GPIB Interface to GPIB0 as VISA Interface ID in order to control Power Meter for the Power Calibration External Signal Source for the Frequency Offset ...

Page 498: ...Cs The following browsers are recommended Internet Explorer 6 0 and later Enabling Web Server Network Configuration To use web server you have to configure the E5071C s network correctly For detailed information on configuration and notes see Configuring the Network Enabling Web Server Enable the web server for the E5071C so that it may allow access from an external PC Follow these steps 1 Press S...

Page 499: ...E5071C 726 To change LAN TCP IP configration of you ENA 1 Click View Modify Configuration 1 in the Figure below The following screen appears ...

Page 500: ...Setting Control Functions 727 2 Click Modify Configuration 2 in the Figure above Modifying this setup affects the Windows Internet Protocol TCP IP property The following screen appears ...

Page 501: ...E5071C 728 3 Enter the password Default Agilent in the Password field 1 in the figure above and click Login 2 in the figure above The following screen appears ...

Page 502: ...the Java Runtime Environment installed otherwise the Browser Web Control function might not work properly To install Java Runtime Environment see http www java com The following is a description of how to start the VNC server configuration Visit the web site at http www realvnc com for information on the password setting procedure and VNC server 1 Press System Key 2 Click Misc Setup Network Setup ...

Page 503: ...071C 730 3 Click VNC Server Configuration to start the VNC Server Properties 4 To restrict external access set a password for the VNC server configuration The default password at factory shipment is blank ...

Page 504: ...ime Display The date time display in the instrument status bar can be switched on off using the following procedure 1 Press System Misc Setup Clock Setup 2 Click Show Clock to toggle the date time display on off Other topics about Setting Control Functions ...

Page 505: ... continuously over a long period Turning off the LCD Screen Backlight 1 Press System key 2 Press Backlight to switch the backlight on off 3 Switching off the backlight causes indications on the LCD screen to be almost invisible 4 The backlight that has been switched off can be turned on again by pressing any key from the front panel Other topics about Setting Control Functions ...

Page 506: ...n calibration screen appears 4 Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger The mark x appears also on the lower left upper right and lower right Touch the x marks in that order with your finger 5 Touching the four locations described above with your finger automatically concludes the touch screen calibration 6 With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time it au...

Page 507: ...sient voltage occurs when the active DUT is connected or an external DC power supply is turned on A test port not used or a test port to which the DUT input terminal is connected can be regarded as a test port which hardly experience transient voltage The following table shows the degree of tolerance to transient voltage of each test with this feature Connect the DUT so that transient voltage is n...

Page 508: ...ing on the Init Src Ctrl feature System Service Menu Init Src Ctrl ON Specifying the Init Src port System Service Menu Init Src Port 1 2 3 4 When using a SCPI program Sample program to set Port 1 to Initial Source Port INIT CONT OFF SYSTem ISPControl STATe ON SYSTem ISPControl PORT 1 To disable the Initial Source Port Control feature When using the front panel menu System Service Init Src Ctrl OFF...

Page 509: ...sing the S parameter test set built in the E5071C When you want to use the E5071C for such purposes use the external test set mode function Example of using the external test set mode function To apply amplified output signal of the E5071C to the DUT an amplifier is connected to the port used for the source to the E5071C A reverse coupler is inserted to make the reflection measurement A forward co...

Page 510: ...tting the external test set mode You can select the status of the external test set mode from 3 types OFF Mode 1 or Mode 2 When OFF is selected the instrument operates as a network analyzer with a built in 4 port S parameter test set ...

Page 511: ...E5071C 738 When Mode 1 or Mode 2 is selected the instrument operates as a network analyzer with a built in 2 port T R test set 1 Mode 1 ...

Page 512: ...only limited types of calibrations and measurement parameters are available Calibration when using the external test set When the external test set mode Mode 1 or Mode 2 is used with the E5071C the following calibrations are available When other calibration methods are used correct calibration is not performed Open response calibration Short response calibration Thru response calibration Enhanced ...

Page 513: ...ameters When the external test set mode Mode 1 or Mode 2 is used with the E5071C only the S11 S21 measurement and absolute value measurement are available When Mode 1 or Mode 2 is selected the fixture simulator s balance measurement function and frequency offset function are not available ...

Page 514: ...sion and System Information The revision number and system information of the firmware installed in the E5071C can be checked using the following procedure 1 Press System Firmware Revision 2 The Firmware Revision dialog is displayed From firmware revision A 08 0x and later the Firmware Revision dialog box provides information about installed Options Serial Number IP Address Mac Address and USB ID ...

Page 515: ...E5071C 742 ...

Page 516: ...ions and then select option which you want to activate 2 Type the relevant 12 character long license key sent by Agilent in the Key Code entry dialog box then click Enter 3 Check the installed option according to Checking_Serial Number and Option Note for Option TDR Requires the upgrade at Agilent service center Requires the option TDR application on the E5071C Backing Up License Key File The lice...

Page 517: ...ock on off Softkey Function Front Panel Keyboard Lock Switches the lock for the front panel keys and keyboard on off Touch Screen Mouse Lock Switches the lock for the touch screen and mouse on off You cannot use a locked device to unlock that same device To unlock the front panel keys keyboard touch screen and mouse that have been locked press the Standby switch to turn off the power supply and th...

Page 518: ...unds a beep tone to prompt the user to use caution When an instrument error occurs An error message appears at the same time When a limit test fails The warning beeper sounds slightly longer than the operation complete beeper Setting the Operation Complete Beeper 1 Press System key 2 Click Misc Setup Beeper Beep Complete to switch the operation complete beeper on off 3 Clicking Test Beep Complete ...

Page 519: ...u can save the instrument state of the E5071C into a file in the mass storage and then recall it with the preset function to reproduce that state If no user preset instrument state is stored you cannot set the user preset function 1 Press System key 2 Click Misc Setup Preset Setup State 3 Use one of the following keys for the desired setting Softkey Function Factory Specifies the normal preset fun...

Page 520: ...t signal level is below the maximum input level In that case you may turn off overload detection Even if the overload detection is turned off overload may occur at the excessive input level When you need to turn off this feature be sure to control that your input signal is under the maximum input level for specified measurements and never exceeds the damage level 26 dBm written on the instrument p...

Page 521: ...1C Measurement Application Pressing System Service Menu Exit Firmware shuts down the firmware of E5071C Pressing System Service Menu Restart Firmware restarts the firmware of the E5071C Other topics about Setting Control Functions ...

Page 522: ...ntations Specifications Customer Contacts Error Messages Warning Message TDR Error Messages TDR Warning Message Default Conditions Troubleshooting Maintenance Measurement Accessories General Principles of Operation Revision History Replacing 8753ES with E5071C ...

Page 523: ... 9 kHz to 3 GHz No Option 230 Option 430 All 9 kHz to 4 5 GHz Option 240 Option 440 A 08 00 and above 9 kHz to 6 5 GHz Option 260 Option 460 A 09 30 and above 9 kHz to 8 5 GHz Option 280 Option 480 All 100 kHz to 3 GHz Yes Option 235 Option 435 All 100 kHz to 4 5 GHz Option 245 Option 445 A 08 00 and above 100 kHz to 6 5 GHz Option 265 Option 465 A 09 30 and above 100 kHz to 8 5 GHz Option 285 Opt...

Page 524: ...ifferent from 4 5 6 5 8 5 GHz options For more information on attenuation refer to Setting Power Level with Auto Power Range For more information see the Configuration Guide and http www agilent com find ena_upgrades Software Options Option Number Description 008 Frequency Offset Mode 010 Time Domain Analysis 790 Measurement Wizard Assistant Software TDR Enhanced Time Domain Analysis The upgrade r...

Page 525: ...ption 810 Add Keyboard 820 Add Mouse Calibration Option Option Number Description A6J ANSI Z540 Compliant Calibration 1A7 ISO 17025 Compliant Calibration System Rack Options Option Number Description Equivalent Agilent Part Number 1CM Rack Mount Kit 5063 9216 1CN Front Handle Kit 5063 9229 1CP Rack Mount and Front Handle Kit 5188 4430 ...

Page 526: ...tion about start up setup and system recovery information when the Windows cannot be boot up This is furnished with E5071C as a paper manual Service Guide Provides information about the parts troubleshooting performance test adjustment and service menu Both Installation Guide and Service Guide can be downloaded from http www agilent com find e5071c manual The latest revision of Help and Help in PD...

Page 527: ...Specifications The latest version of data sheet is available at http cp literature agilent com litweb pdf 5989 5479EN pdf For its history see the Data Sheet Revision History Other topics about Product Information ...

Page 528: ...ntacts For assistance on E5071C refer to http www agilent com find assist for your regional customer contacts Click Select a Country or Area on the upper right of the web page to select your region Other topics about Product Information ...

Page 529: ...essage Description 20 Additional standard needed The GPIB command that turns ON the calibration function has been sent before all the data measurements required to calculate the calibration factor have been completed In 1 port calibration for example when the measurements are completed for OPEN and SHORT standards but not for LOAD standard This error occurs when you try to turn ON the calibration ...

Page 530: ... type SENS CORR COLL METH xxxx or SENS CORR OFFS COLL METH xxxx is executed This error is not generated by front key operations 148 Character data not allowed A character data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one Double quotes are omitted where it is necessary to place a parameter in double quotes for example 100 Command error...

Page 531: ...ENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLT3 SENS CORR COLL CKIT ORD LOAD etc 104 Data type error The parser has recognized a data element that must not exist Block data has been sent instead of numeric value data or character string data that had been expected for example 63 Duplicate trace name This error occurs when a trace name defined with CALCulate 1 160 PARameter 1 16 TNAMe DATA command already exist E No Mess...

Page 532: ...on data not allowed An expression data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one 170 Expression error When the expression data is put to syntactic analysis an error not corresponding to one of Error Numbers 171 through 179 occurs 27 External test set enabled When the external test set mode is turned ON the allowable calibration is limited See Calibration and...

Page 533: ... formatted data array MMEM LOAD FDAT command and limit table MMEM STOR LIM command for the active trace on the active channel segment sweep table MMEM LOAD SEGM command for the active channel a VBA project file MMEM LOAD PROG command etc cannot be read normally 601 Failed to read bit file This error occurs when reading bit file fails 101 Failed to write file This error occurs when the formatted da...

Page 534: ...is enabled SENS OFFS ON The fixture simulator is allowed to use when the frequency offset is not enabled 24 Frequency offset enabled This error occurs when the normal calibration SENS CORR COLL OPEN etc is performed under the condition of the frequency offset is enabled SENS OFFS ON 59 Frequency offset not allowed This error occurs when frequency offset function is not allowed in the current setti...

Page 535: ...nother measurement is in progress the request for initiating a measurement INIT command is ignored 35 Insufficient ECal module memory This error occurs when the embedded memory is insufficient to save the user property in ECal module during the user definition ECal processing 161 Invalid block data Block data has been expected but the block data that appears is invalid for some reason see 7 7 6 2 ...

Page 536: ...n data element is invalid see 7 7 7 2 IEEE488 2 Parentheses are not paired or illegal characters are used for example 602 Invalid mask data This error occurs when invalid mask data is loaded 103 Invalid separator The parser a syntactic analysis program had been expecting a delimiter but a character that is not a delimiter has been sent 151 Invalid string data Character string data has been expecte...

Page 537: ... been entered For example the command SENS 1 6 SWE POIN requires one more parameter Therefore when a message SENS1 SWE POIN is sent to a correct program message SENS1 SWE POIN 201 this instrument receives the former message as an invalid one because all parameters have not been entered Enter command parameters correctly N No Message Description 70 No GPIB system controller The GPIB system controll...

Page 538: ...tion has occurred A numeric value error other than Errors 121 through 129 has occurred 128 Numeric data not allowed An numeric value data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one O No Message Description 200 Option not installed The command received has been ignored because of the mismatch between the contents of an option for thi...

Page 539: ...ds the specified peak is not found in the marker search analysis 220 Phase lock loop unlocked This error occurs when the PLL circuit of this instrument becomes unlocked while the measurement is in progress The measurement value is not correct This error may occur when an external reference out of specification is connected to this instrument Should an error occur with an external reference not con...

Page 540: ...ty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument If this error occurs the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off For more information see Overload Detection and Power Trip Function 223 Port 3 receiver overload The input to Test Port 3 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or th...

Page 541: ...ot settled The measurement value of the power meter is unstable or it goes outside the tolerance This error occurs when the power meter s measurement value does not become stable within about 10 seconds during measurement for power calibration data or that for scalar mixer calibration data This error also occurs when the power calibration value exceeds the set tolerance In addition it occurs when ...

Page 542: ...tputting the display image on the LCD screen to the printer HCOP IMM command 121 Print failed This error occurs when printing fails for reasons other than Error 120 Printer error 284 Program currently running This error occurs when the PROG SEL STAT RUN command is executed with the VBA program in the Run state 112 Program mnemonic too long The length of the header exceeds 12 characters see 7 6 1 4...

Page 543: ...ED Query error see 6 3 2 IEEE488 2 This error occurs when this instrument is designated as the talker and an incomplete program message is received for example 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response After a query asking for an indefinite response has been run another query is received in the same program message See 6 5 7 5 7 IEEE488 2 350 Queue overflow The queue contains a specific cod...

Page 544: ...h the frequency offset function set to ON 50 Specified channel hidden This error occurs when an attempt is made to activate a channel not on display using the DISP WIND ACT command This error is not generated by front key operations 23 Specified error term does not exist The error occurs when the calibration coefficient type of the parameter specified in the read write command of the calibration c...

Page 545: ...gh 159 occurs 158 String data not allowed A character string data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is attached to a numeric value element to which a suffix is not allowed to be attached 134 Suffix too long The unit is too long The unit is expressed in 12 or more characters see 7 7 3 4 IEEE488 2 55 Sweep mode changed t...

Page 546: ...nd CALC MARK BWID DATA 242 TDR option requires advanced system calibration TDR requires the system information PCC2 00 and above This instrument should be sent to service centre for adjustment with the firmware Rev 9 50 and above to suit E5071C TDR option 124 Too many digits The number of digits of the argument of the decimal numeric value data element exceeds 255 with the preceding 0 removed see ...

Page 547: ... detects a trigger command TRIG or an external trigger signal But it is ignored due to the timing condition This instrument is not in the wait for trigger state for example Change the setup so that a trigger command or an external trigger signal can be sent after the instrument has entered the wait for trigger state U No Message Description 300 Unable to estimate adapter length Adapter length can ...

Page 548: ...e ECal module written by the user definition ECal V No Message Description 30 Valid Ecal module not found This error occurs when the number of ports of the ECal module connected is less than the necessary number of ports This error occurs for example when a 4 port Cal executing command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLT4 is executed with a 2 port ECal module connected This error is not generated by front ke...

Page 549: ...e power meter during the measurement for power calibration data or for that in scalar mixer calibration Ensure the connection of the power sensor 75 Valid signal generator not found No valid external signal source is connected This error occurs when the specified type of external signal source is not connected to the specified GPIB address though the control of the external signal source is enable...

Page 550: ...played the auto port extension is not available Calibration extrapolated The frequency range that can be calibrated with the ECal module is exceeded In this case the calibration data for the minimum frequency or maximum frequency are used instead of the data exceeding the allowable frequency range for calibration Failed to set zero type of power meter This error occurs when zero type External or I...

Page 551: ...xecuted Segment table changed This warning message is displayed when the setting specified segment by segment in the segment table is automatically changed by a change in the other setting For example this warning message is displayed when with the power specified segment by segment in the segment table the power setting for a segment is adjusted by a change in the power range setting Sweep mode c...

Page 552: ...d the bandwidth is not found Transform Gate not allowed This message appears when you have set the measurement points to two sweep type to other than linear sweep or frequency offset to enabled while the gating conversion function of the time domain feature is turned on If this message is displayed the gating conversion function is automatically turned off User Preset File not found This warning m...

Page 553: ...tion where this instrument does not accept one C No Message Description 148 Character data not allowed A character data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one Double quotes are omitted where it is necessary to place a parameter in double quotes for example 100 Command error A comprehensive syntax error has occurred showing that ...

Page 554: ...88 2 has occurred This error occurs also when a calibration measurement is aborted 123 Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent exceeds 32 000 see 7 7 2 4 1 IEEE488 2 178 Expression data not allowed An expression data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one 170 Expression error When the expression data is put to syntactic analysis an error not...

Page 555: ...valid in the unit for numeric parameters following a SCPI command I No Message Description 224 Illegal parameter value The parameter value is not suitable This error occurs when the CALC TRAC PAR command is used to specify an S parameter that does not exist in the model S44 in the case of a 2 port model for example 601 Invalid bit pattern An invalid bit pattern is entered or loaded 161 Invalid blo...

Page 556: ...xpression data element is invalid see 7 7 7 2 IEEE488 2 Parentheses are not paired or illegal characters are used for example 602 Invalid mask data An invalid mask data is loaded 103 Invalid separator The parser a syntactic analysis program had been expecting a delimiter but a character that is not a delimiter has been sent 151 Invalid string data Character string data has been expected but the ch...

Page 557: ...numeric value data having no decimal point representation has occurred A numeric value error other than Errors 121 through 129 has occurred 128 Numeric data not allowed An numeric value data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one O No Message Description 225 Out of memory Insufficient memory is available in this instrument to pe...

Page 558: ...and output buffers have become full preventing the instrument from continuing processing for example 400 Query error A comprehensive query error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a more detailed error This code simply shows that a query error defined in 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 IEEE488 2 has occurred 410 Query INTERRUPTED The state that generates a INTERRUPTED Query error see 6 3 2...

Page 559: ...a element is put to syntactic analysis an error not corresponding to one of Error Numbers 151 through 159 occurs 158 String data not allowed A character string data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is attached to a numeric value element to which a suffix is not allowed to be attached 134 Suffix too long The unit is to...

Page 560: ...condition of the memory or conditions specific to memory related devices In this instrument this error occurs when the number of characters exceeds 254 in a character string parameter 242 TDR option requires advanced system calibration Advanced system calibration has to be performed on the E5071C so that the TDR option functions accurately U No Message Description 113 Undefined header A command no...

Page 561: ...rn ON the E5071C TDR option Analysis TDR ON If its already at ON state then click Start TDR Failed to connect address This message appears when there s start up error in the E5071C TDR option remote mode address shows the specified VISA address E5071C ENA option TDR already exist This message appears if E5071C TDR option is turned ON when there s another E5071C TDR option already turned ON and is ...

Page 562: ...is message appears in E5071C TDR option when you recall a setting which was saved in Advanced Mode in Basic Mode Note that when you save the setting in the Advanced Mode you cannot recall the file in the Basic mode Recall the setting in the Advanced Mode ...

Page 563: ...l Fixture Simulato r Fixture Simulator OFF Topology Device SE BAL Port1 se 1 When SE Bal is selected as the device When SE SE Bal is selected as the device Port1 bal 1 2 When Bal Bal is selected as the device Port2 bal 2 3 SE Bal is selected as the device 3 4 Bal Bal is selected as the device ...

Page 564: ...rt3 bal 3 4 When SE SE Bal is selected as the device Property OFF BalUn OFF Port Matching Port Matching OFF Select Port 1 Select Circuit None C 0 000e 12F G 0 000S L 0 000e 9H R 0 0000 ohm Port Z Conversio n Port Z Conversi on OFF Port1 Z0 Real 50 000 ohm Port1 Z0 Imag 0 000 ohm ...

Page 565: ...000 ohm Port4 Z0 Real 50 000 ohm Port4 Z0 Imag 0 000 ohm De Embeddin g De Embeddi ng OFF Select Port 1 Select Type None Diff Matching Diff Matching OFF Select Bal Port 2 Select Circuit None C 0 0000 F G 0 0000 S L 0 0000 H R 0 0000 ohm Diff Z Conversio n Diff Z Conversi on OFF Port1 bal Real 100 00 ohm ...

Page 566: ...ohm Port3 bal Real 100 00 ohm Port3 bal Imag 0 00 ohm Cmn ZConversi on Cmn Z Conversi on OFF Port1 bal Real 25 000 ohm Port1 bal Imag 0 000 ohm Port2 bal Real 25 000 ohm Port2 bal Imag 0 000 ohm Port3 bal Real 25 000 ohm Port3 bal Imag 0 000 ohm De Embeddin g S4P De Embeddi ng S4P OFF Topology A ...

Page 567: ...ransfor m Transform OFF Start 10 000 ns Stop 10 000 ns Center 0 0000 s Span 20 000 ns Type Bandpass Window Normal Impulse Width 230 69 ps Kaiser Bata 6 0000 Conversi on Conversio n OFF Function Z Reflecti on Limit Test Limit Test OFF Limit Line OFF Limit Line Offsets Stimulus Offset 0 0000 Hz Amplitud e Offset 0 0000 Hz ...

Page 568: ...Ripple Limit Ripple Limit Test OFF Ripple Limit OFF Ripple value OFF Ripple Band 1 Fail Sign ON Bandwidt h Limit BW Test OFF BW Display OFF BW Marker OFF N dB Points 3 0000 dB Min Bandwidth 10 000 kHz Max Bandwidth 300 00 kHz Fail Sign ON ...

Page 569: ...E5071C 796 Avg Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Avg Factor 16 Averaging OFF Avg Trigger OFF SMO Aperture 1 5000 Smoothing OFF IF Bandwidth 70 kHz ...

Page 570: ... Port 1 Respo nse Short Select Port 1 Respo nse Thru Select Ports 2 1 S21 Enhan ced Respo nse Select Ports 2 1 S21 S11 1 Port Cal Select Port 1 2 Port Cal Select Ports 1 2 3 Port Cal Select Ports 1 2 3 2 Port TRL Cal Select Ports 1 2 3 Port TRL Cal Select Ports 1 2 3 Adapte r Remov al Select Ports 1 Adapte r Remov Cal Kit 85033 E ...

Page 571: ... Cal Kit 85033 E Modify Cal Kit Define STDs Define STDs Specif y CLSs Sub Class Sub Class 1 TRL Reflect Short TRL Option Impedance Syste m TRL Option Reference Plane Thru Label Kit 85033 E Port Extensions Extensions OFF Auto Port Extens ion Select Ports 1 2 3 4 Method Curren t Span Meth od User Spa n Start Minimu m value in ...

Page 572: ... range Adjust Mismatch OFF Include Loss OFF Extension Port1 0 0000 s Extension Port2 0 0000 s Extension Port3 0 0000 s Extension Port4 0 0000 s Loss Select Port 1 Loss1 OFF Loss1 0 0000 dBm Freq1 1 0000 GHz Loss2 OFF Loss2 0 0000 dBm Freq2 1 0000 GHz Loss at DC 0 0000 dBm Velocity Factor 1 0000 ...

Page 573: ...Sensor A Setting s Ref Cal Factor 100 00 Non changi ng Zero Type Extern al Sensor B Setting s Ref Cal Factor 100 00 Non changi ng Zero Type Extern al Receiver Calibration Select Port 1 Correction OFF Source Port 1 Power Offset 0 Calibrate Both Calibrate R Calibrate T Mixer Conv erter Calibration Scalar Cal Manu al Select Ports 2 1 fwd Scalar Powe User A ...

Page 574: ...Product Information 801 Cal Manu al r Mete r Sens or Scalar Cal ECal Select Ports 2 1 fwd Scalar Cal ECal Powe r Mete r Use Sens or A Cal Trig Source Intern al ...

Page 575: ...E5071C 802 Center Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Maximum Frequency 10E5 2 ...

Page 576: ...Display Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Allocate Channels Number of Traces 1 Allocate Traces Display Data Data Math OFF Title Label OFF Graticule Label ON Invert Color OFF Frequency ON Update ON Equation OFF ...

Page 577: ...E5071C 804 Format Key Operation Default value Preset RST Save Recall Log Mag ...

Page 578: ...Product Information 805 Macro Setup Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Echo Window OFF ...

Page 579: ...C 806 Marker Fctn Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Discrete OFF Couple ON Marker Table OFF Statistics OFF Annotation Options Marker Info X Pos 1 Marker Info Y Pos 1 Align ON Active Only ON ...

Page 580: ...eak Excursion 3 0000 dB Peak Polarity Positive Target Search Target Target Value 0 0000 dB When Target is selected Target Transitio n Both When Target is selected Tracking OFF Search Range Search Range OFF Start 0 0000 Hz Stop 0 0000 Hz Couple ON Multiple Range Multipl e Range OFF Target Range 1 Start 0 0000 Hz ...

Page 581: ...E5071C 808 Stop 0 0000 Hz Bandwidth OFF Bandwidth Value 3 0000 dB When one of the marker is on Notch OFF Notch Value 3 0000 dB When one of the marker is on ...

Page 582: ...Product Information 809 Marker Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Marker1 Marker 1 is turned on immediately after the marker softkey menu is displayed Ref Marker Mode OFF ...

Page 583: ...ology at SE Bal and BalUn on in Analysis mode Sdd11 When Fixture Simulator is set on set Topology at Bal Bal and BalUn on in Analysis mode Sss11 When Fixture Simulator is set on set Topology at SE SE Bal and BalUn on in Analysis mode Absolute A 1 Aux Input 1 Range 10 V Sweep Port 1 Aux Input 2 Range 10 V Sweep Port 1 ...

Page 584: ...Product Information 811 Save Recall Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Save Type State Cal Channel Trace Disp Only Save SnP SnP Format Auto ...

Page 585: ...E5071C 812 Scale Key Operation Default value Preset RST Save Recall Divisions 10 Scale Div 10 000 dB div Reference Position 5 Div Reference Value 0 0000 dB Electrical Delay 0 0000 s Phase Offset 0 0000 ...

Page 586: ...Product Information 813 Span Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Maximum Frequency 10E5 ...

Page 587: ...E5071C 814 Start Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall 100 00 kHz ...

Page 588: ...Product Information 815 Stop Key Operation Default Value Preset RST Save Recall Maximum value in frequency range ...

Page 589: ...ower 0 dBm Port 3 Power 0 dBm Port 4 Power 0 dBm Slope xx dB GHz 0 dB GHz Slope ON OFF OFF CW Freq 100 00 kHz RF Out ON Sweep Time AUTO Sweep Delay 0 0000 s Sweep Mode Stepped Points 201 Sweep Type Lin Freq Edit Segment Table Freq Mode Start Stop List IFBW OFF List Power OFF List Delay OFF List Sweep Mode OFF List Time OFF Segment Display Order ...

Page 590: ... Stop 8 5000 GHz Port 2 Multiplier 1 0000 Divisor 1 0000 Offset 0 0000 Hz Start 9 00 kHz Stop 8 5000 GHz Port 3 Offset 0 0000 Hz Start 9300 kHz Stop 8 5000 GHz Port 4 Offset 0 0000 Hz Start 9 00 kHz Stop 8 5000 GHz External Source LO Frequency OFF Multiplier 0 0000 Divisor 1 0000 Offset 0 0000 Hz Start 0 0000 Hz Stop 0 0000 Hz Control OFF ...

Page 591: ...E5071C 818 Power 10 dBm Slope xxdB GHz 0 dB GHz Slope ON OFF OFF X Axis Normal When Frequency Offset is set off X Axis Response When Frequency Offset is set on ...

Page 592: ...e Pres et R ST Save Recall Invert Image ON Multi port Test Set Setu p Test Set 1 Select Test Set E50 91_ 9 Control OFF Property OFF Port1 A Port2 T1 Port3 R1 Port4 R1 Port5 X1 Port6 Y1 Port7 Z1 Control Lines Line 1 LOW Control Lines LOW Control Lines Line 8 LOW ...

Page 593: ...rol OFF Property OFF Port1 A Port2 T1 Port3 R1 Port4 R1 Port5 X1 Port6 Y1 Port7 Z1 Control Lines Line 1 LOW Control Lines LOW Control Lines Line 8 LOW Misc Setu p Bee per Beep Complete ON Beep Warning ON GPI B Set Talker Listener Address 17 Non chan ging ...

Page 594: ... Time 100 00 ms Custo m Com mand s Prese t Turn RF Out ON R3 Set Frequ ency FR f HZ Set Powe r Level AP p DM Pow er Met er Set up Select Type GPIB Non chan ging GPIB Address 13 Non chan ging USB Net wor k Set up Telnet Server OFF Non chan ging SICL LAN Server OFF Non chan ging SICN LAN Address 17 Non chan ging ...

Page 595: ...lock ON Key Loc k Front Panel Keyboard Lock OFF Touch Screen Mouse Lock OFF Disp lay Set up Co lor Se tu p Nor mal Data Trace 1 Red 5 Gree n 5 Blue 0 Data Trace 2 Red 0 Gree n 5 Blue 5 Data Trace 3 Red 5 Gree n 0 Blue 5 Data Trace 4 Red 0 Gree n 5 Blue 0 Data Trace 5 Red 5 Gree n 4 Blue ...

Page 596: ...ace 6 Red 5 Gree n 3 Blue 3 Data Trace 7 Red 3 Gree n 4 Blue 5 Data Trace 8 Red 5 Gree n 4 Blue 4 Data Trace 9 Red 3 Gree n 4 Blue 3 Mem Trace 1 Red 3 Gree n 3 Blue 0 Mem Trace 2 Red 0 Gree n 3 Blue 3 Mem Trace 3 Red 3 Gree n 0 Blue 3 ...

Page 597: ...lue 0 Mem Trace 5 Red 3 Gree n 2 Blue 0 Mem Trace 6 Red 3 Gree n 1 Blue 1 Mem Trace 7 Red 1 Gree n 2 Blue 3 Mem Trace 8 Red 3 Gree n 2 Blue 2 Mem Trace 9 Red 1 Gree n 2 Blue 1 Graticule Main Red 3 Gree n 3 Blue 3 Graticule Sub Red 1 Gree n 1 ...

Page 598: ...Blue 0 Background Red 0 Gree n 0 Blue 0 Magnification Nor mal Channel Trace Setup 9 Cha nnel s 9 Trac es Non chan ging Pres et Set up State Fact ory Non chan ging Confirm ON Non chan ging Backlight ON Serv ice Men u System Correction ON External Test Set OFF Init Src Ctrl ON Init Src Port 1 ...

Page 599: ...E5071C 826 Security Level Non e ...

Page 600: ...Recall Continuous Continuous Ch1 Hold all channels Hold Other Ch Trigger Source Internal Trigger Event On Sweep Ext Trig Input Negative Edge Ext Trig Delay 0 0000 s Low Latency OFF Ext Trig Output OFF Polarity Positive Pulse Position After Point Trigger Scope All Channel ...

Page 601: ...dby switch does not start up the system Confirm that the power cable is properly plugged in Confirm that the line switch on the rear panel is turned on The system starts up but it automatically shuts down immediately Execute the system recovery The system starts up but it enters the service mode The instrument status bar in the lower right part of the screen displays SVC in red Execute the system ...

Page 602: ...tion so that the input to the test port does not exceed the maximum input level When you measure the 3rd harmonics over 8 5 GHz with options 2D5 4D5 2K5 and 4K5 it is recommended to suppress the carrier signal using filter etc before executing the measurement for accurate results A Clearly Abnormal Measurement Value The measurement value is not reproducible or clearly abnormal Confirm that the DUT...

Page 603: ...e Lock OFF to turn OFF the lock Execute the calibration of the touch screen After the System Recovery touch screen may be inoperable See the Reconfiguring Touch Panel Setting in the installation guide The mouse becomes inoperable Using the front panel keys press System Key Lock Touch Screen Mouse Lock to turn OFF the lock All of the front panel keys keyboard and mouse become inoperable Confirm tha...

Page 604: ...e Appears There is a possibility of a failure An error or warning message is displayed on the instrument message warning area in the lower part of the screen Refer to Error Messages and Warning Messages Troubleshooting for External Devices Symptom Solution Cannot Output to a Printer Cannot output a measurement screen or data to a printer Attempting to output to a printer causes Error Messages 120 ...

Page 605: ...from E5071C 2 Execute the system recovery 3 Delete two files AgtEcal inf and AgtEcal PNF in C WINDOWS PNPDRVRS AGILENT 4 Get the usbecal inf file from http www agilent com find ena_firmw are 5 Put this file into C WINDOWS PNPDRVRS AGILENT 6 Reinstall the firmware 7 Install the Ecal Driver The E5071C hung up when two or more ECals are connected disconnected at the same time When you install the fir...

Page 606: ...Product Information 833 5 Put these two files into C WINDOWS PNPDRVRS AGILENT 6 Reinstall the firmware 7 Install the Ecal Driver ...

Page 607: ...s Applicable to Requesting Repair Replacement Regular Calibration etc Cleaning this Instrument Removing Log Data Removing Mounting Removable Hard Disk Replacement of Parts with Limited Service Life System Recovery Service Menu Updating Firmware System Verification ...

Page 608: ...es on the hard disk of an external PC using following methods You can access to drive D of the E5071C from an external PC via LAN and copy your important data files on the drive D to the external PC See Accessing Hard Disk of E5071C from External PC for details You can transfer your important data files on the drive D of the E5071C to the external PC using MMEM TRAN command via GPIB Do not modify ...

Page 609: ...enter of Agilent Technologies for repair or regular calibration please follow the instructions below Equipment to be Sent When requesting repair or regular calibration of the unit by our Service Center send only the E5071C main unit without any installed option you may have ordered Unless specifically instructed it is not necessary to send accessories and calibration kits Packing Use the original ...

Page 610: ...Product Information 837 For online information about Agilent s service and support visit http www agilent com find tm_services ...

Page 611: ...isopropyl alcohol to wet the cleaning cloth To clean the touch screen LCD do not wet the cloth with water Maintenance of Test Ports and Other Connectors Ports Test ports on the front panel of the E5071C are fitted with N Type connectors f Stains or other damage to these connectors would significantly affect the accuracy in measurements in the RF range Always pay attention to the following precauti...

Page 612: ...eeds to be deleted then SCPI SERVice LOGGing CLEar command can be used to clear the log recorded by the E5071C The log file stores data related to Power ON time Number of times of power ON Result of power ON test Number of switching time of Step Attenuator Number of time of overload Number of aborted time Event Log Other topics about Maintenance ...

Page 613: ...tion or repair of the E5071C send it with the removable hard disk mounted If you replace the removable hard disk make sure to retrieve the system correction data and option data after mounting the hard disk Backing Up Retributing Option Data 1 Back up the license key file for software option before removing hard disk 2 Place the license key file after mounting the hard disk Removing Removable Hard...

Page 614: ...the hard disk into the slot 2 Turn the key to the left until it is locked 3 Remove the key 4 Turn on the E5071C 5 The U is displayed at the 8 segment LED on next to the removal hard disk when E5071C is turned on without key lock The key is available to remove even in Unlocked state Before power on confirm if Removable hard disk is locked completely Removing Removable Hard Disk Type II Follow the s...

Page 615: ...E5071C 842 3 Open the screw in clockwise direction ...

Page 616: ...Product Information 843 4 Press the button under the screw ...

Page 617: ...lot 2 Turn the screw in anti clockwise direction until it is locked 3 Turn the key to the right until it is locked 4 Remove the key 5 Turn on the E5071C 6 The key is available to remove even in Unlocked state Before power on confirm if Removable hard disk is locked completely Writing System Correction Data from Backup Memory to Removable Hard Disk The following procedure shows how to write the sys...

Page 618: ...ject in the softkey menu 4 Select RestoreSysCorFile vba from the D Agilent Service folder and then press the Open button 5 Press Macro Run key 6 The RestoreSysCorFile dialog box appears 7 Click OK 8 Once the program has terminated restart the E5071C to enable the system correction data ...

Page 619: ...Disk Drive HDD 5 years or 20 000 operating hours whichever comes earlier Exchanging hard disk drives causes the contents written after shipment from the factory LAN setup etc to be initialized to the state at the time of shipment The programs and data stored in Drive D user directory are erased 3 years Main fan 50 000 operating hours The service life may be significantly shorter when used in a dus...

Page 620: ...efer to Turning off the LCD Screen Backlight Touch screen function One million times dotting life 5 years USB receptacle 1 500 cycles insertion extraction The service life may be shorter when used in a dusty and dirty environment In case that the insertion extraction is in heavy usage such as Ecal in the production line using USB extension cable may save the USB receptacle life N A Other topics ab...

Page 621: ...m of the E5071C to the factory state or the user state at the setting the user performed save user state User state recovery function is available at HDD revision CN924 and below The procedure of system recovery is described in both Installation Guide and Service Guide Other topics about Maintenance ...

Page 622: ... start again Procedure If you have E5071C TDR option installed turn OFF this option before updating the firmware Analysis TDR OFF 1 Download the latest firmware from the http www agilent com find ena_firmware 2 Download the execution file E5071C_xx xx exe 3 Run the E5071C_xx xx exe to extract the E5071C msi 4 If you use your local PC to download save the file to a USB mass storage device in order ...

Page 623: ...msi 6 If you use your local PC to download save the file to a USB mass storage device in order to move it to E5071C Connect the USB mass storage device into the front USB port of the E5071C 7 Copy or move the E5071C_opt_TDR msi file to D drive 8 Double click E5071C_opt_TDR msi 9 If you are installing for the first time select Install Option TDR on E5071C Instrument default 10 Follow the instructio...

Page 624: ...ion related to various test related to the E5071C For more information about any test related to the E5071C like System Test please refer to the E5071C Service manual available at http www agilent com find e5071c manual Under service menu the following topics are described in this help Other topics about Maintenance ...

Page 625: ...characteristics and its output and input behavior The E5071C performance tests are used to verify the analyzer s conformance to instrument specifications The System Verification utility verifies the E5071C s system specifications by automatically measuring the magnitude and phase for all four S parameters for each verification device and comparing the values against the following Factory measured ...

Page 626: ...ation Kit The combination of Calibration Kit and Verification Kit that can be used is as follows Cal kit Connec tor Kit Type Verificat ion Kit Minimu m Freque ncy Maximu m Freque ncy 85033 D 3 5 mm Mechani cal 85053B 6 GHz 85033 E 3 5 mm Mechani cal 85053B 9 GHz 85052 D 3 5 mm Mechani cal 85053B 26 5 GHz 85052 C 3 5 mm Mechani cal 85053B 26 5 GHz 85093 B 3 5 mm ECal 85053B 300 kHz 9 GHz 85093 C 3 ...

Page 627: ... GHz N4432 A Type N ECal 85055A 300 kHz 18 GHz N4690 A Type N ECal 85055A 10 MHz 18 GHz N4690 B Type N ECal 85055A 300 kHz 18 GHz 85031 B APC 7mm Mechani cal 85051B 6 GHz 85050 C APC 7mm Mechani cal 85051B 18 GHz 85050 D APC 7mm Mechani cal 85051B 18 GHz 85091 B APC 7mm ECal 85051B 300 kHz 9 GHz 85091 C APC 7mm ECal 85051B 300 kHz 9 GHz N4696 A APC 7mm ECal 85051B 10 MHz 18 GHz N4696 APC ECal 8505...

Page 628: ...___________________________________________________ ______ E5071C 14GHz 20GHz Option 2D5 2K5 4D5 4K5 Calibration Kit 85052D The connection of the N4431x is for the thru path A B C D A D and B C The supported connector type is male female Cable Substitution The test port cables specified for the E5071C have been characterized for connector repeatability magnitude and phase stability with flexing re...

Page 629: ...on Kit Substitution Non Agilent calibration kits are not recommended nor supported Precautions for Handling Airlines When you are using the airlines in the Verification Kit observe the following practices to ensure good measurement techniques Be very careful not to drop the airline s center or outer conductor Damage will result if these devices are dropped Use proper Electro Static Discharge ESD p...

Page 630: ...Product Information 857 Flow Diagram of Procedure The operational flow of the software is depicted by the flowchart shown below ...

Page 631: ...E5071C 858 System Verification Program There are four tabs in the E5071C System Verification program Run Configure Overview Help Run ...

Page 632: ...s necessary to connect Calibration Kit and Verification Kit to E5071C with the same cable connection When calibration or verification is measured 2 port measurement E5071C ports are connected to ports of kit by the following options Single Cable One side of the port is connected to the port of E5071C and kit directly The other port is connected through Cable Cable Pair Both ports are connected to ...

Page 633: ...a in tabular form to a text file The file is stored as SysVer Date Time Ports txt and saved under the directory of D SysVer where Date yyyymmdd ex 20101016 Time hhmm ex 1520 Ports Pnm ex P12 An example of a filename is SysVer201010161520P12 txt File Graphs Saves a screen image in PNG format The file is stored as SysVer Date Time Ports DevNo Param png and saved under the directory of D SysVer where...

Page 634: ...2 is selected and it cannot be changed 2 Measure Devices Select the device in the verification kit to execute the measurement from the following options By default all options are selected and at least one option must be selected In general all items should be measured When you disable all items 20 dB Attenuator is automatically selected 20 dB Attenuator 40 dB Attenuator 50 Ohm Airline 25 Ohm Mism...

Page 635: ...ption and entry for Port 3 4 is not displayed 4 Set Up Instrument State and Exit If this check box is checked only set up is performed and the program is terminated thereafter without executing the verification process If this check box is un checked the verification process is executed once the set up is performed Overview 1 This tab displays the overview of the ENA System Verification Click Meas...

Page 636: ...Product Information 863 Help 1 This tab displays the information of the ENA System Verification and links to online help topics ...

Page 637: ... main menu 7 Click the Run button 8 Type the serial number for both Calibration kit and Verification kit then click the Continue button 9 The user entered serial number is printed on the Verification result report If not necessary blank is acceptable 10 Connect the cable with E5071C ports and Calibration Kit or ECal with adapter then click OK 11 The connection is depends on the selected Calibratio...

Page 638: ...ation 865 12 Calibration Execution a Press Cal key on the E5071C front panel and execute full 2 ports calibration Once you have completed calibration click OK in the following dialog box to proceed with the next step ...

Page 639: ...3 Verification Execution a Execute the Verification measurements for the devices selected under Measure Devices options of the Configure tab b Follow the instruction displayed in the dialog c Connect the Verification Kit device then click Measure This Device to measure The result is displayed in the graph display area on the E5071C screen d Once the measurement is completed the following dialog is...

Page 640: ...es h Click Remeasure Previous Device to return to the previous measurement in this example 20 dB Attenuator 14 Displaying the result of Verification Measurement a Once all the verification measurements for the selected devices are completed the following result is displayed It shows the PASS and FAIL status for each measurement b Click Close to close the dialog box 15 Saving the Verification resul...

Page 641: ...er pair 17 If only one pair is selected follow the procedure from step 5 onwards If the System Fails the Verification Test Inspect all connections Do not remove the cable from the E5071C test port This will invalidate the calibration that you have done earlier 1 Repeat this verification test Make good connections with correct torque specifications for each verification device 2 Disconnect clean an...

Page 642: ... whether your measured data falls within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies The result includes the following items Tabular Data 1 Header information E5071C model number serial number verification test time and day Calibration Kit model number serial number Verification Kit model number serial number Measured device Parameter 2 Data for each test point Frequency ...

Page 643: ...t status PASS or FAIL Asterisks is displayed at fail points Graphs 1 Upper limit line defined by the total system uncertainty specification 2 Lower limit line defined by the total system uncertainty specification 3 Measured value at factory Memory trace 4 Measured value Data trace 5 Parameter name S11 S12 etc format Lin Log or Phase 6 Device name and serial number ...

Page 644: ...Product Information 871 Measurement Accessories Measurement Accessories Calibration Kits Test Port Cables Adapters System Accessories ...

Page 645: ... availability of particular calibration kits are subject to change without prior notice Refer to http www agilent com find na_accessories for more information Mechanical Calibration Kit Model Name Description Connector Type Frequency Range 85031B Calibration Kit APC 7 DC to 6 GHz 85032B E Calibration Kit Type N 50 ohm DC to 6 GHz 85032F Mechanical Calibration Kit Type N 50 ohm DC to 9 GHz 85033D C...

Page 646: ...tion Kit Type N 50 ohm DC to 18 GHz 85056D Economy Calibration Kit 2 4 mm DC to 50 GHz 85056K Mechanical Calibration Kit 2 4 mm and 2 92 mm DC to 50 GHz K11644A Mechanical Calibration Kit waveguide WR 42 18 GHz to 26 5 GHz P11644A Mechanical Calibration Kit waveguide WR 62 12 4 GHz to 18 GHz X11644A Mechanical Calibration Kit waveguide WR 90 8 2 GHz to 12 4 GHz 85054D 85056D 85056K X1164A P1164A a...

Page 647: ...B 7 mm 300 kHz to 9 GHz 85091C 7 mm 300 kHz to 9 GHz 85092B Type N 300 kHz to 9 GHz 85092C Type N 300 kHz to 9 GHz 85093B 3 5 mm 300 kHz to 9 GHz 85093C 3 5 mm 300 kHz to 9 GHz 85096B Type N 75 ohm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 85096C Type N 75 ohm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 85098B 7 16 300 kHz to 7 5 GHz 85098C 7 16 300 kHz to 7 5 GHz 85099B Type F 300 kHz to 3 GHz 85099C Type F 300 kHz to 3 GHz N4431A 3 5 mm Type N 30...

Page 648: ...cally Firmware A 09 10 The maximum frequency of your ECal is over 13 GHz Firmware A 09 20 and above The maximum frequency of your ECal is over 13 GHz and the stop frequency on your ENA set over 8 5 GHz The waiting time is NOT added when stop frequency is set below 8 5GHz For scalar mixer calibration the stop frequency of calibration port is used to determine the waiting time instead of the sweep s...

Page 649: ...E5071C 876 N4694A 1 85 mm 10 MHz to 67 GHz ...

Page 650: ...z to 9 GHz An RF cable 610 mm in length with a male and a female N type connector on each end Adapters 11853A 50 ohm N Type Accessory Kit The 11853A kit includes the following items Agilent Cat No Description 1250 1472 N type f f adaptor kit two adaptors 1250 1475 N type m m adaptor kit two adaptors 11511A N type f short 11512A N type m short 11878A N type to 3 5 mm Adaptor Kit The 11878A kit incl...

Page 651: ... 1250 1473 BNC m to N type m adaptor kit two adaptors 1250 1474 BNC f to N type f adaptor kit two adaptors 1250 1476 BNC f to N type m adaptor kit two adaptors 1250 1477 BNC m to N type f adaptor kit two adaptors 11852B Minimum loss pad Option Description Option 004 N type connectors 50 ohm m to 75 ohm f ...

Page 652: ...Speed USB 2 0 in http www agilent com find gpib for more information GPIB Cables The following GPIB cables can be used to connect the analyzer with an external device such as a computer Product Number Length 10833A 1 0 m 3 3 ft 10833B 2 0 m 6 6 ft 10833C 3 0 m 9 9 ft 10833D 0 5 m 1 6 ft Agilent IO Libraries Agilent IO Libraries is a collection of libraries that give you the ability to use your ins...

Page 653: ... information The latest revision of IO Libraries can be downloaded from http www agilent com find iolib Do not update Agilent IO Library on E5071C besides Agilent recommends to do so Refer to http www agilent com find ena_support for the information ...

Page 654: ...Product Information 881 General Principles of Operation General Principles of Operation Data Processing System Description ...

Page 655: ...E5071C 882 Data Processing The internal data processing flowchart for the E5071C is shown in the following figure Data Processing Flowchart Data Processing Flowchart Option TDR ...

Page 656: ...h IF signal is then converted into a complex number that has a real part and an imaginary part The IF bandwidth of the analyzer is equivalent to the bandwidth of the DFT filter The IF bandwidth can be set in the range of 10 Hz 100 kHz IF Range Correction Input signals that went through ranging at the receiver are reverted corrected to previous values before the ranging Ratio Calculation The ratio ...

Page 657: ...red in the calibration coefficient data array It accommodates everything from the simple vector normalization to the full 12 term error correction The user is allowed to access read write this calibration coefficient data array Gain correction is performed in absolute measurement Port Extension This process carries out a simulation of adding or eliminating a variable length no loss transmission pa...

Page 658: ...sing performed from this point on in the flowchart is applied to both the data array and the memory array TDR Data Array The results from all data processing done up to this point are stored in this array The user is not allowed to access read write this data array TDR Memory Array By pressing Display Data Mem the contents of the TDR data array will be copied to this array The user is not allowed ...

Page 659: ...a is processed so that traces can be drawn on the screen Particular scaling depending on the data format is applied using the position of the reference line the value of the reference line and the scale graticule settings Display The results obtained after data processing are displayed on the screen as traces Other topics about General Principles of Operation ...

Page 660: ...network analyzer consists of the circuit modules shown in the following figure System Diagram for the E5071C Network Analyzer Synthesized Source The synthesized source generates an RF sweep signal in the specified frequency range The signal source is phase locked to a highly reliable quartz crystal oscillator to maintain a high level of accuracy in its frequency as well as to achieve precise phase...

Page 661: ...tected as the reference signal R and the test signal T respectively On the other ports the signal that is transmitted through the DUT is detected as the test signal T All signals are then sent to the receiver Receiver Each signal that is sent to the receiver is first converted into an IF signal by a mixer and then converted into a digital signal by an ADC analog to digital converter These processe...

Page 662: ...Product Information 889 Revision History Revision History Firmware Revision History HDD Revision History Data Sheet Revision History Other topics about Product Information ...

Page 663: ...story A 09 61 S6P S8P are supported A 09 60 Turning ON OFF segment individually Segment Sweep is supported Setting multiple range is allowed Multiple ECal connection is added Sliding load and offset load calibration is supported RAW data array is readable Trace data direct selection is allowed Trace name assignment is allowed The following commands have been added SCPI SENSe Ch SEGMent LIST CONTro...

Page 664: ...ption TDR is added Bal is added on the balanced devices type The following commands have been added SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun PARameter Tr BALance d DEFine SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun TOPology BALanced PP ORts The parameter of following command has been changed SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice A 09 4x System Verification is added A 09 31 SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer M...

Page 665: ...Rection RECeiver Pt OFFset AMPLitude SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ECAL INFormation SCPI SERVice ADjust VIRTual BRIDge STATe SCPI SERVice ADjust SENse Ch SWEep RF RANGe PORT Pt A UTO SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate USB PMETer CATalog SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate PSENsor SCPI SERVice LOGGing CLEar Modifications Channel Traces Setup Support for 2ch 8Tr 10001 points Reduce waiting time for ECal calibration Ove...

Page 666: ...RRection EXTension PORT Pt WAVeguide TIME Overload Detection Power Trip Function Modifications Equation Editor MWA Context Sensitive Save Recall Compatibility of Files Saving Recalling Recall Procedure Calibration Kit Error Message Protecting ENA System Default Condition Default Condition Finder Preset RST Save Recall SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ECAL ISOLation STATe A 08 1x New Feature Extend...

Page 667: ...d EQUation STATE SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected EQUation TEXT SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected EQUation VALid LXI Trigger Scope Trigger Scope Active Only Trigger SCPI TRIGger SCOPe Faster Recall User Variable SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum SIZE SCPI PROGram VARiable DOUBle Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable LONG Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable STRing Vnum DATA Revised Fi...

Page 668: ...lled External Test Set Mode Windows Open environment XGA 10 4 inch LCD More USB ports Front 2 Rear 4 Online Help Internal DC Bias Tee Option 235 435 285 and 485 Extended the lowest frequency to 9 KHz Option 230 430 280 and 480 100 kHz Option 235 435 285 and 485 Touch Panel LCD is equipped as a standard Deleted Functions from E5070B E5071B Floppy Disk Drive Fast Stepped Fast Swept mode Power Range ...

Page 669: ... product information CN96x CN95x CN94x CN93x CN925 CN922 CN80x Other topics about Revision History CN96x No functionally update CN95x No functionally update CN94x No functionally update CN93x No functionally update CN925 Initial registration procedure has been changed Factory recovery procedure has been changed User recovery capability has been deleted CN922 cXL support cXL software is pre install...

Page 670: ...Hz frequency model are added Option 260 265 460 465 2D5 4D5 and its related information are added Corrected system performance with 3 5 mm device connectors 85052D calibration kit Figures of Transmission uncertainty has been corrected Corrected system performance with 3 5 mm device connectors N4691B electronic calibration ECal module Figures of Transmission uncertainty has been corrected February ...

Page 671: ...E5071C 898 At 300 kHz to 1MHz Directivity and Source Match are changed from 25 dB to 20 dB ...

Page 672: ...eplace Agilent 8753ES with the Agilent E5071C is described below Agilent provides some tools such as a Code Conversion Assistant Editor for the command translation for programming Refer to http www agilent com find ena for more information Important Functional Differences Code Migration Tools Comparing Functions ...

Page 673: ...53ES with E5071C Channel and Trace Concepts In the 8753ES channels 1 and 2 are independent from each other and have auxiliary channels channels 3 and 4 respectively Channels 3 and 4 can be displayed as additions to channels 1 and 2 respectively This allows up to four channels to be displayed for up to four traces on the screen simultaneously Channels 1 and 3 and channels 2 and 4 are always coupled...

Page 674: ...3ES comes optionally with a 75 ohm test set Option 075 while the E5071C does not For more about the measurement frequency ranges of the 8753ES and E5071C see the following table Measurement Frequency Ranges Function 8753ES E5071C Measurement frequency range 30 kHz to 3 GHz std 30 kHz to 6 GHz Option 006 See Test Port and Frequency Options For more about the output power levels and output power ran...

Page 675: ...nds are needed to create a table using GPIB SCPI commands on the 8753ES only one command does the same function on the E5071C The 8753ES supports an IF bandwidth up to 6 kHz but the E5071C supports an IF bandwidth up to 500 kHz enabling faster sweep operations than with the 8753ES While the 8753ES supports automatically selecting the output power range the E5071C supports only manual selection The...

Page 676: ...ven standards can be defined for each calibration class In contrast the E5071C allows 20 types of user defined calibration kits to be saved in the internal memory which include the nine calibration kits registered beforehand When setting up calibration classes OPEN SHORT and LOAD can be set up on each port and THRU between ports Eight standards are allowed for each calibration class ECal Both the ...

Page 677: ...nd sweep each channel you need to set each channel to Hold state and make trigger events to each channel On the E5071C the trigger system involves states of the entire system and those of each of the channels Since a trigger event is common to all channels three system wide states exist Hold Waiting for Trigger and Measurement On the other hand two states exist for each channel Idle and Startup Fo...

Page 678: ...Product Information 905 E5071C Data Flow ...

Page 679: ...d E5071C are listed below Reading Writing Data Function 8753ES E5071C Data transfer format Intra device binary IEEE 32 bit floating point IEEE 64 bit floating point ASCII PC DOS 32 bit floating point IEEE 64 bit floating point ASCII Reading Writing data Raw data array Formatted data ...

Page 680: ...efficient array after interpolation Calibration coefficient data array after interpolation Reading data Pre raw data in Take4 mode Calibration coefficient array after interpolation Power meter calibration coefficient array after interpolation Entry area display All lists in list format Screen Display and Marker Functions The 8753ES allows up to four channels to be displayed on the screen Up to fiv...

Page 681: ...d with a memory trace For this reason math operations between the data trace and memory trace are supported Data Memory and Data Memory On the E5071C however Data Memory and Data Memory are supported along with the division and subtraction operations described above The trace displays supported on the 8753ES are Data trace only Memory trace only Both memory trace and data trace and Data math only ...

Page 682: ...ogram Although the 8753ES supports the test sequence program the E5071C provides an environment for developing VBA programs for automatic measurement Outputting to a Printer Plotter The 8753ES enables you to establish the print area covering an entire sheet or just a 1 4 sheet and to define traces the reference line and colors of warning messages In contrast the E5071C supports only full sheet out...

Page 683: ...rk analyzer This application works on background of the ENA translating incoming 8753 commands via GPIB in real time The ENA8753cXL is designed to work with certain legacy Agilent Network Analyzer products Not all products may be supported nor can all legacy commands be supported ALWAYS REFER TO THE INFORMATION PROVIDED IN THE HELP FILE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THE LIST OF SUPPORTED CO...

Page 684: ...Product Information 911 ...

Page 685: ...E5071C 912 Comparing Functions Anaysis 8753ES E5071C Fixture simulator Not available Available ...

Page 686: ...85031B 3 5 mm 85033C D E N type 50 ohm 85032B E F N type 75 ohm 85036B E 2 4 mm 85056A D TRL 3 5 mm 85052C User defined calibration kit 7 mm 85031B 85050C D 3 5 mm 85033D E 85052D N type 50 ohm 85032B F N type 75 ohm 85036B E TRL 3 5 mm 85052C Up to 11 user defined calibration kits can be registered ...

Page 687: ...ation Receiver calibration Power meter calibration Response calibration OPEN SHO RT THRU Response and isolation calibration The response calibration includes isolation measureme nt as an option Enhanced response calibration Full 1 port calibration Full 2 port calibration TRL LRM Calibration Power calibration Receiver calibration Vector Mixer calibration Scalar Mixer calibration Partial overwrite c...

Page 688: ...Product Information 915 calibration Adapter Removal In sertion calibration ...

Page 689: ...port calibration Opts 430 435 48 0 485 TRL LRM Calibration Power calibration Receiver calibration Vector Mixer calibration Scalar Mixer calibration Partial overwirte calibration Simplified calibration Simplified TRL calibration Unknown thru calibration Adapter Removal In sertion calibration ...

Page 690: ...ailable Available Receiver calibration Available Available Adapter removal Available Not available Velocity factor Definable Definable Characteris tic impedance of the measurem ent system Definable Definable with fixture simulator Port extension Definable for ports 1 and 2 and inputs A and B Definable for each port per channel Selection between chop sweep and alternate sweep Can be changed over Ch...

Page 691: ...11B SHORT S11C LOAD S22A OPEN S22B SHORT S22C LOAD Forward Transmissio n Forward Match Reverse Transmissio n Reverse Match Response Response Isolation TRL Thru TRL Reflect TRL Line Match OPEN SHORT LOAD THRU OPEN SHORT and LOAD are set for each port THRU is set between ports TRL Thru TRL Reflect TRL Line Match Class indication label Editable Editable ...

Page 692: ...one Standard parameters Common to standard s Offset delay Offset loss Offset characterist ic impedance Frequency range Offset type coaxial waveguide Same Unique to OPEN C0 C1 C2 C3 Same Unique to SHORT Not available L0 L1 L2 L3 Unique to LOAD Type of standard fixed sliding offset Not available the type of standard is treated as fixed load Unique to THRU Not available Unknown Thru Arbitrary Impedan...

Page 693: ...ll 2 port calibration Enhanced response calibration Response thru calibration Full 1 port calibration Full 2 port calibration Full 3 port calibration Opts 430 435 48 0 485 Full 4 port calibration Opts 430 435 48 0 485 Omission of isolation Allowed Allowed Manual THRU measurem ent Allowed Allowed Reading the frequency array Allowed Not allowed Reading the module Allowed Not allowed ...

Page 694: ...Product Information 921 information ...

Page 695: ...he GPIB command Create a table by using two or more commands Create a table by using one command Reading the results Per channel Per segment Pass fail at each point Number of points per segment that failed the maximum minimum Stimulus value at a failed point Pass Fail of the active trace on each channel Number of failed points Stimulus value at a failed point Ripple test Available Available Bandwi...

Page 696: ...s display of memory traces and data traces Data math only Simultaneous display of data math and memory traces Frequency display On Off setting is definable for all channels On off setting is definable channel by channel Graph layout Up to four graphs can be displayed Windows are assigned to each channel up to 36 windows can be displayed Up to 16 graphs can be displayed in each window Math between ...

Page 697: ...xed at 10 Can be set in increments of 2 from 4 to 30 Turning the softkey area On Off Available Available List display Available Not available List display of Instrument State Available Not available Color settings Available Available Screen brightness setting Available Not available Turning the LCD On Off Available Available Turning the update On Off Always updates Available ...

Page 698: ...Product Information 925 Macro 8753ES E5071C Creating macros Uses a test sequence Uses VBA Automatic execution Will execute if AUTO is given as the name of the sequence 6 Only auto loading is possible ...

Page 699: ...able coupling available only between markers on the same channel Marker move mode Continuous discrete definable channel by channel Continuous discrete definable trace by trace Fixed marker One marker definable per channel Not available Marker value display On Off setting for the marker value display definable per channel All marker values for active traces are displayed on each channel Display No ...

Page 700: ...ion type Not definable Setting of Positive Negative transition definable per marker Search tracking On Off setting definable for the active marker Markers other than the active marker are always turned off On Off setting definable for each marker Marker reading set at a parameter Values of the start stop center span CW frequency and reference line in the sweep range Values of the start stop center...

Page 701: ...dependent measurement channels Coupling between channels Channels 3 and 4 are auxiliary channels for channels 1 and 2 and subject to the same sweep conditions etc applicable to channels 1 and 2 Couple Uncoupl e between channels 1 and 2 can be set up Channels are independent of each other Trace A trace for each channel Up to 16 traces Measureme nt parameter S paramete rs A B R S paramete rs Mixed m...

Page 702: ...c e reflectio n and transmiss ion admittanc e reflectio n and transmiss ion 1 S Same Display format Data format log magnitud e linear magnitud e phase group delay Smith chart polar format SWR real imaginary log magnitud e linear magnitud e phase expanded phase positive phase group delay Smith chart polar format SWR ...

Page 703: ...wing frequency range is available depending on the option 9 kHz to 4 5 6 5 8 5 GHz 100 kHz to 4 5 6 5 8 5 GHz 300 kHz to 14 20 GHz Power level 85 to 10 dBm Std 85 to 8 dBm Opts 014 075 55 to 10 dBm Characteristic Impedance 50 ohm Std 75 ohm Opt 075 50 ohm Coupled Unco upled power levels You can define Couple Uncoupl e between Traces are coupled on the same channel ...

Page 704: ... Range setting with 10 dBm resolution is definable from between 15 and 10 dBm down to between 85 and 60 dBm Sweep conditions Number of points except for the list frequency sweep operation 3 11 21 26 51 101 201 401 801 1601 Arbitrary value from 2 to 1601 Can be set only when the Channel trace is set to 1 ch 4 Tr 20001 points Sweep type linear sweep log sweep list sweep power sweep CW time sweep lin...

Page 705: ... per segment Up to 20001 points in total Stepped s wept mode stepped mode and swept mode Selectable only when list frequency sweep is performed stepped mode and swept mode Selectable also when list frequency sweep is not performed Sweep of designate d segments Allowed Not allowed Always sweeps all segments Sweep time Automatic Manual definable from the shortest time to 24 hours Automatic Manual ra...

Page 706: ...999 Smoothing The smoothing aperture can be set from 0 05 to 20 Same Electrical delay Transmission line Compatible with coaxial cables and waveguides Same Value Any value from 0 to 10 seconds Any value from 10 to 10 seconds Phase offset Any value from 360 degree to 360 degree Same Setting sweep conditions for Couple Unc Channels 1 and 3 and channels 2 and 4 are always coupled Channels 1 and 2 can ...

Page 707: ...Trigger mode Continuo us Single Hold Specified number of sweeps Continuo us Single Hold Trigger source Internal External per sweep per point Manual per point Internal External per sweep bus manual per sweep External trigger line Can be set to High or Low Same ...

Page 708: ...ion Not available LAN interface Not available 10 Base T 100 Base TX protocol Not available TCP IP function Not available Telnet SICL LAN GPIB Debug mode Can be turned On Off Not available pass control Available Not available GPIB address setup The addresses of the main body controller external disk LO control power meter printer and plotter can be specified by using the GPIB command and from the f...

Page 709: ...E5071C 936 Parallel port Can be used as a printer or GPIO connector Not available ...

Page 710: ...eet 1 4 of a sheet Entire sheet Color settings Settings definable for the colors of a trace reference line text and warning messages Highlighting No highlighting of all elements Line settings Possible Always a solid line Printer port Parallel port Serial port GPIB USB ...

Page 711: ...atted memory array Memory trace Calibration kit array data Power meter calibration coefficient array before interpolating Calibration coefficient data array after interpolating Corrected data array Corrected memory array Formatted data array Formatted memory array Power meter calibration coefficient array after interpolating Object to be read only Pre raw data in Take4 mode Calibration coefficient...

Page 712: ...n simultaneously save formatted data array for the active trace raw data array corrected data array and LCD images Color settings Test sequence Instrument State You can simultaneously save formatted data array for the active trace and calibration data Segment sweep table Limit line table VBA project File formats Binary form ASCII form Binary form Format for saving the screen display JPEG format Wi...

Page 713: ...r limit test Included in the standard event status register B and validation register Questionable limit status register Questionable limit channel status register Questionable limit extra channel status register Questionable limit channel extra status register Questionable ripple limit status register Questionable ripple limit channel status register Questionable ripple limit extra channel status...

Page 714: ...Product Information 941 limit extra channel status register Questionable bandwidth limit channel extra status register ...

Page 715: ... Available Available Beep sound On Off setting definable for completion of actions warnings and limit test failures On Off setting definable for completion of actions and warnings Measuring instrument mode Can be selected from a standard network analyzer external signal source automatic external signal source manual tuned receiver Always a network analyzer ...

Page 716: ...onsideration Change Date Time Settings User Account and Password On Screen Keyboard Configuring Network Accessing Hard Disk of E5071C from External PC Windows Firewall Disabling Enabling USB Mass Storage Device Connecting External Accessories ...

Page 717: ...ick and easy but if you move the device to a different USB port you will have to wait through the hardware ID and driver search again Certain USB devices such as ECAL modules require you to be logged on with Administrator s privileges the first time you plug them into the ENA This must be done for each serial number Click Next to choose the default settings when installing new USB devices Plug Pla...

Page 718: ...dows 945 By default Windows allows a double click method of launching icons To revert to single clicking see the Windows help Printing Adding a printer should be done as Windows operation See Connecting Printer ...

Page 719: ...following functions To display the current date and time in the instrument status bar at the lower part of the screen To write date and time information when saving internal data or a VBA program The Date Time of E5071C clock can be changed by double clicking the clock on the bottom right of the taskbar Other topics about Using Windows ...

Page 720: ... to press CTRL ALT DELETE before logging on 1 Open User Accounts in Control Panel 2 Click Change the way users log on or off 3 Check out Use the Welcome screen 4 Click Apply Options 5 Log off Windows ENA must be removed from the domain for the procedure to work When shipped ENA is configured as a member of a workgroup If the configuration of ENA is later changed so as to be a member of domain then...

Page 721: ...st be the computer administrator if you make measurements 1 Open User Accounts in Control Panel 2 Click Create a new account 3 Type the new account name then click Next 4 Select Computer Administrator 5 Click Create Account ...

Page 722: ...t displays a virtual keyboard on the screen It allows the users of the E5071C to input characters without the need of a keyboard The E5071C does not requires an external keyboard for its operation Users can input characters using an on screen keyboard in built with the E5071C firmware To open Windows On Screen Keyboard To open On Screen Keyboard click Start All Programs Accessories Accessibility O...

Page 723: ...tion of the E5071C To enable disable the network connection function 1 Use the LAN cable to connect the E5071C to the LAN 2 Press System Misc Setup Network Setup Network Configuration to open Network Connections window 3 Perform either of the following When switching from disable to enable Double click the Local Area Connection icon in the Network Connections window to enable the network connectio...

Page 724: ...s Click select Use the following IP address and then enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway address 6 If the IP address can be obtained automatically if the DHCP server can be used click select Obtain an IP address automatically 7 In Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties click OK 8 In Local Area Connection Properties click OK 9 In Local Area Connection Status click Close 10 Close Network Conne...

Page 725: ... share name name used when accessed from the external PC in the Share Name box and click OK 6 In the USERS D Properties dialog box click the OK button Accessing hard disk of E5071C from external PC This section describes the procedure to connect to the hard disk D drive in the E5071C to which access has been made possible according to the procedure described in Enabling the access form the externa...

Page 726: ...an make connection using the user name agena without the password E5071C Hard Disk Drive The E5071C Hard disk contains several memory partitions The following table explains the different partitions of the E5071C Drive Description CNxxx C The system drive is replaced with the original image when system recovery is executed USER D User can keep their files in this drive This drive is not replaced e...

Page 727: ...owing On recommended This is the setting that you should normally use Off not recommended Turning off Windows Firewall might make your computer and your network if you have one more vulnerable to damage from viruses To open Windows Firewall open Control Panel and then double click Windows Firewall Other topics about Using Windows ...

Page 728: ...e will not work To enable a USB Mass Storage Device 1 Press Save Recall key 2 Press Explorer 3 Double click EnableUsbStorage exe from D Agilent Service 4 Click OK in the SUCCEEDED message window that appears 5 If you do not want any USB mass storage device to ever be enabled at any time delete EnableUsbStorage exe from the E5071C after DisableUsbStorage exe has been completed These two programs wi...

Page 729: ...key 2 Press Explorer 3 Double click ReadOnlyUsbStorage exe from D Agilent Service 4 Click OK in the SUCCEEDED message window that appears 5 The ReadOnlyUsbStorage exe does not allows you to save the file into USB memory from ENA HDD ...

Page 730: ...can be connected to the E5071C using the Mini DIN Keyboard Port provided in the rear panel of the E5071C or through the Universal Serial Bus USB ports provided in the front or rear panel Connecting a Monitor A monitor can be connected to the E5071C using the External Monitor Output Terminal Video located in the rear panel of the E5071C An external monitor needs to be connected to the analyzer and ...

Page 731: ...958 Programming Programming Remote Control Built in VBA Programming TDR Remote Control Option TDR Command Reference TDR Command Reference Option TDR ...

Page 732: ...alyzer Performing Calibration Making Measurement Reading Writing Measurement Data Analyzing Data Limit Test Saving and Recalling Communication with External Devices Status Reporting System Working with Automatic Test System Sample Programs Other topics about Programming ...

Page 733: ...E5071C 960 Overview Overview Types of remote control system GPIB remote control system LAN remote control system USB Remote Control System Sending SCPI command messages LXI ...

Page 734: ...oller For more information refer to GPIB remote control system LAN System to control the E5071C and other devices connected via LAN from the external controller For more information refer to LAN remote control system USB System to control the E5071C and other devices connected via USB from the external controller For more information refer to USB Remote Control System E5071C System to control the ...

Page 735: ...puter sends commands and instructions to the E5071C and receives data sent from the E5071C via GPIB System Configuration Use GPIB cables to connect between the E5071C the external controller computer and peripherals The following figure shows the overview of the system configuration of the GPIB remote control system Configuration of the GPIB remote control system While the E5071C is turned off the...

Page 736: ... The number of connectors connected to an individual device must be 4 or less If you connect 5 or more connectors excessive force is applied to the connector part which may result in failure You can choose the device connection topology from star linear and combined Loop connection is not supported Device selector The device selector is a unique value assigned to each device that is used by the co...

Page 737: ...same system In the description and sample programs in this manual it is assumed that the device selector is set to 717 Setting the GPIB address of E5071C To set the GPIB address for talker listener mode See Setting_talker_listener_GPIB_address_of_E5071C ...

Page 738: ...w The LAN Local Area Network remote control system provides two methods controlling the E5071C using the SICL LAN server and controlling the E5071C using the telnet server System Configuration Use a LAN cable to connect between the E5071C and the external controller computer The following figure shows the overview of the system configuration of the LAN remote control system Configuration of the LA...

Page 739: ...in the Windows environment Preparing the E5071C To communicate with the external controller follow these steps to turn on the SICL LAN server of the E5071C in advance 1 Turn on the SICL LAN server of the E5071C System Misc Setup Network Setup SICL LAN Server ON 2 When the SICL LAN server is turned ON for the first time the windows firewall setting dialog box appears To use the SICL LAN server sele...

Page 740: ...ernal controller in the Windows environment You must install the Agilent I O Libraries on your PC in advance Use Agilent I O Libraries Suite 14 2 or later 1 From your PC s Start menu click Program Agilent I O Libraries Suite Agilent Connection Expert to open the Agilent Connection Expert setting screen 2 In the Agilent Connection Expert setting screen select LAN TCPIP0 in the Instrument I O on thi...

Page 741: ...E5071C 968 ...

Page 742: ...n select LAN if it is not selected and then click OK 4 In the LAN Instrument Properties screen set up the IP address of the E5071C and click OK You can change settings as necessary For details refer to the Agilent I O Libraries Suite documentation ...

Page 743: ...E5071C 970 5 In the Agilent Connection Expert screen check that the E5071C has been added under LAN TCPIP0 in the Instrument I O on this PC frame ...

Page 744: ...Visual Basic in the Windows environment Control using Agilent VEE Agilent VEE allows you to control the E5071C via the I O interface The following example shows how to control the E5071C that is set as follows the address of the SICL LAN server is 17 and the IP address is 146 208 116 90 When using Agilent VEE for PC use Agilent VEE Pro 7 5 for Windows or later ...

Page 745: ...E5071C 972 1 On the Agilent VEE s I O menu click Instrument Manager 2 In Instrument Manager click Add 3 A new windows appears for the selection of Interface Type Select TCPIP and click OK ...

Page 746: ... add TCPIP0 IP Address in the TCIP Address where IP Address is the IP address for E5071C For example if the IP address for E5071C is 146 208 116 90 then the value for TCPIP Address would be TCPIP0 146 208 116 90 Click OK after entering all the parameters 5 The Instrument manager displays the connection with E5071C ...

Page 747: ...E5071C 974 The following figure shows an example of control using the I O interface that has been set in the above procedure ...

Page 748: ... conversational control using telnet user interface program for the TELNET protocol and port 5025 for control from a program To use telnet port 23 and 5025 should be opened through Windows firewall By opening port 23 and 5025 the E5071C can be controlled remotely using telnet It is recommended to close port 23 and 5025 after usage from the security prospective Preparing the E5071C To communicate w...

Page 749: ...E5071C and executed If you enter a command that queries some data the query response is displayed below the line you have entered the command 5 The following figure shows the screen after using the SYST PRES command to reset the SENS 1 36 FREQ STAR command and SENS 1 36 FREQ STOP command commands to set the sweep start value and stop value to 1 GHz and 2 GHz respectively and checking the settings ...

Page 750: ...ailable for the Windows environment WinSock WinSock1 1 and WinSock2 0 created by porting BSD Sockets to Windows and expanding it is available For more information on the control method see a sample program for control using WinSock described in Controlling Using Telnet Server Control using Agilent VEE Agilent VEE allows you to control the E5071C through the connection to the socket of port 5025 us...

Page 751: ...E5071C 978 Example of control using Agilent VEE ...

Page 752: ...mpliance with USBTMC USB488 and USB 2 0 System Configuration The USB remote control system controls instruments that use the name alias There is no such address for GPIB connections Use a USB cable to connect the E5071C to an external controller personal computer The following figure shows an overview of the system configuration for the USB remote control system USB Remote Control System Configura...

Page 753: ... the E5071C in order to control the E5071C from an external controller Simply connect a USB cable to the USB interface port Preparing External Controller In order to establish communication with the E5071C via USB you must set up the I O interface of the external controller in advance The USB can identify devices automatically so once you connect a USB cable to a target device a dialog box will ap...

Page 754: ...ming 981 2 Select Install the software automatically Recommended and then click Next 3 The drivers for E5071B are automatically installed and the completion screen appears Click Finish to complete the process ...

Page 755: ...E5071C 982 2 Registering Alias Just after finishing the setting another screen appears that can be used to change the Alias for the connected E5071C ...

Page 756: ...will start Follow the instruction to implement the processing 3 Changing Alias on Setting Screen The following are steps using the Agilent I O Libraries Suite 14 2 1 From the Start menu of your PC click Programs Agilent IO Libraries Suite Agilent Connection Expert to open the Config setting screen 2 In the Config setting screen select the alias names from USB0 onward in the Instrument I O on this ...

Page 757: ...anual of SICL or VISA For Agilent I O Libraries use Agilent I O Libraries Suite 14 2 or later You may use alias in the programming using SICL VISA The following example shows an OPEN command to control the E5071C to which alias is given as ENA_USBIF SICL id iopen ENA_USBIF VISA viOpen ENA_USBIF For further details of the programming using SICL VISA see the SICL Users Guide or the VISA Users Guide ...

Page 758: ... how to control the E5071C to which alias is given as ENA_USBIF When using Agilent VEE for PC use Agilent VEE Pro 7 for Windows or later version 1 On the Agilent VEE s I O menu click Instrument Manager 2 In Instrument Manager click Add 3 A new windows appears for the selection of Interface Type Select USB and click OK ...

Page 759: ...perties type any name for the Instrument in Name for example ENA_USBIF or E5071C_USB and add USB Address in the USB Address Click OK after entering all the parameters 3 The USB address can be retrieved from Agilent Connection Expert ...

Page 760: ...Programming 987 5 The E5071C successfully appears in the Instrument Manager 1 ...

Page 761: ...that support this standard The commands in this group have an asterisk at the beginning For the commands in this group there is no hierarchical structure Concepts of the command tree The commands at the top of the command tree are called root command or simply root To access lower level commands in the tree you need to specify a specific path like a directory path in the DOS file system After powe...

Page 762: ...user sends to the instrument from the external controller to control the instrument A program message consists of 1 or more commands and their necessary parameters Upper lower case sensitivity Upper lower case insensitive Program message terminator A program message must be terminated with one of the 3 program message terminators new line END or new line END END indicates that EOI on the GPIB inte...

Page 763: ...le message separate each command with a semicolon The following example shows how to send the CLS command and the STAT PRES command in a single message using HTBasic OUTPUT 717 CLS STAT PRES Remote Mode The E5071C does not provide remote mode Therefore even if you send a GPIB command it never enters into remote mode automatically There is no local key to release remote mode If you need to prevent ...

Page 764: ...IEEE 1588 precision time protocol For more information on LXI please visit www lxistandard org Checking LXI Compliance The E5071C having LXI compliance will show a LXI logo at the start up screen of the firmware If this logo does not appears at the start up screen of the firmware it means that the system is not LXI C complaint Files Required for LXI with HDD revision CN70x The HDD revision CN70x d...

Page 765: ...E5071C 992 Setting up Analyzer Setting up Analyzer Selecting the Active Channel Trace Configuring Measurement Conditions Configuring Display Settings Saving and Loading the Settings ...

Page 766: ... PAR 1 16 SEL Only the currently displayed traces can be active traces Therefore you must display the desired traces by using the CALC 1 160 PAR COUN command before making them active If you are using E5071C revision A 9 60 and above you can select a trace by the trace name provided it has been defined earlier To define a trace name use the following command CALC 1 160 PAR 1 16 TNAMe DATA If the t...

Page 767: ...E5071C 994 CALC1 PAR2 SEL CALC1 MARK3 ACT Other topics about Setting up Analyzer ...

Page 768: ...he number of traces appropriately before making them active Selecting Measurement Parameters To select the measurement parameter S parameter for each trace use the following command CALC 1 36 PAR 1 36 DEF When you use the Balance Unbalance Conversion feature you can select the mixed mode S parameter as well For more information refer to Analysis Using the Fixture Simulator Setting Sweep Condition ...

Page 769: ...Q STOP Center value SENS 1 36 FREQ CENT Span value SENS 1 36 FREQ SPAN To set the number of measurement points use the following command SENS 1 36 SWE POIN To set the sweep time use the following commands Type Command Sweep time SENS 1 36 SWE TIME Turning on off auto setting SENS 1 36 SWE TIME AUTO To set the sweep delay time use the following command SENS 1 36 SWE DEL To set the IF bandwidth use ...

Page 770: ...d in a CSV file by issuing the following command MMEM LOAD SEGM Also you can save the contents of the current segment sweep table to a file by issuing the following command MMEM STOR SEGM For more information on how to save and load the segment sweep table refer to Saving and recalling the segment sweep table Configuring power sweep settings To set the sweep range use the following commands Type C...

Page 771: ...t be triggered according to the number of averaging however when the averaging trigger is turned on sweeps for the number of averaging can be executed by a single trigger For details on the averaging trigger refer to Averaging Trigger Function Setting the System Z0 This function is available with the Firmware revision 3 01 or greater To set the system characteristic impedance Z0 use the following ...

Page 772: ...ndow layouts shown in the figure below use the following command DISP SPL Selecting the graph layout Trace Display Mode You can place a number of trace graphs in each window by selecting one of the pre defined graph layouts The number of graphs differs depending on your selected graph layout If the number of graphs is equal to or larger than the number of traces set by the CALC 1 36 PAR COUN comma...

Page 773: ... when you have multiple traces displayed you can maximize the active trace so that it extends throughout the entire window To maximize a trace use the following command DISP WIND 1 36 MAX Window graph layouts and command parameters ...

Page 774: ...P TABL TYPE Showing hiding softkey labels You can show or hide the softkey labels placed alongside the right hand edge of the LCD screen To show or hide the softkey labels use the following command DISP SKEY Configuring Trace Display Settings Selecting which traces to display Each trace has two different representations data and memory traces You can show or hide the data and memory traces indepen...

Page 775: ...ng aperture use the following command CALC 1 36 SMO APER Selecting the data format You can select the following data formats Rectangular display formats Log magnitude format Phase format Group delay format Linear magnitude format SWR format Real format Imaginary format Expanded phase format Positive phase format Smith chart format Polar format To select the measurement parameter data format use th...

Page 776: ...aining three settings are trace specific You can show or hide graticule label the label on the left hand side of the graticule lines by issuing the following command DISP WIND 1 36 LAB Smith chart Polar formats When you are using one of Smith chart Polar formats you can only set the full scale value the outermost circle s value using the following command DISP WIND 1 36 TRAC 1 36 Y PDIV Auto Scale...

Page 777: ... screen use the following command DISP ANN FREQ Showing or hiding the title To show or hide the title use the following command DISP WIND 1 36 TITL To define the title string that appears in the title display area use the following command DISP WIND 1 36 TITL DATA Configuring date time display To show or hide the current date and time on the right hand side of the instrument status bar use the fol...

Page 778: ...display color for each item To set the display colors use the following commands Data trace DISP COL 1 2 TRAC 1 36 DATA Memory trace DISP COL 1 2 TRAC 1 36 MEM Graph DISP COL 1 2 GRAT 1 2 Limit test DISP COL 1 2 LIM 1 2 Background DISP COL 1 2 BACK Resetting display colors to factory state You can reset the display colors in normal display and inverted display to the preset factory state To reset ...

Page 779: ...have saved the measurement condition and screen display settings to a file you can later load them whenever necessary therefore you can quickly modify the settings loaded from a file to create new settings without having to issue many commands To save the current settings to a file use the following command MMEM STOR To load the settings from a file use the following command MMEM LOAD Other topics...

Page 780: ...Programming 1007 Performing Calibration Performing Calibration Calibration Power Calibration Receiver Calibration Scalar Mixer Calibration Partial overwrite ...

Page 781: ...ibration kit use the following command SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT Selecting a Calibration Type The calibration coefficients are calculated based on the selected calibration type Therefore before you can calculate the calibration coefficients you must select the appropriate calibration type by using one of the following commands Calibration type Command Response OPEN SENS 1 160 CORR COLL METH OPEN S...

Page 782: ...tting the trigger source for calibration To set the trigger source for calibration use the following command By setting the trigger source for calibration to System setting the trigger source for measurement to External and turning on the point trigger function it becomes possible to use calibration for each measurement point using the external trigger SENS 1 160 CORR TRIG FREE The trigger source ...

Page 783: ...ted before the preceding command completes itself As shown in the table below the data required to calculate the calibration coefficients differ depending on the selected calibration type Calibration type Selected ports are enclosed in parentheses Data OPEN SHOR T LOAD THRU Isolatio n Respons e OPEN a a Not require d a Not require d Not required SHOR T a Not require d a a Not require d Not require...

Page 784: ... 2 1 2 2 1 1 4 4 1 2 4 4 2 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 3 1 1 4 4 1 3 4 4 3 1 3 3 1 1 4 4 1 3 4 4 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 3 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 4 3 2 3 3 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 4 3 Full 4 Port 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 4 1 2 3 3 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 4 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 4 1 2 3 3 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 4 3 Simplified Full 4 Port 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 785: ...items according to your selected calibration type Calculating the calibration coefficients clears all calibration data regardless of whether they are used for the calculation The calibration type selection is also cleared which results in a state where no calibration type is selected Simplified full 3 4 port calibration This function is available with Firmware revision 3 50 or greater Note that yo...

Page 786: ...tion data and when measuring actual data Set the power level of the stimulus signal sufficiently small so that compression does not occur Narrow the IF bandwidth Increase the averaging factor Use a cable that has robust amplitude phase characteristics against bending Use high precision connectors Simplified 3 4 port TRL calibration This function is available with Firmware revision A 06 50 or great...

Page 787: ...RR COLL ECAL SOLT1 Full 2 Port Calibration SENS 1 160 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT2 Full 3 Port Calibration SENS 1 160 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT3 Full 4 Port Calibration SENS 1 160 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT4 Enhanced Response Calibration SENS 1 160 CORR COLL ECAL ERES Response Calibration THRU SENS 1 160 CORR COLL ECAL THRU Simply issuing one of the above commands completes all of the tasks necessary for error correct...

Page 788: ...pplied Calibration Type When you turn on error correction you can check the calibration type actually applied to each trace To check the calibration type use the following command SENS 1 160 CORR TYPE 1 160 The above command reads out the same parameter SOLT3 for both the full 3 port and simplified full 3 port calibrations and thus they cannot be discriminated For the same reason the following cal...

Page 789: ... C2 C3 SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 C3 L0 SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 L0 L1 SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 L1 L2 SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 L2 L3 SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 L3 Offset Delay SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 DEL Offset Loss SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 LOSS Offset Z0 SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT STAN 1 30 Z0 Arbitrary Impedance SENS 1 160 ...

Page 790: ... You need to set the items identified by marks in the table above Saving Recalling the Definition File To save the definition of the selected calibration kit to a file use the following command MMEM STOR CKIT 1 20 To recall the definition of the calibration kit from a file and set use the following command MMEM LOAD CKIT 1 20 Defining a Subclass of the Standard To set the standard type that varies...

Page 791: ... each port use the following command SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT ORD LOAD To select the standard to be applied to the THRU measurement between each pair of ports use the following command SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT ORD THRU To select the standard to be applied to the THRU measurement for the TRL calibration between each pair of ports use the following command SENS 1 160 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLT To sel...

Page 792: ...refer to Saving and recalling instrument status Reading Writing Calibration Coefficient Alone The calibration coefficient alone can be read from and written to the E5071C by using the following command SENS 1 160 CORR COEF To write a positive calibration coefficient use one of the following commands to declare the calibration type SENS 1 160 CORR COEF METH ERES SENS 1 160 CORR COEF METH OPEN SENS ...

Page 793: ...m does not exist Procedures for Writing Calibration Coefficient You must follow the steps below to write the calibration coefficient 1 Declare the calibration type to write Execute SENS 1 160 CORR COEF METH xxxx command 2 Write any calibration coefficient Execute SENS 1 160 CORR COEF command as needed for the written calibration coefficients 3 Validate the calibration coefficients Execute SENS 1 1...

Page 794: ...cuted with SENS 1 160 CORR OFFS COLL OPEN command etc SENS 1 160 CORR OFFS COLL CLE These clear functions make the temporarily settings during the calibration such as trace number and measurement parameters recover to the original state Clearing Calibration Coefficients When the frequency offset function has been disabled You can use the following command to clear the calibration coefficients used...

Page 795: ...ing command to select the type of GPIB or USB enabled power meter SYST COMM PSENsor Setting GPIB Address of Power Meter Use the following command to set the GPIB address of the power meter to the E5071C SYST COMM GPIB PMET ADDR Setting Power Sensor Calibration Factor Table Before performing power calibration set the reference calibration factor the calibration factor at 50 MHz and the calibration ...

Page 796: ...an save the contents of the current power sensor calibration factor table to a file by issuing the following commands Channel A MMEM STOR ASCF Channel B MMEM STOR BSCF For more information on saving recalling the power sensor calibration factor table refer to Saving recalling Power Sensor Calibration Factor Table Loss Compensation You can perform loss compensation by setting in advance the power l...

Page 797: ...r To set the number of power calibration data measurements at one measurement point averaging factor use the following command SOUR 1 36 POW PORT 1 4 CORR COLL AVER To set a tolerance for power calibration use the following command SOUR 1 36 POW PORT 1 4 CORR COLL NTOL When a tolerance for power calibration is set if the measured value does not fall within the tolerance even after measurement is p...

Page 798: ...rned on Reading writing power calibration data array The power calibration data array contains data used to perform error correction for the power level at each measurement point values obtained by subtracting the value actually measured with the power meter from the set power level value when measuring power calibration data at each measurement point The number of power calibration data arrays th...

Page 799: ...ng the same port to both the receiver port and source port will cause an error SENS 1 160 CORR REC 1 4 COLL ACQ From Firmware rev 9 2 you can calibrate the receiver and transmitter port independently Use the following command to calibrate the receiver port SENS 1 160 CORR REC 1 4 COLL RCH ACQ Use the following command to calibrate the transmitter port SENS 1 160 CORR REC 1 4 COLL TCH ACQ Once the ...

Page 800: ...iciently covers the frequencies of both ports or implement it twice before and after the receiver calibration Turning ON OFF Receiver Error Correction To turn on or off the receiver error correction use the following command SENS 1 36 CORR REC 1 4 Once the measurement of receiver calibration data is completed with the SENS 1 36 CORR REC 1 4 COLL ACQ command receiver error correction is automatical...

Page 801: ...alar mixer calibration data SENS 1 36 OFFS To use scalar mixer calibration the frequency offset function must be enabled Selecting Calibration Port and Type You can use the following commands to set the port on which a measurement of scalar mixer calibration data is implemented and the type of calibration SENS 1 36 CORR OFFS COLL METH SMIX2 SENS 1 36 CORR OFFS COLL METH SOLT1 SMIX2 will set a scal...

Page 802: ...ssary measurement is not completed an error will occur Once the calculation of calibration coefficients is completed the measurement values are cleared despite whether they were used and error correction is turned on automatically Turning ON OFF scalar mixer error correction To turn on or off scalar mixer error correction use the following command This command is commonly used for the normal calib...

Page 803: ...libration data calculating the calibration coefficients and running the error correction feature To implement scalar mixer calibration you must measure the power in advance For 1 port calibration you do not need to do this Once ECal has started you cannot interrupt the operation Any command received after ECal has started will not be executed until ECal is completed In other words even if you issu...

Page 804: ...urements for re calculation are performed The isolation calibration coefficient Ex cannot be returned to the initial value 0 once it is calculated If calculation of the calibration coefficients is attempted without the measurements required to execute the partial overwrite an error message 20 Additional Standard Needed is displayed Executing calculation of calibration coefficients using partial ov...

Page 805: ...5071C 1032 Making Measurement Making Measurement Trigger System Starting a Measurement Cycle triggering the instrument Waiting for the End of Measurement Point Trigger Function Averaging Trigger Function ...

Page 806: ...m is responsible for such tasks as detecting the start of a measurement cycle triggering and enabling disabling measurement on each channel As shown the following figure the trigger system has two types of states system wide and channel wide The system wide state can be Hold Waiting for Trigger or Measurement while the channel wide state can be Idle or Initiate Trigger system ...

Page 807: ...g commands has been executed arrow e in the above figure Also turning on the power to the instrument puts the trigger system into Hold state When the power is turned on however continuous initiation mode is on for channel 1 and the trigger source is set to Internal accordingly the trigger system immediately switches to Waiting for Trigger state and subsequently repeats transitions between Measurem...

Page 808: ...asurement state arrow b in the above figure TRIG TRIG SING As shown in the table below the instrument is triggered differently depending on which trigger source is specified To specify the trigger source use the TRIG SOUR command Trigger Source How instrument is triggered Internal trigger The instrument is automatically triggered within itself External trigger The instrument is triggered when a tr...

Page 809: ...If continuous initiation mode is on for one of the channels The trigger system switches to Waiting for Trigger state arrow d in the above figure Channel wide States and Transitions Idle State A channel switches to Initiate state when one of the following commands has been executed arrow f in the above figure INIT 1 36 INIT 1 36 CONT ON specified Initiate State A channel in this state is measured j...

Page 810: ... Internal trigger Starting Measurement on Demand 1 Use the INIT 1 36 CONT command to turn on continuous initiation mode for the channels you want to measure and turn the mode off for any other channel 2 Issue the TRIG SOUR command to set the trigger source to Bus Trigger 3 Trigger the instrument whenever you want to perform measurement An external controller can trigger the instrument by using one...

Page 811: ...equest is useful when creating a program that uses the information reported by this register to detect the end of measurement To detect the end of measurement via an SRQ use one of the following commands SRE STAT OPER ENAB STAT OPER PTR STAT OPER NTR Follow these steps to utilize an SRQ 1 Configure the E5071C so that it generates an SRQ when the operation status condition register s bit 4 a bit th...

Page 812: ...le Program See the Waiting for Trigger OPC Using Wait Time Before creating your program actually measure the time between the start and end of the measurement cycle Then code your program so that the controller waits for the actually measured time by using the appropriate command for example the WAIT command for HTBasic This is a straightforward method but care must be taken an incorrect wait time...

Page 813: ...er source is an external trigger and the point trigger function is on the low latency external trigger function is available The low latency external trigger function is used to set the external trigger delay time each time a trigger for a measurement point is given The setting of the low latency external trigger function is valid for all channels Setting the low latency external trigger To toggle...

Page 814: ...ng of the averaging trigger function is valid for all channels Note that you can set the sweep averaging function for each channel Toggling Mode To toggle ON OFF the averaging trigger function use the following command TRIG AVER When the point trigger function is on its setting has priority and the setting of the averaging trigger is ignored More specifically the required number of triggers is num...

Page 815: ...E5071C 1042 Reading Writing Measurement Data Reading Writing Measurement Data Data Transfer Format Internal Data Processing Retrieving Measurement Results Entering Data into a Trace ...

Page 816: ...u transfer data without using any of the following commands CALC 1 160 BLIM REP CALC 1 160 DATA FDAT CALC 1 160 DATA FMEM CALC 1 160 DATA SDAT CALC 1 160 DATA SMEM CALC 1 160 FUNC DATA CALC 1 160 LIM DATA CALC 1 160 LIM REP CALC 1 160 LIM REP ALL CALC 1 160 RLIM DATA CALC 1 160 RLIM REP SENS 1 160 CORR COEF SENS 1 160 FREQ DATA SENS 1 160 SEGM DATA SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL TABL ASEN DATA SOUR POW P...

Page 817: ... specification Numeric data strings vary in length Keep this in mind when you extract some data from retrieved numeric data strings in your program Integer Format The figure below shows this format Numbers are expressed as integers For example 201 is expressed as 201 or 201 Integer format Floating Point Number Format The figure below shows this format Numbers are expressed with floating points For...

Page 818: ...ransfer format This data transfer format uses a header that consists of a sharp character a number of 6 which indicates the byte size of the number of bytes transferred part and the number of bytes transferred part in this order The header is followed by the binary data each number consists of 8 bytes and the total is the byte size indicated by number of bytes transferred and the message terminato...

Page 819: ...of a sharp character a number of 6 which indicates the byte size of the number of bytes transferred part and the number of bytes transferred part in this order The header is followed by the binary data each number consists of 4 bytes and the total is the byte size indicated by number of bytes transferred and the message terminator new line END The binary data is expressed in the IEEE 754 32 bit fl...

Page 820: ...e MSB Most Significant Bit that is the leftmost byte in 64 bit floating point format and 32 bit floating point data SWAPped Transfer begins with the byte that contains the LSB Least Significant Bit that is the rightmost byte in 64 bit floating point format and 32 bit floating point data To set the byte order use the following command FORM BORD Executing the SYST PRES or RST does not affect the cur...

Page 821: ...ys Raw data array contains uncorrected data The data is obtained by performing IF range correction ratio calculation port characteristics correction and sweep averaging This data will be used in error correction To read one of the raw data arrays use the following command SENS 1 160 DATA RAWD Calibration Coefficient Data Arrays A calibration coefficient data array contains the calibration coeffici...

Page 822: ... the following command CALC 1 160 DATA SDAT Corrected data arrays S Parameter You can get the S Parameter measurement result which the analyzer has For example when you measure 2 full ports calibration the analyzer measures not only the S Parameter you selected but also four S Parameters at the measurement In this case you can get the other S Parameter To read one of the corrected S Parameter data...

Page 823: ...hart Log log magnitude Phase Smith chart Re Im Real part of a complex number Imaginary part of a complex number Smith chart R jX Resistance Reactance Smith chart G jB Conductance Susceptance Polar Lin Liner magnitude Phase Polar Log log magnitude Phase Polar Re Im Real part of a complex number Imaginary part of a complex number Liner magnitude Liner magnitude Always 0 SWR SWR Always 0 Real number ...

Page 824: ...on and smoothing on a particular corrected memory array To read write one of the formatted memory arrays use the following command CALC 1 160 DATA FMEM Stimulus data arrays A stimulus data array contains the stimulus values for all measurement points The instrument retains 160 stimulus data arrays at maximum each of which is associated with one of the 160 channels Stimulus data arrays are read onl...

Page 825: ...tively markers allow you to retrieve measurement results at your specified points For information on how to retrieve marker values refer to Retrieving measurement results at marker positions Retrieving Internal Data Arrays You can chose between the ASCII and binary data transfer formats when you retrieve internal data arrays For more information please refer to Data Transfer Format Sample Program ...

Page 826: ...how sample programs that demonstrate how to write data into formatted data arrays The sample program in Using the ASCII Transfer Format to Write Formatted Data Arrays write_a htb uses the ASCII transfer format while the sample in Using the Binary Transfer Format to Write Formatted Data Arrays write_b htb uses the binary transfer format You can find the source files of these programs named write_a ...

Page 827: ...ing Measurement Results at Specified Points Searching for Positions That Match Specified Criteria Bandwidth Search Notch Search Statistical Analysis Analysis Using the Fixture Simulator Analysis in Time Domain time domain function Analyzing impedance ...

Page 828: ...n On or Off Reference Marker mode Turning ON OFF Reference Marker Mode Turning on Reference Marker mode provides relative marker values with respect to the reference marker by subtracting the value at the reference marker from the value at a particular marker To turn On or Off Reference Marker mode use the following command CALC 1 36 MARK REF Setting and Retrieving Stimulus Value at Marker Positio...

Page 829: ...RK 1 10 Y When Reference Marker mode is on the response value at a regular marker is a relative value obtained by subtracting the response value at the reference marker from the actual response value at that particular marker ...

Page 830: ...range for the marker search range by using the following command CALC 1 36 MARK FUNC DOM When you opt to use a user defined range use the following commands to set the range Description Command Start value lower limit value CALC 1 36 MARK FUNC DOM STAR Stop value upper limit value CALC 1 36 MARK FUNC DOM STOP You can also select whether to specify the marker search range independently for each tra...

Page 831: ...ue CALC 1 36 MARK 1 10 FUNC PEXC Polarity CALC 1 36 MARK 1 10 FUNC PPOL Defining a Target You can define a target by specifying the target value response value and transitional direction positive or negative value change To define a target use the following commands Target value CALC 1 36 MARK 1 10 FUNC TARG Transitional direction CALC 1 36 MARK 1 10 FUNC TTR Performing Marker Search To perform Ma...

Page 832: ...t the range Start value lower limit value CALC 1 36 FUNC DOM STAR Stop value upper limit value CALC 1 36 FUNC DOM STOP You can also select whether to specify the marker search analysis range independently for each trace by using the following command CALC 1 36 FUNC DOM COUP Selecting the Search Analysis Type The analysis commands allows you to choose from the following five search types Maximum va...

Page 833: ...e To define a target use the following commands Target value CALC 1 36 FUNC TARG Transitional direction CALC 1 36 FUNC TTR Performing Search Analysis To perform search analysis use the following command CALC 1 36 FUNC EXEC Retrieving Search Analysis Results To retrieve search analysis results use the following command CALC 1 36 FUNC DATA The number of data items contained in search analysis result...

Page 834: ...esponse value is different by the amount defined as the bandwidth definition value from the response value at the marker position and identifies that point as the cutoff point To set the bandwidth definition value use the following command CALC 1 36 MARK 1 10 BWID THR Retrieving Bandwidth Search Results Once you have moved the marker to the appropriate position using Marker Search or some other fe...

Page 835: ...ency and low is the left hand cutoff point frequency For more information on notch search see Determining the bandwidth of a trace Notch Search Setting the notch definition value The notch search function finds a point whose response value is different by the amount defined as the notch definition value than the response value at the marker position and identifies that point as the cutoff point To...

Page 836: ...Programming 1063 It is able to retrieve the notch search result regardless of whether the marker display and the notch search result display is on off ...

Page 837: ...to control whether to display the results of statistical analysis on the LCD CALC 1 36 MST You can retrieve the results of statistical analysis even after you have turned off the display showing these results Alternatively you can use the analysis commands to analyze the trace statistics When you use the analysis commands you can analyze the trace data in a specific range as well as the trace data...

Page 838: ...ort 4 port models Differential Matching Circuit Embedding only 3 port 4 port models Differential Port Impedance Conversion only 3 port 4 port models Before you can use any of the features listed above you must turn on the desired feature individually and issue the following command to turn on the Fixture Simulator CALC 1 36 FSIM STAT Matching Circuit Embedding The Matching Circuit feature simulate...

Page 839: ...dance of 50 ohm to the characteristics of a different port impedance On Off To turn on or off Port Impedance Conversion use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM SEND ZCON STAT You can only turn on or off Port Impedance Conversion for all of the ports not for each port individually However any port with ZO set to 50 ohm behaves as if this feature were permanently off Setting the Z0 Value To set the...

Page 840: ...s the criteria for Network De embedding use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM SEND DEEM PORT 1 4 USER FIL 4 Port Network Embedding De embedding The 4 port Network Embedding De embedding feature is provided to embed or de embed a network defined in a 4 port touchstone file between the calibration surface and the DUT On Off To turn on or off the 4 port network embedding de embedding feature use t...

Page 841: ...select a network processing type use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM EMB NETW 1 2 TYPE Specifying File To select a file that defines the criteria for network embedding de embedding use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM EMB NETW 1 2 FIL Balance Unbalance Conversion The Balance Unbalance Conversion feature converts the measurement results obtained in an unbalanced state to the characteristic...

Page 842: ...t a balance device type use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL DEV Balance device type To assign the ports ports a through d in Balance_device_type use the command that matches your selected device type as identified in the following table Device Type Command Unbalance balance SBALanced CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL TOP SBAL Balance balance BBALanced CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL TOP BBAL Unbalance unbalance bala...

Page 843: ...onversion On Off To turn on or off Differential Matching Circuit Embedding use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL DMC STAT You can only turn on or off Differential Matching Circuit Embedding for all of the ports not for each balance port individually However any balance port whose circuit type is set to None behaves as if this feature were permanently off Configuring the Matching Circuit Set...

Page 844: ...e On Off To turn on or off Differential Port Impedance Conversion use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL DZC STAT You can only turn on or off Differential Port Impedance Conversion for all of the balance ports not for each port individually Setting the Z0 Value To set the target differential port impedance use the following command CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL DZC BPOR 1 2 Z0 CALC 1 36 FSIM BAL DZC BP...

Page 845: ...he frequency domain to data in the time domain and analyze it On Off To turn on or off the transformation function use the following command CALC 1 36 TRAN TIME STAT Selecting Transformation Type To select the transformation type band pass low pass use the following command CALC 1 36 TRAN TIME To select the stimulus type impulse step when the transformation type is low pass use the following comma...

Page 846: ...w type by setting β as follows Maximum Normal Minimum Value of β 13 6 0 Setting Display Range To set the display range after time domain transformation use the following commands Description Command Start value CALC 1 36 TRAN TIME STAR Stop value CALC 1 36 TRAN TIME STOP Center value CALC 1 36 TRAN TIME CENT Span value CALC 1 36 TRAN TIME SPAN Deleting unnecessary measurement data in the time doma...

Page 847: ...1 36 FILT TIME SHAP Setting Gate Range To set the gate range use the following commands Description Command Start value CALC 1 36 FILT TIME STAR Stop value CALC 1 36 FILT TIME STOP Center value CALC 1 36 FILT TIME CENT Span value CALC 1 36 FILT TIME SPAN Sample Program See the Time Domain ...

Page 848: ...Equivalent impedance in transmission measurement Equivalent admittance in reflection measurement Equivalent admittance in transmission measurement Inverse of S parameter 1 S To turn On Off the parameter conversion function use the following command CALC 1 36 CONV To select the parameter to which you want to convert the measurement result use the following command CALC 1 36 CONV FUNC Other topics a...

Page 849: ...E5071C 1076 Limit Test Limit Test Performing a Limit Test Obtaining Test Results ...

Page 850: ...ine all of the segment conditions all limit lines in the active table trace at once CALC 1 36 LIM DATA Alternatively you can configure limit lines based on the data contained in a CSV file by issuing the following command MMEM LOAD LIM Also you can save the contents of the current limit table to a file by issuing the following command MMEM STOR LIM Showing Hiding Limit Lines To turn ON or OFF limi...

Page 851: ...surement points CALC 1 36 LIM REP POIN Using the status register You cannot use the status register to obtain the test results at each measurement point Test Results for each Trace Using commands that retrieve test results You can retrieve the test result for each trace i e the trace wide result that combines the results for all measurement points in a particular trace by issuing the following com...

Page 852: ...T QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 COND Event register STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 Questionable limit channel 1 16 extra status register Condition register STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 ECH COND Event register STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 ECH Although up to 36 channel is available on E5071C the registers for limit test and Ripple Bandwidth limit tests are for up to 16 channel Test Results for each Channel Using commands that ...

Page 853: ...e condition register is set to 1 If the corresponding bit of the positive transition filter is set to 1 preset value every bit of the event register is set to 1 when the corresponding bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 To retrieve the registers use the following commands Questionable limit status register Condition register STAT QUES LIM COND Event register STAT QUES LIM Questionabl...

Page 854: ...that allows you to directly retrieve the overall test results that combine the test results for all channels Using the status register The condition register and event register under the questionable status event register each provides bit 10 from which you can obtain the overall test result 0 Pass 1 Fail ...

Page 855: ...annels is fail If the positive transition filter s bit 10 is set to 1 preset value the event register s bit 10 is set to 1 when the condition register s bit 10 changes from 0 to 1 To retrieve the condition register and event register under the questionable status event register use the following commands Condition register STAT QUES COND Event register STAT QUES Obtaining overall test results usin...

Page 856: ...Programming 1083 ...

Page 857: ...E5071C 1084 Saving and Recalling Saving and Recalling Saving and Recalling File Managing Files ...

Page 858: ... the user area of hard disk Also when specifying a file name with directory use slash or backslash as a delimiter Saving and Recalling Instrument Status You can save the instrument state using one of the following 2 methods Saving the entire instrument state into a file Saving the state for each channel into registers A to D volatile memory Selecting content to be saved When saving the instrument ...

Page 859: ...h channel into a register For the active channel when you want to save the instrument state specific to that channel into only one of the registers A to D use the following command MMEM STOR CHAN Recalling an instrument state saved in a register can reproduce it as the state of the active channel To recall a register use the following command MMEM LOAD CHAN It is possible to recall a file from a d...

Page 860: ...t use the following command MMEM STOR SNP Only trace data of frequency sweep can be saved in touchstone format files Trace data of frequency offset measurement and power sweep measurement cannot be saved Saving Images Images displayed on the LCD screen can be saved to a file in the bitmap bmp or portable network graphics png format To save the screen image to a file use the following command MMEM ...

Page 861: ...AD LIM It is possible to recall a file from a different channel or trace where it was saved Note that recalling operation is not guaranteed for the file that might have been modified with editor Saving Recalling Power Sensor Calibration Factor Table The power sensor calibration table can be saved in the file with CSV Comma Separated Value format To save the power sensor calibration factor table th...

Page 862: ...n is not guaranteed for the file that might have been modified with editor Saving Loading Importing a VBA Program Saving Only the VBA project file can be saved using command To save the VBA project that is opened on the VBA editor on the file use the following command MMEM STOR PROG Loading importing To load the VBA project to the VBA editor or to import the module form file use the following comm...

Page 863: ...r from the external controller to the E5071C can be possible by reading data from a file on the controller and then writing them to the file on the E5071C MMEM TRAN Also file transfer from the E5071C to the external controller can be possible by reading data from a file on the E5071C using the commands as query and then writing them to the file on the controller Retrieving data from storage To ret...

Page 864: ... External Devices using I O Port Communication with External Devices Handler I O Handler I O Port Overview I O Signal Pin Layout and Description Inputting Outputting Data Preset states at power on Timing Chart Electrical Characteristics ...

Page 865: ...8 bit output port and 2 pairs of 4 bit bi directional port Also those ports can cooperate to provide a maximum 16 bit width output port or a maximum 8 bit width input port The I O signals operate on the negative logic basis which can be altered The control signal lines consist of various control output data including completion of measurement or control signal for handshaking I O ports and control...

Page 866: ...Programming 1093 ...

Page 867: ...on are shown below A slash symbol preceding signal names means that they are negative logic active low Pin number Signal name Input Output Description 1 GND N A Ground 2 INPUT1 Input When this port receives a negative pulse OUTPUT1 and OUTPUT2 are changed to the Low level 3 OUTPUT1 Output Changes to the Low level when INPUT1 receives a ...

Page 868: ...2 of port A 8 PORT A3 Output Bit 3 of port A 9 PORT A4 Output Bit 4 of port A 10 PORT A5 Output Bit 5 of port A 11 PORT A6 Output Bit 6 of port A 12 PORT A7 Output Bit 7 of port A 13 PORT B0 Output Bit 0 of port B 8 bit parallel output port 14 PORT B1 Output Bit 1 of port B 15 PORT B2 Output Bit 2 of port B 16 PORT B3 Output Bit 3 of port B 17 PORT B4 Output Bit 4 of port B 18 EXTERNAL TRIGGER Inp...

Page 869: ...alculation is completed When the point trigger function is on it goes to the High level before staring measurement of the first measurement point and returns to the Low level after completing measurement of all measurement points 21 PORT B7 Output Bit 7 of port B READY FOR TRIGGER Indicates that the instrument is ready for triggering This signal is changed to the Low level when the instrument is r...

Page 870: ... of port C 25 PORT C3 Input Output Bit 3 of port C 26 PORT D0 Input Output Bit 0 of port D 4 bit parallel I O port 27 PORT D1 Input Output Bit 1 of port D 28 PORT D2 Input Output Bit 2 of port D 29 PORT D3 Input Output Bit 3 of port D 30 PORT C STATUS Output Port C status signal This signal is changed to the High level when the port C is configured to output port It is changed to the Low level whe...

Page 871: ...le test results return FAIL It changes to the Low level when all limit test results return PASS 34 SWEEP END Output A sweep completion signal When measurement all sweeps of all channels and data calculation are completed this signal provides a negative pulse 35 5V Output Provides 5V DC power supply for external instruments 36 PASS FAIL STROBE Output Each limit test s results write a strobe signal ...

Page 872: ...g Data Input from Port Data Output to Port Sample Program Other topics about Communication with External Devices Overview The E5071C handler I O port provides the ports for data I O shown below Port Na me Usage Data Structure Port A Output Port B Output Port C Input Out put Port D Input Out put ...

Page 873: ...e port E depends on the setting for the ports C and D Port Name Command Port C CONT HAND C MODE Port D CONT HAND D MODE Reading Data Input into Port When the ports C D or E is configured to input ports binary data represented with High 0 Low 1 of each bit of the port will be read as decimal data To retrieve the data use the following command as query Port Name Command Port C CONT HAND C Port D CON...

Page 874: ...D C Port D CONT HAND D Port E CONT HAND E Port F CONT HAND F The bit 6 of the data output by CONT HAND B the bit 14 of the data output by CONT HAND F is ignored when outputting the INDEX signal is turned on The bit 7 of the data output by CONT HAND B the bit 15 of the data output by CONT HAND F command is ignored when outputting the READY FOR TRIGGER signal is turned on Sample Program See Handler ...

Page 875: ...wer on as follows not affected at reset Description Status Port A High All Bits Port B High All Bits Port C Input Port D Input Port C STATUS Low Port D STATUS Low OUTPUT1 High OUTPUT2 High SWEEP END High PASS FAIL High Other topics about Communication with External Devices ...

Page 876: ...Write Strobe Signal Timing Chart of INPUT1 and OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 Other topics about Communication with External Devices Overview This section shows the typical timing chart of I O port Signal Timing chart of I O Port Signal Point trigger function off Minimum value Typical Value Maximum value T1 Pulse width of EXTERNAL TRIGGER 1 µs T2 Pulse width of SWEEP END 10 µs 12 µs ...

Page 877: ...ignal goes to the Low level when the instrument is ready to accept the trigger signal for the first point and then goes to the High level when the trigger signal for the first point is received When measurement of all measurement points is completed and the instrument is ready to receive the trigger signal for the first point of the next sweep this signal goes to the Low level again When the point...

Page 878: ... I O Port Signal Point trigger function off Timing Chart of Data Output and Write Strobe Signal T1 Response time of write strobe signal 1 µs T2 Pulse width of write strobe signal 1 µs Timing Chart of Limit Test Result Output and Write Strobe Signal T1 Response time of PASS FAIL write strobe 1 µs T2 Pulse width of PASS FAIL write strobe 1 µs ...

Page 879: ...ail and write strobe signals are output at the time that the average test result shows failed on a certain channel Timing Chart of INPUT1 and OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 Minimum value Maximum value T1 Pulse width of INPUT1 1 µs T2 Response time of OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 0 4 µs 0 6 µs ...

Page 880: ...unication with External Devices Input Signal All input signals are TTL compatible Maximum rate input voltage 0 5 V to 5 5 V Input voltage High level 2 0 V to 5 0 V Low level 0 V to 0 5 V Output Signal All output signals are TTL compatible Maximum rate output current 10 mA to 10 mA Output current High level 5 mA ...

Page 881: ... 2 75 V when output current is 5 mA Low level 0 V to 0 8 V when output current is from 0 mA to 3 mA 0 25 V when output current is 1 mA 0 55 V when output current is 3 mA Power Supply 5 V The following table shows electrical characteristics of 5 V power supply for external instruments Output voltage 4 5 V to 5 5 V Maximum output current 100 mA ...

Page 882: ...Programming 1109 Status Reporting System Status Reporting System General Status Register Model Using the Status Reporting System Status Register Structure ...

Page 883: ... reporting system has a hierarchical structure as shown in the figure above When the instrument satisfies a particular condition the corresponding bit of the event register is set to 1 Therefore you can check the instrument status by reading the event register When the event register bit is set to 1 and a corresponding enable register bit a bit marked with an arrow in General status register model...

Page 884: ...tatus byte register by a specific register condition set the corresponding enable register to 1 Status Byte Register If the enabled event register is set to 1 a corresponding bit of the status byte register is also set to 1 This register also indicates the output queue and SRQ status The value of the status byte register can be read by using the STB command or serial poll SPOLL statement in HTBasi...

Page 885: ...xtra status register Questionable limit channel 1 16 status register Questionable limit channel 1 16 extra status register Questionable bandwidth limit status register Questionable bandwidth limit extra status register Questionable bandwidth limit channel 1 16 status register Questionable bandwidth limit channel 1 16 extra status register Questionable ripple limit status register Questionable ripp...

Page 886: ...R STAT OPER NTR STAT QUES ENAB STAT QUES COND STAT QUES STAT QUES PTR STAT QUES NTR STAT QUES LIM ENAB STAT QUES LIM COND STAT QUES LIM STAT QUES LIM PTR STAT QUES LIM NTR STAT QUES LIM ELIM ENAB STAT QUES LIM ELIM COND STAT QUES LIM ELIM STAT QUES LIM ELIM PTR STAT QUES LIM ELIM NTR STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 ENAB STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 COND STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 STAT QUES LIM CHAN 1 16 PTR STAT ...

Page 887: ...T QUES BLIM ELIM PTR STAT QUES BLIM ELIM NTR STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 ENAB STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 COND STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 PTR STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 NTR STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH ENAB STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH COND STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH PTR STAT QUES BLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH NTR STAT QUES RLIM ENAB STAT QUES RLIM COND STAT QUES...

Page 888: ...6 COND STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 PTR STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 NTR STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH ENAB STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH COND STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH PTR STAT QUES RLIM CHAN 1 16 ECH NTR Other topics about Status Reporting System ...

Page 889: ...tatus Register for Bandwidth Limit Channel Status Register for Bandwidth Limit Trace 1 of 2 Status Register for Bandwidth Limit Trace 2 of 2 Status Register for Ripple Limit Channel Status Register for Ripple Limit Trace 1 of 2 Status Register for Ripple Limit Trace 2 of 2 Although up to 36 channel is available on E5071C the registers for limit test and Ripple Bandwidth limit tests are for up to 1...

Page 890: ...Programming 1117 Status Register Status Bit Definitions of Status Byte Register Bit Position Name Description ...

Page 891: ...nabled bits in the standard event status register is set to 1 6 RQS Set to 1 when any of the status byte register bits enabled by the service request enable register is set to 1 reset to 0 when all the data has been retrieved through serial polling 7 Operation Status Register Summary Set to 1 when one of the enabled bits in the operational status register is set to 1 Issuing the CLS command will c...

Page 892: ...consistent with the E5071C s capabilities 2 Set to 1 when an SCPI command cannot be properly executed due to some condition of the E5071C 5 Command Error 1 Set to 1 when an IEEE 488 2 syntax error occurs a command sent to the E5071C does not follow the IEEE 488 2 syntax Possible violations include the command parameter violating the E5071C listening formats or being unacceptable 2 Set to 1 when a ...

Page 893: ...ed Always 0 14 VBA Macro Running Set to 1 while a VBA macro is running 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the operation status event register Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description 0 7 Not used Always 0 8 Bandwidth Test Fail Questionable bandwidth limit status register summary Set to 1 while one of the e...

Page 894: ...t to 1 when a transition of the condition register occurs if the transition filters are set as valid values 9 Ripple Test Fail Questionable ripple limit status register summary Set to 1 when a transition of the condition register occurs if the transition filters are set as valid values 10 Limit Test Fail Questionable limit status register summary Set to 1 when a transition of the condition registe...

Page 895: ...ROG STAT STOP Operating CTRL Break using the keyboard Operating Marcro Break or Macro Setup Stop using the front panel 12 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the questionable status event register ...

Page 896: ...ions of the Questionable Limit Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description 0 Channel 15 16 Limit Test summary questionable limit extra status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit extra status event register is set to 1 ...

Page 897: ...s register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit channel 4 status event register is set to 1 5 Channel 5 Limit Test Fail questionable limit channel 5 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit channel 5 status event register is set to 1 6 Channel 6 Limit Test Fail questionable limit channel 6 status register summary S...

Page 898: ...in the questionable limit channel 11 status event register is set to 1 12 Channel 12 Limit Test Fail questionable limit channel 12 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit channel 12 status event register is set to 1 13 Channel 13 Limit Test Fail questionable limit channel 13 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the quest...

Page 899: ... Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit channel 15 status event register is set to 1 2 Channel 16 Limit Test Fail questionable limit channel 16 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit channel 16 status event register is set to 1 3 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the questionable limit e...

Page 900: ...Programming 1127 Status Register for Limit Test Trace 1 of 2 Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Limit Channel 1 16 Status Condition Register ...

Page 901: ... Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the limit test result for trace 2 3 Trace 3 Limit Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the limit test result for trace 3 4 Trace 4 Limit Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the mea...

Page 902: ...finishes and returns fail as the limit test result for trace 8 9 Trace 9 Limit Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the limit test result for trace 9 10 Trace 10 Limit Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the limit test result for trace 10 11...

Page 903: ...or trace 14 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all the bits in the questionable limit channel 1 16 status event register Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Limit Channel 1 16 Extra Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description 0 Not used Always 0 1 Trace 15 Limit Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes a...

Page 904: ...sed Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all the bits in the questionable limit channel 1 16 extra status event register Although up to 36 channel is available on E5071C the register for limit test is for up to 16 channel ...

Page 905: ...E5071C 1132 Status Register for Limit Test Trace 2 of 2 Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Limit Extra Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description ...

Page 906: ...onable limit channel 15 status event register is set to 1 2 Channel 16 Limit Test Fail questionable limit channel 16 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable limit channel 16 status event register is set to 1 3 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the questionable limit extra status event register ...

Page 907: ...atus Condition Register Bit Position Name Description 0 Trace 15 16 Bandwidth Test summary questionable bandwidth limit channel 1 16 extra status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 1 16 extra status event register is set to 1 1 Trace 1 Bandwidth Test Set to 0 when a ...

Page 908: ...hen the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the bandwidth test result for trace 3 4 Trace 4 Bandwidth Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the bandwidth test result for trace 4 5 Trace 5 Bandwidth Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail ...

Page 909: ... Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the bandwidth test result for trace 9 10 Trace 10 Bandwidth Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the bandwidth test result for trace 10 11 Trace 11 Bandwidth Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins ...

Page 910: ...ace 14 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all the bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 1 16 status event register Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel 1 16 Extra Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description 0 Not used Always 0 1 Trace 15 Bandwidth Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measureme...

Page 911: ...E5071C 1138 3 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all the bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 1 16 extra status event register ...

Page 912: ...Programming 1139 Status Register for Bandwidth Limit Trace 1 Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Status Condition Register ...

Page 913: ...er is set to 1 3 Channel 3 Bandwidth Test Fail questionable bandwidth limit channel 3 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 3 status event register is set to 1 4 Channel 4 Bandwidth Test Fail questionable bandwidth limit channel 4 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable bandwidth limit c...

Page 914: ... register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 10 status event register is set to 1 11 Channel 11 Bandwidth Test Fail questionable bandwidth limit channel 11 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 11 status event register is set to 1 12 Channel 12 Bandwidth Test Fail questionab...

Page 915: ...071C 1142 status register summary channel 14 status event register is set to 1 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the questionable bandwidth limit status event register ...

Page 916: ...Programming 1143 Status Register for Bandwidth Limit Trace 2 Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Extra Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description ...

Page 917: ...limit channel 15 status event register is set to 1 2 Channel 16 Bandwidth Test Fail questionable bandwidth limit channel 16 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable bandwidth limit channel 16 status event register is set to 1 3 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the questionable bandwidth limit extra status event register...

Page 918: ...e Questionable Ripple Limit Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description 0 Channel 15 16 Ripple Test summary questionable ripple limit extra status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable ripple limit extra status event register is set to 1 ...

Page 919: ...register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 4 status event register is set to 1 5 Channel 5 Ripple Test Fail questionable ripple limit channel 5 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 5 status event register is set to 1 6 Channel 6 Ripple Test Fail questionable ripple limit channel...

Page 920: ...e questionable ripple limit channel 11 status event register is set to 1 12 Channel 12 Ripple Test Fail questionable ripple limit channel 12 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 12 status event register is set to 1 13 Channel 13 Ripple Test Fail questionable ripple limit channel 13 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the ...

Page 921: ... 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 15 status event register is set to 1 2 Channel 16 Ripple Test Fail questionable ripple limit channel 16 status register summary Set to 1 while one of the enabled bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 16 status event register is set to 1 3 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all bits from the quest...

Page 922: ...Programming 1149 Status Register for Ripple Limit Trace 1 of 2 Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel 1 16 Status Condition Register ...

Page 923: ... Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 2 3 Trace 3 Ripple Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 3 4 Trace 4 Ripple Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 whe...

Page 924: ...inishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 8 9 Trace 9 Ripple Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 9 10 Trace 10 Ripple Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 1...

Page 925: ...surement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 13 14 Trace 14 Ripple Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 14 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all the bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 1 16 status event register ...

Page 926: ...Programming 1153 Status Register for Ripple Limit Trace 2 of 2 Status Bit Definitions of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel 1 16 Extra Status Condition Register Bit Position Name Description ...

Page 927: ... fail as the ripple test result for trace 15 2 Trace 16 Ripple Test Fail Set to 0 when a measurement cycle begins set to 1 when the measurement cycle finishes and returns fail as the ripple test result for trace 16 3 15 Not used Always 0 Issuing the CLS command will clear all the bits in the questionable ripple limit channel 1 16 extra status event register ...

Page 928: ...1155 Working with Automatic Test System Working with Automatic Test System Preventing Erroneous Key Operation on the Front Panel key lock feature Improving Command Processing Speed Detecting Occurrence of an Error ...

Page 929: ...the mouse or the keyboard disabling these input devices can prevent any erroneous operation that might be caused by accidentally touching the devices To turn on or off Key Locking use the following commands Command Description SYST KLOC KBD Locking the front panel controls and the keyboard SYST KLOC MOUS Locking the mouse and the touch screen ...

Page 930: ...ating the screen To turn off the updating of the LCD display use the following command DISP ENAB Measurement results trace need to be updated When the measurement trace needs to be updated the processing speed of SCPI commands can still be improved by controlling the update timing of the LCD display 1 Execute all SCPI commands that are required before measurement including commands setting conditi...

Page 931: ...ce of an error will be present in the standard event status register An SRQ service request is useful when you create a program that uses the information reported by this register to detect the occurrence of an error To detect the end of sweep via an SRQ use one of the following commands SRE ESE Follow these steps 1 Set the E5071C so that it generates an SRQ when any of the error occurrence bits i...

Page 932: ...dling When an error queue is retrieved it returns 0 as the error number and No error as the error message if no error is detected This can be used for detecting of an error and for branching the flow of a program This is also useful when you wish to handle a specific error s Note that this method will not allow the user to perform any processing during the occurrence of an error 2 When an error is...

Page 933: ... Writing Error Coefficient Waiting for Trigger OPC Waiting for Trigger SRQ Error Detection SRQ Reading Data in Ascii Format Reading Data in Binary Format Writing Data in Ascii Format Writing Data in Binary Format Peak Search Bandwidth Search Limit Test Saving Files Transferring Files Fixture Simulator Time Domain Control Using SICL LAN Server Controlling Using Telnet Server Handler Interface Contr...

Page 934: ...program puts the instrument into the preset state configures it as shown in table below and saves the settings to a file named sample sta See Setting up Analyzer for this programming Target settings Item Setting Window Layout Channel 1 in the upper window 2 3 of the screen height and channel 2 in the lower window 1 3 of the screen height Channel 1 Sweep type Segment Sweep range See Segment table N...

Page 935: ... Smith chart Lin Full scale value 2 Trace 2 Measurement parameter S21 Data format Log magnitude Reference division line number 9 Reference division line value 2 Scale per division 10 dBm Trace 3 Measurement parameter S12 Data format Log magnitude Reference division line number 9 Reference division line value 2 Scale per division 10 dBm ...

Page 936: ...ue 500 MHz Number of measurement points 101 IF bandwidth 70 kHz Power 0 dBm Number of traces 4 Graph Layout Two graphs at left and right Trace 1 Measurement parameter S21 Data format Log magnitude Reference division line number 9 Reference division line value 2 Scale per division 10 dBm Trace 2 Measurement parameter S22 Data format Smith chart Lin Full scale value 2 ...

Page 937: ... Dim Fmt1 4 As String Fmt2 2 As String Dim Star1 3 As String Stop1 3 As String Dim IfBw1 3 As Double IfBw2 As Double Dim Power1 3 As Double Power2 As Double Dim Cent2 As Double Span2 As Double Dim RefLev1 4 As Double RefLev2 2 As Double Scale1 4 As Double Scale2 2 As Double Dim Segm As Integer Nop1 3 As Integer Nop2 As Integer Dim NumOfTr1 As Integer NumOfTr2 As Integer Dim RefPos1 4 As Integer Re...

Page 938: ... 0 dBm NumOfTr1 4 Number of Trace Ch 1 4 NumOfTr2 2 Ch 2 2 Allocate1 D12_34 Allocate Traces Ch 1 D12_34 Allocate2 D12 Ch 2 D12 Para1 1 S11 Measurement Ch 1 Trace1 S11 Para1 2 S21 Parameter Trace2 S21 Para1 3 S12 Trace3 S12 Para1 4 S22 Trace4 S22 Para2 1 S31 Ch 2 Trace1 S31 Para2 2 S33 Trace2 S33 Fmt1 1 SLIN Data Format Ch 1 Trace1 Smith Lin Phase Fmt1 2 MLOG Trace2 Log Mag Fmt1 3 MLOG Trace3 Log M...

Page 939: ...n on Continuous Activation mode for channel 1 Call viVPrintf vi INIT2 CONT ON vbLf 0 Turn on Continuous Activation mode for channel 2 Setup Channel 1 Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 SWE TYPE SEGM vbLf 0 Sets channel 1 sweep type to segment Create the data string for Segment Table SendData 5 0 1 1 0 0 Str Segm For i 1 To Segm SendData SendData Star1 i Stop1 i CStr Nop1 i CStr IfBw1 i CStr Power1 i Next i C...

Page 940: ...FREQ CENT CStr Cent2 vbLf 0 Set center frequency Call viVPrintf vi SENS2 FREQ SPAN CStr Span2 vbLf 0 Set span frequency Call viVPrintf vi SENS2 SWE POIN CStr Nop2 vbLf 0 Set number of points Call viVPrintf vi SENS2 BAND CStr IfBw2 vbLf 0 Set IFBW Call viVPrintf vi SOUR2 POW CStr Power2 vbLf 0 Set power level Call viVPrintf vi CALC2 PAR COUN CStr NumOfTr2 vbLf 0 Set number of traces Call viVPrintf ...

Page 941: ...Stop1 1 3 Pow1 1 3 Cent2 Span2 Pow2 40 REAL Ref_rev1 1 4 Ref_rev2 1 2 Scale1 1 4 Scale2 1 2 50 INTEGER Segm Nop1 1 3 Nop2 Num_of_tr1 Num_of_tr2 60 INTEGER Ref_pos1 1 4 Ref_pos2 1 2 I 70 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 80 90 Segm 3 Number of Segment Ch 1 3 100 Star1 1 1 7E 9 Start Frequency Ch 1 Segm 1 1 7 GHz 110 Star1 2 1 9E 9 Segm 2 1 9 GHz 120 Star1 3 2 E 9 Segm 3 2 GHz 130 Stop1 1 1 9E 9 Stop Frequency...

Page 942: ...ace2 S33 400 Fmt1 1 SLIN Data Format Ch 1 Trace1 Smith Lin Phase 410 Fmt1 2 MLOG Trace2 Log Mag 420 Fmt1 3 MLOG Trace3 Log Mag 430 Fmt1 4 SLIN Trace4 Smith Lin Phase 440 Fmt2 1 MLOG Ch 2 Trace1 Log Mag 450 Fmt2 2 SLIN Trace2 Smith Lin Phase 460 Ref_pos1 2 9 Reference Ch 1 Trace2 9 470 Ref_pos1 3 9 Position Trace3 9 480 Ref_pos2 1 9 Ch 2 Trace1 9 490 Ref_lev1 2 0 Reference Level Ch 1 Trace2 0 dBm 5...

Page 943: ...llocate1 770 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_tr1 780 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR VAL I DEF Para1 I 790 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR VAL I SEL 800 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FORM Fmt1 I 810 SELECT Fmt1 I 820 CASE SLIN SLOG SCOM SMIT SADM PLIN PLOG POL 830 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND1 TRAC VAL I Y PDIV Scale1 I 840 CASE ELSE 850 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND1 TRAC VAL I Y RPOS Ref_pos1 I 860 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND1 TRAC VAL I...

Page 944: ...PUT Agte507x CALC2 PAR VAL I SEL 1050 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC2 FORM Fmt2 I 1060 SELECT Fmt2 I 1070 CASE SLIN SLOG SCOM SMIT SADM PLIN PLOG POL 1080 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND2 TRAC VAL I Y PDIV Scale2 I 1090 CASE ELSE 1100 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND2 TRAC VAL I Y RPOS Ref_pos2 I 1110 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND2 TRAC VAL I Y RLEV Ref_rev2 I 1120 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND2 TRAC VAL I Y PDIV Scale2 I 1130 ...

Page 945: ... cal kit number Ch Cells 5 5 Select channel Port 1 Cells 3 6 Sets the select port 1 Port 2 Cells 3 7 Sets the select port 2 Port 3 Cells 3 8 Sets the select port 3 Port 4 Cells 3 9 Sets the select port 4 CalKit Cal85032F Sets cal kit 85032F Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Initializes the VISA system Call viOpen defrm GPIB0 17 INSTR 0 0 vi Opens the session to the specified instrument Call viSetAttribut...

Page 946: ...ll 4 port calibration Call Cal_Slot vi Ch 4 Port End Select Call viClose vi Closes the resource manager session Call viClose defrm Breaks the communication and terminates the VISA system End End End Sub Sub Cal_Resp vi As Long Ch As String CalType As String Port As String Dim Dummy As Variant Variant to receive the result Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL METH CalType Port vbLf 0 Sets the calibr...

Page 947: ...iVQueryf vi OPC vbLf t Dummy Reads the OPC result Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL SAVE vbLf 0 Calculating the calibration coefficients Call ErrorCheck vi Checking the error Else MsgBox Thru calibration select port error Displaying the error message when selected same ports Exit Sub End If End Sub Sub Cal_Slot vi As Long Ch As String NumPort As String Port As String Dim Dummy Dim i As Integer j...

Page 948: ...ion Call viVQueryf vi OPC vbLf t Dummy Reads the OPC result MsgBox Set Load to Port Port i then click OK button Display the message box Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL LOAD Port i vbLf 0 Measurement the LOAD calibration Call viVQueryf vi OPC vbLf t Dummy Reads the OPC result Next i Transmission For i 1 To NumPort 1 For j i 1 To NumPort MsgBox Set Thru to Port Port i Port j then click OK button...

Page 949: ...File 20 Ch 9 Inp_char 9 20 INTEGER Cal_kit Cal_type Port 1 4 30 40 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 50 File Ex_4_1 sta 60 Ch 1 70 80 Select_cal_kit Agte507x Ch 90 100 CLEAR SCREEN 110 ON ERROR GOTO Type_select 120 Type_select 130 PRINT Calibration Type Selection 140 PRINT 1 Response Open 150 PRINT 2 Response Short 160 PRINT 3 Response Thru 170 PRINT 4 Full 1 Port 180 PRINT 5 Full 2 Port 190 PRINT 6 Full 3 P...

Page 950: ... 380 CASE 4 390 Select_port 1 Port 400 Cal_solt Agte507x Ch 1 Port 410 CASE 5 420 Select_port 2 Port 430 Cal_solt Agte507x Ch 2 Port 440 CASE 6 450 Select_port 3 Port 460 Cal_solt Agte507x Ch 3 Port 470 CASE 7 480 Select_port 4 Port 490 Cal_solt Agte507x Ch 4 Port 500 END SELECT 510 520 OUTPUT Agte507x MMEM STOR STYP CST 530 OUTPUT Agte507x MMEM STOR File 540 END 550 560 Calibration Kit Selection ...

Page 951: ...NT 750 PRINT Input 1 to 10 760 INPUT Input number 1 to 10 Inp_char 770 Cal_kit IVAL Inp_char 10 780 IF Cal_kit 1 OR Cal_kit 10 THEN Kit_select 790 OFF ERROR 800 810 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL CKIT Cal_kit 820 SUBEND 830 840 Port Selection Function 850 860 SUB Select_port INTEGER Num_of_ports INTEGER Port 870 DIM Inp_char 9 880 890 CLEAR SCREEN 900 IF Num_of_ports 4 THEN 910 Port 1 1 920 Por...

Page 952: ...NTEGER Port 1160 DIM Buff 9 1170 1180 PRINT Response Type Calibration 1190 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL METH Type Port 1200 PRINT Set Type to Port VAL Port Then push Enter key 1210 INPUT Buff 1220 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL Type Port 1230 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 1240 ENTER Agte507x Buff 1250 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL SAVE 1260 PRINT Done 1270 SUBEND 1280 1290 Response Thru Calibrat...

Page 953: ... 1510 PRINT Full VAL Num_of_ports Port Calibration 1520 1530 Calibration Type Selection 1540 1550 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL METH SOLT VAL Num_of_ ports 1560 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_ports 1 1570 OUTPUT Agte507x Port I 1580 NEXT I 1590 OUTPUT Agte507x Port Num_of_ports 1600 1610 Reflection Measurement 1620 1630 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_ports 1640 PRINT Set OPEN to Port VAL Port I Then push Enter key 1650...

Page 954: ...0 1830 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_ports 1 1840 FOR J I 1 TO Num_of_ports 1850 PRINT Set THRU between Port VAL Port I and Port VAL Port J Then push Enter key 1860 INPUT Buff 1870 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL THRU Port I Port J 1880 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 1890 ENTER Agte507x Buff 1900 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL THRU Port J Port I 1910 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 1920 ENTER Agte507x Buff 1930 NEXT J 1940 NEX...

Page 955: ...nel Port 1 Cells 3 6 Sets the select port 1 Port 2 Cells 3 7 Sets the select port 2 Port 3 Cells 3 8 Sets the select port 3 Port 4 Cells 3 9 Sets the select port 4 Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Initializes the VISA system Call viOpen defrm GPIB0 17 INSTR 0 0 vi Opens the session to the specified instrument Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE TimeOutTime The state of an attribute for the specifie...

Page 956: ... Ch CORR COLL ECAL SOLT NumPort Port 1 vbLf 0 Execute the 1 port calibration Case 2 MsgBox Connect Port Port 1 and Port Port 2 then click OK button Display the message box Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL ECAL SOLT NumPort Port 1 Port 2 vbLf 0 Execute the full 2 port calibration Case 3 MsgBox Connect Port Port 1 Port 2 and Port Port 3 then click OK button Display the message box Call viVPrintf ...

Page 957: ... Cal_kit Cal_type Port 1 4 30 40 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 50 File Ex_4_2 sta 60 Ch 1 70 80 CLEAR SCREEN 90 ON ERROR GOTO Type_select 100 Type_select 110 PRINT Calibration Type Selection 120 PRINT 1 Full 1 Port 130 PRINT 2 Full 2 Port 140 PRINT 3 Full 3 Port 150 PRINT 4 Full 4 Port 160 PRINT 170 PRINT Input 1 to 4 180 INPUT Input number 1 to 4 Inp_char 190 Cal_type IVAL Inp_char 10 200 IF Cal_type 1 ...

Page 958: ...orts Selection 430 ON ERROR GOTO Port_select 440 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_ports 450 PRINT Port VAL I 460 Port_select 470 INPUT Number Inp_char 480 Port I IVAL Inp_char 10 490 IF Port I 1 OR Port I 4 THEN Port_select 500 FOR J 1 TO I 1 510 IF Port I Port J THEN Port_select 520 NEXT J 530 PRINT Port I 540 NEXT I 550 OFF ERROR 560 END IF 570 SUBEND 580 590 Electronic Calibration Function 600 610 SUB Ecal Ag...

Page 959: ...SOLT2 Port 1 Port 2 800 CASE 3 810 PRINT Connect Port VAL Port 1 820 PRINT Port VAL Port 2 830 PRINT and Port VAL Port 3 to ECal Module 840 PRINT Then push Enter key 850 INPUT Buff 860 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL ECAL SOLT3 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 870 CASE 4 880 PRINT Connect Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 to to ECal Mod ule 890 PRINT Then push Enter key 900 INPUT Buff 910 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS...

Page 960: ...Programming 1187 1010 PRINT Done 1020 END IF 1030 SUBEND ...

Page 961: ... between the E5071C and the external controller through the GPIB cable Then the program executes the power calibration of the E5071C by using the power sensor E4412A The obtained power calibration data array is saved into a file Connecting E5071C power meter and external controller See Power Calibration for this programming Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub pow_cal_Click Dim defrm As Long Dim vi As ...

Page 962: ...4 Number of averaging 4 Limit 10 Limit for corrected data 10 dBm Call viVPrintf vi SYST PRES vbLf 0 Presetting the analyzer Call viVPrintf vi SYST COMM GPIB PMET ADDR 13 vbLf 0 Setting GPIB address of the power meter to ENA Setting measurement conditions Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 SWE TYPE SwpType vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 SWE POIN CStr Nop vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi SOUR1 POW STAR StartPower vbLf...

Page 963: ... vi t OpcRes Error hnadling at power meter measurement Call viVQueryf vi SYST ERR vbLf t err ErrNo Split err If Val ErrNo 0 0 Then ReDim CorrData Nop Call viVPrintf vi FORM DATA ASC vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR DATA vbLf 0 Call viVScanf vi t Result Res Split Result If fnLim vi Nop Limit Res Then MsgBox Power meter calibration measurement is complete vbOKOnly For i 1 To Nop Cells i...

Page 964: ... is out of limit vbOKOnly fnLim False Exit Function End If Next i fnLim True End Function Sample Program in HT Basic pow_cal htb 10 DIM Swp_type 11 Inp_char 9 Buff 9 Err_mes 50 File 20 20 DIM Corr_data 1 1601 30 REAL Start_p Stop_p Cw_freq Limit 40 INTEGER Nop Pow_rang Num_avg Err_no Verifier Data_size I 50 CLEAR SCREEN 60 70 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 80 90 Swp_type POW Sweep type POWER 100 Nop 41 Nu...

Page 965: ...UTPUT Agte507x SOUR1 POW STAR Start_p 320 OUTPUT Agte507x SOUR1 POW STOP Stop_p 330 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 FREQ Cw_freq 340 350 PRINT Do you perform zeroing and calibrating the power sensor 360 PRINT 370 INPUT Y N Inp_char 380 IF UPC Inp_char Y THEN 390 PRINT Zero and calibrate the power sensor by using the power meter then press Enter key 400 PRINT 410 INPUT Inp_char 420 END IF 430 440 Meas_start ...

Page 966: ...07x SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR DATA 690 ENTER Agte507x Corr_data 700 Verifier FNLim Agte507x Nop Limit Corr_data 710 IF Verifier 1 THEN 720 PRINT Do you perform the power meter calibration measurement again 730 PRINT 740 INPUT Y N Inp_char 750 IF UPC Inp_char Y THEN GOTO Meas_start 760 IF UPC Inp_char Y THEN GOTO Prog_stop 770 END IF 780 PRINT Power meter calibration measurement is complete 790 PRINT 80...

Page 967: ...SING 3D 3X MD 4DE I Corr_data I 1030 NEXT I 1040 ASSIGN File TO 1050 1060 PRINT Installing the corrected data to the file is DONE 1070 1080 GOTO Prog_end 1090 1100 Prog_stop 1110 PRINT Program Interruption 1120 1130 Prog_end 1140 1150 END 1160 1170 Limit Test Function for the Corrected Data 1180 1190 DEF FNLim Agte507x INTEGER Nop REAL Limit REAL Corr_data 1200 INTEGER I 1210 1220 FOR I 1 TO Nop 1...

Page 968: ...Programming 1195 1270 RETURN 1 1280 GOTO Fn_exit 1290 END IF 1300 NEXT I 1310 1320 RETURN 0 1330 1340 Fn_exit 1350 1360 FNEND ...

Page 969: ...yed in a graph Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub Err_Term_Click Dim defrm As Long Session to Default Resource Manager Dim vi As Long Session to instrument Dim Ch As String Dim CalKit As Integer Dim Port 2 As String Dim Result As String 10 Dim tNop As Long Dim Respons As String Dim Stimulus As String Dim ErrTerm As String Const TimeOutTime 40000 timeout time Const Cal85032F 4 cal kit number Ch Cells ...

Page 970: ...Case Read Call Cal_Slot vi Ch 2 Port Full 2 Port Calibration Case Write Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COEF METH SOLT2 1 2 vbLf 0 Sets the calibration type to the full 2 port calibration End Select Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch SEGM SWE POIN vbLf 0 Reads out the total number of the measurement points of all segments Call viVScanf vi t Result Call Exec_Error_Term vi Ch Val Result ErrTerm Respons Stimul...

Page 971: ...Data Make_Freq vi Nop Calculates the frequency values For i 0 To Nop 1 RealData CDbl Error_Term_Data i 2 Reads the real data from error coefficient items ImagData CDbl Error_Term_Data i 2 1 Reads the imag data from error coefficient items FreqData CDbl Freq_Data i 1 Reads the frequency values Cells 10 i 2 RealData Displays the real data to the excel sheet Cells 10 i 3 ImagData Displays the imag da...

Page 972: ...e Dim fPoint As Double Dim freq_arry As Variant Dim MeasPoint As Integer Const SegmentCnt 2 number of segment table ReDim freq_arry tPoint As Variant MeasPoint 1 For j 1 To SegmentCnt start_freq Cells 3 j 1 9 Sets the start frequency of segment table stop_freq Cells 3 j 1 10 Sets the stop frequency of segment table Nop Cells 3 j 1 13 Sets the nop of segment table fStep stop_freq start_freq Nop 1 C...

Page 973: ... area End With With ActiveChart HasTitle True ChartTitle Characters Text Error Term ErrTerm Display the title End With End Sub Sub Set_sgm_tbl vi As Long Ch As String Dim Star1 2 As Double Stop1 2 As Double Pow1 2 As Double If_bw1 2 As Double Dim Segm As Integer Nop1 2 As Integer Num_of_tr1 As Integer Dim i As Integer Segm 2 Star1 1 Cells 3 9 Sets the start frequency of segment 1 table Stop1 1 Cel...

Page 974: ...ummy Dim i As Integer j As Integer Select Case NumPort Case 1 Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL METH SOLT NumPort Port 1 vbLf 0 Set the 1 port calibration type Case 2 Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL METH SOLT NumPort Port 1 Port 2 vbLf 0 Set the full 2 port calibration type Case 3 Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL METH SOLT NumPort Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 vbLf 0 Set the full 3 port calibratio...

Page 975: ...j then click OK button Display the message box Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL THRU Port i Port j vbLf 0 Measurement the THRU calibration Call viVQueryf vi OPC vbLf t Dummy Reads the OPC result Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL THRU Port j Port i vbLf 0 Measurement the THRU calibration Call viVQueryf vi OPC vbLf t Dummy Reads the OPC result Next j Next i Call viVPrintf vi SENS Ch CORR COLL S...

Page 976: ...tor Clear 2100 CLEAR SCREEN 2110 GINIT 2130 2140 Set ENA s Addr 2150 Agte507x 717 2160 2170 Ch 1 2180 2190 Set ENA s I O Path 2200 ASSIGN Agte507x TO Agte507x 2210 2220 ON TIMEOUT SC Agte507x 15 RECOVER Tout 2230 2240 Set Start Port and End Port 2250 Port 1 1 2260 Port 2 2 2270 2280 Setup Segment Table 2290 CALL Set_sgm_tbl Agte507x 2300 2310 Select Cal Kit 2320 CALL Select_cal_kit Agte507x Ch 233...

Page 977: ...D EL Ch 8 Nop 2 1 Stok 2530 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ ET Ch 9 Nop 1 2 Stok 2540 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ ET Ch 10 Nop 2 1 Stok 2550 2560 CLEAR SCREEN 2570 PRINT Push Preset OK of ENA Then push Enter key 2580 INPUT Wk 2590 2600 CALL Set_sgm_tbl Agte507x 2610 2620 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COEF METH SOLT2 Port 1 Port 2 2630 2640 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x WRITE ES Ch 1 Nop 1...

Page 978: ...830 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ ED Ch 6 Nop 2 2 Stok2 2840 2850 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ EL Ch 7 Nop 1 2 Stok2 2860 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ EL Ch 8 Nop 2 1 Stok2 2870 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ ET Ch 9 Nop 1 2 Stok2 2880 CALL Exec_error_term Agte507x READ ET Ch 10 Nop 2 1 Stok2 2890 2900 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 2910 2920 DISP CHR 139 Done CHR 136 2930 STOP 2940 2950 ...

Page 979: ...Bm 3200 Pow1 2 0 Segm 2 0 dBm 3210 3220 OUTPUT Agte507x SYST PRES 3230 3240 WAIT 5 3250 3260 Channel 1 3270 3280 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 SWE TYPE SEGM 3290 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 SEGM DATA 5 0 1 1 0 0 Segm 3300 FOR I 1 TO Segm 1 3310 OUTPUT Agte507x Star1 I Stop1 I Nop1 I If_bw1 I Pow1 I 3320 NEXT I 3330 OUTPUT Agte507x Star1 Segm Stop1 Segm Nop1 Segm If_bw1 Segm Pow1 Segm 3340 3350 OUTPUT Agte507x C...

Page 980: ...COLL CKIT LAB 3590 ENTER Agte507x Cal_kit_lbl I 3600 NEXT I 3610 ON ERROR GOTO Kit_select 3620 3630 PRINT Calibration Kit Selection 3640 FOR I 1 TO Noc 3650 PRINT USING X 2D A X 20A I Cal_kit_lbl I 3660 NEXT I 3670 PRINT 3680 PRINT Input 1 to VAL Noc 3690 3700 Msg Input number 1 to VAL Noc 3710 LOOP 3720 LOOP 3730 DISP Msg 3740 INPUT Inp_char 3750 Cal_kit IVAL Inp_char 10 3760 EXIT IF 1 Cal_kit AN...

Page 981: ...0 Cal_solt SUB Cal_solt Agte507x Ch INTEGER Num_of_ports INTEGER Port 3970 3980 Full n Port Calibration Function 3990 4000 4010 DIM Buff 9 4020 INTEGER I J 4030 4040 PC s Monitor Clear 4050 CLEAR SCREEN 4060 4070 PRINT Full VAL Num_of_ports Port Calibration 4080 4090 Calibration Type Selection 4100 4110 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL METH SOLT VAL Num_of_ports 4120 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_ports 1 413...

Page 982: ... Buff 4320 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL LOAD Port I 4330 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 4340 ENTER Agte507x Buff 4350 NEXT I 4360 4370 Transmission Measurement 4380 4390 FOR I 1 TO Num_of_ports 1 4400 FOR J I 1 TO Num_of_ports 4410 PRINT Set THRU between Port VAL Port I and Port VAL Port J Then push Enter key 4420 INPUT Buff 4430 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COLL THRU Port I Port J 4440 OUTPUT Agte507x ...

Page 983: ...80 4690 REDIM Error_term_data 1 Nop 2 4700 4710 SELECT Rw 4720 CASE WRITE 4730 FOR Ii 1 TO Nop 4740 Error_term_data 2 Ii 1 Stok Idx 2 Ii 1 4750 Error_term_data 2 Ii Stok Idx 2 Ii 4760 NEXT Ii 4770 4780 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS Ch CORR COEF Id Respons Stimulas Error_term_data 4790 4800 CASE READ 4810 FOR Ii 1 TO Nop 4820 Error_term_data 2 Ii 1 999 4830 Error_term_data 2 Ii 999 4840 NEXT Ii 4850 4860 OU...

Page 984: ...5040 CLEAR SCREEN 5050 GINIT 5060 GCLEAR 5070 5080 Pen 1 3 5090 Pen 2 4 5100 5110 Get Min Value and Max Value from all data 5120 Y_minmax 1 MIN Error_term_data 5130 Y_minmax 2 MAX Error_term_data 5150 5160 IF Y_minmax 1 Y_minmax 2 AND Y_minmax 1 0 THEN 5170 Y_minmax 1 1 5180 Y_minmax 2 1 5190 ELSE 5200 IF Y_minmax 1 Y_minmax 2 THEN 5210 Y_minmax 1 Y_minmax 1 5 5220 Y_minmax 2 Y_minmax 2 1 5 5230 E...

Page 985: ...1 5430 DRAW 4 1 5440 MOVE 5 1 5450 PEN 1 5460 LABEL Image Value 5470 5480 VIEWPORT 25 RATIO 80 RATIO 90 100 5490 WINDOW 0 2 0 2 5500 CSIZE 3 5510 LORG 5 5520 MOVE 1 1 2 5530 LABEL Error Term Error_term 5540 5550 MOVE 1 5 5560 LABEL Respons Port VAL Respons Stimulas Port VAL Stimulas 5570 5580 VIEWPORT 0 25 RATIO 40 90 5590 WINDOW 0 2 0 2 5600 CLIP 10 10 10 10 5610 LORG 8 5620 CSIZE 3 5630 5640 MOV...

Page 986: ...2 1 5 5760 LABEL VAL Nop 5770 5780 VIEWPORT 25 RATIO 80 RATIO 40 90 5790 WINDOW 1 Nop Y_minmax 1 Y_minmax 2 5800 FOR Ii 2 TO Nop 5820 PEN Pen 1 5830 MOVE Ii 1 Error_term_data 2 Ii 1 1 5840 DRAW Ii Error_term_data 2 Ii 1 5860 5870 PEN Pen 2 5880 MOVE Ii 1 Error_term_data 2 Ii 1 5890 DRAW Ii Error_term_data 2 Ii 5900 NEXT Ii 5910 5920 PEN 1 5930 BEEP 5940 INPUT Cont push Enter key Wk 5950 SUBEND 596...

Page 987: ... is completed then prints a message and exits See Waiting for the End of Measurement for this programming Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub trg_sing_Click Dim defrm As Long Dim vi As Long Dim ContMode 9 As String Dim Result As String 10 Dim i As Integer Const TimeOutTime 100000 TimeOut time should be greater than the measurement time Assign a GPIB address to the I O pass Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm C...

Page 988: ...PC command and wait until the command returns 1 i e the measurement cycle is completed Call viVPrintf vi OPC vbLf 0 Call viVScanf vi t Result Display a measurement completion message Stat MsgBox Measurement complete vbOKOnly Call viClose vi Call viClose defrm End Sub Sample Program in HT Basic trg_sing htb 10 DIM Cont_mode 1 9 9 Buff 9 20 INTEGER I 30 40 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 50 60 Cont_mode 1 ON...

Page 989: ...I 1 TO 9 170 OUTPUT Agte507x INIT VAL I CONT Cont_mode I 180 NEXT I 190 OUTPUT Agte507x TRIG SOUR BUS 200 210 OUTPUT Agte507x TRIG SING 220 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 230 ENTER Agte507x Buff 240 250 PRINT Measurement complete 260 END ...

Page 990: ...ent the program exits after printing a measurement completion message See Waiting for the End of Measurement for this programming Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub srq_meas_Click Dim defrm As Long Dim vi As Long Dim ContMode 9 As String Dim Result As String 10 Dim i As Integer StbStatus As Integer Const TimeOutTime 100000 TimeOut time should be greater than the measurement time Assign a GPIB address...

Page 991: ...AT OPER ENAB 16 vbLf 0 Set 1 at bit 4 of Operation status enable Call viVPrintf vi SRE 128 vbLf 0 Set 1 at bit 7 of Service Request Enable Register Call viVPrintf vi CLS vbLf 0 Clear Register Call viVPrintf vi TRG vbLf 0 Make a trigger Wait until Status Byte Register became 192 Do Call viReadSTB vi StbStatus Read Status Byte Register Range B5 Value StbStatus Loop Until StbStatus 192 Display a meas...

Page 992: ...UR BUS 200 210 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT OPER PTR 0 220 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT OPER NTR 16 230 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT OPER ENAB 16 240 OUTPUT Agte507x SRE 128 250 OUTPUT Agte507x CLS 260 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 270 ENTER Agte507x Buff 280 290 ON INTR 7 GOTO Meas_end 300 ENABLE INTR 7 2 310 OUTPUT Agte507x TRG 320 PRINT Waiting 330 Meas_wait GOTO Meas_wait 340 Meas_end OFF INTR 7 350 PRINT Measurement Complete ...

Page 993: ... operation status event register s bit 4 is set to 1 only when the operation status condition register s bit 4 is changed from 1 to 0 negative transition Lines 230 to 240 These lines enable the operation status event register s bit 4 and status byte register s bit 7 Lines 250 to 270 These lines clear the status byte register and operation status event register Lines 290 to 300 These lines set the ...

Page 994: ...Occurrence of an Error for this programming The sequence interception by an error can not be performed on Excel VBA Sample Program in HT Basic srq_err bas 10 DIM Buff 9 Err_mes 50 20 INTEGER Err_no 30 40 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 50 60 OUTPUT Agte507x ESE 60 70 OUTPUT Agte507x SRE 32 80 OUTPUT Agte507x CLS 90 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 100 ENTER Agte507x Buff 110 120 ON INTR 7 GOTO Err_proc 130 ENABLE INTR ...

Page 995: ... bits 2 3 4 and 5 in the standard event status register and set bit 5 to 1 in the service request enable register Lines 80 to 100 These lines clear the status byte register the standard event status register and the error queue Lines 120 to 130 These lines set the branch target for an SRQ interrupt to enable SRQ interruptions Lines 140 to 260 These lines set the measurement parameters and their da...

Page 996: ...ce of the error the error number the error message and the message showing that the program is suspended Line 350 Displays a closing message Note that this message will not display unless this program is re executed after setting a corrected parameter to the data format setting for trace 2 ...

Page 997: ...urement Results for this programming Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub read_asc_Click Dim defrm As Long Dim vi As Long Dim Result As String 10000 Dim Res As Variant Dim Res2 As Variant Dim Nop As Long Const TimeOutTime 10000 Open the Analyzer Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Call viOpen defrm GPIB0 17 INSTR 0 0 vi Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE TimeOutTime Select Parameter 1 Call viVPrintf vi CA...

Page 998: ...lls of Excel Write data in cells of Excel j 0 For i 1 To Nop Cells i 5 1 i Cells i 5 3 Val Res j Cells i 5 4 Val Res j 1 j j 2 Next i Read out Measurement Frequency Data in ASCII transfer format Result Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 FREQ DATA vbLf 0 Call viVScanf vi t Result Res2 Split Result Write data in cells of Excel For i 1 To Nop Cells i 5 2 Val Res2 i 1 Next i Close the Analyzer Call viClose vi Ca...

Page 999: ...ansfer format 150 160 OUTPUT Agte507x FORM DATA ASC 170 180 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 DATA FDAT 190 ENTER Agte507x Fdata 200 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 FREQ DATA 210 ENTER Agte507x Freq 220 230 Displaying 240 250 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FORM 260 ENTER Agte507x Fmt 270 SELECT Fmt 280 CASE MLOG PHAS GDEL MLIN SWR REAL IMAG UPH 290 Img MD 4DE 2X MD 6DE 300 PRINT Frequency Data 310 FOR I 1 TO Nop 320 PRINT USING...

Page 1000: ...Programming 1227 380 PRINT USING Img Freq I Fdata I 1 Fdata I 2 390 NEXT I 400 END SELECT 410 420 END ...

Page 1001: ..._Click Dim defrm As Long Dim vi As Long Dim Result As String 10000 Dim Res As Double Dim Nop As Long Const TimeOutTime 10000 Open Analyzer Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Call viOpen defrm GPIB0 17 INSTR 0 0 vi Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE TimeOutTime Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 PAR1 SEL vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi INIT1 CONT OFF vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi ABOR vbLf 0 Reading out Measurement Frequen...

Page 1002: ...es i Next i Close Call viClose vi Call viClose defrm End Sub BinaryAry Read Subroutine Sub Scpi_read_binary_double_array vi As Long data As Double Nop As Long Dim dblArray 10000 As Double Dim paramsArray 3 As Long Dim err As Long Dim i As Long Dim lf_eoi As String 1 Nop UBound dblArray LBound dblArray 1 paramsArray 0 VarPtr Nop paramsArray 1 VarPtr dblArray 0 err viVScanf vi Zb 1t paramsArray 0 If...

Page 1003: ...REDIM Fdata 1 Nop 1 2 Freq 1 Nop 140 150 Reading out in binary transfer format 160 170 OUTPUT Agte507x FORM DATA REAL 180 190 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 DATA FDAT 200 ENTER Agte507x USING 8A Buff 210 ENTER Binary Fdata 220 ENTER Agte507x USING 1A Buff 230 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 FREQ DATA 240 ENTER Agte507x USING 8A Buff 250 ENTER Binary Freq 260 ENTER Agte507x USING 1A Buff 270 280 Displaying 290 300 OU...

Page 1004: ...op 370 PRINT USING Img Freq I Fdata I 1 380 NEXT I 390 CASE ELSE 400 Img MD 4DE 2X MD 6DE 2X MD 6DE 410 PRINT Frequency Data1 Data2 420 FOR I 1 TO Nop 430 PRINT USING Img Freq I Fdata I 1 Fdata I 2 440 NEXT I 450 END SELECT 460 470 END ...

Page 1005: ...INTEGER Nop 40 50 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 60 70 CALL Inp_file_name File 80 90 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 100 OUTPUT Agte507x INIT1 CONT OFF 110 OUTPUT Agte507x ABOR 120 130 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 SWE POIN 140 ENTER Agte507x Nop 150 REDIM Fdata 1 Nop 1 2 160 170 ON ERROR GOTO File_error 180 ASSIGN File TO File 190 ENTER File USING K Buff 200 ENTER File USING K Buff 210 ENTER File USING K Buff 220...

Page 1006: ...start 480 PRINT Input File Name 490 INPUT Name Inp_name 500 PRINT Input Name Inp_name 510 INPUT OK Y N Inp_char 520 IF UPC Inp_char Y THEN Inp_start 530 OFF ERROR 540 SUBEND Description Line 50 Assigns a GPIB address to the I O pass Line 70 Passes control to a subprogram named Inp_file_name which lets the user input a file name and then stores the returned file name into the File variable For more...

Page 1007: ...ine points to the statement block to be executed if an error occurs in retrieving data from the file for example if no file matches File Lines 180 to 260 These lines retrieve the formatted data from the file identified by File and store the data into the Fdata array Line 280 Sets the data transfer format to ASCII Line 300 Writes Fdata into the formatted data array for the active trace trace 1 in c...

Page 1008: ...Nop 40 50 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 60 ASSIGN Binary TO 717 FORMAT OFF 70 CALL Inp_file_name File 80 90 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 100 OUTPUT Agte507x INIT1 CONT OFF 110 OUTPUT Agte507x ABOR 120 130 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 SWE POIN 140 ENTER Agte507x Nop 150 REDIM Fdata 1 Nop 1 2 160 170 ON ERROR GOTO File_error 180 ASSIGN File TO File 190 ENTER File USING K Buff 200 ENTER File USING K Buff 210 ENT...

Page 1009: ...Inp_char 9 460 ON ERROR GOTO Inp_start 470 Inp_start 480 PRINT Input File Name 490 INPUT Name Inp_name 500 PRINT Input Name Inp_name 510 INPUT OK Y N Inp_char 520 IF UPC Inp_char Y THEN Inp_start 530 OFF ERROR 540 SUBEND Description Lines 50 to 60 Assigns a GPIB address to the I O pass Line 70 Passes control to a subprogram named Inp_file_name which lets the user input a file name and then stores ...

Page 1010: ... formatted data array for the active trace trace 1 in channel 1 following it with the data header Header Line 310 Sends the data itself Fdata following it with a message terminator Because binary data must be written without being formatted the program uses an I O path Binary that is configured to support writing unformatted data Lines 340 to 380 This statement block is executed if an error occurs...

Page 1011: ...E5071C 1238 These lines display the entered file name and waits for a confirmation entry y n key Line 520 Returns to the entry start line if the key the user pressed in line 870 is not the y key ...

Page 1012: ...ed Criteria for this programming Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub PeakSearch_Click Dim defrm As Long Dim vi As Long Const TimeOutTime 20000 Dim Buff As String Img As String Err_msg As String Dim Excursion As String Freq As String 20 Resp As Variant PeakPoint As Variant Dim Poin As String 5 Result As String 1000 errmsg As String 20 Excursion 0 5 Open Analyzer Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Call viOpen d...

Page 1013: ...Result Resp Split Result Cells 5 5 Value Val Freq Cells 5 6 Value Val Resp 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FUNC DOM OFF vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FUNC TYPE APE vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FUNC PEXC Excursion vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FUNC PPOL NEG vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FUNC EXEC vbLf 0 Call ErrorCheck vi Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FUNC POIN vbLf 0 Call viVScanf vi t Poin Call viVPrint...

Page 1014: ... Err_no 40 50 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 60 Excursion 5 70 80 OUTPUT Agte507x ESE 60 90 OUTPUT Agte507x SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Agte507x CLS 110 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 120 ENTER Agte507x Buff 130 ON INTR 7 GOTO Err 140 ENABLE INTR 7 2 150 160 PRINT Maximum Peak Search using Marker 1 170 180 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 190 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE PEAK 200 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 MARK1 FUNC PEXC E...

Page 1015: ...C PPOL POS 370 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FUNC EXEC 380 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FUNC POIN 390 ENTER Agte507x Poin 400 REDIM Result 1 Poin 1 2 410 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FUNC DATA 420 ENTER Agte507x Result 430 Img 4A 2D 2A MD 4DE 2X MD 6DE 440 PRINT Frequency Response 450 FOR I 1 TO Poin 460 PRINT USING Img Peak I Result I 2 Result I 1 470 NEXT I 480 GOTO No_err 490 Err OFF INTR 7 500 OUTPUT Agte507x SYST ...

Page 1016: ...gin Response End Response 1 MAX 847 5 MHz 905 0 MHz 55 0 dBm 55 0 dBm 2 MIN 935 0 MHz 960 0 MHz 3 5 dBm 3 5 dBm 3 MAX 935 0 MHz 960 0 MHz 0 dBm 0 dBm 4 MAX 980 0 MHz 1047 5 MHz 25 0 dBm 25 0 dBm See Limit Test for this programming Sample Program in HT Basic lim_test htb 10 DIM Param1 9 Param2 9 Fmt1 9 Fmt2 9 Buff 9 20 REAL Cent Span Lim1 1 4 1 5 Lim2 1 3 1 5 Fail_data 1 1601 30 INTEGER Num_of_seg1...

Page 1017: ...0E 8 Frequency Start 935 0 MHz 310 Lim1 3 3 9 600E 8 Stop 960 0 MHz 320 Lim1 3 4 0 Response Start 0 dBm 330 Lim1 3 5 0 Stop 0 dBm 340 Segment 4 350 Lim1 4 1 1 Type Maximum 360 Lim1 4 2 9 800E 8 Frequency Start 980 0 MHz 370 Lim1 4 3 1 0475E 9 Stop 1047 5 MHz 380 Lim1 4 4 25 Response Start 25 dBm 390 Lim1 4 5 25 Stop 25 dBm 400 Trace 2 Limit Line 410 Num_of_seg2 3 Number of segments 3 420 Segment 1...

Page 1018: ...C1 PAR1 COUN 2 640 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND1 SPL D1_2 650 OUTPUT Agte507x TRIG SOUR BUS 660 OUTPUT Agte507x INIT1 CONT ON 670 680 Trace 1 690 700 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 710 720 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 DEF Param1 730 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FORM Fmt1 740 750 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 LIM DATA Num_of_seg1 760 FOR Segment 1 TO Num_of_seg1 770 FOR Column 1 TO 5 780 OUTPUT Agte507x Lim1 Segment C...

Page 1019: ... Agte507x STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ENAB 6 1050 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 PTR 6 1060 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 NTR 0 1070 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT QUES LIM PTR 2 1080 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT QUES LIM NTR 0 1090 OUTPUT Agte507x CLS 1100 1110 OUTPUT Agte507x TRIG SING 1120 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 1130 ENTER Agte507x Buff 1140 1150 Checking test results 1160 1170 OUTPUT Agte507x STAT QUES LIM 1180...

Page 1020: ...a 1 Fail_point 1420 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 LIM REP 1430 ENTER Agte507x Fail_data 1440 PRINT Frequency 1450 FOR I 1 TO Fail_point 1460 PRINT USING 3X MD 4DE Fail_data I 1470 NEXT I 1480 END IF 1490 IF Tr2_judge 0 THEN 1500 PRINT Trace2 S11 PASS 1510 ELSE 1520 PRINT Trace2 S11 FAIL 1530 1540 Reading and displaying frequency at failed points 1550 1560 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR2 SEL 1570 OUTPUT Agte507...

Page 1021: ...s 160 to 390 These lines store the settings in trace 1 limit table into the Lim1 variable Line 410 Stores the number of segments in trace 2 limit table into the Num_of_seg2 variable Lines 420 to 590 These lines store the settings in trace 2 limit table into the Lim2 variable Lines 610 to 620 These lines configure the sweep range for channel 1 s sweep range using the center and span values containe...

Page 1022: ...s 920 to 980 These lines set up the limit table for trace 2 Lines 990 to 1000 These lines turn on the display of limit lines and the Limit Test feature for trace 2 Lines 1040 to 1060 These lines set under the questionable limit channel 1 status register the enable register and positive transition filter to 6 0000000000000110 in binary notation while setting the negative transition filter to 0 so t...

Page 1023: ...f the test result for channel 1 is Pass i e if Ch1_judge returns 0 Lines 1300 to 1660 These lines are executed if the test result for channel 1 is Fail i e if Ch1_judge returns 1 Line 1300 Notifies the user that the limit test result is Fail Line 1320 Displays a message indicating that trace 1 has passed the limit test if the test result for trace 1 is Pass i e if Tr1_judge returns 0 Lines 1340 to...

Page 1024: ...st result for trace 2 is Pass i e if Tr2_judge returns 0 Lines 1520 to 1650 If the test result for trace 2 is Fail i e if Tr2_judge returns 1 these lines notify the user that trace 2 has failed to pass the limit test and then retrieve and display the frequencies at the failed measurement points on trace 2 ...

Page 1025: ...riant Const TimeOutTime 10000 Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Call viOpen defrm GPIB0 17 INSTR 0 0 vi Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE TimeOutTime Threshhold 3 Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 FREQ CENT 947 5E6 vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 FREQ SPAN 200E6 vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 PAR1 DEF S21 vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y AUTO vbLf 0 Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 PAR1 SEL vbLf 0 Call viV...

Page 1026: ... DIM Buff 9 Err_msg 100 20 REAL Threshold Bwid Cent Q Loss 30 INTEGER Err_no 40 50 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 60 Threshold 3 70 80 OUTPUT Agte507x ESE 60 90 OUTPUT Agte507x SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Agte507x CLS 110 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 120 ENTER Agte507x Buff 130 ON INTR 7 GOTO Err 140 ENABLE INTR 7 2 150 160 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 170 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE MAX 180 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC...

Page 1027: ...wid 260 PRINT Center Frequency Cent 270 PRINT Q Q 280 PRINT Loss Loss 290 300 GOTO No_err 310 Err OFF INTR 7 320 OUTPUT Agte507x SYST ERR 330 ENTER Agte507x Err_no Err_msg 340 PRINT Error occurred 350 PRINT No Err_no Description Err_msg 360 No_err OFF INTR 7 370 END ...

Page 1028: ...ime 10000 Check whether file name textbox is empty or not If TextBox1 Text Then File_Name Trim TextBox1 Text File_Type Trim frmFileSave ComboBox1 Value Open connection to the E5071C Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Call viOpen defrm GPIB0 18 INSTR 0 0 vi Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE TimeOutTime Select Case File_Type Case 1 State State only Call viVPrintf vi MMEM STOR STYP STAT vbLf 0 Call vi...

Page 1029: ...End Sub Sample Program in HT Basic file_sav htb 10 DIM File 300 Inp_char 30 20 INTEGER Content 30 CLEAR SCREEN 40 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 50 60 ON ERROR GOTO Content_select 70 Content_select 80 PRINT Save Content Selection 90 PRINT Select Content 100 PRINT 1 State State only 110 PRINT 2 State State Cal 120 PRINT 3 State State Trace 130 PRINT 4 State State Cal Trace 140 PRINT 5 Trace Data CSV 150 PR...

Page 1030: ...TPUT Agte507x MMEM STOR STYP CDST 370 OUTPUT Agte507x MMEM STOR File sta 380 CASE 5 390 OUTPUT Agte507x MMEM STOR FDAT File csv 400 CASE 6 410 OUTPUT Agte507x MMEM STOR IMAG File bmp 420 END SELECT 430 440 END 450 460 File Name Input Function 470 480 SUB Inp_file_name Inp_name 490 DIM Inp_char 9 500 ON ERROR GOTO Inp_start 510 Inp_start 520 PRINT File Name Input 530 PRINT Input Save File Name with...

Page 1031: ...rogram in HT Basic file_xfr htb 10 DIM Src_file 50 Dst_file 50 Src_size_char 50 Inp_char 30 20 INTEGER Direction 30 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 40 50 CLEAR SCREEN 60 ON ERROR GOTO Direct_select 70 Direct_select 80 PRINT File Transfer 90 PRINT 1 E507x Controller 100 PRINT 2 Controller E507x 110 PRINT 120 PRINT Input 1 or 2 130 INPUT Number Inp_char 140 Direction IVAL Inp_char 10 150 IF Direction 1 OR Di...

Page 1032: ...420 File Transfer Function E507x Controller 430 440 SUB Copy_to_contr Agte507x Src_file Dst_file 450 DIM Img 32 Src_size_char 10 Buff 9 Err_msg 100 460 INTEGER Max_bsize Block_size Err_no 470 REAL Src_size 480 490 ON ERROR GOTO Skip_purge 500 PURGE Dst_file 510 Skip_purge OFF ERROR 520 CREATE Dst_file 1 530 ASSIGN Dst_file TO Dst_file 540 Max_bsize 24576 24KByte 550 560 OUTPUT Agte507x ESE 60 570 ...

Page 1033: ...size THEN 750 Block_size Max_bsize 760 ELSE 770 Block_size Src_size 780 END IF 790 800 ALLOCATE Dat Block_size 810 Img VAL Block_size A 820 ENTER Agte507x USING Img Dat 830 OUTPUT Dst_file USING Img Dat 840 DEALLOCATE Dat 850 860 Src_size Src_size Block_size 870 END WHILE 880 890 PRINT Done 900 ENTER Agte507x USING A Buff 910 ASSIGN Dst_file TO 920 930 GOTO Skip_error 940 Err OFF INTR 7 950 OUTPUT...

Page 1034: ...UTPUT Agte507x CLS 1150 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 1160 ENTER Agte507x Buff 1170 1180 PRINT Now Copying Src_file Controller Dst_file E507x 1190 Header VAL LEN Src_size_char Src_size_char 1200 OUTPUT Agte507x MMEM TRAN Dst_file Header 1210 1220 Src_size VAL Src_size_char 1230 WHILE Src_size 0 1240 IF Src_size Max_bsize THEN 1250 Block_size Max_bsize 1260 ELSE 1270 Block_size Src_size 1280 END IF 1290 1300...

Page 1035: ...re enter the data if an error such as an invalid entry occurs while entering the number that indicates the transfer direction Then these line display the list of transfer directions and prompt the user to input a selected number Lines 80 to 130 These lines display the list of transfer directions and prompt the user to choose one of the items by typing in the appropriate number Lines 140 to 150 Con...

Page 1036: ...on the external controller Line 370 If Direction is equal to 2 these lines use the subprogram Copy_to_e507x to transfer copy a file with the name Src_file on the external controller to a file with the name Dst_file on the E5071C Copy_to_contr a subprogram for transferring files from the E5071C to the external controller that appears in lines 440 to 1000 is described below Lines 490 to 520 If any f...

Page 1037: ...ize these lines assign the value of the Max_bsize to Block_size variable transferred data in bytes If Src_size is equal or less than Max_bsize assign the value of Src_size to Block_size Line 800 This line defines Dat string variable with the size as large as Block_size and reserves memory area Line 810 This line creates a format for reading characters as many as Block_size characters Line 820 This...

Page 1038: ...e_char to a real number and stores it into Src_size variable Lines 1230 to 1370 These lines repeat the procedures below until Src_size reaches 0 Lines 1240 to 1280 If Src_size is greater than Max_bsize these lines assign the value of the Max_bsiize to Block_size variable transferred data in bytes If Src_size is equal or less than Max_bsize assign the value of Src_size to Block_size Line 1300 This ...

Page 1039: ...ariables Err_no and Err_msg respectively Lines 1440 to 1490 If Err_no is equal to 0 no error occurred these lines display the message indicating completion of transfer and if Err_no is not equal to 0 an error occurred display Err_no along with Err_msg Lines 1510 to 1520 These lines handle the case with no source file for copying is found ...

Page 1040: ...ort DUT See Analysis Using the Fixture Simulator for this programming Sample Program in Excel VBA Sub Fixture_Click Dim defrm As Long Session to Default Resource Manager Dim vi As Long Session to instrument Dim Para As String Dim Dev_Type As String Dim Dmc_c As Double Dim Dmc_g As Double Dim Dmc_l As Double Dim Dmc_r As Double Dim Z0_se As Double Dim Z0_diff As Double Dim Port 3 As Integer Dim Res...

Page 1041: ...lance conversion Call ErrorCheck vi Checking the error Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PLPC vbLf 0 Specifies the type of differential matching circuit Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PAR C Dmc_c vbLf 0 Sets the differential matching circuit constants C Call viVPrintf vi CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PAR G Dmc_g vbLf 0 Sets the differential matching circuit constants G Call viVPrin...

Page 1042: ...reaks the communication and terminates the VISA system End End Sub Sub ErrorCheck vi As Long Dim err As String 50 ErrNo As Variant Response Call viVQueryf vi SYST ERR vbLf t err Reads error message ErrNo Split err Gets the error code If Val ErrNo 0 0 Then Response MsgBox CStr ErrNo 1 vbOKOnly Display the message box End If End Sub Sample Program in HT Basic fixture htb 10 DIM Dev_type 9 Para 9 20 ...

Page 1043: ...L DMC BPOR1 PLPC 290 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PAR C Dmc_c 300 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PAR G Dmc_g 310 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PAR L Dmc_l 320 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 PAR R Dmc_r 330 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC STAT ON 340 350 Z Conversion Setting 360 370 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FSIM SEND ZCON PORT2 Z0 Z0_se 380 OUTPUT Agte507x...

Page 1044: ...Programming 1271 500 END ...

Page 1045: ...l VBA Sub Time_Domain_Click Dim defrm As Long Session to Default Resource Manager Dim vi As Long Session to instrument Dim Para As String Dim Tran_Type As String Dim Stim_Type As String Dim stop_freq As Double Dim Win_Beta As Double Dim Star_Time As Double Dim Stop_Time As Double Dim Result As String Const TimeOutTime 40000 timeout time stop_freq 3000000000 Stop Frequendy 3 GHz Nop 201 Nop 201 Par...

Page 1046: ...tf vi TRIG SOUR BUS vbLf 0 Sets the trigger source to BUS Call ErrorCheck vi Checking the error MsgBox Connect Port1 to Ecal Module Then click OK button vbOKOnly Display the message box Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT1 1 vbLf 0 Execute the 1 port calibration Call viVPrintf vi OPC vbLf 0 Sets the OPC command Call viVScanf vi t Result Reads the OPC result Call ErrorCheck vi Checking the ...

Page 1047: ...f vi CALC1 FORM REAL vbLf 0 Sets the real data format Call viVPrintf vi DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y AUTO vbLf 0 Execute auto scale Call ErrorCheck vi Checking the error Call viClose vi Closes the resource manager session Call viClose defrm Breaks the communication and terminates the VISA system End End End Sub Sample Program in HT Basic 10 DIM Para 9 Tran_type 9 Stim_type 9 Buff 9 Inp_ch ar 9 20 REAL Stop_...

Page 1048: ...T1 1 310 OUTPUT Agte507x SYST ERR 320 ENTER Agte507x Buff 330 340 Measurement 350 360 PRINT Set DUT Then Push Enter key 370 INPUT Inp_char 380 390 OUTPUT Agte507x TRIG SING 400 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 410 ENTER Agte507x Buff 420 430 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y AUTO 440 PRINT Push Enter key Time Domain Transform 450 INPUT Inp_char 460 470 Time Domain Transform 480 490 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 TRAN ...

Page 1049: ...E5071C 1276 540 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 TRAN TIME STAT ON 550 560 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 570 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 FORM REAL 580 OUTPUT Agte507x DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y AUTO 590 END ...

Page 1050: ...d to make the preparations described in Control over SICL LAN server Sample Program in Excel VBA Opening ctrl_lansicl xls in Microsoft Excel displays a screen as shown in the figure below ctrl_lansicl xls For how to use each element in ctrl_lansicl xls refer to the following description 1 In part 1 in the cell to the right of the SICL LAN Address enter the address of the E5071C for control with th...

Page 1051: ...ce in part 5 retrieves the formatted data array of trace 1 in channel 1 The data is displayed in tabular and graphical format Description of Operation in VBA macro This section describes the operation of the VBA macro focusing on the part related to control with SICL In order to use SICL in your VBA macro you must declare functions and define variables with a SICL definition file for VB In the VBA...

Page 1052: ... OpenSession establishes a connection to the E5071C with the iopen function of SICL using the SICL LAN Address and IP Address entered in part 1 in ctrl_lansicl xls The iopen function takes the address information of the E5071C you specify as its parameters Syntax addr iopen dev Variable addr Description Session information output Data type Integer type dev Description Address information of the in...

Page 1053: ...ler Get Sicl Lan Address Sheets Sheet1 Select Range C2 Select ServAddr ActiveCell FormulaR1C1 Get Ip Address Sheets Sheet1 Select Range C3 Select IpAddr ActiveCell FormulaR1C1 OpenSession iopen lan IpAddr hpib9 ServAddr Call itimeout OpenSession 10000 Exit Function ErrHandler MsgBox Error Error Call siclcleanup End End Function Sending The procedure corresponding to sending in communication is Out...

Page 1054: ...input Data type Integer type mes Description Program message input Data type Character string type OutputSiclLan Sub OutputSiclLan addr As Integer message As String Dim Status As Integer Dim actualcnt As Long Dim length As Long On Error GoTo ErrHandler length Len message Status ivprintf addr message Chr 10 Exit Sub ErrHandler MsgBox Error Error Call siclcleanup End ...

Page 1055: ... the data to be output as its parameters Syntax Status ivscanf addr fmt ap Variable fmt Description Format for output input Data type Character string type ap Description Data to be output output Data type Character string type For information on the variable Status and the variable addr refer to Variable In Visual Basic variables must be declared as a fixed length string when receiving string dat...

Page 1056: ...nd store it into the output variable The iread function takes the session information output from the iopen function the data to be output the number of data bytes the condition to finish reading data and the number of data bytes actually read out as its parameters Syntax Status iread addr buf bufsize reason actual Variable buf Description Data to be output output Data type Character string type b...

Page 1057: ...trace 1 in channel 1 and stores it into the databuf variable 4 Retrieves the message terminator at the end of the data EnterSiclLanArrayReal64 Function EnterSiclLanArrayReal64 addr As Integer databuf As Double As Long Dim Status As Integer Dim actualcnt As Long Dim buf As String 8 Dim size As Long On Error GoTo ErrHandler Read header info of 6NNNNNN Status iread addr buf 8 I_TERM_MAXCNT actualcnt ...

Page 1058: ...rmation on the variable Status and the variable addr refer to Variable Sample control The E5071C can be controlled by executing the above procedures in order following the control flow in Flow of control using SICL This is demonstrated by the Preset procedure a procedure that is executed when the Preset button is clicked as described in Preset Preset Sub Preset Open Session E507x OpenSession Prese...

Page 1059: ...onment Sample Program in Excel VBA Opening ctrl_lan xls in Microsoft Excel displays the screen shown in the figure below ctrl_lan xls For how to use each element in ctrl_lan xls refer to the following description 1 Enter the version number of WinSock API in the cell to the right side of Winsock Version The version number is obtained by multiplying 256 by the major version and then adding the minor...

Page 1060: ...ble while clicking the button labeled Query retrieves the current settings of the E5071C 5 In part 5 click Auto Scale to execute auto scaling for trace 1 in channel 1 6 Click Read Trace in part 6 to retrieve the formatted data of trace 1 in channel 1 The data is displayed in tabular and graphical formats 7 Click Preset to execute the presetting operation Description of operation in VBA macro This ...

Page 1061: ...sockaddr_in sin_family As Integer sin_port As Integer sin_addr As Long sin_zero As String 8 End Type Public Const WSADESCRIPTION_LEN 256 Public Const WSASYS_STATUS_LEN 128 Public Const WSA_DescriptionSize WSADESCRIPTION_LEN 1 Public Const WSA_SysStatusSize WSASYS_STATUS_LEN 1 Setup the structure for the information returned from the WSAStartup function Type WSAData wVersion As Integer wHighVersion...

Page 1062: ...tocols e g BSP Public Const AF_CHAOS 5 mit CHAOS protocols Public Const AF_NS 6 XEROX NS protocols Public Const AF_ISO 7 ISO protocols Public Const AF_OSI AF_ISO OSI is ISO Public Const AF_ECMA 8 european computer manufacturers Public Const AF_DATAKIT 9 datakit protocols Public Const AF_CCITT 10 CCITT protocols X 25 etc Public Const AF_SNA 11 IBM SNA Public Const AF_DECnet 12 DECnet Public Const A...

Page 1063: ...l Alias recv ByVal s As Long buf As Any ByVal buflen As Long ByVal flags As Long As Long Public Declare Function send Lib wsock32 dll ByVal s As Long buf As Any ByVal buflen As Long ByVal flags As Long As Long Public Declare Function socket Lib wsock32 dll ByVal af As Long ByVal socktype As Long ByVal protocol As Long As Long Public Declare Function WSAStartup Lib wsock32 dll ByVal wVersionRequire...

Page 1064: ...rtIt StartIt launches and initializes WinSock API with WSAStartup whose version is shown in part 1 of ctrl_ lan xls The function WSAStartup should always be used when initiating WinSock This function takes the version number input and launching information output as its parameters StartIt Sub StartIt Dim StartUpInfo As WSAData Version 1 1 1 256 1 257 ...

Page 1065: ...criptor is obtained If an error occurs the control returns to the main program with a message The socket function takes an address family input a socket type input and a protocol number input as its parameters In 3 the socket address is specified Note that htons which is used for specifying the port number is a function of WinSock API This function converts a 2 byte integer from the Windows byte o...

Page 1066: ...ketAddress Len I_SocketAddress If socketId SOCKET_ERROR Then MsgBox ERROR connect Str x 4 OpenSocket COMMAND_ERROR Exit Function End If OpenSocket socketId End Function Communication The procedure corresponding to Communication is SendCommand SendCommand transmits a message SCPI command specified with the input parameter command to the E5071C using the send function of WinSock API The send functio...

Page 1067: ...s using the recv function of WinSock API If an error occurs the control returns to the main program with a message The recv function takes a socket descriptor input a message to be received input message length input and a flag input as its parameters In 2 it is determined whether each received character is LF ASCII code 10 When it is LF receiving is terminated by adding NULL ASCII code 0 to the e...

Page 1068: ...CloseConnection disconnects communication and removes a socket using the closesocket function of WinSock API The closesocket function takes a socket descriptor input as its parameter c Sub CloseConnection x closesocket socketId If x SOCKET_ERROR Then MsgBox ERROR closesocket Str x Exit Sub End If End Sub End The procedure corresponding to End is EndIt EndIt disconnects WinSock API using the WSACle...

Page 1069: ... the procedure autoscale a procedure that is executed when the Auto Scale button is clicked as described in autoscale autoscale Sub autoscale auto scaling Call StartIt Call get_hostname x OpenSocket Hostname ScpiPort x SendCommand DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y AUTO Call CloseConnection Call EndIt End Sub When you execute more than one command by connecting and disconnecting a socket for every command the seq...

Page 1070: ...pdates the screen once This program repeats this measurement procedure ten times See Improving Command Processing Speed for this programming Sample Program in HT Basic cont_upd htb 10 REAL Trace1 1 201 1 2 Trace2 1 201 1 2 20 DIM Buff 9 Img 30 30 INTEGER Nop I 40 50 ASSIGN Agte507x TO 717 60 ASSIGN Binary TO 717 FORMAT OFF 70 80 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 SWE TYPE LIN 90 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 FREQ CENT...

Page 1071: ...0 OUTPUT Agte507x TRIG SING 340 OUTPUT Agte507x OPC 350 ENTER Agte507x Buff 360 370 Read Trace Data 380 390 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR1 SEL 400 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 DATA FDAT 410 ENTER Agte507x USING 8A Buff 420 ENTER Binary Trace1 430 ENTER Agte507x USING 1A Buff 440 450 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 PAR2 SEL 460 OUTPUT Agte507x CALC1 DATA FDAT 470 ENTER Agte507x USING 8A Buff 480 ENTER Binary Trace2 490...

Page 1072: ...Lines 210 to 270 These lines set the number of traces for channel 1 to 2 the measurement parameter and its data format for trace 1 to S21 and Log Mag respectively and those for trace 2 to S11 and Log Mag respectively Line 290 This line turns Off the updating of the LCD screen Line 300 This line sets the data transfer format to binary Lines 320 to 540 These lines repeat the following procedure ten ...

Page 1073: ...g Session to instrument Dim Out_Data As Integer Decimal value Dim In_Data As Long Dim Bit_stat As Integer Dim Flag_bit As Integer Dim Out_Data_Bin As String Dim Ret As Long Return value Dim i As Long Dim X As Long Const TimeOutTime 40000 timeout time Out_Data_Bin 00000101 Store the output data on the port A binaly Flag_bit 3 Bit location bit 3 Call viOpenDefaultRM defrm Initializes the VISA system...

Page 1074: ...Ret vbLf 0 Sets to the port A Call viVPrintf vi CONT HAND C vbLf 0 Outputs data to output port C Call viVScanf vi t In_Data Reads data from the port C Call ErrorCheck vi Checking the error Call viClose vi Closes the resource manager session Call viClose defrm Breaks the communication and terminates the VISA system End End Sub Sub ErrorCheck vi As Long Dim err As String 50 ErrNo As Variant Response...

Page 1075: ...AND C MODE INP 100 OUTPUT Agte507x CONT HAND IND STAT ON 110 OUTPUT Agte507x CONT HAND RTR STAT ON 120 130 Out_data IVAL Out_data_bin 2 140 OUTPUT Agte507x CONT HAND A Out_data 150 160 REPEAT 170 OUTPUT Agte507x CONT HAND C 180 ENTER Agte507x In_data 190 Bit_stat BIT In_data Flag_bit 200 UNTIL Bit_stat 1 210 END ...

Page 1076: ... Program in Excel VBA Sub e5091ctrl_Click Dim defrm As Long Session to Default Resource Manager Dim vi As Long Session to instrument Dim Port1 As String Dim Port2 As String Dim Port3 As String Dim Port4 As String Dim Line1 As String Dim Line2 As String Dim Line3 As String Dim Line4 As String Dim Line5 As String Dim Line6 As String Dim Line7 As String Dim Line8 As String Dim Data_Bin As String Dim ...

Page 1077: ... state of the ENA Call viVPrintf vi CLS vbLf 0 Clears the all status register Call viVPrintf vi SENS1 MULT1 NAME Model vbLf 0 Specifies the test set name Call viVPrintf vi SENS MULT PORT1 Port1 vbLf 0 Sets the port assigned to port 1 to A Call viVPrintf vi SENS MULT PORT2 Port2 vbLf 0 Sets the port assigned to port 2 to T2 Call viVPrintf vi SENS MULT PORT3 Port3 vbLf 0 Sets the port assigned to po...

Page 1078: ... viClose defrm Breaks the communication and terminates the VISA system End End End Sub Sub ErrorCheck vi As Long Dim err As String 50 ErrNo As Variant Response Call viVQueryf vi SYST ERR vbLf t err Reads error message ErrNo Split err Gets the error code If Val ErrNo 0 0 Then Response MsgBox CStr ErrNo 1 vbOKOnly Display the message box End If End Sub Sample Program in HT Basic e5091ctr_2 htb 10 DI...

Page 1079: ...ne7 Low 230 Line8 0 Line8 Low 240 250 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 MULT1 NAME Model 260 270 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 MULT1 PORT1 Port1 280 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 MULT1 PORT2 Port2 290 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 MULT1 PORT3 Port3 300 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 MULT1 PORT4 Port4 310 320 Data_bin Line8 Line7 Line6 Line5 Line4 Line3 Line2 Line1 330 Data_dec IVAL Data_bin 2 340 OUTPUT Agte507x SENS1 MULT1 OUTP Data_dec 350...

Page 1080: ...Programming Built in VBA Programming Introduction to VBA Programming Operation Basics Controlling E5071C Controlling Peripherals Application Programs Complex Operation Library Waveform Analysis Library Other topics about Programming ...

Page 1081: ...71C 1308 Introduction to VBA Programming Introduction to VBA Programming Introduction of the E5071C Macro Function An Overview of a Control System Based on the Macro Function Overview of E5071C COM Object ...

Page 1082: ... guides and various books on VBA For information on the basic operating procedures for the E5071C s VBA see Operation Basics This manual is not meant to be an in depth guide to VBA programming basics and the syntax of VBA functions and commands Such in depth information is covered in VBA Help Microsoft official guides and various books on VBA The built in VBA can not control the ENA option TDR app...

Page 1083: ...E5071C 1310 familiarity with the E5071C thus minimizing the possibility of human error ...

Page 1084: ...assified into two types As shown in the following figure a VBA control system controls the E5071C itself while a VBA remote control system controls peripherals When you use the macro function to control peripherals you must connect the E5071C with the peripherals through USB GPIB interface USB or LAN and configure them to communicate over VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture For informati...

Page 1085: ...n objects specific to the COM interface and COM objects that correspond to SCPI commands Controlling a Peripheral When you want to control a peripheral you can create a program using VISA library functions within the E5071C VBA environment For information on using the VISA library see Controlling Peripherals For a complete description of VISA functions refer to the VISA library s online help For i...

Page 1086: ...rty A property allows you to read or write a setting or attribute of an object With the E5071C you can use properties to set or read the settings of the E5071C You can find properties in the list of object types in COM Object Reference Method A method allows you to manipulate an object in a particular way With the E5071C you can use methods to perform specific tasks You can find methods in the lis...

Page 1087: ...he E5071C s VBA Major Control Difference between COM Object and SCPI Command While the control using SCPI commands allows SRQ Service Request interrupts through the status reporting mechanism the control using COM objects does not support SRQ interrupts Instead of SRQ interrupts you can use the WaitOnSRQ object to suspend the program until the E5071C is put into the desired state ...

Page 1088: ... Editor Switching to the E5071C Measurement Screen Making a Preparation Before Coding Coding a VBA Program Saving a VBA program Loading a VBA Program Running a VBA Program Stopping a VBA Program Errors and Debugging Printing Output Values in the Echo Window Uses Advanced Techniques Using VBA Online Help ...

Page 1089: ...ch Visual Basic Editor using one of the following methods 1 Macro Setup VBA Editor 2 Press Alt F11 keys on the keyboard Initial Screen of Visual Basic Editor When you launch Visual Basic Editor it displays the initial screen which contains a number of windows as shown in the following figure The initial screen provides the following GUI elements Example of Visual Basic Editor initial screen 1 Menu...

Page 1090: ...a number of files modules Project Explorer shows a list of all files modules that make up a project The list also includes files modules created or loaded in Visual Basic Editor For information on modules refer to A Project and Three Types of Module To display the project explorer do one of the following 1 On the View menu click Project Explorer 2 Press Ctrl R keys on the keyboard 3 On the toolbar...

Page 1091: ...E5071C 1318 To display the properties window do one of the following 1 On the View menu click Properties Window 2 Press F4 key on the keyboard 3 On the toolbar click ...

Page 1092: ...l Basic Editor press Alt Q keys on the keyboard Macro Setup Close Editor E5071C measurement screen Whenever you launch Visual Basic Editor it automatically displays the project files you were working with in the previous session However once you turn off the power to the E5071C the project files kept in memory will be lost therefore it is strongly recommended to save your VBA programs before you t...

Page 1093: ...ou can switch to the E5071C measurement screen without closing Visual Basic Editor On the View menu click E5071 Press Alt F11 keys on the keyboard On the toolbar click E5071C icon Press Focus key on the E5071C front panel Other topics about Operation Basics ...

Page 1094: ...r form is saved with the file extension frm Standard module A standard module contains a collection of one or more procedures subprograms enclosed between Sub and End Sub One typical use of a standard module is to contain shared subroutines and globally called functions The standard module is saved with the file extension bas Class Module A class module contains both data and procedures and acts a...

Page 1095: ... project see Saving a Project Inserting the User Form Within Visual Basic Editor do one of the following to add a user form to your project 1 On the Insert menu click UserForm 2 On the toolbar click Insert User Form Standard Module Class Module Procedure icon and click UserForm 3 In Project Explorer right click the VBAProject icon and click Insert UserForm 4 Adding a user form does not automatical...

Page 1096: ...ing to add a standard module to your project 1 On the Insert menu click Module 2 On the toolbar click Insert User Form Standard Module Class Module Procedure icon and click Module 3 In Project Explorer right click the VBAProject icon and click Insert Module Adding a standard module class module ...

Page 1097: ... On the toolbar click Insert User Form Standard Module Class Module Procedure icon and click ClassModule 3 In Project Explorer right click the VBAProject icon and click Insert ClassModule Deleting Modules You can delete any unnecessary module from the project within Visual Basic Editor The following procedure assumes that you want to delete a class module named Class1 ...

Page 1098: ...light it 2 Delete the Class1 class module using one of the following methods a On the File menu click Remove Class1 b Click the right mouse button and click Remove Class1 3 When you are prompted to confirm whether to export save Class1 click No Alternatively you can click Yes if you want to save the module ...

Page 1099: ...s the maximum value contained in an array so you can gain insight into how to create your own programs User Interface Elements of a Code Window A code window is where you code a VBA program When you are working with a user form you can open the code window for that user form by double clicking a control such as a button or text box placed on the form Similarly when you are working with a standard ...

Page 1100: ...window When you are working with a user form this provides a list of events actions such as click or double click 3 Margin indicator bar Primarily intended for use when debugging a program 4 Show Procedure button Displays only the procedure at the cursor position 5 Show Module button Displays the entire program contained in the code window Creating a Simple VBA Program ...

Page 1101: ...in an array 10 Option Explicit 20 30 Sub Maximum 40 50 Dim q As Variant 60 Dim x 100 As Integer 70 Dim i As Integer n As Integer 80 Dim Start As Integer Last As Integer Num As Integer 90 Dim Maximum As Integer 100 110 Defining the array 120 q Array 7 2 3 20 15 6 27 12 9 5 18 23 _ 130 9 16 22 0 140 150 Start LBound q 160 Last UBound q 170 Num Last Start 1 180 190 For i Start To Last 200 x i q i 210...

Page 1102: ...s Integer For a complete list of statements and data types supported by VBA see VBA Online Help Line 110 Any text preceded by a comment indicator is treated as a comment Lines 120 to 130 These lines use VBA s Array function to initialize the array The q array contains elements delimited with commas in the ascending order of index numbers zero based A combination of a space and underscore _ is used...

Page 1103: ...pe of variables and procedures Auto complete Feature When you use COM objects in Visual Basic Editor the editor s auto complete feature allows you to easily type in keywords without misspelling them The following procedure assumes that you are entering the SCPI INITiate Ch CONTinuous object 1 In a standard module type sub main and press the Enter key End Sub is automatically added 2 Typing scpi fo...

Page 1104: ...oject File icon Press Ctrl S keys on the keyboard 2 The Save As dialog box appears Specify the file name and location drive or folder and click Save E5071C Saving a Project from the E5071C Measurement Screen 1 Display the E5071C measurement screen following the instructions given in Switching to the E5071C Measurement Screen 2 Open the Save As dialog box using the following key sequence Macro Setu...

Page 1105: ... doing one of the following On the File menu click Export File Click the right mouse button and click Export File Press Ctrl E keys on the keyboard c The Export File dialog box appears Specify the file name and location drive or folder and click Save ...

Page 1106: ... Setup key then click Load Project o When the another project has already been loaded on the Visual Basic Editor the message whether or not the current project is saved may appear If you want to save the project click Yes button to display a dialog box for saving For saving the project see Saving a Project 2 The Open dialog box appears Specify the file name and location drive or folder of the file...

Page 1107: ...ad vba If there is the file named autoload vba in both the A drive and the D drive the file in the A drive is used Loading a Module Importing To load a saved module into a project you must use Visual Basic Editor 1 In Project Explorer click the file name that appears under the desired module icon to highlight it 2 Open the Import File dialog box by doing one of the following On the File menu click...

Page 1108: ... name Specify the file name of the module you want to load 3 Files of type Select the type of the file you want load Normally you should select VB Files frm bas cls 4 Open Clicking this button loads the module 5 Cancel Clicking this button closes the Import File dialog box and brings you back to the main screen 6 Help Clicking this button brings up VBA Online Help ...

Page 1109: ...icates that the program is stopped Instrument status bar indicating the status of the VBA program Running a Previously Loaded VBA Program Running a Program from Visual Basic Editor The E5071C allows you to run a previous loaded VBA program using one of the four methods listed below 1 Open the Macros dialog box by doing either one of the following On the Run menu click Run Macro On the Tools menu c...

Page 1110: ...button brings up Visual Basic Editor and put it into step in mode where the selected VBA program is run step by step This mode is primarily intended for use when debugging a VBA program For more information on step in mode see Debug Toolbar 6 Edit Displays the code of the selected VBA program You can use this for re editing your code 7 Create This button is normally dimmed 8 Delete Clicking this b...

Page 1111: ...ubprograms enclosed between Sub and End Sub in a standard module Loading and Executing Programs in Batch Process This section describes how to load and execute a program VBA project in a batch process by pressing the softkey corresponding to the program name 1 Save the VBA program VBA project file into the following folder D VBA o This feature is available only for programs saved in D VBA This fea...

Page 1112: ...layed as softkeys is 50 File names of the VBA projects saved in D VBA are displayed as softkeys in alphabetical order The maximum number of characters that can be displayed in a softkey is 12 If a file name has 13 or more characters is added to the 12th character from the beginning of the program name and displayed In this case a vba extension is omitted ...

Page 1113: ...Setup Stop E5071C measurement screen Press Macro Break key on the E5071C front panel 2 A dialog box is displayed through forced interrupts and the program is suspended Select one of the following Continue Resumes the execution of the program End Terminates the VBA program Debug Displays a run time error Help Brings up VBA Online Help Abruptly Terminating a VBA Program This section describes how to...

Page 1114: ...Programming 1341 To terminate the running VBA program do one of the following On the Run menu click Reset On the toolbar click Reset Macro icon Insert an End statement into your code ...

Page 1115: ...e misspelled keywords generate syntax errors An error dialog box appears that indicates the error message and highlight the invalid statement in red To get detailed information on the error click the HELP button in the error dialog box to display the help topic on the error You cannot run the macro until you correct the syntax error The E5071C VBA environment is by default configured to automatica...

Page 1116: ...nt that caused the error In this case the statement in question is highlighted in yellow Some run time errors occur under particular conditions even though a program run without occurring the errors under normal conditions For example the Target value not found error that occurs when a program that analyzes the results using the Marker Bandwidth Search feature fail to perform bandwidth search beca...

Page 1117: ...l to another procedure that procedure is also run step by step 3 Step over keyboard Shift F8 Runs the VBA program step by step If the current program contains a call to another procedure that procedure is run as one line 4 Step out keyboard Ctrl Shift F8 Executes the remaining lines of the function where the execution point is currently placed 5 Local window Opens the local window that shows the c...

Page 1118: ... the desired line of code and click the Set clear break points button on the debug toolbar Click anywhere in the margin indicator bar of the code window Setting a break point Monitoring Variable or Property Values With your VBA program suspended you can use the following debug tool to monitor variables or properties To do this you must set a break point run the VBA program and suspend it Data Hint...

Page 1119: ...er a question mark followed by the variable or expression whose value you want to check and press the Enter key as shown in the following figure The current value appears in the line that follows Immediate window Watch Window To display the watch window click the Watch Window button on the debug toolbar Watch window ...

Page 1120: ...ick the OK button Add Watch dialog box Quick Watch In the code window select a variable or expression whose value you want to watch On the debug toolbar click the Quick Watch button to open the Quick Watch dialog box The dialog box displays the current value of your specified variable or expression Also you can click the Add button in the Quick Watch dialog box to specify the current expression as...

Page 1121: ...he COM objects listed below to enter values output to the echo window ECHO SCPI DISPlay ECHO DATA Opening Echo Window You can use the COM objects listed below to open the echo window SCPI DISPlay TABLe TYPE SCPI DISPlay TABLe STATe Alternatively you can also open the echo window using the following key sequence Macro Setup Echo Window ON Clearing Values Output from Echo Window You can use the COM ...

Page 1122: ...OM objects by opening Object Browser within Visual Basic Editor 1 To open Object Browser do one of the following On the View menu click Object Browser On the toolbar click Object Browser icon 2 Select E5071Lib from the Project Library box to display the E5071C library as shown in the following figure 3 There are some COM objects NOT used in controlling with E5071C VBA in the list of the E5071C COM...

Page 1123: ...tically referenced libraries Conditions Directory where the library resides D Agilent Extensions of libraries olb tlb dll or ocx To check the library reference setting you must use Visual Basic Editor Follow these steps to check the library reference setting On the Tools menu click References A project sets the library reference when the project is created Therefore if the existing project is load...

Page 1124: ...Programming 1351 the development of the project are not automatically set in the library reference ...

Page 1125: ...ow to use a particular feature In VBA Online Help you can find a topic of interest through the Contents or by entering specific keywords Accessing VBA Online Help From Visual Basic Editor do one of the following to access the VBA Online Help screen On the Help menu click Microsoft Visual Basic Help Press F1 key on the keyboard On the toolbar click VBA Help icon VBA Online Help screen ...

Page 1126: ...es of information Format of VBA program is covered in Visual Basic Conceptual Topics Properties and methods supported by VBA are covered in Visual Basic Language Reference and Visual Basic Add In Model Information on using user forms is covered in Microsoft Forms Reference Using the Index Tab In the VBA Online Help screen click the Index tab and enter a keyword s into the text box For example you ...

Page 1127: ...E5071C 1354 Controlling E5071C Controlling E5071C Detecting the End of Measurement Reading Writing Measurement Data Executing a Procedure with a Softkey User Menu Function ...

Page 1128: ...ur program is based on SPCI commands you can use SRQ Service Request interrupts to detect the end of measurement On the other hand if your program is based on COM objects SRQ interrupts are not available instead you can use the following object to suspend the program until SRQs are generated upon completion of measurement WaitOnSRQ Sample program is available to download from the Agilent Support p...

Page 1129: ...scription of the code window 3 The program exits and the UserForm disappears In Visual Basic Editor open the UserForm object name frmSrqMeas and double click the Meas or Exit button to bring up the code window The following is the description of the subprograms associated with the respective buttons Procedure called when the user clicks the Exit button on the UserForm lines 10 to 50 Line 30 Unload...

Page 1130: ...ster s bit 4 is changed from 1 to 0 negative transition Line 280 Enables the operation status event register s bit 4 Line 290 Enables the status byte register s bit 7 Line 300 Clears the status byte register and operation status event register Line 310 Triggers the instrument to start a measurement cycle Line 320 Verifies that the instrument is in a measurement cycle and suspends the program until...

Page 1131: ...alue 180 SCPI INITiate 3 CONTinuous optOn3 Value 190 SCPI INITiate 4 CONTinuous optOn4 Value 200 SCPI INITiate 5 CONTinuous optOn5 Value 210 SCPI INITiate 6 CONTinuous optOn6 Value 220 SCPI INITiate 7 CONTinuous optOn7 Value 230 SCPI INITiate 8 CONTinuous optOn8 Value 240 SCPI INITiate 9 CONTinuous optOn9 Value 250 260 SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 270 SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition 16 28...

Page 1132: ...erForm Uses the SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGle and SCPI IEEE4882 OPC objects to suspend the program until the end of measurement mdlSingMeas Standard module Invokes a UserForm This sample program correctly runs when the maximum number of channels traces is set 9 channels 9 traces When you run this VBA program a Userform appears In Visual Basic Editor open the UserForm object name frmSingMeas and dou...

Page 1133: ...Line 260 Triggers the instrument to start a measurement cycle Line 270 Executes the SCPI IEEE4882 OPC object to suspend the program until the value of 1 is returned indicating the end of measurement Line 290 Displays a measurement completion message Line 310 Displays the UserForm object name frmSingMeas on the screen Using the SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGle object to suspend the program until the en...

Page 1134: ...CONTinuous optOn3 Value 190 SCPI INITiate 4 CONTinuous optOn4 Value 200 SCPI INITiate 5 CONTinuous optOn5 Value 210 SCPI INITiate 6 CONTinuous optOn6 Value 220 SCPI INITiate 7 CONTinuous optOn7 Value 230 SCPI INITiate 8 CONTinuous optOn8 Value 240 SCPI INITiate 9 CONTinuous optOn9 Value 250 260 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGle 270 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 280 290 MsgBox Measurement Completion 300 310 frm...

Page 1135: ...SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA SDATa SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA SMEMory To read a stimulus data array use the following objects SCPI SENSe Ch FREQuency DATA The E5071C VBA allows you to deal with multiple pieces of data through variables of Variant type Variant variables can contain any type of data allowing you to deal with array data without being aware of the number of elements For exampl...

Page 1136: ...e 1 statement which specifies the use of the base array index of 1 For example you may wish to read the formatted data array for a particular trace in its entirety including all measurement points display the data in the echo window and then write the data into another trace How to implement such a process can be better understood with the aid of a sample program ...

Page 1137: ...appears UserForm of read_write vba program The program lets the user specify the channel to be controlled 1 The program lets the user specify which trace s formatted data array to read source trace 2 The program reads the formatted data array for the trace specified by the user display the measurement results in the echo window and write the data into the trace specified by the user For detail see...

Page 1138: ...e sweep Line 260 Reads the number of measurement points for the specified channel ActCh and stores that number into the Nop variable Line 280 Reads the formatted data array for the active trace source trace and store the data into the FmtData variable Line 290 Reads the stimulus array for the specified channel ActCh and stores the data into the Freq variable Line 330 Reads the data format for the ...

Page 1139: ...es the program Procedure that initializes the UserForm lines 600 to 1020 Lines 620 to 1000 When the program is launched these lines add each list item and set the default value for each list Sample Program Reading displaying writing a formatted data array read_write frm 10 Private Sub cmdCopy_Click 20 30 Dim X As Integer Y As Integer Z As Integer I As Integer 40 Dim ActCh As Long TrGet As Long TrP...

Page 1140: ...ata 300 310 Displays the formatted data 320 330 Fmt SCPI CALCulate ActCh SELected Format 340 SCPI DISPlay TABLe TYPE ECHO 350 SCPI DISPlay TABLe STATe True 360 Select Case Fmt 370 Case MLOG PHAS GDEL MLIN SWR REAL IMAG UPH 380 ECHO Nop Frequency GHz Data 390 For I 0 To Nop 1 400 ECHO I 1 Freq I 1000000000 FmtData 2 I 410 Next I 420 Case Else 430 ECHO Nop Frequency GHz Data1 Data2 440 For I 0 To No...

Page 1141: ...dItem CH4 670 AddItem CH5 680 AddItem CH6 690 AddItem CH7 700 AddItem CH8 710 AddItem CH9 720 End With 730 740 With cboGet 750 AddItem Trace 1 760 AddItem Trace 2 770 AddItem Trace 3 780 AddItem Trace 4 790 AddItem Trace 5 800 AddItem Trace 6 810 AddItem Trace 7 820 AddItem Trace 8 830 AddItem Trace 9 840 End With 850 860 With cboPut 870 AddItem Trace 1 880 AddItem Trace 2 890 AddItem Trace 3 ...

Page 1142: ...0 AddItem Trace 4 910 AddItem Trace 5 920 AddItem Trace 6 930 AddItem Trace 7 940 AddItem Trace 8 950 AddItem Trace 9 960 End With 970 980 cboCh ListIndex 0 990 cboGet ListIndex 0 1000 cboPut ListIndex 0 1010 1020 End Sub ...

Page 1143: ...gram when using the user menu function Preparing for User Menu Function Before using the user menu function perform the following preparation Coding of a Procedure Assigned to a Softkey Follow these steps to create a procedure assigned to a specific softkey in the UserMenu object in the E5071 Objects folder 1 Double click to open the code window 2 In the object box in the code window select UserMe...

Page 1144: ...OM object UserMenu PRESet The above user menu setting is also preset by pressing Macro Setup Preset User Menu on the E5071C front panel Using User Menu Function To execute a procedure assigned to a softkey you need to generate an event of pressing the softkey To generate an event the manual method and the COM object method are available Method by Manual Operation Click the specific softkey as foll...

Page 1145: ...led and sets the fourth to tenth softkey id 4 to 10 disabled Lines 170 to 190 Sets the first softkey label id 1 to Setup the second softkey label id 2 to Meas the third softkey label id 3 to Exit Line 210 Displays the buttons for the user menu function in the softkey area Lines 230 to 250 Processing repeated until the State variable is True State True Line 240 Detects an event that a specific soft...

Page 1146: ...t are described below Lines 70 to 190 The procedure when the first softkey id 1 is pressed Line 90 Returns the E5071C to the preset state Lines 110 to 130 For channel 1 sets the sweep start value to 1 73 GHz the sweep stop value to 1 83 GHz and the number of measurement points to 51 Lines 150 to 170 After aborting the measurement sets the trigger source to the bus trigger and turns on the continuo...

Page 1147: ...ment data values primary value and secondary value for each measurement point in the echo window Lines 380 to 430 The procedure when the third softkey id 3 is pressed Line 400 Displays a program closing message Line 410 Stores False into the sta variable to terminate the main program Sample program using user menu UserMenu object 10 Private Sub UserMenu_OnPress ByVal id As Long 20 30 Dim I As Inte...

Page 1148: ...SWEep POINts 270 280 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect 290 FmtData SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA FDATa 300 310 SCPI DISPlay TABLe TYPE ECHO 320 SCPI DISPlay TABLe State True 330 340 For I 1 To Nop 1 350 ECHO FmtData 2 I 2 FmtData 2 I 1 360 Next I 370 380 ElseIf id 3 Then 390 400 MsgBox Program ended 410 State False 420 430 End If 440 450 End Sub ...

Page 1149: ...e User defined variable this value is available to an external controller program through the use of these User defined variables Turning E5071C power ON OFF initializes the User defined variables They are not initialized through executing Preset These commands does not refers to or change the results of the E5071C SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum SIZE SCPI PR...

Page 1150: ...Programming 1377 Controlling Peripherals Controlling Peripherals Overview Programming with VISA ...

Page 1151: ...forms communications via the COM interface when controlling the E5071C itself but it communicates via VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture when controlling external measurement instruments Preparation Importing Definition Files To use the VISA library in the E5071C macro E5071C VBA you need to import two definition files into your project with the Visual Basic editor to define the VISA fu...

Page 1152: ...loping a VISA program in the Visual Basic language a special programing notice in the readme text filie listed below must be reviewed For details on the use of the VISA library and the programing notice for using the VISA library with the E5071C macro E5071C VBA refer to the following files contained in IO library CD ROM visa hlp on line help for the VISA library vbreadme txt notes on using the VI...

Page 1153: ...function must be executed before other VISA functions are called and the parameter of this function is startup information Defrm in ctrl_ext vba Syntax viOpenDefaultRM param Parameter Parameter param Description Startup information output Data type Long integer type STEP 2 Connection The connection session is handled in Line 130 VISA s viOpen function makes connection with the specified instrument...

Page 1154: ...in ctrl_ext vba Syntax viOpen param1 param2 param3 param4 param5 Parameters Parameter param1 Description Startup information input Data type Long integer type Parameter param2 Description Address information of the specified instrument input Data type Character string type Syntax GPIB0 gpib address INSTR USB0 manufacturer ID model code serial number 0 INSTR ex USB0 2391 2312 MY12345678 0 INSTR TCP...

Page 1155: ...ion refer to visa hlp online help for the VISA library Syntax viVPrintf param1 param2 param3 Parameters Parameter param1 Description Connection information input Data type Long integer type Parameter param2 Description Program message input When sending a program message of the GPIB command a message terminator is required at the end of the message Chr 10 in ctrl_ext vba Data type Character string...

Page 1156: ...ariable Data type Character string type Parameter param3 Description Output variable output Data type Character string type STEP 4 Disconnection The disconnection session is handled in Line 280 VISA s viClose function disconnects communication and terminates the VISA system The parameter of this function is startup information Defrm in ctrl_ext vba Syntax viClose param Parameter Parameter param De...

Page 1157: ...s the startup information to the Defrm variable During this process if an error occurs the program goes to the error handling routine Lines 320 to 360 Lines 130 to 140 Establishes the connection to the external instrument GPIB address 17 connected via GPIB and outputs the connection information to the Equip variable During this process if an error occurs the program goes to the error handling rout...

Page 1158: ...zes the VISA system 90 status viOpenDefaultRM Defrm 100 If status VI_SUCCESS Then GoTo VisaErrorHandler 110 120 Opens the session to the specified instrument 130 status viOpen Defrm GPIB0 17 INSTR 0 0 Equip 140 If status VI_SUCCESS Then GoTo VisaErrorHandler 150 160 Asks for the instrument s product information 170 status viVPrintf Equip IDN Chr 10 0 180 If status VI_SUCCESS Then GoTo VisaErrorHan...

Page 1159: ...E5071C 1386 320 VisaErrorHandler 330 Dim VisaErr As String 200 340 Call viStatusDesc Defrm status VisaErr 350 MsgBox Error VisaErr vbExclamation 360 Exit Sub 370 380 Prog_end 390 400 End Sub ...

Page 1160: ...ion Programs Application Programs Basic Measurement measuring a band pass filter Measuring a Multi port Device Measurement Using E5091A measuring FEM Executing Power Calibration Connecting Hard Disk of External PC shared folder ...

Page 1161: ...t conditions are automatically set and the message Perform the full 2 port calibration is displayed To perform the full 2 port calibration click Yes otherwise click No To perform the calibration follow the onscreen messages to connect each standard of the Agilent 85032F calibration kit to the specified port and then click OK to measure the calibration data Click Cancel to return to the beginning o...

Page 1162: ...ual program source code Lines 120 to 160 Store the sweep center value 947 5 MHz the sweep span value 200 MHz the number of measurement points 401 the IF bandwidth 10 kHz and the power level 10 dBm into the variables Center Span Nop IfBw and Pow respectively Lines 170 to 210 Store the number of traces 1 the measurement parameter S21 the data format log amplitude the calibration kit number 4 85032F ...

Page 1163: ...for the full 2 port calibration Line 480 Calls the Calib_Solt procedure lines 1200 to 2130 Lines 520 to 530 Save the instrument setting and the calibration coefficient into a file whose name is specified with the File variable Line 580 Displays a message that prompts you to connect a DUT Device Under Test in the instrument status bar in the lower part of the LCD display and waits for the operation...

Page 1164: ...rred and store 0 to the Bw Cent and Qfac variables and the response value of marker 1 MkrVal 0 variable to the Loss variable Then the program finishes the error handling and proceeds to the next processing Lines 1000 to 1010 Calculate the 2 higher and lower cutoff frequencies from the values in the Bw and Cent variables and store them into the CutLow and CutHigh variables Lines 1030 to 1110 Displa...

Page 1165: ...750 to 1840 Display the message that prompts for connecting the thru standard between the specified ports These lines start the measurement of the thru calibration data initiated by clicking OK after the connection and wait for the completion of the measurement Click Cancel to return to the beginning of the calibration Lines 1880 to 2060 When the calibration type is not the 1 port calibration a va...

Page 1166: ...mber of points 401 150 IfBw 10000 IF bandwidth 10 kHz 160 Pow 10 Power level 10dBm 170 NumTrac 1 Number of traces 1 180 Par S21 Meas parameter S21 190 Fmt MLOG Data format Log Mag 200 CalKit 4 Calibration kit 85032F 210 File State08 sta Saved file name State08 sta 220 230 Presetting the E5071C 240 250 SCPI SYSTem PRESet 260 270 Setting measurement conditions 280 290 SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True...

Page 1167: ...0 SCPI MMEMory STORe STATe File 540 550 Connecting DUT 560 570 Meas_Start 580 Prompt Connect DUT and then press Macro Setup Continue button 590 600 Performing single sweep 610 620 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGle 630 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 640 650 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 1 Y SCALe AUTO 660 670 Analyzing the results 680 690 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 STATe True 700 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected ...

Page 1168: ... 880 Error SCPI SYSTem Error 890 MsgBox Error No Error 0 Description Error 1 900 910 Bw 0 920 Cent 0 930 Qfac 0 940 Loss MkrVal 0 950 960 Resume Skip_Bw_Err 970 980 Skip_Bw_Err 990 1000 CutLow Cent Bw 2 1010 CutHigh Cent Bw 2 1020 1030 ECHO Measurement Result 1040 ECHO BW Bw 1050 ECHO cent Cent 1060 ECHO low CutLow 1070 ECHO high CutHigh 1080 ECHO Q Qfac 1090 ECHO loss Loss 1100 SCPI DISPlay TABLe...

Page 1169: ...ration 1270 1280 If Buff vbCancel Then 1290 GoTo Cal_Skip 1300 End If 1310 1320 Select Case SoltType 1330 Case 1 1340 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT1 Port 0 1350 Case 2 1360 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT2 Port 1370 Case 3 1380 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT3 Port 1390 Case 4 1400 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT4 Port 1410 End Select 1...

Page 1170: ...rt calibration 1650 If Buff vbOK Then 1660 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect ACQuire Load Port I 1 1670 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 1680 Else 1690 GoTo Cal_Start 1700 End If 1710 Next I 1720 1730 For I 1 To SoltType 1 1740 For J I 1 To SoltType 1750 Buff MsgBox Connect the Thru standard between Por t CStr Port I 1 _ 1760 and Port CStr Port J 1 vbOKCancel Full SoltType port calibration 1770 If Buff vbOK...

Page 1171: ...1940 vbOKCancel Full Solt Type port calibration 1950 If Buff vbOK Then 1960 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect ACQuire ISOLation Array Port I 1 Port J 1 1970 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 1980 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect ACQuire ISOLation Array Port J 1 Port I 1 1990 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 2000 Else 2010 GoTo Cal_Start 2020 End If 2030 Next J 2040 Next I 2050 End If 2060 End If 2070 2080 SCPI SENSe ...

Page 1172: ...st set a runtime error occurs because there are parameters that cannot be measured Object name Module type Description frmDupRes User form Displays the analysis result mdlDupMeas Standard module Performs duplexer measurement Overview of the Program The program performs full 3 port calibration using the 85032F calibration kit measures a 3 terminal duplexer and calculates and displays the limit test...

Page 1173: ...is displayed To perform the full 3 port calibration click Yes otherwise click No To perform the calibration follow the onscreen messages to connect each standard of the Agilent 85032F calibration kit to the specified port and then click OK to measure the calibration data Click Cancel to return to the beginning of the calibration You cannot skip the isolation calibration When ...

Page 1174: ... Then for both trace 1 Tx S13 and trace 2 Rx S21 the Pass Fail judgment of the limit test and the insertion loss and ripple analysis result within the pass band are displayed Click Exit on the user form displaying the analysis result The message prompting for remeasurement is displayed To perform remeasurement click Yes otherwise click No to terminate the program The details of the program within ...

Page 1175: ... variable Line 260 Stores 1 2 and 3 into the Port variable that indicates the ports used for the full 3 port calibration Line 280 Calls the Calib_Solt procedure Line 310 Calls the Setup_Limitline procedure lines 2420 to 3180 For information on the Setup_Limitline procedure see the description later Line 330 Calls the Setup_Register procedure lines 3200 to 3260 For information on the Setup_Register...

Page 1176: ...k and the negative peak and the lower limit of the peak excursion value 0 Lines 620 to 640 Search for the minimum value within the analysis range and store the analysis result into the IlossTx variables Line 650 Uses the ripple analysis function to store the maximum value of the response differences between the positive peaks and the negative peaks within the analysis range into the RipTx variable...

Page 1177: ...to 1060 Set the number of traces for channel 1 to 2 the channel layout to the ChDisp variable and the graph layout for channel 1 to the TracDisp variable Lines 1080 to 1120 Set the measurement parameter for trace 1 to the Par 0 variable the data format for trace 1 to the Fmt 0 variable the measurement parameter for trace 2 to the Par 1 variable and the data format for trace 2 to the Fmt 1 variable...

Page 1178: ... to 2790 Store the settings in trace 1 limit table into the LimDataS13 1 to LimDataS13 25 variables Line 2820 Stores the number of lines 4 in trace 2 limit table into the LimDataS21 0 variable Lines 2830 to 3060 Store the settings in trace 2 limit table into the LimDataS21 1 to LimDataS21 20 variables Lines 3080 to 3110 Specify trace 1 as the active trace store trace 1 s limit line into the LimDat...

Page 1179: ... Lines 3400 to 3460 When trace 2 s limit test result is Fail Test_Tr2 4 these lines display Rx S21 Limit test result Fail on the user form object name frmDupRes against a red background On the other hand when trace 1 s limit test result is Pass Test_Tr2 4 they display Rx S21 Limit test result Pass on the user form object name frmDupRes against a blue background Lines 3480 to 3540 When channel 1 s ...

Page 1180: ...Ble False 120 130 Presetting the E5071C 140 SCPI SYSTem PRESet 150 160 Setting measurement conditions 170 SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True 180 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence Source BUS 190 200 Setup_Parameter 210 220 Setup_Segment 230 240 Full 3 port calibration 250 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT Select CalKit 260 Port Array 1 2 3 270 280 Calib_Solt 1 3 Port 290 300 Setting analysis conditions 310 Set...

Page 1181: ...0000 590 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe True 600 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion PPOLarity both 610 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion PEXCursion 0 620 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion TYPE MIN 630 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXECute 640 IlossTx SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DATA 650 RipTx MaxPeakToPeak 1 660 670 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 2 Select 680 SCPI CALCul...

Page 1182: ... Sub Setup_Parameter 920 930 Dim I As Long 940 Dim ChDisp As String TracDisp As String 950 Dim Par 1 As String Fmt 1 As String 960 970 ChDisp D1 980 TracDisp D1_2 990 Par 0 S13 1000 Par 1 S21 1010 Fmt 0 MLOG 1020 Fmt 1 MLOG 1030 1040 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter Count 2 1050 SCPI DISPlay Split ChDisp 1060 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 Split TracDisp 1070 1080 For I 1 To 2 1090 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter I D...

Page 1183: ... frequency 1300 SegmData 8 1830000000 Stop frequency 1310 SegmData 9 50 Number of points 1320 Segment 2 1330 SegmData 10 1830000000 Start frequency 1340 SegmData 11 2030000000 Stop frequency 1350 SegmData 12 400 Number of points 1360 Segment 3 1370 SegmData 13 2030000000 Start frequency 1380 SegmData 14 2130000000 Stop frequency 1390 SegmData 15 50 Number of points 1400 Segment 4 1410 SegmData 16 ...

Page 1184: ...ct Case SoltType 1670 Case 1 1680 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT1 Port 0 1690 Case 2 1700 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT2 Port 1710 Case 3 1720 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT3 Port 1730 Case 4 1740 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT4 Port 1750 End Select 1760 1770 For I 1 To SoltType 1780 1790 Buff MsgBox Connect the Open standard to Port...

Page 1185: ...2 OPC 1990 Else 2000 GoTo Cal_Start 2010 End If 2020 Next I 2030 2040 For I 1 To SoltType 1 2050 For J I 1 To SoltType 2060 Buff MsgBox Connect the Thru standard between Por t CStr Port I 1 and Port CStr Port J 1 vb OKCancel Full SoltType port calibration 2070 If Buff vbOK Then 2080 SCPI SENSe Chan CORRection COLLect ACQuire THRU Array Port I 1 Port J 1 2090 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 2100 SCPI SENSe C...

Page 1186: ... OPC 2290 Else 2300 GoTo Cal_Start 2310 End If 2320 Next J 2330 Next I 2340 End If 2350 End If 2360 2370 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect SAVE 2380 MsgBox All calibration data completion 2390 2400 Cal_Skip 2410 2420 End Sub 2430 2440 Private Sub Setup_Limitline 2450 2460 Dim LimDataS13 25 As Variant LimDataS21 20 As Variant 2470 2480 Limit line for S13 2490 LimDataS13 0 5 Number of segment 2500 Lim...

Page 1187: ...us 2720 LimDataS13 19 40 Beginning of response 2730 LimDataS13 20 40 End of response 2740 Limit_line 5 2750 LimDataS13 21 1 Maximum 2760 LimDataS13 22 2130000000 Beginning of stimulus 2770 LimDataS13 23 6020000000 End of stimulus 2780 LimDataS13 24 20 Beginning of response 2790 LimDataS13 25 20 End of response 2800 2810 Limit line for S21 2820 LimDataS21 0 4 Number of segment 2830 Limit_line 1 284...

Page 1188: ...LCulate 1 SELected LIMit DATA LimDataS13 3100 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected LIMit DISPlay STATe True 3110 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected LIMit STATe True 3120 3130 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 2 Select 3140 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected LIMit DATA LimDataS21 3150 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected LIMit DISPlay STATe True 3160 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected LIMit STATe True 3170 3180 End Sub 3190 3200 Private Sub Setup_Regist...

Page 1189: ...JudgeS21 Caption Fail 3430 Else 3440 frmDupRes lblJudgeS21 BackColor RGB 0 0 255 3450 frmDupRes lblJudgeS21 Caption Pass 3460 End If 3470 3480 If Test_Ch1 2 Then 3490 frmDupRes lblResult BackColor RGB 255 0 0 3500 frmDupRes lblResult Caption Fail 3510 Else 3520 frmDupRes lblResult BackColor RGB 0 0 255 3530 frmDupRes lblResult Caption Pass 3540 End If 3550 3560 frmDupRes txtIlossS13 Text Format Il...

Page 1190: ...ror occurs because there are parameters that cannot be measured This VBA program cannot control the E5091A 016 the multiport test set Object name Module type Description mdlFemMeas Standard module Performs measurement of FEM This program calibrates each channel using the ECal module and then measures the transmission characteristics EGSM Tx Antenna channel 1 EGSM Antenna Rx channel 2 GSM1800 Tx An...

Page 1191: ...nection to the ECal module an error message is displayed You can execute calibration again by clicking the Retry button If you want to abort the program click the Cancel button For channels 2 to 4 execute the calibration in the same way When calibration is complete Set DUT is displayed Connect the DUT FEM and the E5091A as shown below and click the OK button to start measurement FEM E5091A Antenna...

Page 1192: ...The FEM measurement program object name mdlFemMeas is described in detail below Line numbers are added for description purpose only and do not appear in the actual program source code Lines 140 to 330 Set the ports assigned to Port 1 to Port 4 of the E5091A and the control line setting table below into the variables Channel number Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Control Lines 1 A T1 R1 R1 0 00000000 2...

Page 1193: ...es Channel number Sweep range Number of points Number of traces Measurement parameter Start Stop 1 400 MHz 1 4 GHz 51 1 S12 2 880 MHz 1 GHz 101 1 Sds21 3 1 34 GHz 2 34 GHz 201 1 S12 4 1 665 GHz 2 015 GHz 101 1 S31 Channel number Fixture simulator Title ON OFF Topology 1 OFF E span E span EGSM Tx Antenna 2 ON SE 1 Bal 3 4 EGSM Antenna Rx 3 OFF E span E span GSM1800 Antenna Rx ...

Page 1194: ...of points to Nop Ch 1 and the number of traces to N_tr Ch 1 Lines 910 to 950 If the fixture simulator function is ON Fsim Ch 1 is True these lines set the fixture simulator function to ON the device type to Dev Ch 1 the port assignment to Tpl Ch 1 the balance unbalance conversion to ON and the measurement parameter mix mode S parameter to Trc Ch 1 Line 970 If the fixture simulator function is OFF ...

Page 1195: ...g whether you want to perform measurement again Line 1360 If the Yes button is clicked returns to the DUT connection section Function procedure ECal_solt lines 1410 to 1770 Line 1460 Clears the error queue Lines 1460 to 1480 Display the message that prompts for connecting the Tset_Port of the E5091A to the ECal module and wait for the OK button to be clicked after the connection Line 1500 Enables ...

Page 1196: ...e error queue Line 1680 Displays the error message Line 1700 When the Retry button is clicked the program disables the error handler routine and then returns to the connection part and repeats ECal Lines 1720 to 1730 When the Cancel button is clicked the program sets the return value of ECal_solt to the error number and disables the error handler routine Sample Program Measurement of FEM object na...

Page 1197: ...3 T2 Port2 T2 310 Port3 3 R2 Port3 R2 320 Port4 3 R2 Port4 R2 Dummy 330 CLines 3 1 Control Lines 1 Line0 HIGH 340 350 Measurement Condition 360 Ch1 370 Freq_star 0 400000000 Start frequency 400 MHz 380 Freq_stop 0 1400000000 Stop frequency 1 4 GHz 390 Nop 0 51 Number of points 51 400 N_tr 0 1 Number of traces 1 410 Fsim 0 False Fixture Simulator OFF 420 Trc 0 S12 Meas parameter S12 430 Ttl 0 EGSM ...

Page 1198: ...frequency 2 015 GHz 650 Nop 3 101 Number of points 101 660 N_tr 3 1 Number of traces 1 670 Fsim 3 False Fixture Simulator OFF 680 Trc 3 S31 Meas parameter S31 690 Ttl 3 GSM1800 Antenna Rx Title 700 710 SCPI SYSTem PRESet 720 SCPI DISPlay Split D12_34 730 740 For Ch 1 To 4 750 760 E5091A Setup 770 780 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 Port1 Port1 Ch 1 790 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 Port2 Por...

Page 1199: ...90 SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TITLe DATA Ttl Ch 1 1000 SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TITLe STATe True 1010 SCPI INITiate Ch CONTinuous True 1020 Next Ch 1030 1040 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence Source BUS 1050 SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 DISPlay STATe True 1060 SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 STATe True 1070 1080 Calibration 1090 1100 AnaPort Array 1 2 1110 Res ECal_Solt 1 2 AnaPort A and T1 1120 If Res 0 Then GoTo Prg_end 113...

Page 1200: ...on ECal_Solt Ch As Long Solt As Long AnaPort As Variant TsetPort As String As Long 1420 Dim Err_info As Variant 1430 Dim Buff As Long 1440 1450 Ecal_start 1460 SCPI IEEE4882 CLS 1470 1480 MsgBox Connect TsetPort to ECal Module 1490 1500 On Error GoTo Ecal_err 1510 1520 Select Case Solt 1530 Case 1 1540 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ECAL SOLT1 AnaPort 0 1550 Case 2 1560 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection ...

Page 1201: ... 1650 1660 Ecal_err 1670 Err_info SCPI SYSTem Error 1680 Buff MsgBox Error Err_info 1 vbRetryCancel 1690 If Buff vbRetry Then 1700 Resume Ecal_start 1710 Else 1720 ECal_Solt Err_info 0 1730 Resume Ecal_end 1740 End If 1750 1760 Ecal_end 1770 End Function ...

Page 1202: ...dlPowCal Standard module Executes power calibration Module1 Module2 Standard module Definition files for using VISA library Program Overview The program connects the E5071C and the E4418B GPIB address 13 through the USB GPIB interface as shown below Then the program executes the zero adjustment and calibration of the power sensor E4412A connected to the power meter E4418B as necessary Finally it e...

Page 1203: ...t is executed immediately and the obtained power calibration data array is saved in a file named CORR_DATA The power calibration execution program object name mdlPowCal is described in detail below Line numbers are added for description purpose only and do not appear in the actual program source code Lines 100 to 150 Assign the sweep type power sweep the number of points 41 the power range 20 to 1...

Page 1204: ...ata and wait for the completion of the measurement Line 500 Reads out an error that has occurred in the E5071C during the measurement of the power calibration data and sets it in the Err variable Lines 510 to 590 If no error has occurred these lines read out the power calibration data array and set it in the Corr_data variable In addition the program uses the Limit_Test function to check whether t...

Page 1205: ...tus byte register and the standard event status register Then these lines enable the standard event status register s bit 0 Line 1100 Prompts you to connect the power sensor to the POWER REF port of the power meter and waits for the OK button to be clicked after the connection Lines 1110 to 1120 Execute the zero adjustment and calibration of the power sensor through VISA These lines make the setti...

Page 1206: ...imi t As Double 50 Dim Nop As Long Pow_rang As Long Num_avg As Long Data_size As Long Buff As Long Dmy As Long 60 Dim Corr_data As Variant Err As Variant 70 Dim Verifier As Boolean 80 Dim FileNo As Integer I As Integer 90 100 Swp_type POW Sweep type POWER 110 Nop 41 Number of points 41 120 Pow_rang 0 Power range 20 to 12 dBm 130 Start_p 20 Start power 20 dBm 140 Stop_p 10 Stop power 10 dBm 150 Cw_...

Page 1207: ...r calibration 430 440 Performing power calibration measurement 450 SCPI Source 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect AVERage count Num_avg 460 SCPI Source 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire ASEN 470 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 480 490 Error handling at power meter calibration 500 Err SCPI SYSTem Error 510 If Err 0 0 Then 520 Corr_data SCPI Source 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection DATA 530 Verifier Limit_Test...

Page 1208: ...ite FileNo Val Corr_data I 760 Next I 770 Close FileNo 780 790 MsgBox Installing the corrected data to the file is DONE vbO KOnly Power meter calibration 800 810 GoTo Prog_End 820 830 Prog_Stop 840 MsgBox Program Interruption vbOKOnly Power meter calibratio n 850 860 Prog_End 870 880 End Sub 890 900 Private Sub Control_PowerMeter 910 920 Dim Status As Long VISA function status return 930 Dim Defrm...

Page 1209: ...e POWER REF port in the power meter vbOKOnly Power meter calibration 1110 Status viVPrintf E4418 CAL1 ALL Chr 10 0 1120 Status viVPrintf E4418 OPC Chr 10 0 1130 Do While Rslt 0 1140 Status viVPrintf E4418 STB Chr 10 0 1150 Status viVScanf E4418 t Rgst 1160 Rslt CInt CInt Rgst And 32 1170 Loop 1180 1190 MsgBox Zeroing and Calibrating the power sensor is complete vbOKOnly Power meter calibration 120...

Page 1210: ...teger 1390 1400 For I 0 To Nop 1 1410 1420 If Abs Corr_data I Limit Then 1430 SCPI Source 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection STATe False 1440 MsgBox The corrected data is out of limit vbExclamation Power meter calibration 1450 Limit_Test False 1460 Exit Function 1470 End If 1480 1490 Next I 1500 1510 Limit_Test True 1520 1530 End Function ...

Page 1211: ...n external PC to the E5071C This VBA program consists of the following modules Object name Module type Description frmMapDrive User form Connects or disconnects a hard disk Module1 Standard module Displays frmMapDrive Using VBA Program Load the map_drive vba and press Macro Run key The following macro appears Shared folder connection macro Connecting Mapping Enter the drive letter for the shared f...

Page 1212: ... connects the shared folder using the MapDrive procedure if the drive letter is not used or otherwise displays a message to show the drive letter is used Sub CommandButton2_Click This procedure is called when the user clicks the Disconnect button The procedure disconnects the shared folder by using the DisconnectDrive procedure Function IsDriveNameInUse This procedure checks if the txtDrive Text t...

Page 1213: ... CommandButton2_Click Call DisconnectDrive End Sub Private Function IsDriveNameInUse As Boolean Set fso CreateObject Scripting FileSystemObject IsDriveNameInUse fso DriveExists txtDrive Text End Function Private Sub MapDrive Set network CreateObject wscript network Call network MapNetworkDrive txtDrive Text txtShare Text vbFal se txtUser Text txtPasswd Text End Sub Private Sub DisconnectDrive Set ...

Page 1214: ...library Procedure name Function ComplexSet x y Sets a complex number Specify a real part and an imaginary part ComplexPolar x y Sets a complex number Specify an absolute value and a phase angle ComplexSetArray x Converts a variant type or double floating point type array to a complex type array ComplexAdd x y Returns the result of the addition ComplexSub x y Returns the result of the subtraction C...

Page 1215: ...ot Sample Program Dim Dmy As Long Dim s21_raw As Variant Dim s31_raw As Variant Dim s21_Comp As Complex Dim s31_Comp As Complex Dim trAce_ratio_comp As Complex Dim trAce_ratio 401 As Double SCPI DISPlay Split D1 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 Split D12_34 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter Count 2 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 DEFine s21 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 2 DEFine s31 SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 201 SCPI TRI...

Page 1216: ...31_raw 2 i 1 Calculate the ratio of S31 and S21 S31 S21 trAce_ratio_comp ComplexDiv s31_Comp s21_Comp trAce_ratio 2 i trAce_ratio_comp real trAce_ratio 2 i 1 trAce_ratio_comp imag Next i SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter Count 4 Write S31 S21 data to corrected data array for the trace 3 LogMag SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 3 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Format MLOG SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA SDATa t...

Page 1217: ...exSet x y Sets a complex number Specify a real part and an imaginary part ComplexPolar x y Sets a complex number Specify an absolute value and a phase angle ComplexSetArray x Converts a variant type or double floating point type array to a complex type array ComplexAdd x y Returns the result of the addition ComplexSub x y Returns the result of the subtraction ComplexMul x y Returns the result of t...

Page 1218: ...g Dim s21_raw As Variant Dim s31_raw As Variant Dim s21_Comp As Complex Dim s31_Comp As Complex Dim trAce_ratio_comp As Complex Dim trAce_ratio 401 As Double SCPI DISPlay Split D1 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 Split D12_34 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter Count 2 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 DEFine s21 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 2 DEFine s31 SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 201 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence Source bus SCPI TR...

Page 1219: ...lculate the ratio of S31 and S21 S31 S21 trAce_ratio_comp ComplexDiv s31_Comp s21_Comp trAce_ratio 2 i trAce_ratio_comp real trAce_ratio 2 i 1 trAce_ratio_comp imag Next i SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter Count 4 Write S31 S21 data to corrected data array for the trace 3 LogMag SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 3 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Format MLOG SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA SDATa trAce_ratio Writ...

Page 1220: ...Syntax Result ComplexAbs x Description Returns the absolute value of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Double precision floating point type Double Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Double a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexAbs a ...

Page 1221: ...urns the result x y of the addition of a complex number x and another y Data type x Complex type Complex y Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex c As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSet 0 5 3 5 c ComplexAdd a b ...

Page 1222: ...ns the phase angle radian of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Double precision floating point type Double Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Double c As Double pi As Double a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexArg a pi 3 14159265 c b 180 pi radian degree ...

Page 1223: ...Result ComplexConj x Description Returns the conjugate complex number of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexConj a ...

Page 1224: ...x Syntax Result ComplexCos x Description Returns the cosine cos x of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexCos a ...

Page 1225: ...Result ComplexCosh x Description Returns the hyperbolic cosine cosh x of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexCosh a ...

Page 1226: ...Returns the result x y of the division of a complex number x and another y Data type x Complex type Complex y Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex c As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSet 0 5 3 5 c ComplexDiv a b ...

Page 1227: ...1454 ComplexExp x Syntax Result ComplexExp x Description Returns ex Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexExp a ...

Page 1228: ...tax Result ComplexLog x Description Returns the natural logarithm log x of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexLog a ...

Page 1229: ...Result ComplexLog x Description Returns the common logarithm log 10 x of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexLog10 a ...

Page 1230: ...urns the result x y of the multiplication of a complex number x and another y Data type x Complex type Complex y Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex c As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSet 0 5 3 5 c ComplexMul a b ...

Page 1231: ...xNorm x Description Returns the square of the absolute value of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Double precision floating point type Double Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Double a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexNorm a ...

Page 1232: ...x type variable z Specify a complex number with an absolute value x and a phase angle y radian Data type x Double precision floating point type Double y Double precision floating point type Double z Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex pi As Double pi 3 14159265 a ComplexPolar 2 5 60 pi 180 ...

Page 1233: ... variable z Specify a complex number with a real part x and an imaginary part y Sets x and y to z real and z imag respectively Data type x Double precision floating point type Double y Double precision floating point type Double z Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a as Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 ...

Page 1234: ...ex numbers using 2 elements to store each complex number in the order of the real part and imaginary part to a complex type array y Data type x Variant type Variant array or Double precision floating point type Double array y Complex type Complex array Example of use Dim a as Variant b as Complex a SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA SDATa b ComplexSetArray a ...

Page 1235: ... Syntax Result ComplexSin x Description Returns the sine sin x of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSin a ...

Page 1236: ...tax Result ComplexSinh x Description Returns the hyperbolic sine sinh x of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSinh a ...

Page 1237: ...Syntax Result ComplexSqrt x Description Returns the square root of a complex number x Data type x Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSqrt a ...

Page 1238: ...turns the result x y of the subtraction of a complex number x and another y Data type x Complex type Complex y Complex type Complex Result Complex type Complex Example of use Dim a As Complex b As Complex c As Complex a ComplexSet 1 5 2 0 b ComplexSet 0 5 3 5 c ComplexSub a b ...

Page 1239: ...on setting before using the ripple analysis library Specifying the analysis range Setting the peak definition 2 Using the ripple analysis library Condition Setting before using Ripple Analysis Library Since the analysis conditions are not specified in the ripple analysis library before using the procedure for ripple analysis set up the analysis range and the peak definition using COM objects Speci...

Page 1240: ...etween a positive peak and its left adjacent negative peak MaxGap Chan Returns the maximum value of the difference between a positive peak and its adjacent negative peak MaxEnvelopeGap Chan Returns the maximum value of the vertical distance between a line segment connecting 2 adjacent positive peaks and the negative peak between them GapMean Chan Returns the mean value of the differences between a...

Page 1241: ...rd the left edge and its left adjacent negative peak FirstRightInterval Chan Returns the difference of the stimulus value between the positive peak detected first when searched from the left edge toward the right edge and its right adjacent negative peak FirstLeftInterval Chan Returns the difference of the stimulus value between the positive peak detected first when searched from the left edge tow...

Page 1242: ...efines a variable Val as Double 2 Sets the lower limit of the peak excursion value and polarity for the peak search to 1 5 and both of positive peak and negative peak respectively 3 Sets the analysis range for channel 1 to 935 MHz to 960 MHz 4 For channel 1 substitutes the return value from the MaxPeakToPeak function procedure in the ripple analysis library to the Val variable ...

Page 1243: ...nalysis library Specifying the analysis range Setting the peak definition 2 Using the ripple analysis library Condition Setting before using Ripple Analysis Library Since the analysis conditions are not specified in the ripple analysis library before using the procedure for ripple analysis set up the analysis range and the peak definition using COM objects Specifying the Analysis Range Use the fol...

Page 1244: ... left adjacent negative peak MaxGap Chan Returns the maximum value of the difference between a positive peak and its adjacent negative peak MaxEnvelopeGap Chan Returns the maximum value of the vertical distance between a line segment connecting 2 adjacent positive peaks and the negative peak between them GapMean Chan Returns the mean value of the differences between a negative peak and its right a...

Page 1245: ...ent negative peak FirstRightInterval Chan Returns the difference of the stimulus value between the positive peak detected first when searched from the left edge toward the right edge and its right adjacent negative peak FirstLeftInterval Chan Returns the difference of the stimulus value between the positive peak detected first when searched from the left edge toward the right edge and its left adj...

Page 1246: ...ble 2 Sets the lower limit of the peak excursion value and polarity for the peak search to 1 5 and both of positive peak and negative peak respectively 3 Sets the analysis range for channel 1 to 935 MHz to 960 MHz 4 For channel 1 substitutes the return value from the MaxPeakToPeak function procedure in the ripple analysis library to the Val variable ...

Page 1247: ... detected first when searched from the right edge toward the left edge within the analysis range and its left adjacent negative peak FirstLeftGap Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed ...

Page 1248: ...ected first when searched from the right edge toward the left edge within the analysis range and its left adjacent negative peak Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value FirstLeftGap 1 MsgBox First Left Gap Value ...

Page 1249: ...ed first when searched from the right edge toward the left edge within the analysis range and its left adjacent negative peak FirstLeftInterval Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed ...

Page 1250: ... first when searched from the right edge toward the left edge within the analysis range and its left adjacent negative peak Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value FirstLeftInterval 1 MsgBox First Left Interval Value ...

Page 1251: ...when searched from the left edge toward the right edge within the analysis range and its right adjacent negative peak FirstRightGap Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Return value ...

Page 1252: ...rst when searched from the left edge toward the right edge within the analysis range and its right adjacent negative peak Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value FirstRightGap 1 MsgBox First Right Gap Value ...

Page 1253: ...ed first when searched from the left edge toward the right edge within the analysis range and its right adjacent negative peak FirstRightInterval Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed ...

Page 1254: ...first when searched from the left edge toward the right edge within the analysis range and its right adjacent negative peak Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value FirstRightInterval 1 MsgBox First Right Interval Value ...

Page 1255: ...ption Returns the mean value of the response differences between the negative peaks and its adjacent positive peaks within the analysis range GapMean Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 ...

Page 1256: ...rameter Value Description Returns the mean value of the response differences between the negative peaks and its right and left adjacent positive peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value GapMean 1 MsgBox Gap Mean Value ...

Page 1257: ...ne segments connecting 2 adjacent positive peaks and the negative peaks between them within the analysis range MaxEnvelopeGap Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Return value ...

Page 1258: ...e between the line segments connecting 2 adjacent positive peaks and the negative peaks between them Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value MaxEnvelopeGap 1 MsgBox Max Envelope Gap Value ...

Page 1259: ...es between the positive peaks and its adjacent negative peaks within the analysis range MaxGap Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Return value ...

Page 1260: ...lue of the response differences between the positive peaks and its adjacent negative peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value MaxGap 1 MsgBox Max Gap Value ...

Page 1261: ...ferences between the positive peaks and its left adjacent negative peaks within the analysis range MaxLeftGap Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed ...

Page 1262: ...ue of the response differences between the positive peaks and its left adjacent negative peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value MaxLeftGap 1 MsgBox Max Left Gap Value ...

Page 1263: ...ifferences between the positive peaks and the negative peaks within the analysis range MaxPeakToPeak Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Return value ...

Page 1264: ...of the response differences between the positive peaks and the negative peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value MaxPeakToPeak 1 MsgBox Max Peak To Peak Value ...

Page 1265: ...es between the positive peaks and its right adjacent negative peaks within the analysis range MaxRightGap Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Return value ...

Page 1266: ...e response differences between the positive peaks and its right adjacent negative peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value MaxRightGap 1 MsgBox Max Right Gap Value ...

Page 1267: ...value of the sum of the response differences between the negative peaks and its adjacent positive peaks and the stimulus value of the applicable negative peaks within the analysis range MaxRipplePoint Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 ...

Page 1268: ...n floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Parameter Stim Description Returns the stimulus value of the negative peak at which the sum of the response differences between the negative peak and its adjacent positive peaks is maximum Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim V...

Page 1269: ...on Returns the maximum value of the sum of the response differences between the negative peaks and its adjacent positive peaks within the analysis range MaxRippleValue Variable Parameter Chan Description Specifies the channel number Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 9 ...

Page 1270: ... Value Description Returns the maximum value of the sum of the response differences between the negative peaks and its adjacent positive peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim Value As Double Value MaxRippleValue 1 MsgBox Max Ripple Value Value ...

Page 1271: ...sis range returns the response value LeftValue and stimulus value LeftStimulus of the negative peak first detected when searched to the left from the maximum value of the positive peaks and the response value RightValue and stimulus value RightStimulus of the negative peak first detected when searched to the right from the maximum value of the positive peaks Pole Variable Parameter Chan Descriptio...

Page 1272: ...ype Double Return value arguments Parameter LeftStim Description Returns the stimulus value of the negative peak first detected to the left from the maximum value of the positive peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Parameter LeftValue Description Returns the response value of the negative peak first detected to the left ...

Page 1273: ...ating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Parameter RightValue Description Returns the response value of the negative peak first detected to the right from the maximum value of the positive peaks Data type Double precision floating point type Double Note If no applicable point is detected 0 is returned Example of use Dim LeftStim As Double Dim LeftValue As Doubl...

Page 1274: ...Programming 1501 MsgBox Left Pole LeftStim LeftValue MsgBox Right Pole RightStim RightValue ...

Page 1275: ...E5071C 1502 TDR Remote Control Option TDR Remote Control Concepts of Remote Control in TDR Setup and Connection of TDR TDR Sample Program Other topics about Programming ...

Page 1276: ...commands are sent through GPIB to the E5071C Whereas VISA application connects to Enhanced Time Domain Analysis option via SICL LAN through TCPIP0 localhost inst0 INSTR address E5071C TDR commands are sent through SICL LAN to the Enhanced Time Domain Analysis option To learn more about other remote control system refer to Types of remote control system SCPI commands and COM commands are used to co...

Page 1277: ... www microsoft com downloads Installing Agilent IO Library 1 Ensure that Agilent IO Library Version 15 5 is installed in the PC If it is not installed go to below URL and download the latest Agilent IO Libraries Suite executable file IO library 15 5 download 2 Double click on the executable file for installation Follow the instruction of the installation wizard Installing E5071C TDR Software 1 Dow...

Page 1278: ...Programming 1505 3 Select Install Option TDR on a Personal Computer as Remote Mode and click Next ...

Page 1279: ...E5071C 1506 4 Click Next ...

Page 1280: ...Programming 1507 5 Click Close to complete the installation ...

Page 1281: ...he instrument remotely 1 Connect the E5071C with the PC through either GPIB or USB 2 From Windows Start Start All Programs Agilent E5071C ENA Option TDR TDR Remote 3 Type the VISA address of E5071C and click OK This dialog box is displayed once The next time TDR Remote is launched the previous VISA address is used to connect to the instrument ...

Page 1282: ...5071C TDR GUI is closed in the instrument when TDR Remote is launched Restart E5071C TDR GUI in instrument by clicking Analysis Start TDR Advanced Mode Configuring IO Library Setup This is optional as it needs Agilent Connection Expert 1 Click Start All Programs Agilent IO Libraries Suite Agilent Connection Expert 2 Click Refresh All ...

Page 1283: ...E5071C 1510 3 Refresh the system The E5071C is now available under GPIB USB category 4 Click on LAN TCPIP0 5 Select Add Instrument Add Other Other LAN Instruments to connect to E5071C TDR ...

Page 1284: ...Programming 1511 5 Type localhost in Hostname 6 Click Test Connection to confirm that the connection is working 7 Select out Auto identify this instrument and click OK ...

Page 1285: ...E5071C 1512 8 Notice that ENA TDR connection fails in Agilent Connection Expert main window ...

Page 1286: ...Programming 1513 9 Right click on ENA TDR option and select Change Properties 10 Select IDN query under Identification Method at LAN Instrument window and click OK ...

Page 1287: ...E5071C 1514 11 Both E5071C and ENA TDR should be active in Agilent Connection Expert main window as shown below ...

Page 1288: ...Programming 1515 ...

Page 1289: ...E5071C 1516 TDR Sample Programs TDR Sample Programs TDR TDT Measurement Simulated Eye Diagram 2 Channels Measurement ...

Page 1290: ...DR New VisaComLib FormattedIO488 TDR address is not necessary to change Set ENATDR IO rm Open TCPIP0 localhost inst0 INSTR ENATDR IO Timeout 50000 Clear Excel Sheet Cells Range F5 F5 ClearContents With ENATDR Preset the ENA WriteString SYST PRES TDR Trigger Hold WriteString TRIG MODE HOLD Set DUT Topology to Differential 2 Port WriteString CALC DEV DIF2 WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Execute De...

Page 1291: ...ly WriteString SENS CORR COLL DLC THRU TH24 WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Measure Load Connect a Load to Port 1 MsgBox Connect a Load to Port 1 vbOKOnly WriteString SENS CORR COLL DLC LOAD 1 WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Measure Load Connect a Load to Port 2 MsgBox Connect a Load to Port 2 vbOKOnly WriteString SENS CORR COLL DLC LOAD 2 WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Measure Load Connect...

Page 1292: ...5E 12 Set Definition WriteString CALC TRAC1 TIME STEP RTIM THR T1_9 WriteString CALC TRAC3 TIME STEP RTIM THR T1_9 WriteString CALC TRAC5 TIME STEP RTIM THR T1_9 WriteString CALC TRAC7 TIME STEP RTIM THR T1_9 WriteString TRIG SING WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Set Auto Scale for all traces WriteString DISP ATR SCAL AUTO WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Read Rise Time WriteString CALC TRAC3 TT...

Page 1293: ...E5071C 1520 errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End Sub ...

Page 1294: ...rrorhandler Set rm New VisaComLib ResourceManager Set ENATDR New VisaComLib FormattedIO488 TDR address is not necessary to change Set ENATDR IO rm Open TCPIP0 localhost inst0 INSTR ENATDR IO Timeout 50000 Clear Excel Sheet Cells Range F5 F22 ClearContents MsgBox E5071C TDR is opened vbOKOnly Exit Sub errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End ...

Page 1295: ... EXT AUTO PORT2 ON WriteString SENS CORR EXT AUTO PORT3 ON WriteString SENS CORR EXT AUTO PORT4 ON WriteString SENS CORR EXT AUTO IMM WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Measure DUT Length MsgBox Connect the DUT to the cables vbOKOnly WriteString SENS DLEN AUTO IMM WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Set Rise Time WriteString CALC TRAC1 TIME STEP RTIM DATA 35E 12 Set Definition WriteString CALC TRAC1 ...

Page 1296: ...rs Set Type to PRBS WriteString CALC EYE INP BPAT TYPE PRBS Set Length WriteString CALC EYE INP BPAT LENG 7 Set Amplitude WriteString CALC EYE INP OLEV 200e 3 Set Data Rate WriteString CALC EYE INP RTIM THR T1_9 WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Execute Draw Eye WriteString CALC EYE STAT ON WriteString CALC EYE EXEC WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber Read Eye Result WriteString CALC EYE RES DATA Ey...

Page 1297: ... NumDmy ReadNumber MsgBox Eye Diagram Simulation is completed vbOKOnly End With Exit Sub errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End Sub Close Sub CloseInstrument ENATDR IO Close End Sub ...

Page 1298: ...ld be sent to ENA Note for 2 Channels Measurement Put OPC to make sure to finish the process before you change the control from ENA to ENATDR or ENATDR to ENA DUT topology setting should be executed at the beginning of sequence because changing DUT Topology presets the E5071C Sample Program in Excel VBA VISA COM Grobal valiables Dim rm As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim ENA As VisaComLib FormattedI...

Page 1299: ...andler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End Sub Preparation for 2 Channels Sub Preparation On Error GoTo errorhandler Note Must put OPC when you change the control between ENA and ENATDR With ENA ENA Preset ENA WriteString RST OPC for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With With ENATDR TDR Set Diff 2 port as DUT WriteSt...

Page 1300: ... TRIG SOUR BUS ENA Set Trigger scope at Active channel only WriteString TRIG SCOP ACT ENA Beep Warning OFF WriteString SYST BEEP WARN STAT OFF OPC for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With MsgBox Preparation for 2ch is done vbOKOnly Exit Sub errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End Sub Setup for Channel 1 Sub...

Page 1301: ...P RTIM THR T2_8 WriteString CALC TRAC2 TIME STEP RTIM DATA 50e 12 OPC for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With Advance mode setting such as Limit Test for channel 1 TDR should be setup through ENA With ENA ENA Limit Test ON WriteString CALC1 LIM ON ENA Limit Line On WriteString CALC1 LIM DISP ON ENA Edit Limit Line WriteString CALC1 LIM DATA 2 1 0 1e 9 105 105 2 0...

Page 1302: ...String OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With End Sub DutLength This is called from SetupCh1 Sub DUTLength With ENATDR TDR Execute Auto DUT length WriteString SENS DLEN AUTO IMM OPC for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With End Sub Measurement for Channel 1 Sub MeasCh1 On Error GoTo errorhandler Dim TimeData As Double Impedance As Double Dim Nop As Integer PassFail As Inte...

Page 1303: ...C for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With Read TDR data Channel1 TDR Data should be read through ENA With ENA Query Number of Test Points WriteString SENS1 SWE POIN Nop ReadNumber ReDim TimeData Nop 1 ReDim Impedance Nop 2 1 Get the data for X axis WriteString CALC1 SEL DATA XAX TimeData ReadList ASCIIType_R8 Select the trace 1 WriteString CALC1 PAR1 SEL Get the ...

Page 1304: ... for Ch1 is done vbOKOnly Exit Sub errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End Sub Setup for Ch2 Sub SetupCh2 On Error GoTo errorhandler With ENA Setup Network measurement S Parameter on channel 2 ENA Set Start Frequency WriteString SENS2 FREQ STAR 1E9 ENA Set Stop Frequency WriteString SENS2 FREQ STOP 3E9 ENA Set IFBW WriteString SENS2 BAND 1E...

Page 1305: ...L SDD21 ENA Limit Test ON WriteString CALC2 LIM ON ENA Limit Line On WriteString CALC2 LIM DISP ON ENA Edit Limit Table WriteString CALC2 LIM DATA 3 2 100e6 1 25e9 1 5 5 2 1 25e9 2 5e9 5 7 5 2 2 5e9 7 5e9 7 5 25 OPC for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With FrmEcal Show MsgBox Setup Ch2 is done vbOKOnly Exit Sub errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Err...

Page 1306: ...ENA ENA Set active channel at channel 2 WriteString DISP WIND2 ACT ENA Single Trigger WriteString INIT2 TRIG SING ENA Wait for measurement end WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With Read Newtwork Meaurement Channel 2 data With ENA ENA Get Number of Points of data WriteString SENS2 SWE POIN Nop ReadNumber Get the data for x axis Frequency ReDim FreqData Nop 1 WriteString SENS2 FREQ DATA FreqDat...

Page 1307: ... FreqData i Cells i 7 8 InsersionLoss k k k 2 Next i Cells 4 8 PassFail OPC for checking the process finish WriteString OPC NumDmy ReadNumber End With Exit Sub errorhandler MsgBox Err Description vbExclamation Error Occurred Err HelpFile Err HelpContext End Sub Close Instrument Sub CloseInstrument ENA IO Close ENATDR IO Close MsgBox E5071C and E5071C TDR are closed vbOKOnly End Sub ...

Page 1308: ...Programming 1535 Command Reference Command Reference Notational Conventions COM Object Model Command Finder Other topics about Programming ...

Page 1309: ...ng a COM object from the E5071C VBA to the E5071C The syntax consists of two parts the object part and the set read part with an equal inserted between them Variables are indicated by italicized letters Variables with are indices For indices with having their preset values you can omit variable and if omitted the preset values are automatically set The following table describes the 3 types of synt...

Page 1310: ...ge Long Long integer type 4 bytes 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Double Double precision floating point type 8 bytes For a negative value 1 79769313486232E 308 to 4 94065645841247E 324 For a positive value 1 79769313486232E 308 to 4 94065645841247E 324 Boolean Boolean type 2 bytes For COM True or False For SCPI ON or OFF String Character string type 1 byte alphanumeric character Up to approximatel...

Page 1311: ...onal procedure of the front panel keys that has the same effect as this object Equivalent SCPI command Equivalent SCPI command shows the SCPI command to execute from an external controller Its syntax query response and example of use are provided ...

Page 1312: ...e at the top of the hierarchy of the E5071C COM object model They consist of 7 objects dedicated to the COM interface and SCPI objects corresponding to SCPI commands SCPI Objects The SCPI objects are created to realize the SCPI commands of the E5071C with the COM interface The conversion rules from the SCPI commands when writing SCPI object messages are as follows ...

Page 1313: ...eparator symbol with dots The number written in the object message is specified with You cannot omit the command message in the syntax SCPI command COM object OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW 10 SCPI SOURce 1 POWer LEVel IMMediat e AMPLitude 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL MET H TYPE ENTER 717 A A SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ME THod TYPE OUTPUT 717 CLS SCPI IEEE4882 CLS ...

Page 1314: ...s the declared data type without a cast Parameter V1 V2 V10 Description Data you want to display in the echo window Data type Variant type Variant Examples Dim Nop As Long Dim i As Integer Dim Fdata As Variant Nop SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts Fdata SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA FDATa ECHO Test Results For i 1 to Nop ECHO i Fdata 2 i 2 Fdata 2 i 1 Next i ECHO SCPI SYSTem ERRor Related objects SCPI DI...

Page 1315: ... out the application name of VBA E5071C is always read out Read only Variable Parameter App Description Application name Data type Character string type String Examples Dim Inst As String Inst NAME ECHO Inst Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel ...

Page 1316: ...d because it must parse the message string of the SCPI command Variable Parameter Scpi Description SCPI command Data type Character string type String Parameter Return Description Response query of the SCPI command Data type Character string type String Examples Dim Start As String Parse SENS1 FREQ STAR 100E6 Start Parse SENS1 FREQ STAR Dim TtlLbl As String Parse DISP WIND1 TITL DATA filter TtlLbl...

Page 1317: ...E5071C 1544 Parse CALC1 FORM SMIT Fmt Parse CALC1 FORM Dim BckLght As String Parse SYST BACK OFF BckLght Parse SYST BACK Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel ...

Page 1318: ...using this object execute the program with the Visual Basic closed since you need to press the Macro Setup Continue For more information see Running a Program from the E5071C Measurement Screen If you need to abort the program see Stopping with the Dialog Box Appeared Variable Parameter Mes Description Message Data type Character string type String Examples Prompt Connect DUT and then press Contin...

Page 1319: ...nteger type Long Range 1 to 10 Note You cannot omit this because it does not have a preset value If the specified variable is out of the valid setting range an error occurs when executed Parameter Lbl Description Softkey label name for the user menu function Data type Character string type String Preset value Varies depending on the specified softkey number Examples Dim KeyLbl As String UserMenu I...

Page 1320: ...e pressed Variable Parameter Status Description Enabled disabled for the user menu function softkey Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or 1 Makes the softkey enabled False or 0 Makes the softkey enabled Preset value True or 1 For information on the variable Key_id see UserMenu Item Caption Examples Dim KeyEna As Boolean UserMenu Item 10 Enabled False KeyEna UserMen...

Page 1321: ...nly Syntax UserMenu PRESet Description Presets the label name and enabled disabled settings for the user menu softkeys No read Examples UserMenu PRESet Related objects UserMenu Item Caption UserMenu Item Enabled Equivalent key Macro Setup Preset User Menu ...

Page 1322: ...Press Key_id Description Presses one of the user menu function softkeys 1 to 10 id No read Variable For information on the variable Key_id see UserMenu Item Caption Examples UserMenu Press 1 Related objects UserMenu Item Enabled Equivalent key Macro Setup User Menu Button 1 to Button 10 ...

Page 1323: ...550 UserMenu Show Object type Method Write only Syntax UserMenu Show Description Displays the user menu function softkeys in the softkey area No read Examples UserMenu Show Equivalent key Macro Setup User Menu ...

Page 1324: ...e UserMenu object For more information on its use see Executing a Procedure with a Softkey User Menu Function Variable For information on the variable Key_id see UserMenu Item Caption Examples Private Sub UserMenu_OnPress ByVal id As Long If id 1 Then MsgBox Button 1 was pressed ElseIf id 10 Then MsgBox Button 10 was pressed End If End Sub Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front...

Page 1325: ...rmation of VBA installed in the E5071C Read only Variable Parameter Vers Description VBA version information Data type Character string type String Examples Dim Version As String Version VBAVersion ECHO Version Equivalent key From the Help menu of the Visual Basic editor click About Microsoft Visual Basic ...

Page 1326: ...able Parameter Status Description State of the RQS MSS bit read only Data type Boolean type Boolean Range One of the following is returned True or 1 1 has been received within the specified time False or 0 1 has not been received within the specified time due to timeout or abort Parameter Timeout Description Timeout time Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 2 147 483 647 Preset value 1 infi...

Page 1327: ...eded is set Examples Dim Stat As Boolean SCPI IEEE4882 CLS SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition 16 SCPI STATus OPERation ENABle 16 SCPI IEEE4882 SRE 128 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce bus SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IMMediate WaitOnSRQ Stat 10000 If Stat True Then MsgBox Done End If Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front ...

Page 1328: ...ate The channels for which the continuous startup mode is set to ON setting to start up the trigger system continuously changes immediately from idle to startup state See Trigger System for details Examples SCPI ABORt Related objects SCPI INITiate Ch IMMediate SCPI INITiate Ch CONTinuous Equivalent key Trigger Restart Equivalent SCPI command Syntax ABORt Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 ABORt ...

Page 1329: ...AGinar y Description This command sets gets the impedance value imaginary part for the common port impedance conversion function for balance ports 1 and 2 Bpt of the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Ch Description Channel number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 160 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Param...

Page 1330: ...m value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim CImag As Double SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 IMAGinary 1E5 CImag SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 IMAGinary Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt Bpt REAL SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMula...

Page 1331: ... BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 2 IMAGinary numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 2 IMAGinary Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL CZC BPOR1 IMAG 30E6 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL CZC BPOR1 IMAG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1332: ...rts 1 and 2 Bpt of the selected channel Ch This command performs in the same way as SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIM ulator BALun CZConversion BPORt Bpt Z0 R Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value real part for the common port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 3 to 1E7 Preset value 25 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified var...

Page 1333: ...SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun CZConversion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Cmn ZConversion Port1 bal Real Port2 bal Real Port3 bal Real Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 2 REAL numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 2 REAL Query response numeric newline END Example of u...

Page 1334: ...rts 1 and 2 Bpt of the selected channel Ch This command clears setting value of SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt Bpt IMAGinary Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value for the common port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 3 to 1E7 Preset value 25 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variable is o...

Page 1335: ... SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun CZConversion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Cmn ZConversion Port1 bal Real Port2 bal Real Port3 bal Real Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 2 Z0 R numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion BPORt 1 2 Z0 R Query response numeric newline END Example of ...

Page 1336: ...ort impedance conversion function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the common port impedance conversion function False or OFF Turns OFF the common port impedance conversion function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim ComZcon As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion STATe True ComZcon SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun CZConversi...

Page 1337: ...lent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun CZConversion STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL CZC STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL CZC STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1338: ...llowing SBALanced Specifies the unbalance balance 3 ports BBALanced Specifies the balance balance 4 ports SSBalanced Specifies the unbalance unbalance balance 4 ports BALanced Specifies the unbalance 2 ports Rev A 9 50 and above Preset value For 4 port models SBALanced For 2 port models BALanced Examples Dim BalDev As String SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun DEVice bbal BalDev SCPI CALCulate 1 FSI...

Page 1339: ...and Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DEVice SBALanced BBALanced SSBalanced BALanced CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DEVice Query response SBAL BBAL SSB BAL newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DEV BBAL 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DEV 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1340: ...shunt C PLPC is specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE object for balance port 1 and balance port 2 Bpt of the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description C value of the differential matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit F farad Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variabl...

Page 1341: ...IMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt PARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching C Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters C numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters C Query respon...

Page 1342: ...hunt C PLPC is specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE object for the balance port 1 and balance port 2 Bpt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description G value of the differential matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit S siemens Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variab...

Page 1343: ...IMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt PARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching G Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters G numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters G Query respon...

Page 1344: ... and shunt C PLPC is specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE object for the balance port 1 and balance port 2 Bpt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description L value of the differential matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit H henry Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified va...

Page 1345: ...h FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt PARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching L Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters L numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters L Query re...

Page 1346: ...d shunt C PLPC is specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE object for the balance port 1 and balance port 2 Bpt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description R value of the differential matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit ohm Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variable ...

Page 1347: ...IMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt PARameters L SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching R Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters R numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 PARameters R Query respon...

Page 1348: ...ring Range Select from the following NONE Specifies no circuit PLPC Specifies the circuit that consists of shunt L and shunt C USER Specifies the user defined circuit Preset value NONE Note If you want to select the user defined circuit you must specify the 2 port touchstone file in which the proper information on the user defined circuit is saved in advance If you do not specify the appropriate f...

Page 1349: ...ate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt USER FILena me SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching Select Circuit Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 TYPE NONE PLPC USER CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 TYPE Query response NONE PLPC USER newline END Example of use ...

Page 1350: ...y the file name with the extension When you use directory names folder names and file name separate them with back slash or slash Even if the specified file does not exist no error occurs when you execute this object However when you set the type of the differential matching circuit to the user defined circuit with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt Bpt TYPE object an error occ...

Page 1351: ... FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching User File Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 USER FILename string CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit BPORt 1 2 USER FILename Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC BPOR1 USER FIL Match_d s2p 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1...

Page 1352: ... the differential matching circuit embedding function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the differential matching circuit embedding function False or OFF Turns OFF the differential matching circuit embedding function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim DifMch As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe True DifMch SCPI CALCulate ...

Page 1353: ...e Ch FSIMulator BALun PARameter Tr STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff Matching Diff Matching Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DMCircuit STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DMC STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BA...

Page 1354: ... of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value imaginary part for the differential port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 18 to 1E 18 Preset value 0 Unit ohm Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value ...

Page 1355: ...quivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff ZConversion Port1 bal Imag Port2 bal Imag Port3 bal Imag Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt 1 2 IMAGinary numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt 1 2 IMAGinary Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DZC BPOR1 IMAG 300 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL...

Page 1356: ...ports 1 and 2 Bpt of the selected channel Ch This command performs in the same way as SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt Bpt Z0 R Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value real part for the differential port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 3 to 1E7 Preset value 100 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the speci...

Page 1357: ... SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DZConversion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff ZConversion Port1 bal Real Port2 bal Real Port3 bal Real Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt 1 2 REAL numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt 1 2 REAL Query response numeric newline END Example of...

Page 1358: ... ports 1 and 2 Bpt of selected channel Ch This command clears setting value of SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMula tor BALun DZConversion BPORt Bpt IMAGinary Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value for the differential port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 3 to 1E7 Preset value 100 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variab...

Page 1359: ... SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DZConversion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Diff ZConversion Port1 bal Real Port2 bal Real Port3 bal Real Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt 1 2 Z0 R numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion BPORt 1 2 Z0 R Query response numeric newline END Example of...

Page 1360: ...ort impedance conversion function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the differential port impedance conversion function False or OFF Turns OFF the differential port impedance conversion function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim DifZcon As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion STATe True DifZcon SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALu...

Page 1361: ...alent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun DZConversion STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DZC STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL DZC STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1362: ... the defined trace name already exist the following error occurs 63 Duplicate trace name The following commands allow you to select the active trace directly by using TNAMe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAME BALanced DEFin e SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAME BBALanced DEFi ne SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAME SBALanced DEFi ne SCPI CALCulate Ch FSI...

Page 1363: ...ance device type is balance for the selected trace of the selected channel Ch The trace can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Da...

Page 1364: ...CPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Meas Sdd11 Scd11 Sdc11 Scc11 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe BALanced DEFine string SDD11 SCD11 SDC11 SCC11 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe BALanced DEFine string Query response SDD11 SCD11 SDC11 SCC11 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR...

Page 1365: ... parameter when the balance device type is balance balance for the selected channel Ch The trace can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Param Description Measurement par...

Page 1366: ...2 SCD22 Specifies Scd22 SDC11 Specifies Sdc11 SDC21 Specifies Sdc21 SDC12 Specifies Sdc12 SDC22 Specifies Sdc22 SCC11 Specifies Scc11 SCC21 Specifies Scc21 SCC12 Specifies Scc12 SCC22 Specifies Scc22 IMB1 Specifies Imbalance1 IMB2 Specifies Imbalance2 CMRR Specifies CMRR Sdd21 Scc21 Preset value SDD11 Examples ...

Page 1367: ...Scc11 Scc21 Scc12 Scc22 Imbalance1 Imbalance2 Sdd21 Scc21 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe BBALanced DEFine string SDD11 SDD21 SDD12 SDD22 SCD11 SCD21 SCD12 SCD22 SDC11 SDC 21 SDC12 SDC22 SCC11 SCC21 SCC12 SCC22 IMB1 IMB2 CMRR CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe BBALanced DEFine string Query response SDD11 SDD21 SDD12 SDD22 SCD11 SCD21 SC...

Page 1368: ...type is unbalance balance for the selected trace of the selected channel Ch The trace can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data...

Page 1369: ...a SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe SBALanced DEFine duptrace Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Meas Sss11 Sds21 Ssd12 Scs21 Ssc12 Sdd22 Scd22 Sdc22 Scc22 Imbalance Sds21 Scs21 Ssd12 Ssc12 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe SBALanced DEFine string SSS11 SDS21 SSD12 SCS21 S...

Page 1370: ...Programming 1597 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 TNAM DATA DUPTRACE 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR TNAM SBAL DUPTRACE SDS21 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR TNAM SBAL DUPTRACE 40 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1371: ...s unbalance unbalance balance for the selected trace of the selected channel Ch The trace can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter ...

Page 1372: ...nce2 IMB3 Specifies Imbalance3 IMB4 Specifies Imbalance4 CMRR1 Specifies CMRR Sds31 Scs31 CMRR2 Specifies CMRR Sds32 Scs32 Preset value SSS11 Examples Dim SsbPara As String SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun DEVice ssb SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 TNAMe DATA duptrace SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe SSBalanced DEFine duptrace sds31 SsbPara SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun PARamete...

Page 1373: ...SS12 SSS22 SDS31 SDS32 SSD13 SSD23 SCS31 SCS3 2 SSC13 SSC23 SDD33 SCD33 SDC33 SCC33 IMB1 IMB2 IMB3 IMB4 CMRR1 CMRR2 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe SSBalanced DEFine string Query response SSS11 SSS21 SSS12 SSS22 SDS31 SDS32 SSD13 SSD23 SCS31 SCS3 2 SSC13 SSC23 SDD33 SCD33 SDC33 SCC33 IMB1 IMB2 IMB3 IMB4 CM RR1 CMRR2 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 TNAM DATA DUP...

Page 1374: ...race of the selected channel Ch The trace can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the balance unbalance conversion function Data type Boolean...

Page 1375: ...CPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator BalUn Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe STATe string ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter TNAMe STATe string Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 TNAM DATA DUPTRACE 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR TNAM STAT DUPTRACE ON 30 OUTP...

Page 1376: ... the firmware revision A 9 50 and above Variable Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following SDD11 Specifies Sdd11 SCD11 Specifies Scd11 SDC11 Specifies Sdc11 SCC11 Specifies Scc11 Preset value SDD11 Examples Dim BalPara As String SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun DEVice bal SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 B...

Page 1377: ... BALanced DEFine SDD11 SCD11 SDC11 SCC11 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16 BALanced DEFine Query response SDD11 SCD11 SDC11 SCC11 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR1 BAL SDD21 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR1 BAL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1378: ...he balance device type is balance balance for the selected trace Tr of the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following SDD11 Specifies Sdd11 SDD21 Specifies Sdd21 SDD12 Specifies Sdd12 SDD22 Specifies Sdd22 SCD11 Specifies Scd11 SCD21 Specifies Scd21 SCD12 Specifies Scd12 SCD22 Specifies Scd22...

Page 1379: ...Simulator Meas Sdd11 Sdd21 Sdd12 Sdd22 Scd11 Scd21 Scd12 Scd22 Sdc11 Sdc21 Sdc12 Sdc22 Scc11 Scc21 Scc12 Scc22 Imbalance1 Imbalance2 Sdd21 Scc21 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16 BBALanced DEFine SDD11 SDD21 SDD12 SDD22 SCD11 SCD21 SCD12 SCD22 SDC11 SDC 21 SDC12 SDC22 SCC11 SCC21 SCC12 SCC22 IMB1 IMB2 CMRR CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16...

Page 1380: ...Programming 1607 ...

Page 1381: ... the balance device type is unbalance balance for the selected trace Tr of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following SSS11 Specifies Sss11 SDS21 Specifies Sds21 SSD12 Specifies Ssd12 SCS21 Specifies Scs21 SSC12 Specifies Ssc12 SDD22 Specifies Sdd22 SCD22 Specifies Scd22 SDC22 Specifies Sdc22...

Page 1382: ...lator Meas Sss11 Sds21 Ssd12 Scs21 Ssc12 Sdd22 Scd22 Sdc22 Scc22 Imbalance Sds21 Scs21 Ssd12 Ssc12 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16 SBALanced DEFine SSS11 SDS21 SSD12 SCS21 SSC12 SDD22 SCD22 SDC22 SCC22 IMB CMRR CMRR2 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16 SBALanced DEFine Query response SSS11 SDS21 SSD12 SCS21 SSC12 SDD22 SCD22 SDC22 SCC22 IM...

Page 1383: ...e type is unbalance unbalance balance for the selected trace Tr of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following SSS11 Specifies Sss11 SSS21 Specifies Sss21 SSS12 Specifies Sss12 SSS22 Specifies Sss22 SDS31 Specifies Sds31 SDS32 Specifies Sds32 SSD13 Specifies Ssd13 SSD23 Specifies Ssd23 SCS31 S...

Page 1384: ...SIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Meas Sss11 Sss21 Sss12 Sss22 Sds31 Sds32 Ssd13 Ssd23 Scs31 Scs32 Ssc13 Ssc23 Sdd33 Scd33 Sdc33 Scc33 Imbalance1 Imbalance2 Imbalance3 Imbalance4 Sds31 Scs31 Sds32 Scs32 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16 SSBalanced DEFine SSS11 SSS21 SSS12 SSS22 SDS31 SDS32 SSD13 SSD23 SCS31 SCS3 2 SSC13 SS...

Page 1385: ...E5071C 1612 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR1 SSB SDS31 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR1 SSB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1386: ...ected channel Ch Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the balance unbalance conversion function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the balance unbalance conversion function False or OFF Turns OFF the balance unbalance conversion function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim BalMode As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1...

Page 1387: ...tor BALun PARameter 1 16 STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun PARameter 1 16 STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR1 STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL PAR1 STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1388: ...ect This command is available at the firmware revision A 9 50 and above Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Balance device type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Balance device type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 2 Preset value Ports 0 1 Ports 1 2 Resolution...

Page 1389: ...IMulator BALun TOPology BALanced PPORts Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port1 bal When performing the operation from the front panel set each port separately Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun TOPology BALanced PPORts numeric 1 numeric 2 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun TOPology BALanced PPORt...

Page 1390: ...alance device type to balance balance specify BBAL with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice object Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 4 element array data port number Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Balance device type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Balance device type Ports 2 Port number assigned to port c in Balance device type Ports 3 Port number assig...

Page 1391: ... 1 BbalPort 3 2 SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun DEVice bbal SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun TOPology BBALanced PPORts BbalPort Ref SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun TOPology BBALanced PPORts Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port1 bal Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port2 bal When performing the operation from the f...

Page 1392: ...Programming 1619 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL TOP BBAL 1 2 3 4 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL TOP BBAL 30 ENTER 717 A B C D ...

Page 1393: ...nel Ch Variable Parameter Status Description On off of the property display of the topology setting Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns on the property display False or OFF Turns off the property display Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim TopProp As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun TOPology PROPerty STATe True TopProp SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMul...

Page 1394: ... 1621 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun TOPology PROPerty STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL TOP PROP STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM BAL TOP PROP STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1395: ...e selected channel Ch To set the balance device type to unbalance balance specify SBAL with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice object Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 3 element array data port number Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Balance device type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Balance device type Ports 2 Port number assigned to port c in Balance d...

Page 1396: ... 4 SbalPort SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator BALun TOPology BBALanced PPORts Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port1 se Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port2 bal When performing the operation from the front panel set each port separately Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun TOPology SBALanced PPORt...

Page 1397: ...e balance device type to unbalance unbalance balance specify SSB with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice object Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 4 element array data port number Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Balance device type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Balance device type Ports 2 Port number assigned to port c in Balance device type Ports 3 Por...

Page 1398: ...ator BALun TOPology SSBalanced PPORts Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator BALun DEVice Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port1 se Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port2 se Analysis Fixture Simulator Topology Port3 bal When performing the operation from the front panel set each port separately Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator BALun TOPology SSBa...

Page 1399: ...with the s4p or s6p s8p extension For information on network numbers refer to Obtaining Characteristics After Embedding De embedding 4 6 8 port Network Specify the file name with the extension When you use directory names folder names and file name separate them with back slash or slash This function is available with the firmware revision 3 50 or above The 6 8 port touchstone file is supported wi...

Page 1400: ...ork Nwk TYPE object an error occurs Examples Dim Emb As String SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator EMBed NETWork 1 FILename network s4p Emb SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator EMBed NETWork 1 FILename Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator EMBed NETWork Nwk TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator EMBed STATe Equivalent key Firmware 9 61 or above Analysis Fixture Simulator De Embedding SxP Topology User File nwk1 ...

Page 1401: ...28 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed NETWork 1 4 FILename Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM EMB NETW1 FIL Network s4p 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM EMB NETW1 FIL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1402: ...the firmware revision 9 61 or above Variable Parameter Param Description Processing type Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following NONE Specifies no processing EMBed Specifies embedding DEEMbed Specifies de embedding Preset value NONE Note Before selecting embedding de embedding use the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator EMBed NETWork Nwk FILename object to specify the 4 6 8...

Page 1403: ... Embedding SxP Topology Type nwk1 Type nwk2 Type nwk3 Type nwk4 None Embed De Embed Firmware 9 60 or below Analysis Fixture Simulator De Embedding S4P Topology Type nwk1 Type nwk2 None Embed De Embed Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed NETWork 1 4 TYPE NONE EMBed DEEMbed CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed NETWork 1 4 TYPE Query response NONE EMB DEEM newline END Example o...

Page 1404: ...ng de embedding feature Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the 4 port network embedding de embedding feature False or OFF Turns OFF the 4 port network embedding de embedding feature Preset value False or 0 Examples Dim Emb As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator EMBed STATe True Emb SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator EMBed STATe Related objects SCPI CALCulat...

Page 1405: ...CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM EMB STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM EMB STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1406: ...e Parameter Ports Description Indicates 2 element array data port numbers Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Connection Type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Connection Type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Preset value Ports 0 1 Ports 1 2 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setting range an error occur...

Page 1407: ... 3 1 4 2 1 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TOPology A PORTs value 1 value 2 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TOPology A PORTs Query response value 1 value 2 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM EMB TOP A PORT 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM EMB TOP A PORT 30 ENTER 717 A B ...

Page 1408: ...onnection type Topology refer to Connection Type Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 3 element array data port numbers Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Connection Type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Connection Type Ports 2 Port number assigned to port c in Connection Type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Preset value Po...

Page 1409: ... Embedding S4P Topology Ports 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 3 2 1 3 4 1 4 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 3 4 2 4 1 2 4 3 3 1 2 3 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 2 1 4 2 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TOPology B PORTs value 1 value 2 value 3 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TOPology B PORTs Query response value 1 value 2 value 3 newline END Example of use 10 OU...

Page 1410: ... to Connection Type Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 4 element array data port numbers Ports 0 Port number assigned to port a in Connection Type Ports 1 Port number assigned to port b in Connection Type Ports 2 Port number assigned to port c in Connection Type Ports 3 Port number assigned to port d in Connection Type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant...

Page 1411: ...s 1 2 3 4 1 2 4 3 1 3 2 4 1 3 4 2 1 4 2 3 1 4 3 2 2 1 3 4 2 1 4 3 2 3 1 4 2 3 4 1 2 4 1 3 2 4 3 1 3 1 2 4 3 1 4 2 3 2 1 4 3 2 4 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 4 2 1 3 4 2 3 1 4 3 1 2 4 3 2 1 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TOPology C PORTs value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TOPology C PORTs Query response value 1 value 2 value 3 valu...

Page 1412: ...ription This command selects a connection type Topology for the 4 port network embedding de embedding feature for channels 1 to 36 Ch This function is available with the Firmware revision 3 50 or greater Connection Type Variable Parameter Param Description Connection type refer to Connection Type Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following A Specifies connection ...

Page 1413: ...MBed TOPology A PORTs SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator EMBed TOPology B PORTs SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator EMBed TOPology C PORTs Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator De Embedding S4P Topology Select Topology A B C Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TYPE A B C CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator EMBed TYPE Query response A B C newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSI...

Page 1414: ...network de embedding for ports 1 and 4 Pt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Pt Description Port number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Param Description Type of the network de embedding Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following...

Page 1415: ...ALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed PORT 1 TYPE user DeemType SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed PORT 1 TYPE Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed PORT Pt USER FILena me SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ECAL ORIentation STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator De Embedding Select Type Equivalent SCPI command Sy...

Page 1416: ...tension Specify the file name with the extension When you use directory names folder names and file name separate them with back slash or slash Even if the specified file does not exist no error occurs when you execute this object However when you set the type of the network de embedding to the user defined network with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed PORT Pt TYPE object an error o...

Page 1417: ... SENDed DEEMbed STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator De Embedding User File Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed PORT 1 2 3 4 USER FILename string CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed PORT 1 2 3 4 USER FILename Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND DEEM PORT1 USER FIL D folder Network s2p 20 OUTPUT 717 CAL...

Page 1418: ...twork de embedding function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the network de embedding function False or OFF Turns OFF the network de embedding function Preset value False or 0 Examples Dim Deemb As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed STATe True Deemb SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed STATe Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch F...

Page 1419: ... FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed DEEMbed STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND DEEM STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND DEEM STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1420: ... for ports 1 and 4 Pt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description C value of the matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit F farad Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper li...

Page 1421: ...ARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching C Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters C numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters C Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC PORT1 PAR C 12 ...

Page 1422: ...for the ports 1 and 4 Pt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description G value of the matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit S siemens Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upp...

Page 1423: ...ARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching G Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters G numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters G Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC PORT1 PAR G 12 ...

Page 1424: ... for ports 1 and 4 Pt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description L value of the matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit H henry Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper li...

Page 1425: ...ARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching L Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters L numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters L Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC PORT1 PAR L 12 ...

Page 1426: ...ject for ports 1 and 4 Pt of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description R value of the matching circuit Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value 0 Unit ohm Resolution 1E 18 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper li...

Page 1427: ...ARameters L SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching R Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters R numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 PARameters R Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC PORT1 PAR R 12 ...

Page 1428: ...ng NONE Specifies no circuit SLPC Specifies the circuit that consists of series L and shunt C PCSL Specifies the circuit that consists of shunt C and series L PLSC Specifies the circuit that consists of shunt L and series C SCPL Specifies the circuit that consists of series C and shunt L PLPC Specifies the circuit that consists of shunt L and shunt C USER Specifies the user defined circuit Preset ...

Page 1429: ...s L SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT Pt PARameters R SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT Pt USER FILena me SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching Select Circuit Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 TYPE NONE SLPC PCSL PLSC SCPL PLPC USER CALCulate...

Page 1430: ...ile name with the extension When you use directory names folder names and file name separate them with back slash or slash Even if the specified file does not exist no error occurs when you execute this object However when you set the type of the matching circuit to the user defined circuit with the SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT Pt TYPE object an error occurs Variable Paramete...

Page 1431: ...ulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching User File Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 USER FILename string CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit PORT 1 2 3 4 USER FILename Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC PORT1 USER FIL Match s2p 20 OUTPUT 717 CA...

Page 1432: ...Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the matching circuit embedding function False or OFF Turns OFF the matching circuit embedding function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Pmcir As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe True Pmcir SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed PMC...

Page 1433: ...lysis Fixture Simulator Port Matching Port Matching Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed PMCircuit STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND PMC STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1434: ... value imaginary part for the port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 18 to 1E 18 Preset value 0 Unit ohm Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim ZImag As Double SCP...

Page 1435: ...ort2 Z0 Imag Port3 Z0 Imag Port4 Z0 Imag Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT 1 2 3 4 IMAGinary numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT 1 2 3 4 IMAGinary Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND ZCON PORT1 IMAG 75 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND ZCON PORT1 IMAG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1436: ...and 4 Pt of the selected channel Ch This command performs in the same way as SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIM ulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT Pt Z0 R Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value real part for the port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 001 to 1E7 Preset value 50 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variable is out of...

Page 1437: ...te Ch FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port ZConversion Port1 Z0 Real Port2 Z0 Real Port3 Z0 Real Port4 Z0 Real Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT 1 2 3 4 REAL numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT 1 2 3 4 REAL Query response numeric newline END Exampl...

Page 1438: ...and 4 Pt of the selected channel Ch This command clears setting value of SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT Pt IMAGinary Variable Parameter Value Description Impedance value for the port impedance conversion function Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 001 to 1E7 Preset value 50 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variable is out of the allow...

Page 1439: ...ate Ch FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Port ZConversion Port1 Z0 Real Port2 Z0 Real Port3 Z0 Real Port4 Z0 Real Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT 1 2 3 4 Z0 R numeric CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion PORT 1 2 3 4 Z0 R Query response numeric newline END Examp...

Page 1440: ... type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the port impedance conversion function False or OFF Turns OFF the port impedance conversion function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Zcon As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion STATe True Zcon SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion STATe Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch FSIMulator SEND...

Page 1441: ...Mulator SENDed ZCONversion STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONversion STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND ZCON STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM SEND ZCON STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1442: ...he fixture simulator function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the fixture simulator function False or OFF Turns OFF the fixture simulator function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim FxtSim As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator STATe True FxtSim SCPI CALCulate 1 FSIMulator STATe Equivalent key Analysis Fixture Simulator Fixture Simulator Equiv...

Page 1443: ...E5071C 1670 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FSIM STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1444: ...ce for the selected channel Ch The trace can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data type Character string type String Range Sele...

Page 1445: ... S XY X 1 4 Y 1 4 Meas Absolute R X X 1 4 A B C D Meas Aux Input 1 Aux Input 2 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 PARameter TNAMe DEFine string S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S4 4 A B C D R 1 R2 R3 R4 Aux1 AUX2 CALCulate 1 160 PARameter TNAMe DEFine string Query response S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S4 4 A B C D R1 R2 R3 R4 AU...

Page 1446: ...can be selected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command Variable Parameter Name Description Name of the trace Data type Character string type String Examples Dim MeasPara As String SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter TNAMe SELect duptrace Equivalent key Trace Prev Trace Next Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 PARameter TNAMe SELect strin...

Page 1447: ...ected by the trace name once its defined earlier with SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA command This function is available in the revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace Name Data type Character string type String Parameter Value Description Setting of the output port Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Preset value 1 Note You need to set the measureme...

Page 1448: ... Absolute A x D x R1 x R4 x x 1 to 4 Meas AUX Input 1 or AUX Input 2 Sweep Port Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 PARameter TNAMe SPORt string numeric CALCulate 1 160 PARameter TNAMe SPORt string Query response value newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR2 TNAM DATA DUPTRACE 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR TNAM DEF DUPTRACE B 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR TNAM SPOR DUPTRACE 4 40 OUTPUT ...

Page 1449: ...ected channel Ch Variable Parameter Param Description Measurement parameter Data type Character string type String Range Select either one of the following S XY Where x 1to 4 Y 1to 4 A B C D R X X 1 4 AUX1 or AUX2 Preset value S11 Examples Dim MeasPara As String SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 DEFine s21 MeasPara SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 DEFine Equivalent key Meas S XY X 1 4 Y 1 4 Meas Absolute R...

Page 1450: ...3 S43 S14 S2 4 S34 S44 A B C D R 1 R2 R3 R4 Aux1 AUX2 CALCulate 1 160 PARameter 1 16 DEFine Query response S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S4 4 A B C D R1 R2 R3 R4 AUX1 AUX2 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 DEF S21 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 DEF 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1451: ...e by the trace name provided it has been defined earlier To define a trace name execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect In revision A 9 60 and above you can execute the action directly by using direct channel and trace assign commands like SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr XXXX XXXX Variable Parameter Tr Description Trace number D...

Page 1452: ...Culate Ch SELected CORRection EDELay WGCutoff SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch ACTivate SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset Equivalent key Trace Prev Trace Next Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 PARameter 1 16 SELect Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 SEL ...

Page 1453: ...in revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Name Description Trace name for the active trace Data type Character string type String Examples Dim TraceName As String SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 TNAMe DATA DuplexTrace TraceName SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter Tr TNAMe DATA Param Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 PARameter ...

Page 1454: ...tput port Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Preset value 1 Note You need to set the measurement parameter for absolute AUX measurements with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr DEFine command Example of use Dim Sport As Long SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 DEFine B SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SPORt 4 Sport SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SPORt Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr D...

Page 1455: ...5071C 1682 CALCulate 1 160 PARameter 1 16 SPORt Query response value newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 DEF B 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 SPOR 4 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR1 SPOR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1456: ...s depending on the upper limit setting for the channel trace number Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim TraceNum As Long SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter COUNt 4 TraceNum SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter COUNt Equiva...

Page 1457: ...E5071C 1684 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR COUN 4 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 PAR COUN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1458: ...te Ch TRACe Tr BLIMit MINimum SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr BLIMit REPort DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr BLIMit STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr CONVersion FUNCtion SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr CONVersion STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr CORRection EDELay MEDium SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr CORRection EDELay TIME SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr CORRection EDELay WGCutoff SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr CORRection...

Page 1459: ...ity SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr FUNCtion TARGet SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr FUNCtion TTRansition SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr FUNCtion TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr LIMit DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr LIMit DISPlay STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr LIMit FAIL SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr LIMit OFFSet AMPLitude SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr LIMit OFFSet MARKer SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr LIMit OFFSet STIM...

Page 1460: ...SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion PPOLarity SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TARGet SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TRACking SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TTRansition SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer NOTCh SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk NOTCh DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk NO...

Page 1461: ...te Ch TRACe Tr SMOothing STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME CENTer SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME IMPulse WIDTh SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME KBESsel SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME LPFRequency SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME SPAN SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME STARt SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch...

Page 1462: ...e bandwidth threshold value attenuation from the peak of the bandwidth test for the selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the bandwidth threshold value for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Param...

Page 1463: ... Analysis Bandwidth Limit N dB Points Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit DB numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit DB In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit DB numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit DB Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 BLIM DB 3 20 OUTPUT ...

Page 1464: ...d turns ON OFF the marker display of the bandwidth test for the active trace of selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the marker display of the bandwidth tests for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Va...

Page 1465: ...late Ch SELected BLIMit DISPlay VALue Equivalent key Analysis Bandwidth Limit BW Marker Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit DISPlay MARKer ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit DISPlay MARKer In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit DISPlay MARKer ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit D...

Page 1466: ...h value display of the bandwidth test for the active trace of selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the bandwidth value display of the bandwidth tests for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Pa...

Page 1467: ...te Ch SELected BLIMit DISPlay MARKer Equivalent key Analysis Bandwidth Limit BW Display Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit DISPlay VALue ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit DISPlay VALue In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit DISPlay VALue ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit DISP...

Page 1468: ...ect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and get the bandwidth limit test results for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description The bandwidth limit test result Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the bandwidth li...

Page 1469: ...quivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit FAIL In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit FAIL Query response 1 0 newline END Description 1 The bandwidth test result is FAIL 0 The bandwidth test result is PASS When the bandwidth limit test is set to OFF 0 is al...

Page 1470: ...Description This command sets gets the upper limit value of the bandwidth test for the selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the upper limit value of the bandwidth test for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELe...

Page 1471: ...CPI CALCulate Ch SELected BLIMit MINimum Equivalent key Analysis Bandwidth Limit Max Bandwidth Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit MAXimum numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit MAXimum In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit MAXimum numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit MAXimum Query respons...

Page 1472: ... sets gets the lower limit value of the bandwidth test for the selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the lower limit value of the bandwidth test for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Va...

Page 1473: ... Equivalent key Analysis Bandwidth Limit Min Bandwidth Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit MINimum numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit MINimum In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit MINimum numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit MINimum Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 ...

Page 1474: ...vision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the bandwidth test just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description The bandwidth value of the bandwidth Data type Double precision floating point type Double For information on the variable Ch see Variable Examples Dim BWData As Double SCPI CAL...

Page 1475: ...160 SELected BLIMit REPort DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 BLIMit REPort DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 BLIM REP 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1476: ...dwidth test function for the active trace of selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the bandwidth test function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF the ba...

Page 1477: ...CALCulate Ch SELected BLIMit FAIL SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected BLIMit MAXimum SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected BLIMit MINimum SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected BLIMit REPort DATA Equivalent key Analysis Bandwidth Limit BW Test Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected BLIMit STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also...

Page 1478: ...Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the parameter after conversion using the parameter conversion function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description The parameter after conversion Data type Character string type String Range Select from the followi...

Page 1479: ... PARameter Tr SELect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset Equivalent key Analysis Conversion Z Reflection Z Transmission Y Reflection Y Transmission 1 S Z Trans Shunt Y Trans Shunt Conjugation Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected CONVersion FUNCtion ZREFlection ZTRansmit YREFlection YTRansmit INVersion ZTSHunt YTSHunt CONJugati on CALCulate 1 160 SELecte...

Page 1480: ...Programming 1707 ZREF ZTR YREF YTR INV ZTSH YTSH CONJ newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 CONV FUNC ZTR 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 CONV FUNC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1481: ...urns ON OFF the parameter conversion function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the parameter conversion function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the parameter conversion function ...

Page 1482: ...ct Equivalent key Analysis Conversion Conversion Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected CONVersion STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected CONVersion STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CONVersion STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CONVersion STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use...

Page 1483: ...ption This command select the media type for calculating the electrical delay time of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the media type for calculating the electrical delay time just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Select the media type fo...

Page 1484: ...ey Scale Electrical Delay Media Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection EDELay MEDium COAXial WAVeguide CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection EDELay MEDium In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection EDELay MEDium COAXial WAVeguide CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection EDELay MEDium Query response C...

Page 1485: ...is command sets gets the electrical delay time of the active trace of channels 1 to 160 Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the electrical delay time for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Electrical delay time Data type Double precision floatin...

Page 1486: ...LCulate Ch SELected CORRection EDELay WGCutoff Equivalent key Scale Electrical Delay Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection EDELay TIME numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection EDELay TIME In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection EDELay TIME numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection EDE...

Page 1487: ... sets gets the cut off frequency when waveguide is selected as an electrical delay time of channels 1 to 160 Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the cut off frequency just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Cut off frequency Data type Double precision floating...

Page 1488: ...tion EDELay TIME Equivalent key Scale Electrical Delay Cutoff Frequency Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection EDELay WGCutoff numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection EDELay WGCutoff In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection EDELay WGCutoff numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection EDEL...

Page 1489: ...e Description This command sets gets the phase offset of the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the phase offset of the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Phase offset Data type Double precision floating point type ...

Page 1490: ...ivalent key Scale Phase Offset Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection OFFSet PHASe numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected CORRection OFFSet PHASe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection OFFSet PHASe numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 CORRection OFFSet PHASe Query response numeric newline END Exampl...

Page 1491: ...nformation on the formatted data array see Internal Data Processing If valid data is not calculated because of the invalid measurement 1 QNB is read out In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the formatted data array for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Descript...

Page 1492: ...a Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FORMat SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA FMEMory SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA SDATa Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA FDATa numeric1 numeric NOP 2 CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA FDATa I...

Page 1493: ...E5071C 1720 10 DIM A 1 201 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 DATA FDAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1494: ...more information on the formatted memory array see Internal Data Processing If valid data is not calculated because of the invalid measurement 1 QNB is read out In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the formatted memory array for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Dat...

Page 1495: ...ated objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FORMat SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA FDATa SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA SMEMory Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA FMEMory numeric 1 numeric NOP 2 CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA FMEMory I...

Page 1496: ...Programming 1723 10 DIM A 1 201 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 DATA FMEM 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1497: ...al Data Processing If valid data is not calculated because of the invalid measurement 1 QNB is read out In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the corrected data array for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data corrected data array...

Page 1498: ... SELect SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA SMEMory SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA FDATa Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA SDATa numeric 1 numeric NOP 2 CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA SDATa In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 16...

Page 1499: ...n Internal Data Processing If valid data is not calculated because of the invalid measurement 1 QNB is read out In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the corrected memory array for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data corrected ...

Page 1500: ...ELect SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA SDATa SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected DATA FMEMory Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA SMEMory numeric 1 numeric NOP 2 CALCulate 1 160 SELected DATA SMEMory In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 ...

Page 1501: ...ve you can select the trace and read the data of measurement points of X axis for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data measurement points of X axis Data type Variant type Variant Examples Dim AnaData As Variant AnaData SCPI CALC1 SEL DATA XAX Equivalent ke...

Page 1502: ...Programming 1729 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 DATA XAXis Query response numeric 1 numeric N END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 SEL DATA XAX 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1503: ...ATE Data Data SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr EQUation STATE Description This command enable disable the Equation Editor In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and enable disable the Equation Editor for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Ch Description Channel Number Range 1 to 36 Para...

Page 1504: ...Lected EQUation TEXT SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected EQUation VALid Equivalent key Display Equation Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected EQUation STATE ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected EQUation STATE In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 160 EQUation STATE ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 160 EQUation STATE Query...

Page 1505: ...his command sets gets the equation in the Equation Editor For valid parameters that can be used in this equation refer to the Equation Editor In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the equation in the Equation Editor for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Ch Descriptio...

Page 1506: ... panel for Equation Text but Equation Editor can be accessed through Display Equation Editor Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected EQUation TEXT string1 CALCulate 1 160 SELected EQUation TEXT In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 EQUation TEXT string1 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 EQUation TEXT Query response stri...

Page 1507: ...s the invalid corrected memory array Annotation of Equ is displayed when this command returns a False value Equation Editor can refer S parameter data and data present in corrected memory array In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and check the validity of the equation for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter...

Page 1508: ...ate Ch SELected EQUation STATE SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected EQUation TEXT Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected EQUation VALID In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 EQUation VALID Query response 1 0 END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 EQUation VA...

Page 1509: ...g function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the center value of the gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description The ...

Page 1510: ...ected FILTer GATE TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Gating Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME CENTer numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME CENTer In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME CENTer numeric CALCulate 1 160 TR...

Page 1511: ...e gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the shape of the gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Para...

Page 1512: ... key Analysis Gating Shape Maximum Wide Normal Minimum Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME SHAPe MAXimum WIDE NORMal MINimum CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME SHAPe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME SHAPe MAXimum WIDE NORMal MINimum CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILT...

Page 1513: ...ts gets the span value of the gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the span value of the gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter ...

Page 1514: ...late Ch SELected FILTer GATE TIME CENTer SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FILTer GATE TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Gating Span Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME SPAN numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME SPAN In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe...

Page 1515: ...unction of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the start value of the gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description The star...

Page 1516: ...Lected FILTer GATE TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Gating Start Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME STARt In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe...

Page 1517: ...f points is 3 or more If you execute this object to try to turn ON the gating function when the sweep type is other than the linear sweep or the number of points is less than 3 an error occurs and the object is ignored When the sweep type is the power sweep you cannot turn on the gating function If you execute this object trying to turn on the gating function during the power sweep an error occurs...

Page 1518: ...ep TYPE SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts Equivalent key Analysis Gating Gating Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME STA...

Page 1519: ...ction of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the stop value of the gate used for the gating function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description The stop va...

Page 1520: ...SELected FILTer GATE TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Gating Stop Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME STOP In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1...

Page 1521: ...te type used for the gating function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the gate type used for the gating function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Descr...

Page 1522: ...lent key Analysis Gating Type Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME TYPE BPASs NOTCh CALCulate 1 160 SELected FILTer GATE TIME TYPE In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME TYPE BPASs NOTCh CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FILTer GATE TIME TYPE Query response BPAS NOTC newline END Examp...

Page 1523: ...ed channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the data format of the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Data format Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following MLOGarithmic Specifies the log magnitude format PHASe Specifi...

Page 1524: ...ifies the imaginary format UPHase Specifies the expanded phase format PPHase Specifies the positive phase format Preset value MLOGarithmic Examples Dim Fmt As String SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FORMat smit Fmt SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FORMat Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Format Log Mag Phase Group Delay Lin Mag SWR Real Imag...

Page 1525: ...ove the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FORMat MLOGarithmic PHASe GDELay SLINear SLOGarithmic SCOMplex SMITh SADMittance PLINear PLOGarith mic POLar MLINear SWR REAL IMAGinary UPHase PPHase CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FORMat Query response MLOG PHAS GDEL SLIN SLOG SCOM SMIT SADM PLIN PLOG POL MLIN SWR REAL IMAG UPH PPH newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FOR...

Page 1526: ...tion EXECute object for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data analysis result of N number of data pairs x2 N number of data pairs can be read out with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion POINts object Where n is an integer between 1 and N Data n 2 2 Res...

Page 1527: ...CPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion POINts Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric N 2 END Example of use 1...

Page 1528: ... of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for all traces for the selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above even though you can select the trace and set the coupling of the analysis range of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for all traces just by executing the above TRACe Tr command the Tr value is omitted This is because the command is applied to all t...

Page 1529: ...is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain COUPle ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain COUPle In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DOMain COUPle ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DOMain COUPle Query response 1 0 newline END Example...

Page 1530: ... analysis range of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the selected channel Ch When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the start value of the analysis range of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace when trace coupling is off just by executing the a...

Page 1531: ...ulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STARt In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DOMain STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FU...

Page 1532: ... the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the selected channel Ch When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get whether to use an arbitrary range when executing the analysis with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace when trace coupling is off just by executi...

Page 1533: ...Ction DOMain STOP SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion DOMain COUPle SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCul...

Page 1534: ...nalysis range of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the selected channel Ch When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the stop value of the analysis range of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace when trace coupling is off just by executing the abov...

Page 1535: ...LCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STOP In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DOMain STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUN...

Page 1536: ... SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TYPE object for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Examples SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXECute Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TYPE SCP...

Page 1537: ...E5071C 1764 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC EXEC ...

Page 1538: ... of the difference relative to the right and left adjacent measurement points when executing the peak search with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the lower limit of peak excursion value when executing the peak search with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECu...

Page 1539: ...late 1 SELected FUNCtion PEXCursion 1 5 PeakExc SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion PEXCursion Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion PPOLarity SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI...

Page 1540: ...Programming 1767 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC PEXC 0 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC PEXC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1541: ...s always read out for the search of all peaks or the search of all targets the total number of searched measurement points is read out In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the number of data pairs of the analysis result of the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCu...

Page 1542: ... Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion POINts In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCTion POINts Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC POIN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1543: ...SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the active trace of the selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the polarity when performing the peak search with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variab...

Page 1544: ... FUNCtion PEXCursion SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion PPOLarity POSitive NEGative BOTH CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion PPOLarity In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion PPOLarity P...

Page 1545: ... gets the target value when performing the target search with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the active trace of the selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the target value when performing the target search with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command...

Page 1546: ...ar SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion TARGet 12 5 TargVal SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion TARGet Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TTRansition SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equival...

Page 1547: ...E5071C 1774 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC TARG 12 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC TARG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1548: ...I CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the active trace of the selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the transition type when performing the target search with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute object for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect ...

Page 1549: ...FUNCtion TARGet SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion TTRansition POSitive NEGative BOTH CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion TTRansition In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion TTRansition ...

Page 1550: ...elected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the type of analysis for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Analysis type Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following PTPeak Specifies the analysis of the difference ...

Page 1551: ...UNCtion PEXCursion SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion PPOLarity SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TARGet SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion TTRansition SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion TYPE PTPeak STDEV MEAN MAXimum MINimum PEAK APEak ATARget...

Page 1552: ...Programming 1779 PTP STDEV MEAN MAX MIN PEAK APE ATAR newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC TYPE PEAK 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 FUNC TYPE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1553: ... get the limit table for the limit test for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data for limit line of 1 Num number of limit lines 5 Where n is an integer between 1 and Num Data 0 The number of limit lines you want to set Specify an integer ranging 0 to 100 Wh...

Page 1554: ...urs when executed For Data n 5 3 Data n 5 2 Data n 5 1 and Data n85 in the array data if the specified value is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim LimData As Variant SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected LIMit DATA Array 1 1 1e6...

Page 1555: ... Edit Limit Line Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit DATA numeric 1 numeric 1 N 5 CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit DATA numeric 1 numeric 1 N 5 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric 1 N 5 newline END Example of use 10 DIM B ...

Page 1556: ...Mit DISPlay STATe Description This command turns ON OFF the limit line display for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the limit line display for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description Limit line display Dat...

Page 1557: ... Analysis Limit Test Limit Line Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit DISPlay STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit DISPlay STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit DISPlay STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit DISPlay STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 O...

Page 1558: ...he limit test result for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description Limit test result Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON The limit test result is FAIL False or OFF The limit test result is PASS Note When the limit test is set to OFF False or OFF ...

Page 1559: ...CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit FAIL In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit FAIL Query response 1 0 newline END Description 1 The limit test result is FAIL 0 The limit test result is PASS When the limit test is set to OFF 0 is always read out Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 LIM FAIL 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1560: ... of response for the selected active trace specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command of the selected channel Ch The setting of the limit line doesn t change even if the offset value is changed In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the limit line offset of response for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execut...

Page 1561: ...key Analysis Limit Test Limit Line Offsets Amplitude Offset Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit OFFSet AMPLitude numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit OFFSet AMPLitude In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit OFFSet AMPLitude numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit OFFSet AMPLitude Query response n...

Page 1562: ... not displayed this command does not operate In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set the active marker value to amplitude offset using the limit line for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable For information on the variable Ch see Variable Examples SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SC...

Page 1563: ...E5071C 1790 In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit OFFSet MARKer Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 LIM OFFS MARK ...

Page 1564: ...ts gets the stimulus offset of the limit line for the selected channel specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command The setting of the limit line doesn t change even if the offset value is changed In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the stimulus offset of the limit line for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to e...

Page 1565: ... OFFSet MARKer Equivalent key Analysis Limit Test Limit Line Offsets Stimulus Offset Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit OFFSet STIMulus numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit OFFSet STIMulus In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit OFFSet STIMulus numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit OFFSet STIM...

Page 1566: ...and In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the bandwidth test results for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data for limit line of NOP number of measurement points x4 Where n is an integer between 1 and NOP Data nx4 3 The stimulus val...

Page 1567: ...LCulate Ch SELected LIMit STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected LIMit REPort DATA SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected LIMit REPort POINts Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit REPort ALL In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit REPort ALL Example of us...

Page 1568: ...ad the stimulus values at all the measurement points that failed the limit test for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data for failed measurement points can be read out with the SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected LIMit REPort POINts object Data type Variant type Var...

Page 1569: ...above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit REPort DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric N newline END Where N is the number of the measurement points that failed can be read out with the CALC 1 160 LIM REP POIN command Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 LIM REP POIN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 REDIM B 1 A 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 LIM REP 50 ENTER 717 B ...

Page 1570: ...e trace and read the number of the measurement points that failed the limit test for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Number of measurement points that failed Data type Long integer type Long Preset Value 0 Examples Dim FailPoin As Long SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCP...

Page 1571: ...160 SELected LIMit REPort POINts In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit REPort POINts Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 LIM REP POIN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1572: ... This command turns ON OFF the limit test function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the limit test function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the limit test function Data type Boole...

Page 1573: ...SCPI DISPlay FSIGn Equivalent key Analysis Limit Test Limit Test Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected LIMit STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 LIMit STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 ...

Page 1574: ... marker display is automatically set to ON In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set the marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 to the active marker for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Mk Description Marker number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 10 Notice ...

Page 1575: ...Marker More Markers Marker 5 Marker 6 Marker 7 Marker 8 Marker 9 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 ACTivate In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 ACTivate Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 ACT ...

Page 1576: ...xecuted and the object is ignored In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the bandwidth search result of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates 4 element array data bandwidth search result Data 0 The ba...

Page 1577: ...ivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 BWIDth DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 BWIDth DATA Query Response numeric1 numeric2 numeric3 numeric4 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 BWID DATA 20 ENTER 717 A B C D ...

Page 1578: ...and turns ON OFF the bandwidth search result display for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the bandwidth search result display for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the bandwidth search resu...

Page 1579: ... MARKer Mk BWIDth THReshold Equivalent key Marker Search Bandwidth Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer BWIDth STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer BWIDth STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer BWIDth STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer BWIDth STATe Query response ...

Page 1580: ...mmand sets gets the bandwidth definition value the value to define the pass band of the filter of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the bandwidth definition value of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not ...

Page 1581: ...r 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 BWIDth THReshold 6 BandVal SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 BWIDth THReshold Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer BWIDth STATe Equivalent key Marker Search Bandwidth Value Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 BWIDth THReshold numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELecte...

Page 1582: ...Programming 1809 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 BWID THR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 BWID THR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1583: ...es for the selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the marker coupling between traces for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the marker coupling between traces Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the foll...

Page 1584: ...ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer COUPle In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer COUPle ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer COUPle Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK COUP OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK COUP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1585: ... the readout value is the value relative to the reference marker In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the response and stimulus value of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates 3 element array data re...

Page 1586: ...LCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk Y Equivalent key Marker Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 Ref Marker Marker More Markers Marker 5 Marker 6 Marker 7 Marker 8 Marker 9 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 n...

Page 1587: ...hich the marker moves only at the measurement points with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the discrete mode with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr ...

Page 1588: ...Discrete Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 DISCrete ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 DISCrete In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 DISCrete ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 DISCrete Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MAR...

Page 1589: ...ommand sets gets the coupling of the marker search range for all traces for the selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above even though you can select the trace and set get the coupling of the marker search range for all traces just by executing the above TRACe Tr command the Tr value is omitted This is because the command is applied to all the traces Variable Parameter Status Description On ...

Page 1590: ...t SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain COUPle ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain COUPle In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain COUPle ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain COUPle Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OU...

Page 1591: ...aram SCPI CALCulate Ch TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple R ANGe Description This command sets gets the target range of search analysis for the selected marker for the selected channel Ch in revision A 9 60 and above Even though you can select the trace and set get the target range of search analysis for all traces just by executing the above TRACe Tr command the Tr value is omitted This ...

Page 1592: ...to max within the search range SCPI CALCulate TRACe 2 MARKer 2 FUNCtion TYPE MAXimum SCPI CALCulate TRACe 2 MARKer 2 FUNCtion EXECute End Sub Refer to Setting Multiple Range for the operations procedure to place multiple markers within a search range Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple ST ARt SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple ST...

Page 1593: ...on DOMain MULTiple RANGe numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple RANGe Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK2 FUNC DOM MULT RANG 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK2 FUNC DOM MULT RANG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1594: ...e Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple S TARt Param Description This command sets gets the start value of the target range in the multiple search range for the selected channel Ch in revision A 9 60 and above When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set You can select the trace and set get the start value of the target range in the multiple search range for the trace wh...

Page 1595: ... CALCULATE Ch SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STATe SCPI CALCULATE Ch SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STOP Equivalent key Marker Search Search Range Multiple Range Start Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STARt 1 16 numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STARt 1 16 The following syntax is als...

Page 1596: ...Programming 1823 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM MULT STAR 2 1 7E9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM MULT STAR 2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1597: ...FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STATe Description This command sets gets the state of the multiple search range for the active trace of the selected channel Ch in revision A 9 60 and above You can select the trace and set get the multiple search range for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Descr...

Page 1598: ...iple RA NGe Equivalent key Marker Search Search Range Multiple Range Multiple Range Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STATe The following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple ST...

Page 1599: ...MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple S TOP Param Description This command sets gets the stop value of the target range in the multiple search range for the selected channel Ch in revision A 9 60 and above When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set You can select the trace and set get the stop value of the target range in the multiple search range for the trace when the t...

Page 1600: ...SCPI CALCULATE Ch SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STATe SCPI CALCULATE Ch SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple START Equivalent key Marker Search Search Range Multiple Range Stop Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STOP 1 16 numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion DOMain MULTiple STOP 1 16 The following syntax is a...

Page 1601: ...E5071C 1828 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM MULT STOP 2 1 8E9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM MULT STOP 2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1602: ...nnel Ch When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the start value of the marker search range for the trace when the trace coupling is off just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description The start value of ...

Page 1603: ...Lected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STARt In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STARt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK FUNC DOM STAR 1 7E9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1...

Page 1604: ... use an arbitrary range when executing the marker search for the selected channel Ch When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get whether to use an arbitrary range when executing the marker search for the trace when the trace coupling is off just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to e...

Page 1605: ...OP SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key Marker Search Search Range Search Range ON OFF Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain ...

Page 1606: ...h range for the selected channel Ch When the trace coupling is off the active trace is the target to be set In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the stop value of the marker search range for the trace when the trace coupling is off just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Desc...

Page 1607: ...l revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STOP In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer FUNCtion DOMain STOP Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK FUNC DOM STOP ...

Page 1608: ...earch with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Examples SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 FUNCtion TYPE maximum SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 FUNCtion EXECute Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulat...

Page 1609: ...te 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion EXECute In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion EXECute Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC EXEC ...

Page 1610: ... value when executing the peak search with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch Peak excursion value is the minimum value of the difference relative to the right and left adjacent measurement points In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the lower limit of peak excursion value when executing the peak search with marker 1...

Page 1611: ...k SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 FUNCtion PEXCursion 0 2 PeakExc SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 FUNCtion PEXCursion Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion PPOLarity Equivalent key Marker Search Peak Peak Excursion Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELect...

Page 1612: ...Programming 1839 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC PEXC 0 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC PEXC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1613: ...polarity of the peak search with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the polarity of the peak search with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable...

Page 1614: ...r Mk FUNCtion PEXCursion Equivalent key Marker Search Peak Peak Polarity Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion PPOLarity POSitive NEGative BOTH CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion PPOLarity In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion PPOLarity POSitive NEGative BOTH...

Page 1615: ...Mk FUNCtion TARGet Description This command sets gets the target value to be searched with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the target value to be searched with marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need...

Page 1616: ...ted MARKer 1 FUNCtion TARGet 12 5 TargVal SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MARKer 1 FUNCtion TARGet Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion TYPE SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion TTRansition Equivalent key Marker Search Target Target Value Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TARGe...

Page 1617: ...E5071C 1844 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC TARG 12 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC TARG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1618: ...ion to repeat search for each sweep for marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the search tracking for marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable P...

Page 1619: ...EXECute Equivalent key Marker Search Tracking Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TRACking ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TRACking In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TRACking ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TRACk...

Page 1620: ...sition type of the target search for marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 of the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and select the transition type of the target search for marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELec...

Page 1621: ...Ker Mk FUNCtion TARGet Equivalent key Marker Search Target Target Transition Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TTRansition POSitive NEGative BOTH CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TTRansition In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TTRansition POSitive NEG...

Page 1622: ...rker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and select the search type for marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Search type of marker Data type Character string type S...

Page 1623: ...ALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion PEXCursion SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion PPOLarity SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion TARGet SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion TTRansition SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent key Marker Search Max Min Marker Search Peak Search Peak Search Left Search Right Marker Search Target Search Target ...

Page 1624: ...1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TYPE MAXimum MINimum PEAK LPEak RPEak TARGet LTARget RTARget CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 FUNCtion TYPE Query response MAX MIN PEAK LPE RPE TARG LTAR RTAR newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE PEAK 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1625: ...is obtained In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the notch search result of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates 4 element array data notch bandwidth search result Data 0 The bandwidth Data 1 Cente...

Page 1626: ...uivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 NOTCh DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 NOTCh DATA Query response value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK1 NOTC DATA 20 ENTER 717 A B C D ...

Page 1627: ... display for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the notch search result display for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the notch search result display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Sele...

Page 1628: ...OTCh THReshold Equivalent key Marker Search Notch Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer NOTCh STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer NOTCh STATe In revision A 9 60 and above CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer NOTCh STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer NOTCh STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK NOTC...

Page 1629: ... value of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the notch definition value of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCul...

Page 1630: ...Related Objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer NOTCh SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer NOTCh DATA Equivalent key Marker Search Notch Value Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 NOTCh THReshold value CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 NOTCh THReshold In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer ...

Page 1631: ...on of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 to the value of the instrument setting item Param for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Instrument setting item Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following STARt Sets the sweep start value to the stim...

Page 1632: ...Lected MARKer 1 SET cent Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MARKer REFerence STATe Equivalent key Marker Fctn Marker Start Marker Stop Marker Center Marker Reference Marker Delay There are no equivalent keys for the parameters of RMARker and SPAN Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 SET STARt STOP CENTer RLEV...

Page 1633: ...y of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the display of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of displa...

Page 1634: ...anel a marker set to ON is automatically set to the active marker When turning OFF the display of the marker Marker Clear Marker Menu Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 Marker 5 Marker 6 Marker 7 Marker 8 Marker 9 Ref Marker Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the ...

Page 1635: ...race of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set the stimulus value for marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Ch 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Stimulus value of the marker Data type Double precision floating point type Double...

Page 1636: ...er 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 Ref Marker Marker More Markers Marker 5 Marker 6 Marker 7 Marker 8 Marker 9 When performing the operation from the front panel you turn ON the marker and set the stimulus value at the same time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 X numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 X In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is ...

Page 1637: ...ence STATe object the readout value is the value relative to the reference marker In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the response value of marker 1 to 9 Mk and reference marker Mk 10 for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates 2 element array dat...

Page 1638: ... When performing the operation from the front panel you turn ON the marker and read the response value on the display Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer 1 10 Y In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MARKer 1 10 Y Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 newline END Description numeric 1 Response value primar...

Page 1639: ...ce STATe Description This command turns ON OFF the reference marker mode for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the reference marker mode for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the reference m...

Page 1640: ...uivalent key Marker Ref Marker Mode Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer REFerence STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MARKer REFerence STATe In revision A 9 60 and above CALCulate 1 160 TRACe Tr MARKer REFerence STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe Tr MARKer REFerence STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MARK REF ON...

Page 1641: ...r the active trace of selected channel Ch The math result according to this setting is displayed on the data trace In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the data trace display method for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Math method between measurem...

Page 1642: ...Display Data Math OFF Data Mem Data Mem Data Mem Data Mem Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MATH FUNCtion NORMal SUBTract DIVide ADD MULTiply CALCulate 1 160 SELected MATH FUNCtion In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MATH FUNCtion NORMal SUBTract DIVide ADD MULTiply CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MATH FUNCtio...

Page 1643: ...u can select the trace and copy the measurement data to the memory trace for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Examples SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected MATH MEMorize Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Display Data Mem Equivalent SCPI command Syntax A...

Page 1644: ...e trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the X axis frequency when the frequency offset feature is off for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Selects the X axis frequency frequency offset off Data type Character string typ...

Page 1645: ...O RF Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MIXer XAXis NORMal RFPLo RFMLo LOMRf CALCulate 1 160 SELected MIXer XAXis In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MIXer XAXis NORMal RFPLo RFMLo LOMRf CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MIXer XAXis Query response NORM RFPL RFML LOMR newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1...

Page 1646: ...e In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the statistics values of the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates 3 element array data statistics value Data 0 Mean value Data 1 Standard deviation Data 2 Difference between the maximum value and the minimum va...

Page 1647: ...vision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MSTatistics DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 newline END Description numeric 1 Mean value numeric 2 Standard deviation numeric 3 Difference between the maximum value and the minimum value Peak to Peak Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 MST DATA 20 ENTER 717 A B C ...

Page 1648: ...es display for the active trace of selected channel Ch The statistical values contains mean value standard deviation and the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the statistics values display for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr...

Page 1649: ...ed MSTatistics DATA Equivalent key Marker Fctn Statistics Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected MSTatistics STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected MSTatistics STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MSTatistics STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MSTatistics STATe Query response 1 0 newline END E...

Page 1650: ...e of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the X axis frequency when the frequency offset feature is on for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description Selects the X axis frequency frequency offset on Data type Character string type String...

Page 1651: ...Axis Base Stimulus Response Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected OFFSet XAXis BASE STIMulus RESPonse CALCulate 1 160 SELected OFFSet XAXis In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 OFFSet XAXis BASE STIMulus RESPonse CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 OFFSet XAXis Query response BASE STIMulus RESPonse newline END Example ...

Page 1652: ... the setting with the SCPI FORMat DATA command In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the ripple limit table for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description Indicates the array data for ripple line of 1 Num number of limit lines 4 Where n is an integer betwee...

Page 1653: ... value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples 1 Dim RLimData As Variant SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected RLIMit DATA Array 1 1 1E6 1E9 0 RLimData SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected RLIMit DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected RLIMit DATA Array 0 Clear Ripple Lim...

Page 1654: ...1 N 4 CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DATA numeric 1 numeric 1 N 4 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric 1 Nx4 newline END Example of use 10 DIM B 1 2 1 4 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 RLIM DATA 2 1 1E9 3E9 3 1 5E9 7E9 3 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 RLIM DATA 40 ENTER 717 A B 1...

Page 1655: ...e ripple limit line display for the active trace specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the ripple limit line display for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description O...

Page 1656: ...IMit DISPlay VALue Equivalent key Analysis Ripple Limit Ripple Limit Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DISPlay LINE ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DISPlay LINE In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DISPlay LINE ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DISPlay LINE Query respons...

Page 1657: ...d sets gets the ripple limit band for ripple value display for selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the ripple limit band for ripple value display for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description The ripple limit band Data type Long intege...

Page 1658: ...ntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DISPlay SELect numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DISPlay SELect In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DISPlay SELect numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DISPlay SELect Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 RLIM DISP SEL 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 ...

Page 1659: ...lay type of ripple value for the active trace specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the display type of ripple value for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description The di...

Page 1660: ...y SELect Equivalent key Analysis Ripple Limit Ripple Value OFF Absolute Margin Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DISPlay VALue OFF ABS MAR CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit DISPlay VALue In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DISPlay VALue OFF ABS MAR CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit DISPlay VAL...

Page 1661: ... channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the ripple test result for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description The ripple test result Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the ripple test result is FAIL Fal...

Page 1662: ...nt key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit FAIL In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit FAIL Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 RLIM FAIL 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1663: ...is executed depends on the setting with the SCPI FORMat DATA command Read only In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and read the ripple value of the ripple test for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data for ripple line of 1 Num number of li...

Page 1664: ...tax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit REPort DATA In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 RLIMit REPort DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric 1 Nx3 newline END Type Description numeric 1 Number of ripple limit line 1 to 12 numeric 1 n 3 2 Number of ripple limit bands numeric 1 n 3 1 Ripple value numeric 1 n 3 Results of ripple test ...

Page 1665: ...E5071C 1892 10 DIM B 1 2 1 3 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 RLIM REP 30 ENTER 717 A B ...

Page 1666: ...FF the ripple test function for the active trace specified with the SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect command of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the ripple test function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF...

Page 1667: ...ate Ch SELected RLIMit DISPlay VALue SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected RLIMit FAIL SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected RLIMit REPort DATA Equivalent key Analysis Ripple Limit Ripple Limit Test Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected RLIMit STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 ...

Page 1668: ...he smoothing aperture percentage to the sweep span value of the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the smoothing aperture of the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Smoothing aperture Data type Double precision float...

Page 1669: ... Ch SELected SMOothing STATe Equivalent key Avg Smo Aperture Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected SMOothing APERture numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected SMOothing APERture In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 SMOothing APERture numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 SMOothing APERture Query response numeric newline ...

Page 1670: ...ng for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and turn ON OFF the smoothing for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the smoothing Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON ...

Page 1671: ...ion CALCulate 1 160 SELected SMOothing STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected SMOothing STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 SMOothing STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 SMOothing STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 SMO STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC1 SMO STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1672: ...formation function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the center value for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Cente...

Page 1673: ... TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME CENTer numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME CENTer In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME CENTer numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 T...

Page 1674: ... using the impulse width used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the shape of the Kayser Bessel window using the impulse width used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not nee...

Page 1675: ...PI CALCulate Ch SELected TRANsform TIME STEP RTIMe SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME IMPulse WIDTh numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME IMPulse WIDTh In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supp...

Page 1676: ... function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the shape of the Kayser Bessel window used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value ...

Page 1677: ...E STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME KBESsel numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME KBESsel In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME KBESsel numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TI...

Page 1678: ...hange the frequency range to match with the low pass type transformation of the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Examples SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected TRANsform TIME LPFRequency Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected TRA...

Page 1679: ...n function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the span value for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Span value Data...

Page 1680: ...ected TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME SPAN numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME SPAN In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME SPAN numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TR...

Page 1681: ...ion function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the start value for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Start value ...

Page 1682: ...cted TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Start Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STARt In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME STARt numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 T...

Page 1683: ...more If you execute this object to try to enable the transformation function when the sweep type is other than the linear sweep or the number of points is less than three an error occurs and the object is ignored When the sweep type is the power sweep you cannot turn on the transformation function If you execute this object trying to turn on the transformation function during the power sweep an er...

Page 1684: ...WEep TYPE SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts Equivalent key Analysis Transform Transform Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STATe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME STA...

Page 1685: ...ng the rise time of step signal used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the shape of the Kayser Bessel window using the rise time of step signal used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr comm...

Page 1686: ...WIDTh SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected TRANsform TIME KBESsel SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STEP RTIMe numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STEP RTIMe In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also suppo...

Page 1687: ...domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the stimulus type used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Param Description The stimulus type Data type Ch...

Page 1688: ...t the same time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STIMulus IMPulse STEP CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STIMulus In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME STIMulus IMPulse STEP CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME STIMulus Query response IMP STEP newline END Example of...

Page 1689: ...function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the stop value used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Variable Parameter Value Description Stop value D...

Page 1690: ...Lected TRANsform TIME STATe SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Analysis Transform Stop Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME STOP In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME STOP numeric CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRA...

Page 1691: ...he transformation type used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the active trace of selected channel Ch In revision A 9 60 and above you can select the trace and set get the transformation type used for the transformation function of the time domain function for the trace just by executing the above TRACe Tr command You do not need to execute SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter...

Page 1692: ... Lowpass Step Lowpass Imp When performing this operation from the front panel you select the stimulus type at the same time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax All revision CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME TYPE BPASs LPASs CALCulate 1 160 SELected TRANsform TIME TYPE In revision A 9 60 and above the following syntax is also supported CALCulate 1 160 TRACe 1 16 TRANsform TIME TYPE BPASs LPASs CAL...

Page 1693: ... Port information output Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use SCPI CONTrol HANDler A DATA 15 Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent S...

Page 1694: ...f the data outputted by this project is ignored when outputting the READY FOR TRIGGER signal is turned ON specifying True with the SCPI CONTrol HANDler EXTension RTRigger STATe object Variable Parameter Value Description Port information output Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of ...

Page 1695: ...E5071C 1922 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND B 15 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND B DATA 15 ...

Page 1696: ...ut as 4 bit binary data using C0 as LSB and C3 as MSB Variable Parameter Value Description Port information output input Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 15 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples SCPI CONTrol HANDle...

Page 1697: ... C DATA numeric CONTrol HANDler C DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C MODE OUTP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C 15 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C MODE INP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1698: ...n of port C Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following INPut Sets the port C to input OUTPut Sets the port C to output Preset value INPut Examples Dim HdlCmode As String SCPI CONTrol HANDler C MODE OUTP HdlCmode SCPI CONTrol HANDler C MODE Related objects SCPI CONTrol HANDler C DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command...

Page 1699: ...E5071C 1926 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C MODE OUTP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C MODE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1700: ...as 4 bit binary data using D0 as LSB and D3 as MSB Variable Parameter Value Description Port information output input Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 15 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples SCPI CONTrol HANDler D...

Page 1701: ... D DATA numeric CONTrol HANDler D DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D MODE OUTP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D 15 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D MODE INP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1702: ...cription Input output direction of port D Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following INPut Sets the port D to input OUTPut Sets the port D to output Preset value INPut Examples Dim HdlDmode As String SCPI CONTrol HANDler D MODE OUTP HdlDmode SCPI CONTrol HANDler D MODE Related objects SCPI CONTrol HANDler D DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front...

Page 1703: ...E5071C 1930 CONTrol HANDler C MODE Query response INP OUTP newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D MODE OUTP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D MODE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1704: ...binary data using C0 as LSB and D3 as MSB Variable Parameter Value Description Port information output input Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples SCPI CONTrol HANDler C MODE ou...

Page 1705: ...and Syntax CONTrol HANDler E DATA numeric CONTrol HANDler E DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C MODE OUTP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D MODE OUTP 30 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND E 128 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND C MODE INP 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND D MODE INP 30 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND E 40 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1706: ...ONTrol HANDler B DATA object the bit 14 of the data outputted by the SCPI CONTrol HANDler F DATA object is ignored Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the INDEX signal output Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the INDEX signal output False or OFF Turns OFF the INDEX signal output Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Indx As Boolean SCPI...

Page 1707: ...x CONTrol HANDler EXTension INDex STATe ON OFF 1 0 CONTrol HANDler EXTension INDex STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND IND STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND IND STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1708: ... SCPI CONTrol HANDler B DATA object the bit 15 of the data output by the SCPI CONTrol HANDler F DATA object is ignored Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the READY FOR TRIGGER signal output Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the READY FOR TRIGGER signal output False or OFF Turns OFF the READY FOR TRIGGER signal output Preset value False ...

Page 1709: ...ONTrol HANDler EXTension RTRigger STATe ON OFF 1 0 CONTrol HANDler EXTension RTRigger STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND RTR STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND RTR STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1710: ...put by this project is ignored when outputting the READY FOR TRIGGER signal is turned ON specifying True with the SCPI CONTrol HANDler EXTension RTRigger STATe object Variable Parameter Value Description Port information output Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is no...

Page 1711: ...E5071C 1938 Syntax CONTrol HANDler F DATA numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND F 511 ...

Page 1712: ...s gets data to OUTPUT1 or OUTPUT2 of the handler I O Variable Parameter Num Description Number of the OUTPUT terminal Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 or 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Value Description Polarity High Low Data type Long integer type Long Range Select from the following 1 Specifies ...

Page 1713: ...NTrol HANDler OUTPut 1 DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CONTrol HANDler OUTPut 1 2 DATA 1 0 CONTrol HANDler OUTPut 1 2 DATA Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND OUTP1 1 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT HAND OUTP1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1714: ...ong integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Note This command is available only for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut A DATA 150 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut A DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is availabl...

Page 1715: ...E5071C 1942 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP A 0 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP A 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1716: ...Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0V Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut A VOLTage DATA 5 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut A VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B VOLTage DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C VOLTage DATA SCP...

Page 1717: ...E5071C 1944 CONTrol MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut A VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP A VOLT 2 3 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP A VOLT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1718: ...up B Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 15 Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B DATA 12 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is...

Page 1719: ...E5071C 1946 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP B 10 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP B 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1720: ...Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0V Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B VOLTage DATA 0 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A VOLTage DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C VOLTage DATA SCP...

Page 1721: ...E5071C 1948 CONTrol MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut B VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP B VOLT 0 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP B VOLT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1722: ...type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 15 Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C DATA 10 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available...

Page 1723: ...E5071C 1950 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP C 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP C 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1724: ...ouble precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0V Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C VOLTage DATA 5 2 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A VOLTage DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B VOLTage DATA SC...

Page 1725: ...E5071C 1952 CONTrol MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut C VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP C VOLT 4 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP C VOLT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1726: ...type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 15 Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D DATA 5 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available ...

Page 1727: ...E5071C 1954 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP D 4 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP D 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1728: ...ouble precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0V Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D VOLTage DATA 5 2 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A VOLTage DATA SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B VOLTage DATA SC...

Page 1729: ...E5071C 1956 CONTrol MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP D VOLT 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 OUTP D VOLT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1730: ...e multiport test set port Variable Parameter Pt Description Test set port Data type Note This command is available for E5092A multiport test set Examples SCPI CONTrol MULTiplexer 1 PORT 1 SELect Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax CONTrol MULTiplexer 1 2 PORT SELect Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 CONT MULT1 PORT SEL ...

Page 1731: ...ription Sets Gets ON OFF state of the frequency display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select either of the following True or ON Turns ON the frequency display False or OFF Turns OFF the frequency display Preset value True or ON Examples Dim DispFreq As Boolean SCPI DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe 0 DispFreq SCPI DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe Equivalent key Display Frequency Equivale...

Page 1732: ...Programming 1959 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP ANN FREQ OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP ANN FREQ 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1733: ... Description This command clears the error message displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the LCD display Examples SCPI DISPlay CCLear Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay CCLear Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP CCL ...

Page 1734: ...able Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the clock display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select either of the following True or ON Turns ON the clock display False or OFF Turns OFF the clock display Preset value True or ON Examples Dim DispTime As Boolean SCPI DISPlay CLOCk ON DispTime SCPI DISPlay CLOCk Equivalent key System Misc Setup Clock Setup Show Clock Equivalent SCPI command Synt...

Page 1735: ...E5071C 1962 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP CLOC OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP CLOC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1736: ...Parameter Dnum Description Select either of the following 1 Normal display 2 Inverted display Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 or 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when the command is executed Parameter Data Description Indicates 3 element array data Data 0 Sets amount of red Data 1 Sets amount of green Data 2 Sets amount of...

Page 1737: ...Dim BackColor As Variant SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 BACK Array 1 2 3 BackColor SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 BACK Related objects SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum RESet Equivalent key System Misc Setup Display Setup Color Setup Normal Invert Background Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay COLor 1 2 BACK numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 DISPlay COLor 1 2 BACK Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 newline END Example...

Page 1738: ...of the grid line of the graph Gnum 2 for the normal display Dnum 1 and inverted display Dnum 2 Variable Parameter Gnum Description The number of items 1 The outer frame line of the graph 2 The color of the grid line of the graph Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Dat...

Page 1739: ...ded is set Examples Dim GritColor As Variant SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 GRATicule 1 Array 1 2 3 GritColor SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 GRATicule 1 Related objects SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum RESet Equivalent key System Misc Setup Display Setup Color Setup Normal Invert Graticule Main Graticule Sub Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay COLor 1 2 GRATicule 1 2 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 DISPlay COLor 1 2 GRATicul...

Page 1740: ...ipple test result Lnum 1 Color of the limit line Lnum 2 for normal display Dnum 1 and inverted display Dnum 2 Variable Parameter Lnum Description The number of item 1 The limit test result Fail Pass 2 The limit line Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Data Description...

Page 1741: ...of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim LimColor As Variant SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 LIMit 1 Array 1 2 3 LimColor SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 LIMit 1 Related objects SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum RESet Equivalent key System Misc Setup Color Setup Normal Invert Limit Fail Limit Line Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay COLor 1 2 LIMit 1 2 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 DISPlay COLor 1 2 LIMit 1 2 Query respon...

Page 1742: ...Dnum 1 and inverted display Dnum 2 Examples SCPI DISPlay COLor 1 RESet Related objects SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum BACK SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum GRATicule Gnum SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum LIMit Lnum SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum TRACe Tr DATA SCPI DISPlay COLor Dnum TRACe Tr MEMory Equivalent key System Misc Setup Color Setup Normal Invert Reset Color OK Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay COLor 1 2 RESet Exa...

Page 1743: ... Sets amount of red Data 1 Sets amount of green Data 2 Sets amount of blue The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range Data 0 0 to 5 Data 1 0 to 5 Data 2 0 to 5 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded...

Page 1744: ...e 6 Data Trace 7 Data Trace 8 Data Trace 9 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay COLor 1 2 TRAC 1 36 DATA numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 DISPlay COLor 1 2 TRAC 1 36 DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP COL1 TRAC1 DATA 1 2 3 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP COL1 TRAC1 DATA 30 ENTER 717 A B C ...

Page 1745: ... 0 Sets amount of red Data 1 Sets amount of green Data 2 Sets amount of blue The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range Data 0 0 to 5 Data 1 0 to 5 Data 2 0 to 5 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceed...

Page 1746: ...6 Mem Trace 7 Mem Trace 8 Mem Trace 9 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay COLor 1 2 TRAC 1 36 MEMory numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 DISPlay COLor 1 2 TRAC 1 36 MEMory Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP COL1 TRAC1 MEM 1 2 3 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP COL1 TRAC1 MEM 30 ENTER 717 A B C ...

Page 1747: ... CLEar Description This command clears all character strings displayed in the echo window Examples SCPI DISPlay ECHO CLEar Related objects SCPI DISPlay ECHO DATA Equivalent key Macro Setup Clear Echo Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay ECHO CLEar Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP ECHO CLE ...

Page 1748: ...scription String you want to display in the echo window Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Examples SCPI DISPlay ECHO DATA Test Result SCPI DISPlay TABLe TYPE echo SCPI DISPlay TABLe STATe True Related objects ECHO SCPI DISPlay TABLe TYPE SCPI DISPlay TABLe STATe SCPI DISPlay ECHO CLEar Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCP...

Page 1749: ...scription ON OFF of the display update of the E5071C measurement screen Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the display update False or OFF Turns OFF the display update Preset value True or ON Examples Dim DispUpdt As Boolean SCPI DISPlay ENABle False DispUpdt SCPI DISPlay ENABle Equivalent key Display Update Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay ENA...

Page 1750: ...Programming 1977 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP ENAB OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1751: ...type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the Fail display False or OFF Turns OFF the Fail display Preset value True or ON On off of the Fail display cannot be set at each test When the Fail display of either of test is turned on the Fail display of other tests turns on too Examples Dim DispFail As Boolean SCPI DISPlay FSIGn False DispFail SCPI DISPlay FSIGn Related objects ...

Page 1752: ... Limit Fail Sign Analysis Bandwidth limit Fail Sign Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay FSIGn ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay FSIGn Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP FSIG OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP FSIG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1753: ... Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following NORMal Specifies the normal display background color black INVert Specifies the display in which the color of the normal display is inversed background color white Preset value NORMal Examples Dim DispImg As String SCPI DISPlay IMAGe inv DispImg SCPI DISPlay IMAGe Equivalent key Display Invert Color Equivalent SCPI command Syn...

Page 1754: ...Programming 1981 NORM INV newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP IMAG INV 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP IMAG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1755: ...ws of the other channels are not displayed Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the window maximization Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the window maximization False or OFF Turns OFF the window maximization Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim ChMax As Boolean SCPI DISPlay SPLit d1_2 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 2 ACTivate SCPI DISPlay MAXimiz...

Page 1756: ...Programming 1983 Syntax DISPlay MAXimize ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay MAXimize Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP MAX ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP MAX 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1757: ...FF of the softkey menu bar display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the softkey menu bar display False or OFF Turns OFF the softkey menu bar display Preset value True or ON Examples Dim DispSkey As Boolean SCPI DISPlay SKEY STATe False DispSkey SCPI DISPlay SKEY STATe Equivalent key Entry Off Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay SKEY STATe ON OFF...

Page 1758: ...Programming 1985 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP MAX ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP MAX 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1759: ...g Range Select from the following D1 See Channel graph window layouts D12 See Channel graph window layouts D1_2 See Channel graph window layouts D112 See Channel graph window layouts D1_1_2 See Channel graph window layouts D123 See Channel graph window layouts D1_2_3 See Channel graph window layouts D12_33 See Channel graph window layouts D11_23 See Channel graph window layouts D13_23 See Channel ...

Page 1760: ...w layouts D1234_5678 See Channel graph window layouts D12_34_56_78 See Channel graph window layouts D123_456_789 See Channel graph window layouts D123__ABC See Channel graph window layouts D1234__9ABC See Channel graph window layouts D1234__CDEF See Channel graph window layouts D1234__DEFG See Channel graph window layouts D1X1 D1X2 D1X3 D1X4 D2X1 D2X2 D2X3 D2X4 D3X1 D3X2 D3X3 D3X4 ...

Page 1761: ... D1 From Firmware revision A 08 10 channel display configuration of 8x9 6x12 and 8x12 is added Examples Dim ChanAloc As String SCPI DISPlay SPLit d12_34 ChanAloc SCPI DISPlay SPLit Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch SPLit Equivalent key Display Allocate Channels Channel graph window layouts ...

Page 1762: ...ogramming 1989 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay SPLit D1 D12 D1_2 D112 D1_1_2 D123 D1_2_3 D12_33 D11_23 D13_23 D1 2_13 D1234 D1_2_3_4 D12_34 D123_456 D12_34_56 D1234_5678 D12_34_5 6_78 D123_456_789 ...

Page 1763: ...se D1 D12 D1_2 D112 D1_1_2 D123 D1_2_3 D12_33 D11_23 D13_23 D1 2_13 D1234 D1_2_3_4 D12_34 D123_456 D12_34_56 D1234_5678 D12_34_5 6_78 D123_456_789 D123__ABC D1234__9ABC D1234__CDEF D1234__DEFG D1X1 D1X2 D1 X3 D1X4 D2X1 D2X2 D2X3 D2X4 D3X1 D3X2 D3X3 D3X4 D4X1 D4X2 D4X3 D4X4 D4X5 D4X6 D4X7 D4X8 D4X9 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP SPL D1_2 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP SPL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1764: ...tes the coordinates position of Table Area Param 0 coordinates X position of top left of Table Area Param 1 coordinates Y position of top left of Table Area Param 2 coordinates X position of bottom right of Table Area Param 3 coordinates Y position of bottom right of Table Area The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Resolution 1 Examples Dim TablePos As Variant SCPI DI...

Page 1765: ...1C 1992 Syntax DISPlay TABLe POSition RECTangle Query response numeric1 numeric2 numeric3 numeric4 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TABL STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TABL POS 20 ENTER 717 A B C D ...

Page 1766: ...us Description ON OFF of the display of the window that appears in the lower part of the LCD display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the display False or OFF Turns OFF the display Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim DispTbl As Boolean SCPI DISPlay TABLe TYPE echo SCPI DISPlay TABLe STATe True DispTbl SCPI DISPlay TABLe STATe Related objects SCP...

Page 1767: ...en performing the operation from the front panel you select the type of the window that appears in the lower part of the LCD display and turn ON OFF the display at the same time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay TABLe STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay TABLe STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TABL ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TABL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1768: ...pe String Range Select from the following MARKer Specifies the marker table window LIMit Specifies the limit test table window SEGMent Specifies the segment table window ECHO Specifies the echo window PLOSs Specifies the loss compensation table window SCFactor Specifies the power sensor s calibration factor table window RLIMit Specifies the ripple test table window Preset value MARKer Examples Dim...

Page 1769: ...ettings Sensor B Settings When performing the operation from the front panel you select the type of the window that appears in the lower part of the LCD display and turn ON OFF the display at the same time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay TABLe TYPE MARKer LIMit SEGMent ECHO PLOSs SCFactor RLIMit DISPlay TABLe TYPE Query response MARK LIM SEGM ECHO PLOS SCF RLIM newline END Example of use 10...

Page 1770: ...ce when the display update of the LCD screen is set to OFF specifying False with the SCPI DISPlay ENABle object Examples SCPI DISPlay ENABle False SCPI DISPlay UPDate IMMediate Related objects SCPI DISPlay ENABle Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay UPDate IMMediate Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP UPD ...

Page 1771: ...layed to the active channel If this object is used to set a channel not displayed to the active channel an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI DISPlay SPLit d1_2 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 2 ACTivate Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key Channel Prev Channel Next Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 ACTivate Example of use 10 OU...

Page 1772: ...f each trace based on trace 1 Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the mode that allign marker display position based on trace 1 False or OFF Turns OFF the alignment Preset value True or ON Examples Dim AnnMarkAlig As Boolean SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ANNotation MARKer ALIGn STATe False AnnMarkAlig SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ANNotation MARKer ALIGn STATe Relate...

Page 1773: ...ANNotation MARKer ALIGn STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow 1 160 ANNotation MARKer ALIGn STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 ANN MARK ALIG OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 ANN MARK ALIG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1774: ...display of the marker value of only active Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Displays the marker values of only active traces ON False or OFF Displays the marker values of all traces OFF Preset value True or ON Examples Dim AnnMarkAlig As Boolean SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ANNotation MARKer SINGle STATe False AnnMarkAlig SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ANNotation MARKer SI...

Page 1775: ...60 ANNotation MARKer SINGle STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow 1 160 ANNotation MARKer SINGle STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 ANN MARK SING OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 ANN MARK SING 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1776: ...ion ON OFF of the graticule label display of the graph Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the graticule label display False or OFF Turns OFF the graticule label display Preset value True or ON Examples Dim DispGrat As Boolean SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 LABel False DispGrat SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 LABel Equivalent key Display Graticule Label Equivalent SCPI ...

Page 1777: ...E5071C 2004 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 LAB ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 LAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1778: ... the window and the other traces are not displayed Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the maximization of the active trace Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the maxim display False or OFF Turns OFF the maxim display Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim TracMax As Boolean SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 2 SELect SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 MAXimi...

Page 1779: ...alent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 MAXimize ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow 1 160 MAXimize Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 MAX ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 MAX 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1780: ... Select from the following D1 See Channel graph window layouts D12 See Channel graph window layouts D1_2 See Channel graph window layouts D112 See Channel graph window layouts D1_1_2 See Channel graph window layouts D123 See Channel graph window layouts D1_2_3 See Channel graph window layouts D12_33 See Channel graph window layouts D11_23 See Channel graph window layouts D13_23 See Channel graph w...

Page 1781: ...outs D1234__9ABC See Channel graph window layouts D1234__DEFG See Channel graph window layouts Preset value D1 Examples Dim TracAloc As String SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 SPLit d1_2 TracAloc SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 SPLit Related objects SCPI DISPlay SPLit Equivalent key Display Allocate Traces Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 36 SPLit D1 D12 D1_2 D112 D1_1_2 D123 D1_2_3 D12_33 D11_23 D13_23...

Page 1782: ...2 D112 D1_1_2 D123 D1_2_3 D12_33 D11_23 D13_23 D1 2_13 D1234 D1_2_3_4 D12_34 D123_456 D12_34_56 D1234_5678 D12_34_56_78 D123_456_7 89 D123__ABC D1234__9ABC D1234__DEFG newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND SPL D1_2 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND SPL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1783: ...Lbl Description Title label Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value Examples Dim TtlLbl As String SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TITLe DATA Filter SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TITLe STATe True TtlLbl SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TITLe DATA Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TITLe STATe Equivalent key Display Edit Title Label Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160...

Page 1784: ...Programming 2011 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TITL DATA Title 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TITL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1785: ... of the title label display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the title label display False or OFF Turns ON the title label display Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim DispTtl As Boolean SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TITLe DATA Filter SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TITLe STATe True DispTtl SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TITLe STATe Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch T...

Page 1786: ...Programming 2013 DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TITLe STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TITL ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TITL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1787: ...on of the marker value on the X axis Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 15 to 100 Preset value 1 Unit percent Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim AnnMPosX As Double SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 1...

Page 1788: ...mand Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 ANNotation MARKer POSition X numeric DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 ANNotation MARKer POSition X Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 ANN MARK POS X 33 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 ANN MARK POS X 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1789: ...f the display span Variable Parameter Value Description Display position of the marker value on the Y axis Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 15 to 100 Preset value 1 Unit percent Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceede...

Page 1790: ... Info X Pos Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 ANNotation MARKer POSition Y numeric DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 ANNotation MARKer POSition Y Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 ANN MARK POS Y 33 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 ANN MARK POS Y 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1791: ...e display Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the memory trace display False or OFF Turns OFF the memory trace display Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim DispMem As Boolean SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 MEMory STATe True DispMem SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 MEMory STATe Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected MATH MEMorize SCPI DISPlay WINDow ...

Page 1792: ...WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MEMory STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 MEMory STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 MEM ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 MEM 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1793: ...Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the data trace display False or OFF Turns OFF the data trace display Preset value True or ON Examples Dim DispTrac As Boolean SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 STATe False DispTrac SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 STATe Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr MEMory STATe Equivalent key Display Display Data when the memory trace display ...

Page 1794: ...Programming 2021 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1795: ...e function automatically adjusts the value of the reference division line and the scale per division to display the trace appropriately Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 Y SCALe AUTO Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr Y SCALe PDIVision SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr Y SCALe RLEVel Equivalent key Scale Auto Scale Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 Y SC...

Page 1796: ...data format is the Smith chart format or the polar format sets the full scale value the value of the outermost circumference Variable Parameter Value Description Scale value Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 18 to 1E8 Preset value Varies depending the data format Log magnitude 10 Phase Expanded phase or Positive phase 90 Group delay 1E 8 Smith chart or Polar or SWR 1 L...

Page 1797: ...ion 1E 9 Pdiv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 Y SCALe PDIVision Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch SELected FORMat SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch Y SCALe DIVisions SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr Y SCALe RLEVel SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr Y SCALe RPOSition Equivalent key Scale Scale Div Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 Y SCALe PDIVision numeric DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 1...

Page 1798: ...erence division line Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 5E8 to 5E8 Preset value 0 Unit Varies depending on the data format Log magnitude MLOG dB decibel Phase PHAS Expanded phase UPH or Positive phase PPH degree Group delay GDEL s second Others No unit Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is no...

Page 1799: ...ISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr Y SCALe PDIVision SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr Y SCALe RPOSition Equivalent key Scale Reference Value Equivalent SCPI command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 Y SCALe RLEVel numeric DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 16 Y SCALe RLEVel Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y RLEV 1E2 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y RLEV 30 ENT...

Page 1800: ... reference division line Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to the number of divisions Preset value 5 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim RefPos As Long SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 Y SCALe RPOSition 6 RefPos SCP...

Page 1801: ...Play WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 36 Y SCALe RPOSition numeric DISPlay WINDow 1 160 TRACe 1 36 Y SCALe RPOSition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y RPOS 6 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y RPOS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1802: ...haracter string type String Range Select from the following LINear Specifies the frequency base linear frequency axis with the minimum frequency at the left edge and the maximum frequency at the right edge OBASe Specifies the order base axis in which the measurement point numbers are positioned evenly in the order of measurement Preset value OBASe Examples Dim DispSegm As String SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep...

Page 1803: ...yntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 X SPACing LINear OBASe DISPlay WINDow 1 160 X SPACing Query response LIN OBAS newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 X SPAC OBAS 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 X SPAC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1804: ...ng integer type Long Range 4 to 30 Preset value 10 Resolution 2 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Divs As Long SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 Y SCALe DIVisions 12 Divs SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 Y SCALe DIVisions Related objects SC...

Page 1805: ...command Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 160 Y SCALe DIVisions numeric DISPlay WINDow 1 160 Y SCALe DIVisions Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 Y DIV 12 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 Y DIV 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1806: ...used when controlling the E5071C using COM objects through E5071C VBA Variable Parameter Param Description Byte order Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following NORMal Specifies the byte order in which transfer starts from the byte including MSB Most Significant Bit SWAPped Specifies the byte order in which transfer starts from the byte including LSB Least Significant B...

Page 1807: ...ey is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer Query response NORM SWAP newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 FORM BORD SWAP 20 OUTPUT 717 FORM BORD 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1808: ... 160 LIM REP CALC 1 160 LIM REP ALL CALC 1 160 BLIM REP CALC 1 160 RLIM DATA CALC 1 160 RLIM REP SENS 1 160 CORR COEF SENS 1 160 FREQ DATA SENS 1 160 SEGM DATA SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL TABL ASEN DATA SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL TABL BSEN DATA SOUR 1 160 POW PORT 1 4 CORR COLL TABL LOSS DATA SOUR 1 160 POW PORT 1 4 CORR DATA ASCII transfer format must be specified when controlling the E5071C using SCPI ...

Page 1809: ...y transfer format Preset value ASCii Examples Dim Fmt As String SCPI FORMat DATA ASC Fmt SCPI FORMat DATA Related objects SCPI FORMat BORDer Parse Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax FORMat DATA ASCii REAL REAL32 FORMat DATA Query response ASC REAL REAL32 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 FORM DATA REAL 20 OUTPUT 717 FORM DATA 30 E...

Page 1810: ...ite only Syntax SCPI HCOPy ABORt Description This command aborts the print output Examples SCPI HCOPy ABORt Related objects SCPI HCOPy IMMediate Equivalent key System Abort Printing Equivalent SCPI command Syntax HCOPy ABORt Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 HCOP ABOR ...

Page 1811: ...r output to the printer Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following NORMal Specifies printing in close color to the display color INVert Specifies printing in the inverted color of the display color Preset value INVert Examples Dim Img As String SCPI HCOPy IMAGe norm Img SCPI HCOPy IMAGe Related objects SCPI HCOPy IMMediate Equivalent key System Invert Image Equivalent S...

Page 1812: ...Programming 2039 HCOPy IMAGe Query response NORM INV newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 HCOP IMAG NORM 20 OUTPUT 717 HCOP IMAG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1813: ...amples SCPI HCOPy IMMediate Related objects SCPI HCOPy ABORt SCPI HCOPy IMAGe Equivalent key System Print When performing the operation from the front panel the image on the LCD display memorized in the volatile memory clipboard the image on the LCD display when the Capture System key is pressed is printed If no image is memorized in the clipboard in the same way as the SCPI HCOPy IMMediate object...

Page 1814: ...Channel Extra Status Event Register Questionable Bandwidth Limit Status Event Register Questionable Bandwidth Limit Extra Status Event Register Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Status Event Register Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Extra Status Event Register Questionable Ripple Limit Status Event Register Questionable Ripple Limit Extra Status Event Register Questionable Ripple Limit Chan...

Page 1815: ...E5071C 2042 10 OUTPUT 717 CLS ...

Page 1816: ...e of the Standard Event Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Preset value 0 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the result of bitwise AND with 255 0xff is set Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI IEEE4882 ESE 16 Stat SCPI IEEE4882 ESE Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 SRE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equival...

Page 1817: ...E5071C 2044 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 ESE 16 20 OUTPUT 717 ESE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1818: ...command clears the register value Variable Parameter Value Description Value of the Standard Event Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Preset value 128 Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI IEEE4882 ESR Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax ESR Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 ESR 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1819: ...ing 3 string 4 string 1 Manufacturer Agilent Technologies is always read out string 2 Model number E5071C is always read out string 3 Serial number example MY123400101 string 4 Firmware revision number example A 07 00 Data type Character string type String Examples Dim Who As String Who SCPI IEEE4882 IDN Equivalent key System Firmware Revision System Service Menu Enable Options Serial Number Equiv...

Page 1820: ...Programming 2047 10 OUTPUT 717 IDN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1821: ...2 Parameter Value Description 1 returned when all pending operations are complete Data type Long integer type Long Examples SCPI IEEE4882 OPC 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire ISOLation SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire LOAD SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire OPEN SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SHORt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COL...

Page 1822: ...Programming 2049 10 OUTPUT 717 OPC ...

Page 1823: ...t Description Identification numbers of installed options Data type Character string type String Note If there is no installed option 0 is read out Examples Dim OptNum As String OptNum SCPI IEEE4882 OPT Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax OPT Query response numeric newline END Example of use Call viVPrintf vi OPT vbLf 0 Call viVScanf vi t...

Page 1824: ...ng state preset with the SCPI SYSTem PRESet object as the continuous initiation mode see SCPI INITiate Ch CONTinuous of channel 1 is set to OFF Examples SCPI IEEE4882 RST Related objects SCPI INITiate Ch CONTinuous SCPI SYSTem PRESet SCPI SYSTem UPReset Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax RST Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 RST ...

Page 1825: ...ster Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Preset value 0 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the result of bitwise AND with 255 0xff is set Note that bit 6 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI IEEE4882 SRE 8 Stat SCPI IEEE4882 SRE Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 ESE SCPI STATus OPERation ENABle SCPI STATus QUEStionable ENABle Equivalent key No e...

Page 1826: ...Programming 2053 SRE numeric SRE Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SRE 128 20 OUTPUT 717 SRE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1827: ...ter Variable Parameter Value Description Value of the Status Byte Register Data type Long integer type Long Preset Value 0 Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI IEEE4882 STB Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STB Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STB 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1828: ...071C if the trigger source is set to GPIB LAN set to BUS with the SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Examples SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce bus SCPI IEEE4882 TRG Related objects SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax TRG Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRG ...

Page 1829: ...aits for the execution of all objects sent before this command to be completed Examples SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce bus SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGle SCPI IEEE4882 WAI MsgBox Done Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax WAI Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 WAI ...

Page 1830: ...on Trigger System Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the continuous initiation mode Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the continuous initiation mode False or OFF Turns OFF the continuous initiation mode Preset value Varies depending on variable Ch Examples Dim ContMode As Boolean SCPI INITiate 2 CONTinuous True ContMode SCPI INITiate 2 ...

Page 1831: ...E5071C 2058 Syntax INITiate 1 160 CONTinuous ON OFF 1 0 INITiate 1 160 CONTinuous Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 INIT1 CONT OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 INIT1 CONT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1832: ...ce it goes back to the idle state If this object is executed for a channel that is not in the idle state or a channel for which the continuous initiation mode is set to ON setting by which the trigger system initiates continuously in the trigger system an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored For more information on the trigger system see Trigger System Examples SCPI INITiate 1 CONT...

Page 1833: ...frm extension or a class module a file with the cls extension If the specified file does not exist an error occurs and the command is ignored Variables Parameter String Description File name in which you want to load the VBA project Range 254 characters or less Preset value Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD PROG Test1 Test1_01 vba 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD PROG A Test1_01 vba Related commands M...

Page 1834: ...ve a vba extension If a file with the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Variables Parameter String Description File name in which you want to save the VBA project Range 254 characters or less Preset value Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR PROG Test1 Test1_01 vba 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR PROG D Test1_01 vba Related commands MMEM LOAD PROG Equivalent key Macro Setup Save VB...

Page 1835: ...is command file transfer from the external controller to the E5071C can be realized When you use directory names and file name separate them with slash or backslash If a file with the specified file name already exists for writing or if the specified file does not exist for reading out Query an error occurs and the command is ignored Variables Parameter String Description File name on the built in...

Page 1836: ... ENTER 717 USING A A 30 ENTER 717 USING A Digit 40 Img Digit A 50 ENTER 717 USING Img Byte 60 Img Byte A 70 ALLOCATE Dat VAL Byte 80 ENTER 717 USING Img Dat Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel ...

Page 1837: ...parate between directory names file name with back slash or slash Variable Parameter Cont Description Directory information A B Name 1 Size 1 Name 2 Size 2 Name N Size N Where N is the number of all files in the specified directory and n is an integer between 1 and N A Space in use of the built in storage device byte B Available space of the built in storage device byte Name n Name of the n th fil...

Page 1838: ...ery response string 2 newline END The format of the readout character string is as follows used_size free_size name 1 size 1 name N size N Where N is the number of all files in the specified directory and n is an integer between 1 and N used_size Space in use of the built in storage device byte free_size Available space of the built in storage device byte name n Name of the n th file directory siz...

Page 1839: ...E5071C 2066 10 DIM A 1000 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM CAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1840: ...me File 1 Copy destination file name The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified copy source file does not exist an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Notice that if a file with the same name as the specified copy destination file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI MMEMory COPY Array te...

Page 1841: ...E5071C 2068 Syntax MMEMory COPY string 1 string 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM COPY Test1 State01 sta d Test1_01 sta ...

Page 1842: ...irectory separate them with back slash or slash To delete all files in the directory folder specify backslash Variable Parameter File Description File name or directory name you want to delete Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file or directory does not exist an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI MMEMory DELete...

Page 1843: ...E5071C 2070 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM DEL Test1 State01 sta 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM DEL D State01 sta ...

Page 1844: ...s and file name separate them with back slash or slash No read Variable Parameter File Description A file name extension csv of the reference calibration coefficient and the calibration coefficient table for power sensor A Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist a runtime error occurs Examples SCPI MMEMory LOAD ASCFactor d senso...

Page 1845: ...E5071C 2072 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD ASCF Test1 Sensor01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD ASCF D Sensor01 csv ...

Page 1846: ...ames and file name separate them with back slash or slash Variable Parameter File Description A file name extension csv of the reference calibration coefficient and the calibration coefficient table for power sensor B Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist a runtime error occurs Examples SCPI MMEMory LOAD BSCFactor d sensor01 c...

Page 1847: ...E5071C 2074 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD BSCF Test1 Sensor01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD BSCF D Sensor01 csv ...

Page 1848: ...ster Description Register Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following A Specifies register A B Specifies register B C Specifies register C D Specifies register D Note If no instrument state has been saved in the specified register an error occurs and the object is ignored Examples SCPI MMEMory LOAD CHANnel STATe a Related objects SCPI MMEMory STORe CHANnel STATe SCPI DIS...

Page 1849: ...E5071C 2076 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD CHAN A ...

Page 1850: ...the file name with the extension When you use directory names and file name separate them with back slash or slash Variable Parameter Ckit Description Number of calibration kit Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 30 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter File Description File name of the definition table of ...

Page 1851: ...Test1 Ckit01 ckx SCPI MMEMory LOAD CKIT 1 A Ckit01 ckx Related objects SCPI MMEMory STORe CKIT Ckit Equivalent key Cal Modify Cal Kit Import Cal Kit Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory LOAD CKIT 1 30 string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD CKIT1 Test1 Ckit01 ckx 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD LIM A Ckit01 ckx ...

Page 1852: ...e Description File name of limit table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI MMEMory LOAD LIMit d limit01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect ...

Page 1853: ...E5071C 2080 Syntax MMEMory LOAD LIMit string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD LIM Test1 Limit01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD LIM D Limit01 csv ...

Page 1854: ...separate them with back slash or slash Variable Parameter File Description File name of the loss compensation table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist a runtime error occurs Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory LOAD PLOSs 1 d loss01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory LOAD PLOSs 1 t...

Page 1855: ...E5071C 2082 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD PLOS1 Test1 Loss01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD PLOS1 D Loss01 csv ...

Page 1856: ...names and file name separate them with slash or backslash If the specified file does not exist an error occurs and the command is ignored Variable Parameter File Description File name of the ripple limit table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples S...

Page 1857: ...t Equivalent key Analysis Ripple Limit Edit Ripple Line Import from CSV File Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory LOAD RLIMit string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD RLIM RTest1 Rlim01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD RLIM D Rlim01 csv ...

Page 1858: ...ash or slash Variable Parameter File Description File name of segment sweep table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory LOAD SEGMent d segm01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory LOAD SEGMent te...

Page 1859: ...E5071C 2086 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD SEGM Test1 Segm01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD SEGM D Segm01 csv ...

Page 1860: ...ck slash or slash Variable Parameter File Description File name of instrument state extension sta Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI MMEMory LOAD STATe d state01 sta SCPI MMEMory LOAD STATe test state01 sta Related objects SCPI MMEMory STORe STATe Equival...

Page 1861: ...E5071C 2088 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD d State01 sta ...

Page 1862: ...ile Description Directory name you want to create Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a directory with the same name as the specified directory name exists an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI MMEMory MDIRectory d test SCPI MMEMory MDIRectory test Equivalent key Save Recall Save State File Dialog Equivalent SCPI command Synta...

Page 1863: ...ter File Description A file name extension csv to save the reference calibration coefficient and the calibration coefficient table for power sensor A Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI MMEMory STORe ASCFactor d sensor01 csv SCPI MMEMory STORe ASCFactor tes...

Page 1864: ...Programming 2091 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR ASCF Test1 Sensor01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR ASCF D Sensor01 csv ...

Page 1865: ...ter File Description A file name extension csv to save the reference calibration coefficient and the calibration coefficient table for power sensor B Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI MMEMory STORe BSCFactor d sensor01 csv SCPI MMEMory STORe BSCFactor tes...

Page 1866: ...Programming 2093 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR BSCF Test1 Sensor01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR BSCF D Sensor01 csv ...

Page 1867: ...ument state for each channel saved with the SCPI MMEMory STORe CHANnel STATe object in all the registers Examples SCPI MMEMory STORe CHANnel CLEar Related objects SCPI MMEMory STORe CHANnel STATe Equivalent key Save Recall Save Channel Clear States OK Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe CHANnel CLEar Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR CHAN CLE ...

Page 1868: ...ion Register Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following A Specifies register A B Specifies register B C Specifies register C D Specifies register D Note If an instrument state has been saved already in the specified register its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI MMEMory STORe CHANnel STATe a Related objects SCPI MMEMory LOAD CHANnel STATe SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch ACT...

Page 1869: ...E5071C 2096 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR CHAN A ...

Page 1870: ...ontents are overwritten Variable Parameter File Description A file name used to save the definition of the calibration kit Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten For information on the variable Ckit see Val Ckit Examples SCPI MMEMory STORe CKIT 1 d Ckit01 ckx SCPI MMEMory S...

Page 1871: ...E5071C 2098 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR CKIT1 Test1 Ckit01 ckx 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR CKIT1 d Ckit01 ckx ...

Page 1872: ... name in which you want to save the formatted data array extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI MMEMory STORe FDATa d trace01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI CALCulate 1 P...

Page 1873: ...E5071C 2100 MMEMory STORe FDATa string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR FDAT Result Trace01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR FDAT D Trace01 csv ...

Page 1874: ...tension When you use directory names and file name separate them with back slash or slash Variable Parameter File Description File name in which you want to save the display image on the LCD display extension bmp or png Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI M...

Page 1875: ...EMory STORe IMAGe object the image on the LCD display at the execution is memorized in the clipboard and then it is saved Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe IMAGe string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR IMAG Result Image01 bmp 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR IMAG D Image01 png ...

Page 1876: ... limit table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI MMEMory STORe LIMit d limit01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI MMEMory STORe LIMit t...

Page 1877: ...E5071C 2104 MMEMory STORe LIMit string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR LIM Test1 Limit01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR LIM D Limit01 csv ...

Page 1878: ...r File Description A file name to save the loss compensation table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe PLOSs 1 d loss01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe PLOSs 1 test loss01 csv ...

Page 1879: ...E5071C 2106 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR PLOS1 Test1 Loss01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR PLOS1 D Loss01 csv ...

Page 1880: ... name separate them with slash or backslash If a file with the specified file name already exists its contents will be overwritten Variable Parameter File Description File name used to save the ripple limit table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If the specified file does not exist a runtime error occurs Examples 1 SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivat...

Page 1881: ... MMEMory LOAD RLIMit Equivalent key Analysis Ripple Limit Edit Ripple Line Export to CSV File Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe RLIMit string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR RLIM RTest1 Rlim01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR RLIM D Rlim01 csv ...

Page 1882: ... Description Selecting content to be saved as the instrument state setting Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Specifies the setting of all channels traces as the target to be saved False or OFF Specifies the setting of displayed channels traces only as the target to be saved Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Obj As Boolean SCPI MMEMory STORe SALL True Ob...

Page 1883: ...E5071C 2110 MMEMory STORe SALL ON OFF 1 0 MMEMory STORe SALL Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SALL ON 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SALL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1884: ...e Description File name to save segment sweep table extension csv Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe SEGMent d segm01 csv SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe SEGMent test segm01 csv Related objects...

Page 1885: ...E5071C 2112 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SEGM Test1 Segm01 csv 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SEGM D Segm01 csv ...

Page 1886: ... file types as shown in the follownig table file type extension When specifying one port s1p When specifying two ports s2p When specifying three ports s3p When specifying four ports s4p When you use directory names and file name separate them with slash or back slash If a file with the specified file name already exists its contents are overwritten Variable Parameter File Description File name you...

Page 1887: ... ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP FORMat SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S1P SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S2P SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S3P SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S4P Equivalent key After a file type is specified a dialog box will appear Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe SNP DATA string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP WIND1 ACT 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP FORM RI 30 OUTPUT 717 MMEM S...

Page 1888: ... Data type Character string type String Range Select from the following AUTO Specifies data format automatically according to the display format of the active trace MA Specifies data format log magnitude angle DB Specifies data format linear magnitude angle RI Specifies data format real part imaginary part Preset value AUTO Examples Dim Fmt As String SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP FORMat MA Fmt SCPI MMEMo...

Page 1889: ...6 Syntax MMEMory STORe SNP FORMat AUTO MA DB RI MMEMory STORe SNP FORMat Query response AUTO MA DB RI newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP FORM MA 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP FORM 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1890: ...PI DISPlay WINDow Ch ACTivate command into a file in the touchstone format Variable Parameter Port Description Port number Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S1P 2 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S1P 30 ENTER 717 A Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP DATA SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP FORMat Equivalent key Save Recall Save SnP S1P 1 2 3...

Page 1891: ...E5071C 2118 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S1P 2 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S1P 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1892: ...iption Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies a port for file type Ports 1 Specifies the other port for file type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when it is executed If you specify the same port number to two ports an error occurs du...

Page 1893: ...Re SNP FORMat Equivalent key Save Recall Save Snp S2p 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S2P numeric1 numeric 2 MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S2P Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S2P 2 3 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S2P 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1894: ...3 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies a port for file type Ports 1 Specifies a port for file type Ports 2 Specifies a port for file type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when it is executed If you specify the same port number to two port numbe...

Page 1895: ...TORe SNP FORMat Equivalent key Save Recall Save Snp S3p 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S3P numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S3P Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S3P 2 3 4 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S3P 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1896: ...cription Indicates 4 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies a port for file type Ports 1 Specifies a port for file type Ports 2 Specifies a port for file type Ports 3 Specifies a port for file type The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when it is exec...

Page 1897: ...WINDow Ch ACTivate SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP DATA SCPI MMEMory STORe SNP FORMat Equivalent key Save Recall Save Snp S4p 1 2 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S4P 1 2 3 4 MMEMory STORe SNP TYPE S4P Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S4P 1 2 3 4 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP TYPE S3P 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1898: ...ash or slash Variable Parameter File Description File name to save the instrument state extension sta Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Note If a file with the same name as the specified file name exists its contents are overwritten Examples Dim StaType As String SCPI MMEMory STORe STYPe cdst SCPI MMEMory STORe STATe d state01 sta Dim StaType As String SCPI MMEMor...

Page 1899: ...E5071C 2126 Syntax MMEMory STORe STATe string Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR Test1 State01 sta 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR D State01 sta ...

Page 1900: ...ring type String Range Select from the following STATe Specifies the save of the measurement conditions only CSTate Specifies the save of the measurement conditions and the calibration state DSTate Specifies the save of the measurement conditions and the formatted data array CDSTate Specifies the save of the measurement conditions the calibration state and the formatted data array Preset value CST...

Page 1901: ...l State Trace All Equivalent SCPI command Syntax MMEMory STORe STYPe STATe CSTate DSTate CDSTate MMEMory STORe STYPe Query response STAT CST DST CDST newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR STYP CDST 20 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR STYP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1902: ...al output is turned ON Variable Parameter Status Description On off of the stimulus signal output Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns on the stimulus signal False or OFF Turns off the stimulus signal Preset value True or ON Examples Dim Outp As Boolean SCPI OUTPut STATe True Outp SCPI OUTPut STATe Equivalent key Sweep Setup Power RF Out Equivalent SCPI c...

Page 1903: ...E5071C 2130 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 OUTP ON 20 OUTPUT 717 OUTP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1904: ... by Public including the VBA project loaded on the VBA editor Query response string newline END The character string in the following format in which each macro is separated by a comma is read out macro 1 macro 2 macro N Where N is the total number of VBA macros macro n VBA macro name module name procedure name Example of use 10 DIM A 1000 20 OUTPUT 717 PROG CAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1905: ...PROG CAT command Variable Parameter String Description VBA macro name module name procedure name Range 254 characters or less Preset value Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROG NAME Module1 main 20 OUTPUT 717 PROG NAME 30 ENTER 717 A Related commands PROG CAT PROG STAT Equivalent key Macro Setup Select Macro When performing a similar operation from the front panel you...

Page 1906: ...he PROG STAT command Variable Range STOP Stop the program RUN Run the Program Preset value STOP Query response STOP RUN newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROG STAT RUN 20 OUTPUT 717 PROG STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Related commands PROG NAME Equivalent key Macro Break to stop Macro Setup Select Macro to run When performing the operation from the front panel you select the VBA macro and execute it a...

Page 1907: ...g GPIB LAN USB Variable Parameter Vnum Description Variable Number Range 1 to 10 Preset value 1 Parameter Data Description n is the number obtained from the value specified with the SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum SIZE object Data 0 The first array data Data n 1 The n th array data The index of the array starts from 0 Data Type Variant type Variant Note If the data size is not specified an error ...

Page 1908: ...le ARRay Vnum SIZE SCPI PROGram VARiable DOUBle Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable LONG Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable STRing Vnum DATA Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax PROGram VARiable ARRay 1 10 DATA Data Array PROGram VARiable ARRay 1 10 DATA Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR ARR2 SIZE 4 20 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR ARR2 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 30 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR ARR2 40 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1909: ...e of an array of Data specified by SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay 1 10 DATA that can be exchanged between an external PC and E5071C built in VBA using GPIB LAN USB Variable Parameter Vnum Description Variable Number Range 1 to 10 Preset value 1 Parameter Value Description The value of data size Data Type Long integer type long Range 1 to 40002 Preset value 402 Resolution 1 Examples Dim Var1 2 As Long...

Page 1910: ...PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable DOUBle Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable LONG Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable STRing Vnum DATA Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax PROGram VARiable ARRay 1 10 SIZE Data Array Size PROGram VARiable ARRay 1 10 SIZE Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR ARR2 SIZE 4 20 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR ARR2 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 30 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR AR...

Page 1911: ...ariable Parameter Vnum Description Variable Number Range 1 to 10 Preset value 1 Parameter Value Description The value of the double precision floating point type Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range Compliant with the double precision floating point type Preset value 0 Examples Dim DblVal As Double DblVal 55 7890 SCPI PROGram VARiable DOUBle 1 DATA DblVal DblVal SCPI PROGram...

Page 1912: ...Vnum DATA Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax PROGram VARiable DOUBle 1 10 DATA Numeric value Double Type PROGram VARiable DOUBle 1 10 DATA Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROGram VARiable DOUBle1 DATA 12345 89607 20 OUTPUT 717 PROGram VARiable DOUBle1 DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1913: ... the values from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 as a long type variable However the range of scpi command PROG VAR LONG DATA is 65536 to 65536 Therefore you can exchange the value from 65536 to 65536 If you set the value out of the range by the SCPI PROGram VARiable LONG Vnum DATA command the returned value of PROG VAR LONG DATA is 65536 or 65536 Variable Parameter Vnum Description Variable Number...

Page 1914: ...ARRay Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable ARRay Vnum SIZE SCPI PROGram VARiable DOUBle Vnum DATA SCPI PROGram VARiable STRing Vnum DATA Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax PROGram VARiable LONG 1 10 DATA Numeric value PROGram VARiable LONG 1 10 DATA Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROGram VARiable LONG1 DATA 65536 20 OUTPUT 717 PROGram VARiable LONG1 DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1915: ...BA using GPIB LAN USB Variable Parameter Vnum Description Variable Number Range 1 to 10 Preset value 1 Parameter Value Description The value of the character string type Data type Character string type String Range Compliant with the character string type Preset value Examples Dim StrVal As String StrVal TestS11 SCPI PROGram VARiable STRing 1 DATA StrVal StrVal SCPI PROGram VARiable String 1 DATA ...

Page 1916: ...am VARiable LONG Vnum DATA Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax PROGram VARiable STRing 1 10 DATA Character value String Type PROGram VARiable STRing 1 10 DATA Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR STR TEST DATA 20 OUTPUT 717 PROG VAR STR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1917: ...sed for averaging of selected channel Ch Measurement data before the execution of this object is not used for averaging Examples SCPI SENSe 1 AVERage CLEar Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt SCPI SENSe Ch AVERage STATe Equivalent key Avg Averaging Restart Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 AVERage CLEar Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 AVER CLE ...

Page 1918: ...ger type Long Range 1 to 999 Preset value 16 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim AvgCnt As Long SCPI SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt 4 AvgCnt SCPI SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch AVERage STATe SCPI SENSe Ch AV...

Page 1919: ...E5071C 2146 SENSe 1 160 AVERage COUNt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 AVER COUN 4 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 AVER COUN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1920: ...n ON OFF of the averaging function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the averaging function False or OFF Turns OFF the averaging function Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Avg As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 AVERage STATe True Avg SCPI SENSe 1 AVERage STATe Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt SCPI SENSe Ch AVERage CLEar Equivalent key Avg Avera...

Page 1921: ...E5071C 2148 SENSe 1 160 AVERage STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 AVER ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 AVER 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1922: ...bandwidth Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 10 to 500000 Preset value 70000 Unit Hz hertz Resolution In steps of 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 or 7 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim IfBw As Double SCPI SENSe...

Page 1923: ...lent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 BANDwidth RESolution numeric SENSe 1 160 BANDwidth RESolution Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 BAND 1 5E3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 BAND 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1924: ...ion IF bandwidth Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 10 to 500000 Preset value 70000 Unit Hz hertz Resolution In steps of 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 or 7 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim IfBw As Double SCP...

Page 1925: ...width Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 BWIDth RESolution numeric SENSe 1 160 BWIDth RESolution Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 BWID 1 5E3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 BWID 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1926: ... coefficient for calibration when the frequency offset feature is set to OFF for the selected channel Ch Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection CLEar Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet CLEar Equivalent key Cal Clear OK Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection CLEar Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR CLE ...

Page 1927: ...actor is not interpolated a non interpolated calibration coefficient array is read After writing the calibration coefficient array the written value becomes effective only after the SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE command is executed Variable Parameter Array Description Indicates the array data corrected data array of NOP number of measurement points X2 Where n is an integer between 1 an...

Page 1928: ... Load match ET Transmission tracking EX Isolation Parameter Int1 Description Response port Data type Integer type Integer Range 1 to 4 Note If ES ER or ED is used the response port and the stimulus port must be the same while EL ET or EX is used the response port and the stimulus port must be different Parameter Int2 Description Stimulus port Data type Integer type Integer ...

Page 1929: ...EFficient METHod RESPonse THRU SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT1 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT2 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT3 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT4 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL2 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL3 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METH...

Page 1930: ...he n th measurement point Because the calibration coefficient array is expressed by a complex number the real part and the imaginary part of one measurement point are returned and obtained as a value Here NOP is the number of measurement points and n is an integer between 1 and NOP Example of use 10 DIM A 1 201 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF EL 1 2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1931: ...cted channel Ch Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies the response port Ports 1 Specifies the stimulus port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occ...

Page 1932: ... SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COEFficient METHod ERESponse numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF METH ERES 1 2 ...

Page 1933: ... CORRection COEFficient DATA command for the selected channel Ch Variable For information on the variable Ch and the variable Port see Val Ch Ch and Val Port respectively Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COEFficient METHod RESPonse OPEN 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front pa...

Page 1934: ...ay is written with the SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA command Variable For information on the variable Ch and the variable Port see Val Ch Ch and Val Port Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COEFficient METHod RESPonse SHORt 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel ...

Page 1935: ...r Ports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies the input port Ports 1 Specifies the output port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occurs and the command is ignored Example...

Page 1936: ...EFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COEFficient METHod RESPonse THRU numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF METH THRU 2 1 ...

Page 1937: ... CORRection COEFficient DATA command for the selected channel Variable For information on the variable Ch and the variable Port see Val Ch Ch and Val Port respectively Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORREction COEFficient METHod SLOT1 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equival...

Page 1938: ...elected channel Variable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies a port for full 2 port calibration Ports 1 Specifies the other port for full 2 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port nu...

Page 1939: ...lated objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT2 numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF METH SOLT2 1 2 ...

Page 1940: ...ariable Parameter Ports Description Indicates 3 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies a port for full 3 port calibration Ports 1 Specifies a port for full 3 port calibration Ports 2 Specifies a port for full 3 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If ...

Page 1941: ...ort Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT3 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF METH SOLT3 1 2 3 ...

Page 1942: ... 4 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies a port for full 4 port calibration Ports 1 Specifies a port for full 4 port calibration Ports 2 Specifies a port for full 4 port calibration Ports 3 Specifies a port for full 4 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port nu...

Page 1943: ...rt Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient SAVE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COEFficient METHod SOLT4 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 numeric 4 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF METH SOLT4 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 1944: ...see Ch Examples Dim Dmy As Long Dim Data 3 as Variant Data 0 1 123 Data 1 2 456 Data 2 2 249 Data 3 2 608 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COEFficient METHod RESPonse THRU Array 2 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COEFficient ET 2 1 Data Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COEFficient SAVE Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient DATA SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COEFficient METHod ERESponse SCPI...

Page 1945: ...Se Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL4 Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COEFficient SAVE Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COEF SAVE ...

Page 1946: ...cates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies the response port number Ports 1 Specifies the stimulus port number The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 port numbers an error occurs when executed ...

Page 1947: ...E4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Thru Isolation Optional Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Isolation Optional Port m n Isol Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire ISOLation numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ISOL 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1948: ...mber Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire LOAD 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Open Response Short Load Optional Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Cal Calibrate n Port C...

Page 1949: ...E5071C 2176 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL LOAD 1 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1950: ... Standard number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 30 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LINE 1 Related objects Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Open Response Short Load Optional Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m ...

Page 1951: ...E5071C 2178 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL OLO LINE 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL OLO LINE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1952: ...ut of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LOAD CLEar 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LOAD EXECute SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOAd LOAD DONE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Enhanced Response Load Load n Offset Load Clear Cal Calibrate 1 Port C...

Page 1953: ...E5071C 2180 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL OLO LOAD CLE 1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1954: ...xecuted The maximum number of count for the acquired offset calibration data is two If it is exceeded the error occurs Variable Parameter Count Description Number of count for the offset calibration acquisition Data type Long integer type Long Range Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim Count As Long Count SCPI SENSe 1 CORRect...

Page 1955: ...E5071C 2182 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL OLO LOAD COUN 1 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1956: ...eger type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples See SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LOAD EXECute Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LOAD EXECute Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Enhanced Response Load Load n Offset Load Done Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Load n Offset Load D...

Page 1957: ...E5071C 2184 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL OLO LOAD DONE 1 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1958: ...Rection COLLect CKIT SELect 15 Select Load 2 in Load SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SUBClass 2 Select Offset Line 1 Thur The Thru is defined as the standard No 6 in the Define Standard SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LINE 6 MsgBox Connect Offset Load Thru Make a measurement for Offset Line 1 SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad Load EXECute 1 Wait for measurement end Dmy ...

Page 1959: ... CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LOAD CLEar SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Enhanced Response Load Load n Offset Load Offset Line n Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Load n Offset Load Offset Line n Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m Load Load n Offset Load Offset Line n Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire OLOad LOAD EXECute numeric Example of ...

Page 1960: ...For information on the variable Ch and the variable Port see Ch and Port respectively Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire OPEN 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Open 1 Port Cal Open Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m Open Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire OPEN nume...

Page 1961: ...le For information on the variable Ch and the variable Port see Ch and Port Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SHORt 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Short 1 Port Cal Short Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m Short Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SHORt numeric E...

Page 1962: ...OLLect ACQuire SLOad TRLLine EXECute SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SLOad DONE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Open Response Short Load Load n Sliding Load Clear Cal Calibrate Enhanced Response Load Load n Sliding Load Clear Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Load n Sliding Load Clear Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m Load Load n Sliding Load Clear Cal Calibrate n Port TRL Cal ...

Page 1963: ...e maximum number of count for the acquired offset calibration data is ten If it is exceeded the error occurs Variable Parameter Count Description Number of count for the sliding calibration acquisition Data type Long integer type Long Range Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim Count As Long Count SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLe...

Page 1964: ...Programming 2191 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL SLO COUN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1965: ...ECute SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SLOad TRLLine EXECute SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Open Response Short Load Load n Sliding Load Done Cal Calibrate Enhanced Response Load Load n Sliding Load Done Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Load n Sliding Load Done Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m Load Load n Sliding Load Done Cal Calibrate n Port TRL Cal Line M...

Page 1966: ...riable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Select the 85052B Calibration Kit SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect 19 Select Load 5 Sliding Load m in load SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SUBClass 5 For i 1 To 5 MsgBox Set Sliding Load position Make a measurement for sliding load calibration SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SLOad Load EXECute 1 ...

Page 1967: ...ng Load Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Load Load n Sliding Load Sliding Load Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Reflection Port m Load Load n Sliding Load Sliding Load Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SLOad LOAD EXECute numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL SLO LOAD 1 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A See Example for COM ...

Page 1968: ...number Ports 0 Specifies the input port Ports 1 Specifies the output port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occurs and the command is ignored Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuir...

Page 1969: ...Rection COLLect ACQuire SLOad COUNt SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate n Port TRL Cal Line Match x y Line Match x y Fwd sxy x y Rvs syx Line Match n Sliding Load Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SLOad TRLLine EXECute numeric input port numeric output port Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL SLO TRLL 2 1 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1970: ...u2 When performing Thru cal either Thru 1 or Thru 2 set with this command is used for the calibration Variable Parameter Value Description The setting number of the standard subclass for the calibration Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 30 Preset value 1 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is no...

Page 1971: ...e on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SUBClass numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SUBClass Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL SUBC 1 ...

Page 1972: ...ription Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies the input port Ports 1 Specifies the output port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occurs and the command is ignored Examples Dim Dmy As...

Page 1973: ...ts SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Thru Thru Cal Calibrate n Port Cal Transmission Port m n Thru Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire THRU numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL THRU 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1974: ... Ports 0 Specifies the input port Ports 1 Specifies the output port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occurs and the command is ignored Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire TRLL...

Page 1975: ...zx x z Rvs Sxz y z Line Match y z Fwd Szy y z Rvs Syz Cal Calibrate 4 Port TRL Cal Line Match x y Line Match x y Fwd Syx x y Rvs Sxy x z Line Match x z Fwd Szx x z Rvs Sxz x w Line Match x w Fwd Swx x w Rvs Sxw y z Line Match y z Fwd Szy y z Rvs Syz y w Line Match y w Fwd Swy y w Rvs Syw z w Line Match z w Fwd Swz z w Rvs Szw Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire TR...

Page 1976: ...iable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire TRLReflect 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire TRLLine SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire TRLThru Equival...

Page 1977: ...E5071C 2204 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire TRLReflect numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL TRLR 1 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1978: ...escription Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies the input port Ports 1 Specifies the output port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occurs and the command is ignored Examples Dim Dmy...

Page 1979: ...lect Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 2 Port TRL Cal Thru Line Port x y Thru Cal Calibrate 3 Port TRL Cal Thru Line Port x y Thru Port x z Thru Port y z Thru Cal Calibrate 4 Port TRL Cal Thru Line Port x y Thru Port x z Thru Port x w Thru Port y z Thru Port y w Thru Port z w Thru Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ACQuire TRLThru numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT ...

Page 1980: ...on Adapter Length Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 10 to 10 Unit Second Note Adapter length is positive for adaptor removal and negative for adaptor insertion Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 2 LENGth 0 01 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod ADAPter REMoval Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Adapter Removal Adapter Length Equivalent SCPI com...

Page 1981: ...E5071C 2208 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ADAP2 LENG 0 01 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ADAP2 LENG 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1982: ...f phase fails This command can be executed several times while the calibration remains valid If user cannot execute this command then Execution error is displayed Examples SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ADAPter Pt ROTate Related Object SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ADAPter Pt WAVeguide CUToff SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ADAPter Pt WAVeguide LENGth Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Adapter Rem...

Page 1983: ...rameter Cfreq Description Waveguide cutoff frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 20E9 Unit Hz Preset value 0 Hz Examples Dim CFreq As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 2 WAVeguide CUToff 700 CFreq SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 2 WAVeguide CUToff Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ADAPter Pt ROTate SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection CO...

Page 1984: ...1 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 1 4 WAVeguide CUToff Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ADAP WAV CUT 2000 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ADAP WAV CUT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1985: ...gth Description Waveguide Adapter Length Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 10 to 10 Unit Second Preset value 0 second Note Adapter length is positive for adaptor removal and negative for adaptor insertion Examples Dim CLen As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 2 WAVeguide LENGth 5 CLen SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 2 WAVeguide LENGth Related objects ...

Page 1986: ...ADAPter 1 4 WAVeguide LENGth numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ADAPter 1 4 WAVeguide LENGth Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ADAP WAV LEN 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ADAP WAV LEN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1987: ...ption This command sets gets the calibration kit name for the calibration kit selected for channels 1 to 36 Ch Variable Parameter Lbl Description Calibration kit name Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value Varies depending on the calibration kit number 85031B 85032B E 85032F 85033D 85033E 85036B 85036E 85038A F M 85039B 85050C 85050D 85052D 85052C 85054D ...

Page 1988: ...LLect CKIT LABel Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect Equivalent key Cal Modify Cal Kit Label Kit Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT LABel string SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT LABel Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT LAB MY_KIT 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT LAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1989: ...it selected for the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Cpt Description Port number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Since the variable Cpt has no preset value you cannot omit it If you omit the variable Cpt an error occurs when executed Parameter Value Description Standard number Data ...

Page 1990: ...ORDer THRU Cpt_m Cpt_n SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLLine Cpt_m Cpt_n SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLReflect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLThru Cpt_m Cpt_n Equivalent key Cal Modify Cal Kit Specify CLSs Load Set All Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer LOAD numeric 1 numeric 2 SENSe 1 ...

Page 1991: ...n error occurs when executed Since the variable Cpt has no preset value you cannot omit it If you omit the variable Cpt an error occurs when executed Examples Dim StanOpen As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer OPEN 1 10 StanOpen SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer OPEN 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer LOA...

Page 1992: ...nt SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer OPEN numeric 1 numeric 2 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer OPEN numeric 1 Query response numeric 2 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD OPEN 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD OPEN 1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1993: ...e Long Range 1 to 8 Preset Value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim CKitSel As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SELect 3 CKitSel SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SELect Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SUBClass SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect SCPI SENSe Ch CORR...

Page 1994: ...al Modify Cal Kit Specify CLSs Sub Class Sub Class 1 Sub Class 8 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SELect numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SELect Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD SEL 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD SEL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1995: ... out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Since the variable Cpt has no preset value you cannot omit it If you omit the variable Cpt an error occurs when executed Examples Dim StanShor As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SHORt 1 10 StanShor SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SHORt 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect SCPI SENSe...

Page 1996: ...1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SHORt numeric 1 numeric 2 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SHORt numeric 1 Query response numeric 2 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD SHOR 1 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD SHOR 1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 1997: ...hannel Ch Variable Parameter Cpt_m Cpt_n Description Port number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Since the variables Cpt_m and Cpt_n have no preset value you cannot omit them If you omit the variables Cpt_m and Cpt_n or if you specify the same port number to 2 port numbers an error occurs...

Page 1998: ...Lect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SHORt Cpt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLLine Cpt_m Cpt_n SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLReflect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLThru Cpt_m Cpt_n Equivalent key Cal Modify Cal Kit Specify CLSs Thru Port 1 2 Port 1 3 Port 1 4 Port 2 3 Port 2 4 Port 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRectio...

Page 1999: ...s invalid for the subclass Variable Parameter Value Description Standard number Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 21 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim StanTrll As Long SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLLine 1 2 10 StanTrll SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLLine 1 2 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORR...

Page 2000: ...All Port 1 2 Port 1 3 Port 1 4 Port 2 3 Port 2 4 Port 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLLine numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLLine numeric 1 numeric 2 Query response numeric 3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLL 1 2 11 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLL 1 2 30 ENTER 7...

Page 2001: ... Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 21 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim StanTrlr As Long SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLReflect 5 StanTrlr SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLReflect Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer LOAD Cpt SC...

Page 2002: ...SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLReflect numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLReflect Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLR 11 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2003: ...ion Standard number Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 21 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples Dim StanTrlt As Long SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLThru 1 2 3 StanTrlt SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLThru 1 2 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect C...

Page 2004: ... 2 3 Port 2 4 Port 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLThru numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer TRLThru numeric 1 numeric 2 Query response numeric 3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLT 1 2 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT ORD TRLT 1 2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2005: ...ion kit selected for selected channel Ch to the default factory setting state Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT RESet Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT RESet Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT RES ...

Page 2006: ... error occurs when executed Examples Dim CalKit As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect 3 CalKit SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer LOAD Cpt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer OPEN Cpt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SELect SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT ORDer SHORt Cpt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRec...

Page 2007: ... SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2008: ...pedance of the standards Std for the calibration kit selected for the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Std Description Standard number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 21 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Value Description Value of arbitrary impedance Data type Double precision floating point t...

Page 2009: ...ry 50 5 StanArbt SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 5 ARBitrary Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect Equivalent key Cal Modify Cal Kit Define STDs no name Arb Impedance Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 ARBitrary numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 ARBitrary Query response numeric newline END Example of use...

Page 2010: ...ng point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit fF femto farad 1E 15 F farad Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanC0 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 COR...

Page 2011: ...n COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C0 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C0 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C0 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C0 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2012: ... type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit 1E 27 F Hz 1E 27 farad hertz Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanC1 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection ...

Page 2013: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C1 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C1 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C1 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2014: ...oint type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit 1E 36 F Hz2 1E 36 farad hertz2 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanC2 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRe...

Page 2015: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C2 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C2 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C2 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2016: ...oint type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit 1E 45 F Hz3 1E 45 farad hertz3 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanC3 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRe...

Page 2017: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C3 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 C3 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C3 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 C3 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2018: ...ata type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following COAXial Selects coaxial as the media type WAVeguide Selects waveguide as the media type Preset value COAXial Examples Dim StanChar As Double SCPI SENSe 1 SENSe CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN CHARacter WAVeguide StanChar SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN CHARacter Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKI...

Page 2019: ...E5071C 2246 Query response COAXial WAVeguide newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 CHAR WAV 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 CHAR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2020: ...uble Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit s second Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanDel As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 5 DELay 1...

Page 2021: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 DELay numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 DELay Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 DEL 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 DEL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2022: ...tion Stop frequency of the selected standard Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 999E9 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit Hz hertz Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceed...

Page 2023: ...ction COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 FMAXimum numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 FMAXimum Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 FMAX 5E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 FMAX 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2024: ... Start frequency of the selected standard Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 999E9 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit Hz hertz Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded ...

Page 2025: ...ction COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 FMINimum numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 FMINimum Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 FMIN 1E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 FMIN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2026: ...oating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit pH pico henry Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanL0 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COL...

Page 2027: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L0 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L0 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L0 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L0 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2028: ...ng point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit 1E 24 H Hz 1E 24 henry hertz Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanL1 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 COR...

Page 2029: ...n COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L1 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L1 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L1 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2030: ...oint type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit 1E 33 H Hz2 1E 33 henry hertz2 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanL2 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRe...

Page 2031: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L2 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L2 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L2 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2032: ...oint type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit 1E 42 H Hz3 1E 42 henry hertz3 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanL3 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRe...

Page 2033: ...LLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L3 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 L3 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L3 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 L3 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2034: ...me Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Examples Dim StanLbl As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 5 LABel OPEN 3 5mm StanLbl SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 5 LABel Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT SELect Equivalent key Cal Modify Cal Kit Define S...

Page 2035: ...E5071C 2262 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 LAB OPEN 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 LAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2036: ...cision floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit ohm s Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanLoss As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection ...

Page 2037: ...t CKIT STAN 1 21 LOSS numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 21 LOSS Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 LOSS 12 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 LOSS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2038: ... Character string type String Range Select from either of the following FIXed Normal load SLIDing Sliding load OFFSet Offset load Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Examples Dim StanType As String SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 5 LTYPe SLID StanType SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 5 LTYPe Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect...

Page 2039: ...E5071C 2266 Query response FIX SLID OFFS newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 LTYP SLID 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 LTYP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2040: ...pe Character string type String Range Select from either of the following OPEN Specifies open SHORt Specifies short LOAD Specifies load THRU Specifies Thru UTHRu Specifies Unknown Thru ARBI Specifies arbitrary impedance NONE Specifies DUT of which theoretical value is 0 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Examples Dim StanType As String SCPI SENSe 1 CORRecti...

Page 2041: ... 30 TYPE OPEN SHORt LOAD THRU UTHRu ARBI NONE SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 TYPE Query response OPEN SHORt LOAD THRU UTHRu ARBI NONE newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 TYPE OPEN 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 TYPE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2042: ...sion floating point type Double Range 1E18 to 1E18 Preset value Varies depending on the specified calibration kit and standard Unit ohm Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim StanZ0 As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLec...

Page 2043: ...OLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 Z0 numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT STAN 1 30 Z0 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 Z0 50 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT STAN1 Z0 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2044: ...bration Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following SYSTem Calculate the error coefficients by setting the system impedance to the reference impedance LINE Calculate the error coefficients by setting the characteristic impedance of the line standard to the reference impedance Preset value SYSTem Examples Dim TrlImp As String SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT...

Page 2045: ...T TRLoption IMPedance LINE SYSTem SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT TRLoption IMPedance Query response LINE SYST newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT TRL IMP LINE 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT TRL IMP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2046: ...ration plane Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following THRU Uses the length of the THRU and LINE standard to calculate the calibration plane REFLect Uses the reflection coefficient of the reflection standard to calculate the calibration plane Preset value THRU Examples Dim TrlRpl As String SCPI SENSe 1 SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CKIT TRLoption RPLane REFLect ...

Page 2047: ...CKIT TRLoption RPLane THRU REFLect SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect CKIT TRLoption RPLANE Query response THRU REFL newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT TRL RPL REFL 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL CKIT TRL RPL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2048: ... of traces measurement parameters and so on return to their original values Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect CLEar Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet STATe Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Responce Open Cancel OK Cal Calibrate Responce Short Cancel OK Cal Calibrate Responce Thru Cancel OK Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Cancel OK Cal Calibrate 2 Port Cal Cancel OK Cal Calibrate 3 Port Cal Can...

Page 2049: ...the analyzer and the data stored in ECal so that they can be compared If you execute this object when the ECal module is not connected or when ports are not connected each other appropriately a runtime error occurs This function is available with the Firmware revision 3 50 or greater Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL CCHeck ACQuire Equivalent key Cal ECal Confidence Check Equival...

Page 2050: ...tely an error occurs and the command is ignored Variable Parameter Eports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number EPorts 0 Specifies the response port EPorts 1 Specifies the stimulus port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number fo...

Page 2051: ...esponse 2 1 S21 S11 3 1 S31 S11 3 4 S34 S44 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL ERESponse numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL ERES 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2052: ...nected ECAL modules to the E5071C Variable The command return information in a string variable param in the following syntax For 2 port ECal ModelNumber SerialNumber PortAConnector PortBConnector MinFreq MaxFreq NumberOfPoints Calibrated ID PortAExtension PortBExtension Analyzer Operator Location For 4 port ECal ModelNumber SerialNumber PortAConnector PortBConnector PortCConnector PortDConnector M...

Page 2053: ...tion Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection TYPE Tr Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL INFormation Query response Model number Serial number Connector type Calibration date Min and max frequency newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL INF 20...

Page 2054: ... to maintain backward compatibility Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the isolation measurement when executing ECal Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the isolation measurement False or OFF Turns OFF the isolation measurement Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim EcalIso As Boolean SCPI SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ECAL ISOLatio...

Page 2055: ...nd Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL ISOLation STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL ISOLation STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL ISOL STATE OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL ISOL STATE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2056: ...ion Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the auto detect function False or OFF Turns OFF the auto detect function Preset value True or ON For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim EcalOri As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL ORIentation STATe True EcalOri SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL ORIentation STATe Related o...

Page 2057: ...COLLect ECAL ORIentation STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL ORIentation STATe Query response 0 1 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL ORI ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL ORI 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2058: ...type Long integer type Long Range One of the following is set get 0 Nothing is connected 1 Port A is connected 2 Port B is connected 3 Port C is connected 4 Port D is connected For information on the variable Cpt see Cpt Examples Dim ECalPort As Long SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ECAL PATH 1 3 ECalPort SCPI SENSe CORRection COLLect ECAL PATH 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ECAL ...

Page 2059: ...E5071C 2286 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL PATH numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL PATH 1 2 ...

Page 2060: ...rts are not connected each other appropriately an error occurs and the command is ignored Variable Parameter Eport Description Port number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL SOLT1 1 Equivalent key Cal ECal 1 Port Cal Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 E...

Page 2061: ...r appropriately an error occurs and the command is ignored Variable Parameter Eports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number EPorts 0 EPorts 1 Specifies the port numbers for 2 port ECal The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you s...

Page 2062: ...ect ECAL SOLT2 EcalPort Equivalent key Cal ECal 2 Port Cal Port 1 2 Port 1 3 Port 1 4 Port 2 3 Port 2 4 Port 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL SOLT2 numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT2 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2063: ...command is ignored Variable Parameter Eports Description Indicates 3 element array data port number EPorts 0 EPorts 1 EPorts 2 Specifies the port numbers for 3 port ECal The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to ...

Page 2064: ...ction COLLect ECAL SOLT3 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT3 1 2 3 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A Dim EcalPort 2 As Variant EcalPort 0 1 EcalPort 1 2 EcalPort 2 3 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL SOLT3 EcalPort ...

Page 2065: ... is ignored Variable Parameter Eports Description Indicates 4 element array data port number EPorts 0 EPorts 1 EPorts 2 EPorts 3 Specifies the port numbers for 4 port ECal The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number t...

Page 2066: ... 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL SOLT4 EcalPort Equivalent key Cal ECal 4 Port Cal Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL SOLT4 1 2 3 4 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT4 1 2 3 4 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2067: ...occurs and the command is ignored Variable Parameter Eports Description Indicates 2 element array data port number Ports 0 Specifies the response port number Ports 1 Specifies the stimulus port number The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you s...

Page 2068: ...Cal ECal Thru Cal 2 1 S21 3 1 S31 4 1 S41 1 2 S12 3 2 S32 4 2 S42 1 3 S13 2 3 S23 4 3 S43 1 4 S14 2 4 S24 3 4 S34 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL THRU numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL SOLT2 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2069: ...uting this object will cause a runtime error This command is available with the Firmware revision 3 50 or higher Variable Parameter Param Description Characteristic used when executing ECal user characterization Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following CHAR0 Uses the factory default characteristic Normal ECal CHAR1 Uses the characteristic stored at location ...

Page 2070: ...CHar Equivalent key Cal ECal Characterization Factory User1 User2 User3 User4 User5 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL UCHar CHAR0 CHAR1 CHAR2 CHAR3 CHAR4 CHAR5 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect ECAL UCHar Query response CHAR0 CHAR1 CHAR2 CHAR3 CHAR4 CHAR5 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL UCH CHAR1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL UCH 30 ...

Page 2071: ...s gets Unknown Thru ON Off for Ecal Data type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the Unknown Thru function False or OFF Turns OFF the Unknown Thru function Examples Dim EcalPort As Boolean EcalPort 0 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL UTHRU STATe 0 EcalPort SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ECAL UTHRU STATe Equivalent key Cal ECal Unknown Thru Equivalent SCPI com...

Page 2072: ...Programming 2299 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL UTHRU STAT 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL ECAL UTHRU STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2073: ...escription Port in which Adaptor needs to be added removed Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Examples SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod ADAPter REMoval 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ADAPter Pt LENGth Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Adapter Removal Select Port Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod ADAPter REMoval 1 4 Exam...

Page 2074: ...ta port number Ports 0 Specifies the response port Ports 1 Specifies the stimulus port The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note For each parameter you must specify a different port number If you specify the same port number for 2 or more parameters an error occurs and the command is ignored For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples...

Page 2075: ...alibrate Enhanced Response Select Ports 2 1 S21 S11 3 1 S31 S11 3 4 S34 S44 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod ERESponse numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH ERES 1 2 ...

Page 2076: ...type to the response calibration open of the specified port for the selected channel Ch Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse OPEN 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TYPE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Open Select Port Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse OPEN numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR C...

Page 2077: ... to the response calibration short of the specified port for the selected channel Ch Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse SHORt 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TYPE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Short Select Port Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse SHORt numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR C...

Page 2078: ...rmation on the variable Ch and the variable Port see Ch and Port Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse THRU Array 2 1 Dim ThruPort 1 As Variant ThruPort 0 2 ThruPort 1 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse THRU ThruPort Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TYPE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate Response Thru Select Ports Equivalent SCPI command Syntax S...

Page 2079: ...n type to the 1 port calibration of the specified port for the selected channel Ch Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT1 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TYPE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 1 Port Cal Select Port Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT1 numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH SOLT1 1 ...

Page 2080: ...1 Specifies the other port for full 2 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 port numbers an error occurs when executed The order of the 2 port numbers to be specified is arbitrary Examples ...

Page 2081: ...5071C 2308 Cal Calibrate 2 Port Cal Select Ports Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT2 numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH SOLT2 1 2 ...

Page 2082: ...orts 1 Specifies a port for full 3 port calibration Ports 2 Specifies a port for full 3 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 or more port numbers an error occurs when executed The order of...

Page 2083: ...Rection COLLect METHod TYPE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 3 Port Cal Select Ports Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT3 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH SOLT3 1 2 3 ...

Page 2084: ...cifies a port for full 4 port calibration Ports 2 Specifies a port for full 4 port calibration Ports 3 Specifies a port for full 4 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 or more port numbers...

Page 2085: ... METHod SOLT4 CalPort Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TYPE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 4 Port Cal Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod SOLT4 1 2 3 4 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH SOLT3 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 2086: ... TRL 2 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 or more port numbers an error occurs when executed The order of the 2 port numbers to be specified is arbitrary Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection...

Page 2087: ...SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection TYPE Tr Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 2 Port TRL Cal Select Ports 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod TRL2 numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH TRL2 1 2 ...

Page 2088: ...TRL 3 port calibration Ports 1 Specifies a port for TRL 3 port calibration Ports 2 Specifies a port for TRL 3 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 or more port numbers an error occurs when...

Page 2089: ...Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL2 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL4 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection TYPE Tr Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 3 Port TRL Cal Select Ports 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod TRL3 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH TRL3 1 2 3 ...

Page 2090: ...s 1 Specifies a port for TRL 4 port calibration Ports 2 Specifies a port for TRL 4 port calibration Ports 3 Specifies a port for TRL 4 port calibration The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed If you specify the same port number to 2 or more port num...

Page 2091: ...ent SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL2 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL3 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection TYPE Tr Equivalent key Cal Calibrate 4 Port TRL Cal Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod TRL4 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 numeric 4 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH TRL4 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 2092: ...ype for calculating the calibration coefficients To check the applied calibration type error correction on use the SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection TYPE Tr object Variable Parameter Param Description Calibration type Range AREM Adaptor Removal ERES Enhanced response calibration NONE None RESPO Response calibration open RESPS Response calibration short RESPT Response calibration thru SOLT1 1 port calibrati...

Page 2093: ... COLLect METHod TYPE Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection TYPE Tr Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect METHod TYPE Query response AREM ERES NONE RESPO RESPS RESPT SOLT1 SOLT2 SOLT3 SOLT4 TR L2 TRL3 TRL4 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL METH TYP...

Page 2094: ...n coefficients clears all calibration data regardless of whether they are used for the calculation and also clears the calibration type selections If partial overwrite is executed before selecting the calibration type an error occurs and the command is ignored Variable For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect PARTial SAVE Equivalent key Cal Calibrate n Por...

Page 2095: ...formation on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse THRU Array 2 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire THRU Array 2 1 Dmy SCPI IEEE4882 OPC SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection COLLect SAVE Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse OPEN SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod RESPonse SHORt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METH...

Page 2096: ...Programming 2323 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect SAVE Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL SAVE ...

Page 2097: ... the calibration type setting are cleared If this command is executed before all the necessary calibration data for calculating the calibration coefficients for the simple full 3 port calibration or the simple full 4 port calibration is measured a runtime error occurs This function is available with the Firmware revision 3 50 or greater Variable For information on the variable Ch refer to Ch Examp...

Page 2098: ...Programming 2325 SENSe 1 160 CORRection COLLect SIMPlified SAVE Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR COLL SIMP SAVE ...

Page 2099: ...r string type String Range Select from either of the following CSPN Uses the frequency of the current sweep range AMKR Use the frequency of the active marker This is applied to Loss 1 and Loss 2 is ignored USPN This is executed with the arbitrary specified start frequency and stop frequency Preset value CSPN Examples Dim Conf As String SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFig AMKR Conf SCPI S...

Page 2100: ...O STOP Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Auto Port Extension Method Current Span Active Marker User Span Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFig CSPN AMKR USPN SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFig Query response CSPN AMKR USPN newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO CONF CSPN 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO CONF 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2101: ...f the auto port extension Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Uses the DC Offset value for the results False or OFF Does not use the DC Offset value for the results Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Dcof As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset True Dcof SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset Related objects SCPI CALCu...

Page 2102: ...Rection EXTension AUTO STOP Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Auto Port Extension Adjust Mismatch Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO DCOF ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO DCOF 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2103: ...e Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the loss compensation False or OFF Turns off the loss compensation Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim AutoLoss As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS True AutoLoss SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFig SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection...

Page 2104: ... Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO LOSS ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO LOSS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2105: ...ype String Range Select from either of the following OPEN Measures the calibration data of the OPEN standard SHORt Measures the calibration data of the SHORT standard Preset value SHORt Examples Dim AutoMeas As String SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO MEASure OPEN AutoLoss SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFig SCPI SENSe Ch ...

Page 2106: ...t 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO MEASure OPEN SHORt SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO MEASure Query response OPEN SHOR newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO MEAS OPEN 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO MEAS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2107: ...ct from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the auto port extension False or OFF Turns OFF the auto port extension Preset value True or ON For information on the variable Ch or Pt refer to Ch or Pt Examples Dim APort As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT 1 True APort SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFi...

Page 2108: ...t Ports Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT 1 2 3 4 ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT 1 2 3 4 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO PORT1 ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO PORT1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2109: ...on EXTension STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO CONFig SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO MEASure SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT Pt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO STARt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO STOP Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the ...

Page 2110: ...on floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value 3E5 Unit Hz hertz Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim AStart As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO STARt 1E9 AStart SCPI SE...

Page 2111: ...ion EXTension AUTO STOP Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Auto Port Extension Method User Span Start Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO STARt numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO STARt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO STAR 1 2E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO STAR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2112: ... frequency range for each option Preset value Maximum frequency in the range Unit Hz hertz Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim AStop As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension AUTO STOP 250E8 AStop SCPI SENSe 1 CORRect...

Page 2113: ...t Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Auto Port Extension Method User Span Stop Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO STOP numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension AUTO STOP Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO STOP 1 5E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT AUTO STOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2114: ...ency used for calculation of the loss value of the frequency 1 and 2 Fq of the selected port Pt for the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Fq Description Frequency number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Value Description Frequency Data type Double precision fl...

Page 2115: ... CORRection EXTension STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt INCLude Il STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt LDC SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt LOSS Loss Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Extension Port1 Extension Port2 Extension Port3 Extension Port4 Loss Freq1 Freq2 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency 1 2 numer...

Page 2116: ...ue of include 1 and 2 Il of the port 1 to 4 Pt for the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Il Description Include number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Status Description ON OFF the set of loss value and frequency value Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Sel...

Page 2117: ...EXTension PORT Pt LDC SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt LOSS Loss SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt TIME Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Extension Port1 Extension Port2 Extension Port3 Extension Port4 Loss Loss1 Loss2 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 INCLude 1 2 STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 INCLude 1...

Page 2118: ...int type Double Range 90 to 90 Preset value 0 Unit dBm Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim PLdc As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 LDC 45 PLdc SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 LDC Related objects...

Page 2119: ...tension Port3 Extension Port4 Loss Loss at DC Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 LDC numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 LDC Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 LDC 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 LDC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2120: ... This command sets gets the loss value of the loss 1 to 4 of the port 1 to 4 Pt for the selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Loss Description Loss number Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 2 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Parameter Value Description The loss value Data type Double precision floating point t...

Page 2121: ... SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt FREQuency Fq SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt INCLude Il STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt LDC SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt TIME Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Extension Port1 Extension Port2 Extension Port3 Extension Port4 Loss Loss1 Loss2 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 2122: ... floating point type Double Range 10 to 10 Preset value 0 Unit s second Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim PortExt As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 TIME 1E 3 PortExt SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension ...

Page 2123: ...tension Port3 Extension Port4 Coax Extension Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 TIME numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 TIME Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 TIME 1e 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 TIME 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2124: ...ion Waveguide cutoff frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Unit Hz Preset value 0 Hz Examples Dim CFreq As Double SCPI SENSe 2 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 WAVeguide CUToff 1E5 CFreq SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension PORT 3 WAVeguide CUToff Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt WAVeguide TIME Equivalent key Cal...

Page 2125: ...NSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 WAVeguide CUToff Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 WAV CUT 1e3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 WAV CUT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2126: ...ue Description Port extension Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 10 to 10 Unit Second Preset value 0 second Examples Dim WgTime As Double SCPI SENSe 2 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 WAVeguide TIME 5 WgTime SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension PORT 3 WAVeguide TIME Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt WAVeguide CUToff Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Exten...

Page 2127: ...ENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension PORT 1 2 3 4 WAVeguide TIME Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 WAV TIME 4 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT PORT1 WAV TIME 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2128: ...llowing True or ON Turns ON the port extension False or OFF Turns OFF the port extension Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Ext As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension STATe True Ext SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection EXTension STATe Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt TIME SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO DCOFfset SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection EXTension AUTO LOSS SCPI SENSe...

Page 2129: ...Ch CORRection EXTension PORT Pt TIME Equivalent key Cal Port Extensions Extensions Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection EXTension STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR EXT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2130: ...iption System Z0 value Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E 3 to 1000 Preset value 50 Unit ohm Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim SysZ0 As Double SCPI SENSe CORRection IMPedan...

Page 2131: ...NSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude numeric SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR IMP 75 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR IMP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2132: ...t feature is on for the selected channel Ch This command does not clear the error coefficient when the frequency offset mode is OFF Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet CLEar Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection CLEar Equivalent key Cal Mixer Converter Calibration Clear OK Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet CLEar Example of use 10 O...

Page 2133: ...ts 1 Frequency port number The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Note The value used as the frequency is the value specified with frequency setting commands SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency and its subcommands for the port specified by the frequency port number Example of use 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire LOAD Array 1 2 Example of...

Page 2134: ...band The value of PortX and FreqY changes depending on the selected calibration method and port number Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire LOAD numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL LOAD 1 4 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2135: ...ts 1 Frequency port number The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Note The value used as the frequency is the value specified with frequency setting commands SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency and its subcommands for the port specified by the frequency port number Example of use 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire OPEN Array 1 2 Example of...

Page 2136: ...en The value of PortX and FreqY changes depending on the selected calibration method and port number Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire OPEN numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL OPEN 1 4 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2137: ...s 1 Frequency port number Params 2 Power sensor number in use The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range Measurement port number frequency port number 1 to 4 Power sensor number in use ASENsor Specifies power sensor A BSENsor Specifies power sensor B Note The value used as the frequency is the value specified with frequency setting commands SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT ...

Page 2138: ...CQuire SHORt Equivalent key Cal Mixer Converter Caribration Scalar Cal Manual Power Meter Use Sensor A Use Sensor B Cal Mixer Converter Caribration Scalar Cal Manual Power Meter PortX FreqY The values of PortX and FreqY change depending on the selected calibration method and port number Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire PMETer numeric 1 numeric 2 ASENsor ...

Page 2139: ...number Ports 1 Frequency port number The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Note The value used as the frequency is the value specified with frequency setting commands SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency and its subcommands for the port specified by the frequency port number Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire SHORt Array 1 2 D...

Page 2140: ...rt The value of PortX and FreqY changes depending on the selected calibration method and port number Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire SHORt numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL SHOR 1 4 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2141: ...rt number Ports 1 Stimulus port number The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Note For example when THRU 1 2 is specified S22 and S12 are measured when THRU 2 1 is specified S11 and S21 are measured If you specify the same port number to the 2 port numbers an error occurs when executed Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire THRU Arra...

Page 2142: ...anual Transmission PortX Y FreqZ Thru The value of PortX Y and FreqZ changes depending on the selected calibra tion method and port number Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire THRU numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL THRU 1 4 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2143: ...f the power meter Settings that have been temporarily changed due to measurement for each standard number of traces measurement parameters and so on return to their original values Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect CLEar Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet CLEar Equivalent key Cal Mixer Converter Calibration Scalar Cal Manual Cancel OK Equ...

Page 2144: ... error occurs Variable Parameter Ports Descriptio n Provides 2 element array data port Ports 0 Port number 1 Ports 1 Port number 2 The direction forward or reverse is determined by the presence absence of power meter measurement data instead of port 1 or port 2 specified here The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range 1 to 4 Note Before executing this command the SCP...

Page 2145: ...Set COLLect ACQuire PMETer SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ECAL SOLT1 Equivalent key Cal Mixer Converter Caribration Scalar Cal ECal ECal Done Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ECAL SMIX2 numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL ECAL SMIX2 1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2146: ...untime error occurs Variable Parameter EPort Description Executes 1 port calibration for frequency offset measurement Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect ECAL SOLT1 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OF...

Page 2147: ...E5071C 2374 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL ECAL SOLT1 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2148: ...ward reverse or both is determined depending on the port number specified with the SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire LO AD SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire OP EN SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire SH ORt and SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire TH RU command instead of port number 1 or port number 2 specified here The index of the array starts f...

Page 2149: ...FSet COLLect ACQuire OPEN SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire SHORt SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire THRU Equivalent key Cal Mixer Converter Caribration Scalar Cal Manual Select Ports 2 1 fwd 1 2 rev 1 2 both Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection OFFSet COLLect METHod SMIX2 numeric 1 numeric 2 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR OFFS COLL METH SMIX2 1...

Page 2150: ...equency offset measurement Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use 1 SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect METHod SOLT1 2 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect METHod SMIX2 Equivalent key Cal Mixer Converter Caribration Scalar Cal Manua...

Page 2151: ...y calibration data for calculating the calibration coefficient is measured an error occurs when executed Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection OFFSet COLLect SAVE Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect METHod SMIX2 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect METHod SOLT1 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire LOAD SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet COLLect ACQuire OPEN SCPI SEN...

Page 2152: ...iption ON OFF of the display of the calibration property Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the display of the calibration property False or OFF Turns OFF the display of the calibration property Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim CalProp As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection PROPerty True CalProp SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection PROPerty Equivalent...

Page 2153: ...E5071C 2380 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR PROP ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR PROP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2154: ...uting power calibration for both ports before executing receiver calibration Variable Parameter Src Description Specifies the source port for receiver correction Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If you specify the same port number as the measurement port number an error occurs when executed Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection RECeiver 2 COLLect ACQuire 4 Related objects SCPI S...

Page 2155: ...E5071C 2382 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR REC1 COLL ACQ 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2156: ...s improved by executing power calibration for both ports before executing receiver calibration When Calibrate R is selected the Select Port setting is used and the Source Port setting is ignored Example of use SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection RECeiver 2 COLLect RCHannel ACQuire Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection RECeiver Pt STATe SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection RECeiver Pt COLLect ACQuire SCPI SENSe Ch CORR...

Page 2157: ...on for both ports before executing receiver calibration When Calibrate Both or Calibrate T is selected the source port should be different from measurement port Variable Parameter Src Description Specifies the source port for receiver correction Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Note If you specify the same port number as the measurement port number an error occurs when executed Exampl...

Page 2158: ...Programming 2385 Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection RECeiver 1 2 3 4 COLLect TCHannel ACQuire numeric Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR REC1 COLL TCH ACQ 2 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2159: ...er is 10 dBm then If specified offset is 0 dBm then Source Power Reading after calibration would be 10 dBm If specified offset is 10 dBm then Source Power Reading after calibration would be 0 dBm If specified offset is 10 dBm then Source Power Reading after calibration would be 20 dBm Variable Parameter Value Description Specified Offset Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range ...

Page 2160: ...de Equivalent key Cal Receiver Calibration Power Offset Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection RECeiver 1 4 OFFset AMPLitude numeric SENSe 1 160 CORRection RECeiver 1 4 OFFset AMPLitude Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR REC1 OFF AMP 50 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR REC1 OFF AMP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2161: ...e Parameter Status Description On off of error correction Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the receiver calibration error correction False or OFF Turns off the receiver calibration error correction Preset value False or OFF Example of use Dim Corr As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection RECeiver 1 STATe True Corr SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection RECeiv...

Page 2162: ...e 1 160 CORRection RECeiver 1 2 3 4 STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection RECeiver 1 2 3 4 STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR REC1 ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR REC1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2163: ...on floating point type Double Range 0 to 10 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Vel As Double SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection RVELocity COAX 0 5 Vel SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection RVELocity COAX Equivalent key Cal Veloc...

Page 2164: ...Programming 2391 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR RVEL COAX 0 7 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR RVEL COAX 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2165: ... Status Description ON OFF of the error correction Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the error correction False or OFF Turns OFF the error correction Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Corr As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection STATe True Corr SCPI SENSe 1 CORRection STATe Equivalent key Cal Correction Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe...

Page 2166: ...Programming 2393 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2167: ... is canceled Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the trigger source at calibration Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Specifies internal for the trigger source for calibration This corresponds to the softkey Internal False or OFF Matches the state of the trigger source when measurement is made This corresponds to the softkey System Prese...

Page 2168: ... 1 160 CORRection TRIGger FREE STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 CORRection TRIGger FREE STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR TRIG FREE OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 CORR TRIG FREE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2169: ...d For detail refer to the Range section Data 1 The port number to which the calibration is applied 0 when the calibration type is NONE Data 2 The port number to which the calibration is applied 0 when the calibration type is not SOLT2 SOLT3 or SOLT4 Data 3 The port number to which the calibration is applied 0 when the calibration type is not SOLT3 or SOLT4 Data 4 The port number to which the calib...

Page 2170: ...CORRection TYPE 1 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL2 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL3 SCPI SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod TRL4 Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 CORRection TYPE 1 36 Query response ERES NONE RESPO RESPS RESPT SOLT1 SOLT2 SOLT3 SOLT4 SMIX2 numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3...

Page 2171: ...ic 1 the calibration port number This parameter is 0 when the first parameter is NONE the response port number when the SMIX2 is selected numeric 2 the calibration port number This parameter is 0 when the first parameter is not ERES RESPT SOLT2 SOLT3 SOLT4 and SMIX2 the stimulus port number when the SMIX2 is selected numeric 3 the calibration port number This parameter is 0 when the first paramete...

Page 2172: ...Character string type String Range Select the following S XY Where x 1to 4 Y 1to 4 Preset value S11 Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data corrected data array of NOP number of measurement points 2 Where n is an integer between 1 and NOP Data n 2 2 Real part of the data complex number at the n th measurement point Data n 2 1 Imaginary part of the data complex number at the n th measur...

Page 2173: ...s Dim CorData As Variant CorData SCPI SENSe DATA CORRdata S21 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch DATA RAWData Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe DATA CORRdata S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S4 4 Query response array newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS DATA CORR S21 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2174: ...Character string type String Range Select the following S XY Where x 1to 4 Y 1to 4 Preset value S11 Parameter Data Description Indicates the array data raw data array of NOP number of measurement points 2 Where n is an integer between 1 and NOP Data n 2 2 Real part of the data complex number at the n th measurement point Data n 2 1 Imaginary part of the data complex number at the n th measurement ...

Page 2175: ...im RawData As Variant RawData SCPI SENSe DATA RAWData S21 Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch DATA CORRdata Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe DATA RAWData S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S4 4 Query response array newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS DATA RAWD S21 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2176: ...le precision floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value Maximum Frequency 10E5 2 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 0 5 or 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Cntr As Double SCPI SENSe 1 F...

Page 2177: ...lent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 FREQuency CENTer numeric SENSe 1 160 FREQuency CENTer Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ CENT 2E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ CENT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2178: ...ject Variable Parameter Value Description Fixed frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value 1E5 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is se...

Page 2179: ...key Sweep Setup Power CW Freq Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 FREQuency CW FIXed numeric SENSe 1 160 FREQuency CW FIXed Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ 1E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2180: ...surement points Where n is an integer between 1 and NOP Data n 1 Frequency at the n th measurement point The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Examples Dim FreqData As Variant SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 201 FreqData SCPI SENSe 1 FREQuency DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep POINts Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI com...

Page 2181: ...08 numeric n Frequency at the n th measurement point Where NOP is the number of measurement points and n is an integer between 1 and NOP Example of use 10 DIM A 1 201 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2182: ... Variable Parameter Value Description Fixed frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value 1E5 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Ex...

Page 2183: ...key Sweep Setup Power CW Freq Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 FREQuency CW FIXed numeric SENSe 1 160 FREQuency CW FIXed Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ 1E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2184: ... Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to Maximum Frequency 10E5 Preset value Maximum Frequency 10E5 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Span As Double SCPI SENSe 1 FREQuency SPA...

Page 2185: ...valent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 FREQuency SPAN numeric SENSe 1 160 FREQuency SPAN Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ SPAN 1E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ SPAN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2186: ...a type Double precision floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value 1E5 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Start As Double SCPI SENSe 1 FREQuency STARt 1...

Page 2187: ...lent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 FREQuency STARt numeric SENSe 1 160 FREQuency STARt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ STAR 100E6 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ STAR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2188: ...ble precision floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value Maximum frequency in the range Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Stp As Double SCPI SENSe 1 FR...

Page 2189: ...uivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 FREQuency STOP numeric SENSe 1 160 FREQuency STOP Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ STOP 100E6 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 FREQ STOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2190: ... Parameter Value Description The number of ports Data type Long integer type Long Range 28 E5092A 16 E5091A 016 9 E5091A 009 0 E5091A E5092A is not connected Examples Dim NPort As Long NPort SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 COUNt Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 COUNt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 O...

Page 2191: ...oolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the property display False or OFF Turns OFF the property display Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Prop As Boolean SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 DISPlay STATe True Prop SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 DISPlay STATe Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT1 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT2 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 ...

Page 2192: ... 2419 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 DISPlay STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 DISPlay STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 DISP ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 DISP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2193: ...type Long Range 0 to 255 Preset value 0 Examples Dim Obj As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut A DATA 10 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer1 OUTPut A DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D DATA Equivalent key System Multiport Test Set setup Test Set 1 2 Control Line A Line 1 8 LOW HIGH This command ...

Page 2194: ...Programming 2421 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP A DATA 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP A DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2195: ...loating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2 V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0 V Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut A VOLTage DATA 0 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer1 OUTPut A VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Equivalent key System Multip...

Page 2196: ...amming 2423 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut A VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP A VOLT DATA 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP A VOLT DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2197: ...ype Long Range 0 to 15 Preset value 0 Examples Dim Prop As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B DATA 10 Prop SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer1 OUTPut B DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D DATA Equivalent key System Multiport Test Set setup Test Set 1 2 Control Line B Line 1 4 LOW HIGH This command ...

Page 2198: ...Programming 2425 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP B DATA 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP B DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2199: ...loating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2 V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0 V Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B VOLTage DATA 0 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut B VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Equivalent key System Multi...

Page 2200: ...amming 2427 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut B VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP B VOLT DATA 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP B VOLT DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2201: ...ype Long Range 0 to 15 Preset value 0 Examples Dim Prop As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C DATA 10 Prop SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D DATA Equivalent key System Multiport Test Set setup Test Set 1 2 Control Line C Line 1 4 LOW HIGH This command...

Page 2202: ...Programming 2429 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP C DATA 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP C DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2203: ...loating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2 V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0 V Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C VOLTage DATA 0 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut C VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Equivalent key System Multi...

Page 2204: ...amming 2431 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut C VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP C VOLT DATA 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP C VOLT DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2205: ...teger type Long Range 0 to 15 Preset value 0 Examples Dim Prop As Long SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D DATA 10 Prop SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C DATA Equivalent key System Multiport Test Set setup Test Set 1 2 Control Line D Line 1 4 LOW HIGH This ...

Page 2206: ...Programming 2433 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP D DATA 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP D DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2207: ...loating point type Double Range 0 to 5 2 V Resolution 10 mV Preset value 0 V Examples Dim Obj As Double SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D VOLTage DATA 0 Obj SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer 1 OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut A VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut B VOLTage DATA SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut C VOLTage DATA Equivalent key System Multi...

Page 2208: ...amming 2435 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut D VOLTage DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP D VOLT DATA 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 OUTP D VOLT DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2209: ...al lines to decimal values assuming line 1 as LSB and line 8 as MSB Variable Parameter Value Description Sets gets control line value Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Preset value 0 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set...

Page 2210: ...mand Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut DATA numeric SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 OUTPut DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 OUTP DATA 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 OUTP DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2211: ...plexer1 PORT4 CATalog Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT1 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT2 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT3 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT4 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id DISPlay STATe SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id PORT Pt SELect Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MUL...

Page 2212: ...t 4 is R1 R2 R3 R4 without the or sign However the firmware displays the value with or sign for example R1 or R1 For using this command the or character is not required in the value and the command should be sent without any sign or Variable When the 9 port option of the E5091A E5091A 009 is selected Parameter String Description Sets a port name assigned to Port 1 to 20 Data type String type Range...

Page 2213: ...016 E5091_16 is selected Para mete r String Descr iption ON OFF of the control of the E5091A Data type String type Rang e Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 P o r t 5 Po rt 6 Po rt 7 A1 A A2 A3 A4 T1 T2 T3 B1 T4 B2 B3 B4 T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3 R 4 R1 R2 R3 R 4 X 1 a n d X 2 Y1 an d Y2 Z1 an d Z2 Prese t value A1 B1 R1 R1 X 1 Y1 Z1 When the 16 port configuration of the E5092A E5092_16 is selected ...

Page 2214: ...A 3 A4 B1 B2 B 3 B4 R1 R2 R 3 R4 R1 R2 R 3 R4 X1 an d X2 Y1a nd Y2 Z1a nd Z2 Preset value A1 B1 R1 R1 X 1 Y1 Z1 When the 22 port configuration of the E5092A E5092_22 is selected Parame ter String Descrip tion ON OFF of the control of the E5092A Data type String type Range Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A1 0 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B1 0 B11 ...

Page 2215: ...g type Range Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 P or t 5 P or t 6 P or t 7 P or t 8 P or t 9 P or t 1 0 A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B A B A B A B A B A B Preset value A A A A A A A A A A When the 10 port full crossbar configuration of the E5092A E5092_X10 is selected Parameter String Description ON OFF of the control of the E5092A Data type String type Range Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 ...

Page 2216: ...T9 PORT3 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT4 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id DISPlay STATe SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id PORT Pt CATalog SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id STATe Equivalent key System Multiport Test Set Setup Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 Port 9 Port 10 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 PORT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11...

Page 2217: ...E5071C 2444 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 PORT1 A 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 PORT1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2218: ...he Multiport test set Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the control of the multiport test set False or OFF Turns OFF the control of the multiport test set Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Cont As Boolean SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer1 STATe True Cont SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer1 STATe Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id OUTPut DATA SCPI...

Page 2219: ...etup Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Control Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT1 STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2220: ...y values expressed by HIGH 1 LOW 0 of individual lines to decimal values assuming line 1 as LSB and line 8 as MSB Variable Parameter Value Description Setting value the control line Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 255 Preset value 0 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the max...

Page 2221: ...ne 1 Line 8 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 OUTPut DATA numeric SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 OUTPut DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 OUTP 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 OUTP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2222: ...1 the port assigned to Port 2 is changed to T2 automatically Variable Parameter Param Description The port assigned to Port 1 Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following A Selects A as the port assigned to Port 1 T1 Selects T1 as the port assigned to Port 1 Preset Value A Examples Dim Port As String SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer1 TSET9 PORT1 T1 Port SCPI SENSe 1 MUL...

Page 2223: ...t Setup Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Port 1 A T1 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT1 A T1 SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT1 Query response A T1 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT1 T1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2224: ...t assigned to Port 2 the port assigned to Port 1 is changed to A automatically Variable Parameter Param Description The port assigned to Port 2 Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following T1 Selects T1 as the port assigned to Port 2 T2 Selects T2 as the port assigned to Port 2 Preset Value T1 Examples Dim Port As String SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 PORT2 T2...

Page 2225: ...tem Multiport Test Set Setup Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Port2 T1 T2 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT2 T1 T2 SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT2 Query response A T1 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT2 T2 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT2 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2226: ...The port assigned to Port 3 Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following R1 Selects R1 as the port assigned to Port 3 R2 Selects R2 as the port assigned to Port 3 R3 Selects R3 as the port assigned to Port 3 Preset Value R1 Examples Dim Port As String SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 PORT3 R2 Port SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 PORT3 Related objects SCPI SENSe...

Page 2227: ...p Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Port3 R1 R2 R3 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT3 R1 R2 R3 SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT3 Query response R1 R2 R3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT3 R2 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT3 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2228: ...The port assigned to Port 4 Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following R1 Selects R1 as the port assigned to Port 4 R2 Selects R2 as the port assigned to Port 4 R3 Selects R3 as the port assigned to Port 4 Preset Value R1 Examples Dim Port As String SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 PORT4 R2 Port SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer 1 TSET9 PORT4 Related objects SCPI SENSe...

Page 2229: ...p Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Port4 R1 R2 R3 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT4 R1 R2 R3 SENSe 1 160 MULTiplexer 1 2 TSET9 PORT4 Query response R1 R2 R3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT4 R2 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 MULT1 TSET9 PORT4 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2230: ...al signal source Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the external signal source control mode False or OFF Turns off the external signal source control mode Preset value False or OFF Example of use Dim State As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal CONTrol STATe False State SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal CONTrol STATe Equivalent key Sweep Setup Freque...

Page 2231: ...E5071C 2458 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC CONT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC CONT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2232: ...e Variant Example of use Dim LoData As Variant LoData SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet LOCal FREQuency DIVisor SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet LOCal FREQuency MULTiplier SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet LOCal FREQuency OFFSet SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STARt SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STOP Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Eq...

Page 2233: ...E5071C 2460 10 DIM A 1 201 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2234: ...cision floating point type Double Range 1 to 100 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Divisor As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency DIVisor 50 Divisor SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency DIVi...

Page 2235: ... SCPI SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency DIVisor numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency DIVisor Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC DIV 1E1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC DIV 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2236: ...ecision floating point type Double Range 100 to 100 Preset value 0 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Multiplier As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency MULTiplier 10 Multiplier SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FR...

Page 2237: ...I SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency MULTiplier numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency MULTiplier Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC MULT 1E1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC MULT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2238: ...y Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E12 to 1E12 Preset value 0 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Offset As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency OFFSet ...

Page 2239: ...SCPI SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt and SCPI SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency OFFSet numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency OFFSet Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC OFFS 5E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC OFFS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2240: ...nal source Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 1E12 Preset value 0 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Start As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency ST...

Page 2241: ...cy Offset External Source Start Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STARt numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STARt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC STAR 5E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC STAR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2242: ...ouble precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 1E12 Preset value 0 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Stop As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STOP 100E6 Stop SCPI SENS...

Page 2243: ...Source Stop Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STOP numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal FREQuency STOP Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC STOP 5E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC STOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2244: ...alue for the external signal source Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 150 to 30 Preset value 10 Unit dBm Resolution 0 01 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Power As Double SCPI SENSe 1 O...

Page 2245: ...CPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC POW 12 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC POW 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2246: ...ernal signal source Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 2 to 2 Preset value 0 Unit dB GHz Resolution 0 01 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Slope As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal POWer...

Page 2247: ...ent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel SLOPe DATA numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel SLOPe DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC POW SLOP 1 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC POW SLOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2248: ...source Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the power slope mode False or OFF Turns off the power slope mode Preset value False or OFF Example of use Dim State As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe False State SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet LOCal POWer LEVel IMMedi...

Page 2249: ...E5071C 2476 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC POW SLOP STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC POW SLOP STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2250: ...eter Status Description On off of external signal source frequency setting Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the frequency setting False or OFF Turns off the frequency setting Preset value False or OFF Example of use Dim State As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal STATe False State SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet LOCal STATe Equivalent key Setup Freque...

Page 2251: ...E5071C 2478 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS LOC STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2252: ...type Variant type Variant Example of use Dim Freqdata As Variant Freqdata SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet PORT 1 FREQuency DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency DIVisor SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency MULTiplier SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency OFFSet SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency STARt SCPI SENSe Ch OFFSet PORT Pt FREQuency STOP Equivalent key No equivalent key is ...

Page 2253: ...E5071C 2480 10 DIM A 1 201 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2254: ...ency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1 to 100 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Divisor As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet PORT 1 FREQuency DIVisor 50 Divisor SCPI SENSe 1 O...

Page 2255: ...Se Ch FREQuency STOP Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency DIVisor numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency DIVisor Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 DIV 1E1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 DIV 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2256: ...uency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 100 to 100 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Multiplier As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet PORT 1 FREQuency MULTiplier 10 Multiplier SC...

Page 2257: ...h FREQuency STOP Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency MULTiplier numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency MULTiplier Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 MULT 1E1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 MULT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2258: ...n Setting of a frequency offset value for the basic frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1E12 to 1E12 Preset value 0 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim ...

Page 2259: ...requency range is set by using SCPI SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt and SCPI SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency OFFSet numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency OFFSet Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 OFFS 1E9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 OFFS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2260: ...on floating point type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value 1E5 Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Start As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet PORT 1 FREQuency STARt 10...

Page 2261: ...valent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency STARt numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency STARt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 STAR 300000 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 STAR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2262: ...oint type Double Range See frequency range for each option Preset value Maximum frequency in the range Unit Hz hertz Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Example of use Dim Stop As Double SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet PORT 1 FREQu...

Page 2263: ...ivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency STOP numeric SENSe 1 160 OFFSet PORT 1 2 3 4 FREQuency STOP Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 STOP 1e 009 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS PORT2 STOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2264: ...ch port are used regardless of whether the port is on the stimulus side or response side Variable Parameter Status Description On off of the frequency offset Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the frequency offset False or OFF Turns off the frequency offset Preset value False or OFF Example of use Dim State As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 OFFSet ST...

Page 2265: ...E5071C 2492 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 OFFS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2266: ...gnal is inputted or not Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following INTernal The external reference signal is not inputted EXTernal The external reference signal is inputted For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Ref As String Ref SCPI SENSe 1 ROSCillator SOURce Equivalent key Displayed on the instrument status bar at the bottom of the LCD displ...

Page 2267: ...E5071C 2494 INTernal The external reference signal is not inputted EXTernal The external reference signal is inputted Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 ROSC SOUR 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2268: ... Data buf stim ifbw pow del swp time seg m star 1 stop 1 nop 1 ifbw 1 pow 1 del 1 s wp 1 time 1 star n stop n nop n ifbw n pow n del n s wp n time n star N stop N nop N ifbw N pow N del N s wp N time N Each parameter in the above array data is detailed below buf Always specify 5 or 6 You have to specify 6 if you need to set up the sweep mode setting for each segment stim Stimulus setting mode 0 Sp...

Page 2269: ...gment Not necessary when the IF bandwidth setting for each segment is OFF ifbw 0 pow n Power of the n th segment Not necessary when the power setting for each segment is OFF pow 0 del n Sweep delay time of the n th segment Not necessary when the sweep delay time setting for each segment is OFF del 0 swp n Sweep mode of the n th segment 0 Stepped mode 1 Swept mode 2 Stepped mode 3 Swept mode Not ne...

Page 2270: ...lue if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim SegmData As Variant SCPI SENSe 1 SEGMent DATA Array 5 0 0 1 0 0 2 _ 100E6 1E9 31 0 2E9 3E9 51 10 SegmData SCPI SENSe 1 SEGMent DATA Dim SegmData 14 As Variant Dim Ref As Variant SegmData 0 5 SegmData 1 0 SegmData 2 0 SegmData 3 1 SegmData 4 0 SegmData 5 0 SegmData...

Page 2271: ... is an integer between 1 and N Query response When the sweep mode setting for each segment is OFF 5 mode ifbw pow del time segm star 1 stop 1 nop 1 pow 1 del 1 time 1 E span star n stop n nop n pow n del n time n E span star N stop N nop N pow N del N time N newline END When the sweep mode setting for each segment is ON 6 mode ifbw pow del swp time segm star 1 stop 1 nop 1 pow 1 del 1 swp 1 time 1...

Page 2272: ... 10 DIM H 1 3 1 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGM DATA 6 0 1 0 0 1 0 3 30 OUTPUT 717 1E9 3E9 11 70e3 3 40 OUTPUT 717 3E9 4E9 51 7e3 2 50 OUTPUT 717 4E9 6E9 11 70e3 3 60 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGM DATA 70 ENTER 717 A B C D E F G H ...

Page 2273: ...ble Parameter Value Description Total number of measurement points of all segments Data type Long integer type Long Preset Value 2 Examples Dim SegmPoin As Long SegmPoin SCPI SENSe 1 SEGMent SWEep POINts Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch SEGMent DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 SEGMent SWEep POINts Query response numeric n...

Page 2274: ...nel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description Total sweep time of all segments Data type Double precision floating point type Double Examples Dim SegmTime As Double SegmTime SCPI SENSe 1 SEGMent SWEep TIME DATA Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch SEGMent DATA Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 SEGMent SWEep TIME DATA Query response n...

Page 2275: ...nel Ch This command is only available in revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Data Description Indicates the state array data where N is the number of segments and n is an integer between 1 and N Data state1 state n state N Data type Variant type Variant Examples Dim SegmContrData As Variant SCPI SENSe 1 SEGMent LIST CONTrol DATA Array 1 1 0 0 SegmContrData SCPI SENSe 1 SEGMent LIST CONTro...

Page 2276: ...rol DATA Where N is the number of segments and n is an integer between 1 and N Example of use 10 DIM H 1 3 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGM DATA 5 0 1 0 0 0 3 30 OUTPUT 717 1E9 3E9 11 70e3 40 OUTPUT 717 3E9 4E9 51 7e3 50 OUTPUT 717 4E9 6E9 11 70e3 60 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGM LIST CONT DATA 1 0 0 70 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGM LIST CONT DATA 80 ENTER 717 H ...

Page 2277: ...sweep table This command is only available in revision A 9 60 and above Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the individual segment state control Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following ON or 1 Turns ON the individual segment state con OFF or 0 Turns OFF the individual segment state control Preset value OFF or 0 Examples Dim SegmState As Boolean SCPI SEN...

Page 2278: ...Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 SEGMent LIST CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe 1 160 SEGMent LIST CONTrol STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGMent LIST CONTrol STATe ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SEGMent LIST CONTrol STATe 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2279: ...compatibility with E5070B E5071B Variable Parameter Status Description Dummy Parameter Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON No meaning False or OFF No meaning Preset value True or OFF Examples Dim ASpurious As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep ASPurious False ASpurious SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep ASPurious Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 SWEep AS...

Page 2280: ...Programming 2507 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE ASP OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE ASP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2281: ...ata type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 1 Preset value 0 Unit s second Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim SweDel As Double SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep DELay 0 05 SweDel SCPI SENSe 1 SWEe...

Page 2282: ...Programming 2509 SENSe 1 160 SWEep DELay numeric SENSe 1 160 SWEep DELay Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE DEL 0 05 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE DEL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2283: ...is on ON specified with the SCPI SOURce Ch POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe object if you execute this object to try to set the sweep mode to the swept mode an error occurs and the sweep mode is automatically set to the step mode Variable Parameter Param Description Sweep mode Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following STEPped Sets the sweep mode to the stepped mode AN...

Page 2284: ...I SOURce Ch POWer PORT Pt CORRection STATe SCPI SOURce Ch POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe Equivalent key Sweep Setup Sweep Mode Stepped Swept Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 SWEep GENeration STEPped ANALog FSTepped FANalog SENSe 1 160 SWEep GENeration Query response STEP ANAL FST FAN newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE GEN ANAL 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE GEN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2285: ...ints Data type Long integer type Long Range 2 to 20001 Preset value 201 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim Nop As Long SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 801 Nop SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts Equivalent key Sweep Setup Points Equiv...

Page 2286: ...Programming 2513 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE POIN 801 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE POIN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2287: ...oolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the auto setting False or OFF Turns OFF the auto setting Preset value True or OFF Examples Dim SweAuto As Boolean SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep TIME AUTO False SweAuto SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep TIME AUTO Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch SWEep TIME DATA Equivalent key Sweep Setup Sweep Time When performing the operation from the front pan...

Page 2288: ...Programming 2515 SENSe 1 160 SWEep TIME AUTO Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE TIME AUTO ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE TIME AUTO 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2289: ...Description Sweep time Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range Varies depending on the measurement conditions Preset value Varies depending on the measurement conditions Unit s second Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded...

Page 2290: ...weep Time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 SWEep TIME DATA numeric SENSe 1 160 SWEep TIME DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE TIME 1 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE TIME 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2291: ...ng Range Select from either of the following LINear Sets the sweep type to the linear sweep LOGarithmic Sets the sweep type to the log sweep SEGMent Sets the sweep type to the segment sweep POWer Sets the sweep type to the power sweep Preset value LINear Examples Dim SweType As String SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep TYPE segm SweType SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep TYPE Equivalent key Sweep Setup Sweep Type Lin Freq Log Fr...

Page 2292: ...Programming 2519 SENSe 1 160 SWEep TYPE Query response LIN LOG SEGM POW newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE TYPE SEGM 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 SWE TYPE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2293: ...Tage Auxpt DC RANGe UPPer Description This command sets gets the DC voltage range of selected channel Ch Variable Parameter Param Description AUX DC Input range Data type Double precision floating point type Double Unit Volts V Range 1 or 10 Preset value 10 Parameter Auxpt Description AUX port Data type Long Integer Type Long Range 1 or 2 Preset value None Examples ...

Page 2294: ... 1 DC RANGe UPPer Equivalent key Meas Aux Input 1 or 2 Range Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe 1 160 VOLTage 1 2 DC RANGe UPPer SENSe 1 160 VOLTage 1 2 DC RANGe UPPer Query response 1 10 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 VOLT1 DC RANG UPP 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS1 VOLT1 DC RANG UPP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2295: ... INCount SCPI SENSe 1 MULTiplexer 1 INCount Related objects SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT1 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT2 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT3 SCPI SENSe Ch MULTiplexer Id TSET9 PORT4 Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 INCount Query response numeric newline END Example of use ...

Page 2296: ...owing E5091_9 Selects the 9 port option of the E5091A E5091A 009 E5091_13 Selects the 13 port configuration of the E5091A 016 E5091_16 Selects the 16 port configuration of the E5091A 016 E5092_13 Selects the 13 port configuration of the E5092A E5092A 020 Equivalent to E5091_13 of the E5091A 016 E5092_16 Selects the 16 port configuration of the E5092A E5092A 020 Equivalent to E5091_16 of the E5091A...

Page 2297: ...t Test Set Setup Test Set 1 Test Set 2 Select Test Set E5091_9 E5091_13 E5091_16 E5092_13 E5092_16 E5092_22 E5092_28 E5092_ X10 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 NAME E5091_9 E5091_13 E5091_16 E5092_13 E5092_16 E5092_22 E5092_2 8 E5092_X10 SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 NAME Query response E5091_9 E5091_13 E5091_16 E5092_13 E5092_16 E5092_22 E5092_2 8 E5092_X10 newline END Example of use...

Page 2298: ...e of the multiport test set Examples Dim MultCat As String MultCat SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer CATalog Related objects SCPI SENSe MULTiplexer Id NAME Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SENSe MULTiplexer 1 2 CATalog Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS MULT CAT 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2299: ...er RF Range Mode Data type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value ON Note The setting for this command is set at ON by the preset but it is not saved in the state file Even if save command is executed after calibration with RF range Auto mode as OFF it is not possible to measure the value correctly only by recalling To recall the state the status of RF range Auto should be set as OFF E...

Page 2300: ... RF RANGe PORT 1 4 AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SERVice ADJust SENSe 1 160 SWEep RF RANGe PORT 1 4 AUTO Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV ADJ SENS1 SWE RF RANG PORT2 AUTO ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SERV ADJ SENS2 SWE RF RANG PORT3 AUTO 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2301: ...F of Virtual bridge correction Data type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value ON Note The setting for this command is set at ON by the preset but it is not saved in the state file Even if save command is executed after calibration with virtual bridge OFF it is not possible to measure the value correctly only by recalling To recall the state the status of virtual bridge should be set ...

Page 2302: ...29 SERVice ADJust VIRTual BRIDge STATe ON OFF 1 0 SERVice ADJust VIRTual BRIDge STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV ADJ VIRT BRID ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SERV ADJ VIRT BRID 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2303: ... Value Description Active trace number Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim ActTrac As Long ActTrac SCPI SERVice CHANnel 1 TRACe ACTive Related objects SCPI CALCulate Ch PARameter Tr SELect Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice CHANnel 1 36 TRACe ACTive Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV CH...

Page 2304: ...l number Variable Parameter Value Description Active channel number Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim ActChan As Long ActChan SCPI SERVice CHANnel ACTive Related objects SCPI DISPlay WINDow Ch ACTivate Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice CHANnel ACTive Query response numeric newline END ...

Page 2305: ...he E5071C Variable Parameter Value Description Upper limit of the number of channels Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim MaxChan As Long MaxChan SCPI SERVice CHANnel COUNt Equivalent key System Misc Setup Channel Trace Setup Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice CHANnel COUNt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV CHAN COUN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2306: ... per channel Variable Parameter Value Description Upper limit of the number of traces Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim MaxTrac As Long MaxTrac SCPI SERVice CHANnel TRACe COUNt Equivalent key System Misc Setup Channel Trace Setup Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice CHANnel TRACe COUNt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV CHAN TRAC COUN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2307: ... clears the log data of the E5071C For more information about the log file refer to Removing Log Data Examples Dim ClearLog As Long ClearLog SCPI SERVice LOGGing CLEar Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice LOGGing CLEar Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV LOGG CLE ...

Page 2308: ...he E5071C Variable Parameter Value Description Number of ports Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim MaxPort As Long MaxPort SCPI SERVice PORT COUNt Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice PORT COUNt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV PORT COUN 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2309: ...ion This function is valid only for E5071C and is not valid for E5070B E5071B Variable Parameter Status Description Turns ON OFF Overload detection Power Trip function Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from the following True or ON Turns ON the Overload detect False or OFF Turns OFF the Overload detect Preset value True or ON Examples Dim Value As Bool Value 1 SCPI SERVice POWer AC OVERl...

Page 2310: ...Programming 2537 SERVice POWer AC OVERload DETect STATe ON OFF SERVice POWer AC OVERload DETect STATe Query response 1 0 newline END ...

Page 2311: ...cription 1 means applying new system specifications 0 means applying old system specifications Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim SystemRevision As Long SystemRevision SCPI SERVice PORT COUNt Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice SREVision Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV SREV 20 ENTER 717 ...

Page 2312: ...ble Parameter Value Description Upper limit of measurement frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Examples Dim MaxFreq As Double MaxFreq SCPI SERVice SWEep FREQency MAXimum Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice SWEep FREQency MAXimum Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV SWE FR...

Page 2313: ...e Parameter Value Description Lower limit of measurement frequency Data type Double precision floating point type Double Examples Dim MinFreq As Double MinFreq SCPI SERVice SWEep FREQency MINimum Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice SWEep FREQency MINimum Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV SWE FREQ...

Page 2314: ...e current configuration Variable Parameter Value Description Upper limit of the number of points Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim MaxPoin As Long MaxPoin SCPI SERVice SWEep POINts Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SERVice SWEep POINts Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SERV SWE POIN 20 ENTER 717...

Page 2315: ...r Range Step Attenuation 25 10 dBm 0 dB 35 25 dBm 10 dB 45 35 dBm 20 dB 55 45 dBm 30 dB 65 55 dBm 40 dB 75 65 dBm 50 dB 85 75 dBm 60 dB The power sweep setting is set according to the start power level and maximum value of stop power level is set according to step attenuation For more information on power attenuation refer to Setting Power Level with Auto Power Range This command works only with t...

Page 2316: ...n off the Auto Power Range Preset value True or ON Related objects SCPI SOURce Ch POWer ATTenuation DATA Equivalent key Sweep Setup Power Auto Range Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer ATTenuation AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SOURce 1 160 POWer ATTenuation AUTO Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW ATT AUTO ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW ATT AUTO 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2317: ...is available below Source Power Range Step Attenuation 25 10 dBm 0 dB 35 0 dBm 10 dB 45 10 dBm 20 dB 55 20 dBm 30 dB 65 30 dBm 40 dB 75 40 dBm 50 dB 85 50 dBm 60 dB When Auto Power Range set function is effective this command is ignored and an attenuator level and a power range are selected automatically according to a maximum frequency and a maximum setting power For more information on power att...

Page 2318: ...SOURce 1 POWer ATTenuation DATA Related objects SCPI SOURce Ch POWer ATTenuation AUTO Equivalent key Sweep Setup Power Power Ranges Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer ATTenuation DATA numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer ATTenuation DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW ATT DATA 20 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW ATT DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2319: ...ble precision floating point type Double Range Varies depending on the power range 9 kHz to 5 GHz 55 to 10 dBm 5 to 6 GHz 55 to 9 dBm 6 to 7 GHz 55 to 8 dBm 7 to 8 5 GHz 55 to 7 dBm Preset value 7 5 Unit dBm Resolution 0 05 or 0 025 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper l...

Page 2320: ...ATTenuation DATA SCPI SOURce Ch POWer SPAN Equivalent key Center Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer CENTer numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer CENTer Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW CENT 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW CENT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2321: ...ing point type Double Range Varies depending on the power range Preset value 0 Unit dBm Resolution 0 05 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim PowLev As Double SCPI SOURce 1 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 10 PowLev SCPI S...

Page 2322: ...I command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW 12 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2323: ...r slope feature Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 2 to 2 Preset value 0 Unit dB GHz Resolution 0 01 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim SlopLev As Double SCPI SOURce 1 POWer LEVel SLOPe DATA 0 ...

Page 2324: ...t SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer LEVel SLOPe DATA numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer LEVel SLOPe DATA Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW SLOP 0 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW SLOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2325: ...frequency attenuation due to cables etc Variable Parameter Status Description On off of the power slope feature Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the power slop feature False or OFF Turns off the power slop feature Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim Slop As Boolean SCPI SOURce 1 POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe True Slop SCPI SOURce 1 POWer LEV...

Page 2326: ... SOURce 1 160 POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce 1 160 POWer LEVel SLOPe STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW SLOP STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW SLOP STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2327: ...urned ON If the power meter is not connected correctly an error occurs and this command is ignored Variable Parameter Param Description Selection of the power sensor Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following ASENsor Specifies power sensor A BSENsor Specifies power sensor B Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire asen Dmy...

Page 2328: ...Programming 2555 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL ASEN 20 OUTPUT 717 OPC 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2329: ...ble Parameter Value Description Averaging factor Data type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 100 Preset value 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim AvgCnt As Long SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect AVERage CO...

Page 2330: ...tion COLLect AVERage COUNt numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL AVER 6 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL AVER 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2331: ...f data items you want to set Specify an integer between 0 to 100 When you set the number of data items to 0 to clear the loss compensation table you specify only Data 0 as the Data variable Data nX2 1 The frequency of the n th data item 1 kHz to 500 GHz Data nX2 The loss of the n th data item 100 dB to 100 dB The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Note If the array dat...

Page 2332: ...0 As Variant Loss 0 0 SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect TABLe LOSS DATA Loss Related objects SCPI SOURce Ch POWer PORT Pt CORRection COLLect TABLe LOSS STAT e Equivalent key Cal Power Calibration Loss Compen Delete Add Clear Loss Table Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 CORRection COLLect TABLe LOSS DATA numeric 1 numeric 1 Nx2 SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 ...

Page 2333: ...Ch Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of loss compensation Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the loss compensation False or OFF Turns off the loss compensation Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim LComp As Boolean SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect TABLe LOSS STATe True LComp SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COL...

Page 2334: ... 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 CORRection COLLect TABLe LOSS STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL TABL LOSS ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL TABL LOSS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2335: ... Data at the n th measurement point The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Note If the array data does not contain NOP number of measurement point when setting a power calibration data array a runtime error occurs Examples Dim FreqData As Variant SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 201 FreqData SCPI SENSe 1 FREQuency DATA Dim CorData As Variant SCPI SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 201 CorD...

Page 2336: ...POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 CORRection DATA numeric 1 numeric NOP SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 CORRection DATA Query response numeric 1 numeric NOP newline END Example of use 10 DIM A 1 201 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR DATA 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2337: ... Turns ON OFF the power level error correction Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the power level error correction False or OFF Turns off the power level error correction Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim PowCorr As Boolean SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection STATe True PowCorr SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection STATe Equivalent k...

Page 2338: ...Programming 2565 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2339: ...uble precision floating point type Double Range Varies depending on the power range Preset value 0 Unit dBm Resolution 0 05 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim PowLev As Double SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT COUPle False SCPI...

Page 2340: ...4 Power Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 12 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2341: ... levels cannot be output for each port Variable Parameter Status Description Turns ON OFF the coupling between ports for the power level output Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Outputs the same power level to individual ports False or OFF Outputs different power levels to individual ports Preset value True or ON Examples Dim OutCpl As Boolean SCPI...

Page 2342: ...69 Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT COUPle ON OFF 1 0 SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT COUPle Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT COUP OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT COUP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2343: ... Value Description Span value Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range Varies depending on the power range 9 kHz to 5 GHz 55 to 10 dBm 5 to 6 GHz 55 to 9 dBm 6 to 7 GHz 55 to 8 dBm 7 to 8 5 GHz 55 to 7 dBm Preset value 15 Unit dBm Resolution 0 05 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or...

Page 2344: ...SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE SCPI SOURce Ch POWer ATTenuation DATA SCPI SOURce Ch POWer CENTer Equivalent key Span Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer SPAN numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer SPAN Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW SPAN 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW SPAN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2345: ...riable Parameter Value Description Start value Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range Varies depending on the power range 9 kHz to 5 GHz 55 to 10 dBm 5 to 6 GHz 55 to 9 dBm 6 to 7 GHz 55 to 8 dBm 7 to 8 5 GHz 55 to 7 dBm Preset value 15 Unit dBm Resolution 0 05 Examples Dim Pstart As Double SCPI SOURce 1 POWer STARt 10 Pstart SCPI SOURce 1 POWer STARt Related objects SCPI SENS...

Page 2346: ...3 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer STARt numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer STARt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW STAR 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW STAR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2347: ...alue Description Stop value Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range Varies depending on the power range 9 kHz to 5 GHz 55 to 10 dBm 5 to 6 GHz 55 to 9 dBm 6 to 7 GHz 55 to 8 dBm 7 to 8 5 GHz 55 to 7 dBm Preset value 0 Unit dBm Resolution 0 05 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or th...

Page 2348: ... SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE SCPI SOURce Ch POWer ATTenuation DATA SCPI SOURce Ch POWer STARt Equivalent key Stop Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce 1 160 POWer STOP numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer STOP Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW STOP 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW STOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2349: ...on Reference calibration coefficient Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1 to 150 Preset value 100 Unit percent Resolution 0 01 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim CalRef As Double SCPI SOURce PO...

Page 2350: ...mmand Syntax SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect ASENsor RCFactor numeric SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect ASENsor RCFactor Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL ASEN RCF 99 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL ASEN RCF 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2351: ...Description Reference calibration coefficient Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1 to 150 Preset value 100 Unit percent Resolution 0 01 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Examples Dim CalRef As Double SCPI ...

Page 2352: ...SCPI command Syntax SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect BSENsor RCFactor numeric SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect BSENsor RCFactor Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL BSEN RCF 99 5 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL BSEN RCF 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2353: ...meter Value Description Tolerance of power calibration Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 100 Preset value 5 Unit dB Resolution 0 001 Note When the measurement result is beyond the tolerance an error message appears and the power correction function does not turn on Examples Dim TorVal As Long SCPI SOURce 1 POWer PORT 1 CORRection COLLect NTOLerance 10 TorVal SCPI SOU...

Page 2354: ... CORRection COLLect NTOLerance numeric SOURce 1 160 POWer PORT 1 2 3 4 CORRection COLLect NTOLerance Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL NTOL 6 20 OUTPUT 717 SOUR1 POW PORT1 CORR COLL NTOL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2355: ...pecify an integer between 0 to 100 When you set the number of data items to 0 to clear the calibration coefficient table you specify only Data 0 as the Data variable Data nX2 1 The frequency of the n th data item 1 kHz to 500 GHz Data nX2 The calibration coefficient of the n th data item 1 to 150 The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Note If the array data does not co...

Page 2356: ... Dim CalFac 0 As Variant CalFac 0 0 SCPI SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect TABLe ASENsor DATA CalFac Related objects SCPI SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect TABLe BSENsor DATA Equivalent key Cal Power Calibration Sensor A Settings Delete Add Clear Cal Factor Table Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect TABLe ASENsor DATA numeric 1 numeric 1 Nx2 SOURce POWer PORT C...

Page 2357: ...pecify an integer between 0 to 100 When you set the number of data items to 0 to clear the calibration coefficient table you specify only Data 0 as the Data variable Data nX2 1 The frequency of the n th data item 1 kHz to 500 GHz Data nX2 The calibration coefficient of the n th data item 1 to 150 The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Note If the array data does not co...

Page 2358: ...A Clear Cal Factor Table Dim CalFac 0 As Variant CalFac 0 0 SCPI SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect TABLe BSENsor DATA CalFac Related objects SCPI SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect TABLe ASENsor DATA Equivalent key Cal Power Calibration Sensor B Settings Delete Add Clear Cal Factor Table Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SOURce POWer PORT CORRection COLLect TABLe BSENsor DATA numeric 1 numeric 1...

Page 2359: ...E5071C 2586 10 OUTPUT 717 SOUR POW PORT CORR COLL TABL BSEN DATA 0 Clear Table ...

Page 2360: ...tion Value of the Operation Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus OPERation CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus OPERation CONDition Query response numeric newline END Example ...

Page 2361: ... the Operation Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note The bit 0 to 3 bit 6 to13 and bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus OPERation ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus OPERation ENABle Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 SRE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus OPERat...

Page 2362: ...Programming 2589 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2363: ...he Operation Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus OPERation EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus OPERation EVENt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10...

Page 2364: ...ue of the negative transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note The bit 0 to 3 bit 6 to13 and bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition 16 Stat SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus OPERation EVENt SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the fro...

Page 2365: ...E5071C 2592 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2366: ... of the positive transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 16432 Note The bit 0 to 3 bit 6 to13 and bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 Stat SCPI STATus OPERation PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus OPERation EVENt SCPI STATus OPERation NTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the fr...

Page 2367: ...E5071C 2594 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2368: ... STATus PRESet Description This command initializes all the status registers Examples SCPI STATus PRESet Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus PRESet Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel ...

Page 2369: ... Limit Channel Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel Ch NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel Ch PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent...

Page 2370: ... Channel Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel Ch ECHannel NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel Ch ECHannel PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the ...

Page 2371: ...a type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus Q...

Page 2372: ...Programming 2599 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ECH ENAB 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ECH ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2373: ...iption the value of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionabl...

Page 2374: ...meter Value Description The value of the negative transition filter of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStion...

Page 2375: ...BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ECH NTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ECH NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2376: ...the positive transition filter of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel P...

Page 2377: ...BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel PTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ECH PTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ECH PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2378: ...imit Channel Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 ENABle Related objects SC...

Page 2379: ...E5071C 2606 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2380: ...Description The value of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable BLIMit C...

Page 2381: ...lue Description The value of the negative transition filter of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 NTRansition 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 NTRansition...

Page 2382: ...BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2383: ...tive transition filter of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Channel Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 PTRansition 0 Stat SCPI STATus QUES...

Page 2384: ...BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CHANnel 1 160 PTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM CHAN1 PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2385: ... Questionable Bandwidth Limit Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable BLIMit CONDition Q...

Page 2386: ...onable Bandwidth Limit Extra Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionabl...

Page 2387: ...t Extra Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ENABle Equiva...

Page 2388: ...Programming 2615 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ELIM ENAB 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ELIM ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2389: ... Value Description The value of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit EVENt Query response numeric newli...

Page 2390: ...ansition filter of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionab...

Page 2391: ...E5071C 2618 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ELIM NTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ELIM NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2392: ...andwidth Limit Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ELIMit PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIM...

Page 2393: ...E5071C 2620 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ELIM PTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ELIM PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2394: ...Bandwidth Limit Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable ENABle Equivalent key No equivalent ...

Page 2395: ...E5071C 2622 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2396: ...meter Value Description The value of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable BLIMit EVENt Query response numeric newline END Example ...

Page 2397: ...The value of the negative transition filter of the Questionable Bandwidth Limit Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStiona...

Page 2398: ...Programming 2625 STATus QUEStionable BLIMit NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2399: ...uestionable Bandwidth Limit Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable BLIMit EVENt SCPI STAT...

Page 2400: ...Programming 2627 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES BLIM PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2401: ...e of the Questionable Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable CONDition Query response numeric newline END Ex...

Page 2402: ...ription Value of the Questionable Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note The bit 0 to 7 and bit 12 to 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable ENABle Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 SRE Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command S...

Page 2403: ...E5071C 2630 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2404: ... the Questionable Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS SCPI STATus QUEStionable NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable EVENt Query response numeric newline END ...

Page 2405: ...Questionable Limit Channel Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUESt...

Page 2406: ...Limit Channel Extra Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch ECHannel NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch ECHannel PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command...

Page 2407: ...annel Extra Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStio...

Page 2408: ...Programming 2635 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ECH ENAB 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ECH ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2409: ...ble Parameter Value Description Value of the Questionable Limit Channel Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel E...

Page 2410: ...e specified channel Ch Variable Parameter Value Description Value of the negative transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStio...

Page 2411: ... 1 160 ECHannel NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ECH NTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ECH NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2412: ...meter Value Description Value of the positive transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel PTRansit...

Page 2413: ... 1 160 ECHannel PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel PTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ECH PTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ECH PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2414: ...e Limit Channel Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting for the channel trace number Note The bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle Equiv...

Page 2415: ...E5071C 2642 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2416: ...meter Value Description Value of the Questionable Limit Channel Status Event Register of the specified channel Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 160 EVENt Qu...

Page 2417: ...Value of the negative transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note The bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 NTRansition 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch PTRansition E...

Page 2418: ...Programming 2645 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2419: ...tion filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting for the channel trace number Note The bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 PTRansition 0 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel 1 PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CHANnel Ch EVENt SCPI STATus Q...

Page 2420: ...Programming 2647 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2421: ... Questionable Limit Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition Query response ...

Page 2422: ...onable Limit Extra Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMi...

Page 2423: ...tus Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle Equivalent key No eq...

Page 2424: ...Programming 2651 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ELIM ENAB 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ELIM ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2425: ...ter Value Description Value of the Questionable Limit Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit EVENt Query response numeric newline END Exampl...

Page 2426: ... the negative transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No...

Page 2427: ...E5071C 2654 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ELIM NTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ELIM NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2428: ...r Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ELIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionab...

Page 2429: ...E5071C 2656 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ELIM PTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ELIM PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2430: ...imit Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting for the channel trace number Note The bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable ENABle Equivalent key No equivalent key is availa...

Page 2431: ...E5071C 2658 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2432: ...arameter Value Description Value of the Questionable Limit Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUT...

Page 2433: ... Value of the negative transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note The bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is availab...

Page 2434: ...Programming 2661 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2435: ...ion filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting for the channel trace number Note The bit 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition Eq...

Page 2436: ...Programming 2663 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES LIM CHAN1 PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2437: ...of the negative transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note The bit 0 to 9 and bit 11 to 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the ...

Page 2438: ...Programming 2665 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2439: ... of the positive transition filter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 1024 Note The bit 0 to 9 and bit 11 to 15 can not be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on ...

Page 2440: ...Programming 2667 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2441: ...mit Channel Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel Ch NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel Ch PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SC...

Page 2442: ...el Extra Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel Ch ECHannel NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel Ch ECHannel PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the f...

Page 2443: ...ipple Limit Channel Extra Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHA...

Page 2444: ...671 STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel ENABle Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ECH ENAB 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ECH ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2445: ...iption The value of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable R...

Page 2446: ...Description The value of the negative transition filter of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHA...

Page 2447: ...el 1 160 ECHannel NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ECH NTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ECH NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2448: ...he positive transition filter of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ECHannel PTRan...

Page 2449: ...RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 ECHannel PTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ECH PTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ECH PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2450: ...t Channel Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 ENABle Related objects SCPI ...

Page 2451: ...E5071C 2678 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2452: ...Description The value of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHAN...

Page 2453: ...lue Description The value of the negative transition filter of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 NTRansition 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 NTRansition Re...

Page 2454: ...RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2455: ...ive transition filter of the Questionable Ripple Limit Channel Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 For information on the variable Ch see Ch Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 PTRansition 0 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStion...

Page 2456: ...RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CHANnel 1 160 PTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM CHAN1 PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2457: ... Questionable Ripple Limit Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable RLIMit CONDition Quer...

Page 2458: ...onable Ripple Limit Extra Status Condition Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit CONDition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit NTRansition SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit PTRansition Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable R...

Page 2459: ...xtra Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit ENABle 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ENABle Equivalen...

Page 2460: ...Programming 2687 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ELIM ENAB 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ELIM ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2461: ... Value Description The value of the Questionable Ripple Limit Extra Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit EVENt Query response numeric newline ...

Page 2462: ...ansition filter of the Questionable Ripple Limit Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable ...

Page 2463: ...E5071C 2690 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ELIM NTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ELIM NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2464: ...ipple Limit Extra Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 0 and 3 to 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ELIMit PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ...

Page 2465: ...E5071C 2692 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ELIM PTR 6 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ELIM PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2466: ...Ripple Limit Status Enable Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ENABle 16 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit ENABle Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable ENABle Equivalent key No equivalent key...

Page 2467: ...E5071C 2694 numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ENAB 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM ENAB 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2468: ...meter Value Description The value of the Questionable Ripple Limit Status Event Register Data type Long integer type Long Examples Dim Stat As Long Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit EVENt Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 CLS Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax STATus QUEStionable RLIMit EVENt Query response numeric newline END Example of ...

Page 2469: ...tion The value of the negative transition filter of the Questionable Ripple Limit Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value 0 Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit NTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit NTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit EVENt SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMi...

Page 2470: ...Programming 2697 STATus QUEStionable RLIMit NTRansition Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM NTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM NTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2471: ...uestionable Ripple Limit Status Register Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 65535 Preset value Varies depending on the upper limit setting of the number of channels traces Note Bits 15 cannot be set to 1 Examples Dim Stat As Long SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit PTRansition 6 Stat SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit PTRansition Related objects SCPI STATus QUEStionable RLIMit EVENt SCPI STATus ...

Page 2472: ...Programming 2699 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM PTR 16 20 OUTPUT 717 STAT QUES RLIM PTR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2473: ...he display Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of the backlight Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the backlight False or OFF Turns OFF the backlight Preset value True or ON Examples Dim BckLght As Boolean SCPI SYSTem BACKlight False BckLght SCPI SYSTem BACKlight Equivalent key System Backlight To turn the backlight ON press any ke...

Page 2474: ...Programming 2701 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST BACK OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST BACK 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2475: ...beep for the notification of the completion of an operation Examples SCPI SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete IMMediate Related objects SCPI SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete STATe SCPI SYSTem BEEPer WARNing IMMediate Equivalent key System Misc Setup Beeper Test Beep Complete Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete IMMediate Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST BEEP COMP IMM ...

Page 2476: ... completion of the operation Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the beeper for the notification of the completion of the operation False or OFF Turns OFF the beeper for the notification of the completion of the operation Preset value True or ON Examples Dim BeepComp As Boolean SCPI SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete STATe False BeepComp SCPI SYSTem BEE...

Page 2477: ... 2704 SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete STATe ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST BEEP COMP STAT OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST BEEP COMP STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2478: ...es a beep for the notification of warning limit test results Examples SCPI SYSTem BEEPer WARNing IMMediate Related objects SCPI SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STATe SCPI SYSTem BEEPer COMPlete IMMediate Equivalent key System Misc Setup Beeper Test Beep Warning Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem BEEPer WARNing IMMediate Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST BEEP WARN IMM ...

Page 2479: ...warning limit test result Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the beeper for the notification of warning limit test result False or OFF Turns OFF the beeper for the notification of warning limit test result Preset value True or ON Examples Dim BeepWarn As Boolean SCPI SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STATe False BeepWarn SCPI SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STAT...

Page 2480: ...ming 2707 SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STATe ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST BEEP WARN STAT OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST BEEP WARN STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2481: ... string containing the following parameters for all the connected ECals 1 Model Number 2 Serial Number Data type Character string type String Examples Dim Ctlg As String Ctlg SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL CATalog Related objects SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL DEFine Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL CATalog Query re...

Page 2482: ... Model Number 2 Serial Number Data type Character string type String Examples Dim ECal As String ECalReturn As String SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL DEFine N4431B 03605 ECalReturn SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL DEFine Related objects SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL CATalog Equivalent key Cal ECal ECal Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL DEFine string SYSTem COMMunicate ECAL DEFine Quer...

Page 2483: ... power meter Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 30 Preset value 13 Note If the specified parameter is out of the allowable setting range a runtime error occurs Examples Dim Paddr As Long SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PMETer ADDRess 15 Paddr SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB PMETer ADDRess Equivalent key System Misc Setup GPIB Setup Power Meter Address Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMu...

Page 2484: ...Programming 2711 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB PMET ADDR 10 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB PMET ADDR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2485: ...xternal signal source Data type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 30 Preset value 19 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use Dim SGaddr As Long SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator ADDRess 20 SGaddr SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator ADDRess Equivalent key System Misc Setup GPIB Setup Signal Generator Address Equivalen...

Page 2486: ...Programming 2713 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN ADDR 19 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN ADDR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2487: ...cy setting command for the user defined external signal source Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value FR f HZ Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed The output frequency in the command string is written as f The frequency of the external signal source which changes for each measurement point is set ...

Page 2488: ...r TYPE Equivalent key System Misc Setup GPIB Setup Signal Generator Address Custom Commands Set Frequency Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand FREQuency string SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand FREQuency Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM FREQ FREQ f HZ 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM FREQ 3...

Page 2489: ...ned external signal source Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value AP p DM Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed The output level in the command string is written as p The output level of the external signal source which changes for each measurement point is set and the setting command is sent to th...

Page 2490: ...tem Misc Setup GPIB Setup Signal Generator Address Custom Commands Set Power Level Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand POWer string SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand POWer Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM POW AMPL p DBM 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM POW 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2491: ...er Value Description Preset command for the user defined external signal source Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use Dim SGcomm As String SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand PRESet RST SGcomm SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator...

Page 2492: ...ddress Custom Commands Preset Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand PRESet string SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand PRESet Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM PRES RST 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM PRES 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2493: ...mand for the user defined external signal source Data type Character string type String Range 254 characters or less Preset value R3 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use Dim SGcomm As String SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand RFON AMPL STATE ON SGcomm SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand RFON Relat...

Page 2494: ... Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand RFON string SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand RFON Query response string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM RFON AMPL STATE ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN CCOM RFON 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2495: ... type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 1 Preset value 0 1 Unit s second Resolution 0 001 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use Dim SGdelay As Double SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator DWELl 0 2 SGdelay SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator DWELl Related objects SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENer...

Page 2496: ...ss Switching Time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator DWELl numeric SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator DWELl Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN DWEL 0 2 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN DWEL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2497: ...ESG Series PSG Series Data type Long integer type long Range 1 to 3 Preset value 3 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range an error occurs when executed Example of use Dim SGtype As long SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator TYPE 2 SGtype SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator TYPE Related objects SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator CCOMmand FREQuency SCPI SYSTem ...

Page 2498: ...A 8665A B 8648A B C D ESG Series PSG Series Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator TYPE numeric SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SGENerator TYPE Query response value newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN TYPE 2 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM GPIB SGEN TYPE 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2499: ...ter char Description Power Meter Type Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following GPIB GPIB Power Meter USB USB Power Meter Parameter string Description Address ID string of Power Meter Data type Character string type String Range For char GPIB address of the power meter Choose any integer between 0 and 30 For char USB the ID string of the power meter or power ...

Page 2500: ...MMunicate USB PMETer CATalog Equivalent key System Misc Setup Power Meter Setup Select Type GPIB USB Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate PSENsor GPIB USB string address ID string SYSTem COMMunicate PSENsor Query response GPIB USB string address ID string newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM USB PMET CAT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 OUTPUT 717 SYST COMM PSEN USB A ...

Page 2501: ... Ctlg Description Returns a string containing the following parameters for all the connected power meters sensors 1 Agilent Technologies 2 Model Number 3 Serial Number 4 Firmware Revision Data type Character string type String Examples Dim Ctlg As String Ctlg SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate USB PMETer CATalog Related objects SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate PSENsor Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on ...

Page 2502: ...Programming 2729 10 OUTPUT 717 SYSTem COMMunicate USB PMETer CATalog 20 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2503: ...F of the system correction Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the system correction False or OFF Turns OFF the system correction Preset value True or ON Examples Dim SysCal As Boolean SCPI SYSTem CORRection STATe False SysCal SCPI SYSTem CORRection STATe Equivalent key System Misc Setup Service Menu System Correction Equivalent SCPI command...

Page 2504: ...Programming 2731 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST CORR OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST CORR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2505: ...lock Data 0 Sets year Data 1 Sets month Data 2 Sets day The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range Data 0 1980 to 2099 Data 1 1 to 12 Data 2 1 to 31 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded is set Exa...

Page 2506: ...bjects SCPI SYSTem TIME SCPI DISPlay CLOCk Equivalent key System Misc Setup Clock Setup Set Date and Time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem DATE numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 SYSTem DATE Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST DATE 2002 1 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST DATE 30 ENTER 717 A B C ...

Page 2507: ...rror that occurs by the manual operation or the SCPI command used in controlling the E5071C from the external con troller Variable Parameter Err Description Indicates 2 element array data for error Err 0 Error number Err 1 Error message The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Note If no error is stored in the error queue 0 and No error are read out as the error number a...

Page 2508: ...wline END numeric Error number string Error message a character string with double quotation marks If no error is stored in the error queue 0 and No error are read out as the error number and the error message Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST ERR 20 ENTER 717 A B ...

Page 2509: ...Long integer type Long Range 1to 4 Preset value 1 For option 2D5 4D5 2K5 and 4K5 the preset value is 1 and cannot be changed When this command is send to the option 2D5 4D5 2K5 and 4K5 an error of Option Not Installed is displayed Examples SCPI INIT ch CONT False SCPI SYST ISPC STAT True SCPI SYST ISPC PORT 1 Related objects SCPI SYSTem ISPControl STATe Equivalent key System Service Init Src Port ...

Page 2510: ...Programming 2737 Query response 1 4 newline END Example of use 10 INIT CONT OFF 20 SYSTem ISPControl STATe ON 30 SYSTem ISPControl PORT 1 ...

Page 2511: ...hold state to a test port Variable Parameter Status Description ON OFF Initial Source Port Control feature Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON ON Control feature False or OFF OFF Control feature Preset value True or ON The default value is ON for all options Examples SCPI INIT ch CONT False SCPI SYST ISPC STAT True SCPI SYST ISPC PORT 1 Related objec...

Page 2512: ...Programming 2739 SYSTem ISPControl STATe ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem ISPControl STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 INIT CONT OFF 20 SYSTem ISPControl STATe ON 30 SYSTem ISPControl PORT 1 ...

Page 2513: ...ariable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of lock Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Specifies lock False or OFF Specifies unlock Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim FKLock As Boolean SCPI SYSTem KLOCk KBD True FKLock SCPI SYSTem KLOCk KBD Related objects SCPI SYSTem KLOCk MOUSe Equivalent key System Misc Setup Front Panel Keyboard Lock Equival...

Page 2514: ...Programming 2741 SYSTem KLOCk KBD Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST KLOC KBD ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST KLOC KBD 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2515: ...iable Parameter Status Description ON OFF of lock Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Specifies lock False or OFF Specifies unlock Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim MTLock As Boolean SCPI SYSTem KLOCk MOUSe True MTLock SCPI SYSTem KLOCk MOUSe Related objects SCPI SYSTem KLOCk KBD Equivalent key System Key Lock Mouse Lock Equivalent SCPI command ...

Page 2516: ...Programming 2743 SYSTem KLOCk MOUSe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST KLOC MOUS ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST KLOC MOUS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2517: ...ect type Method Write only Syntax SCPI SYSTem POFF Description This command turns OFF the E5071C Examples SCPI SYSTem POFF Equivalent key Standby switch Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem POFF Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST POFF ...

Page 2518: ...ginal factory setting Default Conditions This command is different from SCPI IEEE4882 RSTas the continuous startup mode see SCPI INITiate Ch CONTinuous of channel 1 is set to ON Examples SCPI SYSTem PRESet Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 RST SCPI SYSTem UPReset Equivalent key Preset OK Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem PRESet Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST PRES ...

Page 2519: ...LOW level to the security level HIGH Specifies HIGH level to the security level Preset value NONE Note When the setting is LOW it is able to change to NONE or HIGH But when this setting is HIGH it is not able to change NONE or LOW The setting can be turned NONE by executing the preset or recalling when the setting of frequency blank function is HIGH Even if the setting is LOW and HIGH the command ...

Page 2520: ... Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem SECurity LEVel NONE LOW HIGH SYSTem SECurity LEVel Query response NONE LOW HIGH newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST SEC LEV LOW 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST SEC LEV 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2521: ... be in the service mode Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON In the service mode False or OFF Not in the service mode Preset Value False or OFF Examples Dim SvMode As Boolean SvMode SCPI SYSTem SERVice Equivalent key Displayed on the instrument status bar at the bottom of the LCD display Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem SERVice Query response 1 0...

Page 2522: ...Programming 2749 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST SERV 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2523: ... this command does not works and generates no error Variable Parameter Status Description Dummy Parameter Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON No Meaning False or OFF No meaning Preset value False or OFF Examples Dim TempMode As Boolean SCPI SYSTem TEMPerature HIGH True TempMode SCPI SYSTem TEMPerature HIGH Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command ...

Page 2524: ...Programming 2751 Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST TEMP HIGH ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST TEMP HIGH 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2525: ...tibility with E5070B E5071B On execution this command does not works and generates no error Variable Parameter Status Description Dummy Parameter Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Always True Examples Dim WarmUp As Boolean WarmUp SCPI SYSTem TEMPerature STATe Equivalent key None Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem TEMPerature STATe Query response 1 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYS...

Page 2526: ...k Data 0 Sets hour 24 hour basis Data 1 Sets minute Data 2 Sets second The index of the array starts from 0 Data type Variant type Variant Range Data 0 0 to 23 Data 1 0 to 59 Data 2 0 to 59 Resolution 1 Note If the specified variable is out of the allowable setup range the minimum value if the lower limit of the range is not reached or the maximum value if the upper limit of the range is exceeded ...

Page 2527: ...jects SCPI SYSTem DATE SCPI DISPlay CLOCk Equivalent key System Misc Setup Clock Setup Set Date and Time Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem TIME numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 SYSTem TIME Query response numeric 1 numeric 2 numeric 3 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST TIME 17 30 0 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST TIME 30 ENTER 717 A B C ...

Page 2528: ...e not available When the external connection test set is changed the calibration coefficients are cleared and the error correction function is turned off Variable Parameter Param Description External test set mode Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following OFF Turns off the external test set MODE1 Turns on the external test set and sets the test set mode to MO...

Page 2529: ...5071C 2756 Syntax SYSTem TSET EXTernal OFF MODE1 MODE2 SYSTem TSET EXTernal Query response OFF MODE1 MODE2 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST TSET MODE1 20 OUTPUT 717 SYST TSET 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2530: ...ardless of the operation mode in preset state If you try to specify a file for a preset D UserPreset sta that does not exist a warning message will be displayed and SCPI SYSTem PRESet will be executed Examples CPI SYSTem UPReset Related objects SCPI IEEE4882 RST SCPI SYSTem PRESet Equivalent key Preset OK Equivalent SCPI command Syntax SYSTem UPReset Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST UPR ...

Page 2531: ...eter Param Description Sets Gets polarity of the pulse generated by the output trigger Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following POSitive Generates a Positive pulse NEGative Generates a Negative pulse Preset value POSitive Examples Dim TrigPol As String TrigPol NEGative SCPI TRIGger OUTPut POLarity TrigPol Related objects SCPI TRIGger OUTPut POSition SCPI TRI...

Page 2532: ...ing 2759 TRIGger OUTPut POLarity POSitive NEGative TRIGger OUTPut POLarity Query response POSitive NEGative newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTP POL POS 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTP POL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2533: ... before measurement point position of the output trigger Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following AFTer Generates a Pulse trigger after the measurement points BEFore Generates a Pulse trigger before the measurement points Preset value AFTer Examples Dim TrigPos As String TrigPos BEFore SCPI TRIGger OUTPut POSition TrigPos Related objects SCPI TRIGger OUTPut ...

Page 2534: ...mming 2761 Syntax TRIGger OUTPut POSition AFTer BEFore TRIGger OUTPut POSition Query response AFTer BEFore newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTP POS AFT 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTP POS 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2535: ...s external trigger output state Data type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns ON the External Trigger Output False or OFF Turns OFF the External Trigger Output Preset value OFF Examples Dim TrigStat As boolean TrigStat 1 SCPI TRIGger OUTPut STATe TrigStat Related objects SCPI TRIGger OUTPut POLarity SCPI TRIGger OUTPut POSition Equivalent key Trigger Ext Trig Output ...

Page 2536: ...Programming 2763 TRIGger OUTPut STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTP STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTP STAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2537: ...ure Variable Parameter Status Description On off status of the averaging trigger Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the averaging trigger False or OFF Turns off the averaging trigger Preset value False or OFF Example of use Dim Avetrig As Boolean SCPI TRIGger SEQuence AVERage True Avetrig TRIGger SEQuence AVERage Related objects SCPI SENSe ...

Page 2538: ...Programming 2765 Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG AVER ON 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG AVER 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2539: ...able Parameter Value Description External trigger delay time Data type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 1 Preset value 0 Unit s second Resolution 10 µ Example of use Dim Extdel As Double SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal DELay 0 05 Extdel SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal DELay Related objects SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal LLATency STATe SCPI TRIGger SEQuence POINt Equivalent key ...

Page 2540: ...Programming 2767 Query response numeric newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG EXT DEL 0 05 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG EXT DEL 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2541: ...al trigger When the point trigger feature is set to off or when the trigger source is set to one other than the external trigger the change is ignored Variable Parameter Status Description On off of the low latency external trigger Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the low latency external trigger False or OFF Turns off the low latency ext...

Page 2542: ...Trigger Low Latency Equivalent SCPI command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal LLATency STATe ON OFF 1 0 TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal LLATency STATe Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG EXT LLAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG EXT LLAT 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2543: ...g type String Range Select from either of the following POSitive Sets Gets Positive polarity NEGative Sets Gets Negative polarity Preset value NEGative Examples Dim InputTrigPol As String InputTrigPol NEGative SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal SLOPe InputTrigPol Related objects SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal DELay SCPI TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal LLATency STATe Equivalent key Trigger Ext Trig Input Equ...

Page 2544: ...Programming 2771 Query response POSitive NEGative newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SEQ EXT SLOP POS 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SEQ EXT SLOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2545: ... at the time of a trigger If you execute this object when the trigger system is not in the trigger wait state trigger event detection state an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored Examples SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce bus SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IMMediate Related objects SCPI TRIGger SEQuence IMMediate Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on t...

Page 2546: ...to Stepped When the trigger source is set to the internal trigger Internal the setting is ignored Variable Parameter Status Description Turns ON OFF the point trigger Data type Boolean type Boolean Range Select from either of the following True or ON Turns on the point trigger False or OFF Turns off the point trigger Preset value False or OFF Note Example of use Dim Ptrig As Boolean SCPI TRIGger S...

Page 2547: ...C 2774 Equivalent SCPI command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence POINt ON OFF 1 0 TRIGger SEQuence POINt Query response 1 0 newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG POIN ON 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG POIN 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2548: ... ACTive when INIT CONT command is turned on for all channels a measurement channel will automatically be changed by switching over the active channel Variable Parameter Param Description Trigger source Data type Character string type String Range Select from either of the following ALL Specifies trigger to all channels ACTive Specifies trigger to active channel Preset value ALL Examples Dim TrigSc...

Page 2549: ...E5071C 2776 Query response ALL ACTive newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SEQ SCOP ACT 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SEQ SCOP 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2550: ...measurement using the SCPI IEEE4882 OPC object If you execute this object when the trigger system is not in the trigger wait state trigger event detection state an error occurs when executed and the object is ignored For details about the trigger system see Trigger System Examples Dim Dmy As Long SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SOURce bus SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGle Dmy SCPI...

Page 2551: ...tted externally via the Ext Trig connector or the handler interface 3 Manual Trigger Generates a trigger when the key operation of Trigger Trigger is executed from the front panel 4 Bus Trigger Generates a trigger when the SCPI IEEE4882 TRG object is executed 5 When you change the trigger source during sweep the sweep is aborted Variable Parameter Param Description Trigger source Data type Charact...

Page 2552: ...IGger SEQuence SOURce Equivalent key Trigger Trigger Source Internal External Manual Bus Equivalent SCPI command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence SOURce INTernal EXTernal MANual BUS TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Query response BUS EXT INT MAN newline END Example of use 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR BUS 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR 30 ENTER 717 A ...

Page 2553: ...N through TCPIP0 localhost inst0 INSTR address The TDR application must be installed and executed on your PC before you send the TDR commands These commands can not be used in the built in VBA The Command Finder helps you to find the command The TDR Notation Convention helps you understand the commands Other topics about Programming ...

Page 2554: ...ax describes the syntax for sending an SCPI command from the controller PC to the E5071C The syntax consists of two parts the object part and the set part with a space inserted between them As for query the syntax consists of object part followed by a question mark with no space in between them Description Description describes how to use the SCPI commands or the operation when executed Parameters...

Page 2555: ...acters Variant Variant type 16 bytes No limitation Examples Examples provides a sample example of using the object through coding with the Basic language Related Commands Related commands provide information about other commands that are similar related with the command Equivalent GUI Equivalent GUI shows the operational procedure by using the E5071C TDR graphic user interface that has the same ef...

Page 2556: ...the parameter format allocation for each traces Parameter Description Type of the parameter format allocation Data Type Character string type String Range SPARameters All S TPARameters All T MIXed Mixed Preset Value MIXed Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC ALL SPAR Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Trace Control Mixed OR All T OR All S button under Allocation ...

Page 2557: ...race number Parameter Description Active trace number Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 16 Preset Value 1 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 7 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate ATRaces COUNt Equivalent GUI Trace Select the trace number OR Trace Next or Trace Prev ...

Page 2558: ...r of trace Parameter Description Number of Trace Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 16 Preset Value Depending on DUT topology setting Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 20 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate ATRaces ACTive Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2559: ...for the marker couple mode Parameter Description State of marker coupling Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value ON Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR MARK COUP ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR MARK COUP 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate ATRaces TIME COUPle Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Trace Control Marker Under Coupling ...

Page 2560: ... the transform couple mode Parameter Description State of the time coupling Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value ON Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR TIME COUP ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR TIME COUP 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate ATRaces MARKer COUPle Equivalent Key TDR TDT Trace Control Time Under Coupling ...

Page 2561: ...ts step amplitude value for the transform function Parameter Description Stimulus amplitude level Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1m to 5 Preset Value 200m Unit volt Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR TIME STEP AMPL 100e 3 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR TIME STEP AMPL 30 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI Setup Stim Ampl under Basic ...

Page 2562: ... topology Data Type Character string type String Range SEND1 Single Ended 1 Port SEND2 Single Ended 2 Port DIF1 Deferential 1 Port SEND4 Single Ended 4 Port DIF2 Deferential 2 Port Preset Value SEND1 Unit Resolution Query Response SEND1 SEND2 DIF1 SEND4 DIF2 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC DEV SEND1 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC DEV 30 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI Setup DUT Topology under Basic ...

Page 2563: ...Command Only Syntax CALCulate EYE ABORt Description This command aborts calculations for the simulated eye diagram Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE ABOR Related Commands CALCulate EYE EXECute Equivalent Key Eye Mask Abort Under Eye Control ...

Page 2564: ...and performs the calculation for the simulated eye diagram for the active trace Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 3 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE EXEC Related Commands CALCulate EYE STATe CALCulate ATRaces ACTive CALCulate EYE ABORt Equivalent Key Eye Mask Draw Eye Under Eye Control ...

Page 2565: ...ttern This value is used only when the bit pattern type is selected at PRBS Parameter Description Bit length Data Type Long integer type Long Range 3 to 15 Preset Value 7 Unit Resolution 2 Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP BPAT TYPE PRBS 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP BPAT LENG 3 Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut BPATtern TYPE Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Length unde...

Page 2566: ...ameter Description Bit pattern type Data Type Character string type String Range PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence K285 K 28 5 USER User Custom Preset Value PRBS Unit Resolution Query Response PRBS K285 USER newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP BPAT TYPE K285 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP BPAT TYPE 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut BPATtern LENGth MMEMory LOAD EYE BPATtern ...

Page 2567: ... Rate Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 1G Unit bits sec Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP DRAT 1 1e9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP DRAT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut OLEVel CALCulate EYE INPut ZLEVel CALCulate EYE INPut RTIMe DATA CALCulate EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Da...

Page 2568: ...for bit 1 Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 5 to 5 Preset Value 200m Unit volt Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP OLEV 100e 3 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP ZLEV 100e 3 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP OLEV 40 ENTER 717 A 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP ZLEV 60 ENTER 717 B Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut ZLEVel CALCulate EYE INPut OFFS...

Page 2569: ...simulated eye function Parameter Description Rise time Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 35p Unit second Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP RTIM DATA 90e 12 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP RTIM DATA 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Rise Time Under Bit Pattern ...

Page 2570: ... for the simulated eye Parameter Description Treshold levels define rise time Data Type Character string type String Range T1_9 10 90 T2_8 20 80 Preset Value T1_9 Unit Resolution Query Response T1_9 T2_8 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP RTIM THR T1_9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP RTIM THR 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut RTIMe DATA Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Rise Time U...

Page 2571: ...r bit 0 Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 5 to 5 Preset Value 0 Unit volt Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP OLEV 100e 3 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP ZLEV 100e 3 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP OLEV 40 ENTER 717 A 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP ZLEV 60 ENTER 717 B Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut OLEVel CALCulate EYE INPut OFFSet Eq...

Page 2572: ... 1 Mask Test Fail 0 Mask Test Pass Preset Value Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 3 30 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD EYE MASK D TDR FC0133 msk 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE MASK STAT ON 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE EXEC 60 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE MASK FAIL 70 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate EYE MASK STATe Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Mask Tes...

Page 2573: ...Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 3 30 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD EYE MASK D TDR FC0133 msk 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE MASK STAT ON 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE EXEC Related Commands CALCulate EYE MASK STATe CALCulate EYE EXECute CALCulate EYE MASK FAIL MMEMory LOAD EYE MASK Equiv...

Page 2574: ...e numeric Minimum Value numeric Maximum Value numeric Level Zero numeric Level One numeric Level Mean numeric Amplitude numeric Height numeric always 0 numeric Width numeric Opening Factor numeric Signal Noise Ratio numeric Duty Cycle Distortion numeric Duty Cycle Distortion numeric Rise Time numeric Fall Time numeric Jitter peak to peak numeric Jitter RMS numeric Crossing Percentage newline END E...

Page 2575: ...E5071C 2802 CALCulate EYE EXECute Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Result Window Under Result Eye Mask Export to CSV Under Result Not exactly equivalent ...

Page 2576: ... the overlay on off Parameter Description Overlay on off Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value ON Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC ATR ACT 3 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE EXEC 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE RES DISP STAT OFF Related Commands CALCulate EYE RESults DATA Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Overlay Under Result ...

Page 2577: ...for the results of eye measurement Parameter Description Rise time threshold level Data Type Character string type String Range T1_9 10 90 T2_8 20 80 Preset Value T1_9 Unit Resolution Query Response T1_9 T2_8 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE RES THR T1_9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE RES THR 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate EYE RESults DATA Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Rise Time Def Under ...

Page 2578: ...iption This command displays the EYE MASK window Parameter Description Status of Eye Mask window Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples See the example in CALCulate EYE EXECute Related Commands CALCulate EYE EXECute Equivalent GUI Eye Mask ...

Page 2579: ...er Parameter Description Marker number to active Data Type Long integer type Long Range 0 to 10 Preset Value 0 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 AMAR ACT 1 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 AMAR ACT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute Equivalent GUI Marker Select the marker number OR Marker Select the marker number...

Page 2580: ...ing STATe Description This command sets state for the peeling function Parameter Description Peeling function on off Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 CONV PEEL STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 CONV PEEL STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Parameters Peeling ...

Page 2581: ...alue of delta time result Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM TARG 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM POS 50 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM DATA 40 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe POSition CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe STATe CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe TARGet Equ...

Page 2582: ... Delta time reference position Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 0 to 100 Preset Value 50 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM POS 0 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM POS 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe STATe CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe TARGet Equivalent GUI Marker Search ...

Page 2583: ...er Description Status of display of delta time marker Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe POSition CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe TARGet Equivalent GUI Marker Se...

Page 2584: ...ace number stopping point for delta time Parameter Description Target trace number for the delta time function Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 16 Preset Value 1 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM TARG 5 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 DTIM TARG 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr DTIMe POSition...

Page 2585: ...LCulate TRACe Tr FORMat Description This command sets trace format Parameter De scri pti on Format for the trace Dat a Ty pe Character string type String Ra ng e For S Parameter Measurement IMPedance MLOGarithmic MLINear REAL IMAGinary GDELay SWR PHASe UPHase PPHase SLINear SLOGarithmic SCOMplex SMITh S ADMittance PLINear PLOGarithmic POLar For Time Domain measurement IMPedance VOLT MLOGarithmic M...

Page 2586: ...inary GDELay SWR PHASe UPHase PPHase SLINear SLOGarithmic SCOMplex SMITh SADMitta nce PLINear PLOGarithmic POLar newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 FORM IMP 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 FORM 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr PARameter Equivalent Key TDR TDT Parameters ...

Page 2587: ...on floating point type Double Range Preset Value 10n Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAR 2e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STOP 6e 9 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE TYPE BPAS 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAT ON 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAR 60 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE STOP CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE TYPE CALC...

Page 2588: ...Programming 2815 TDR TDT Gating type in the text box under the Start virtual knob OR Right click on the time domain graph plot and select Set Gating Range ...

Page 2589: ...pe Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAR 2e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STOP 6e 9 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE TYPE BPAS 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAT ON 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAT 60 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE STARt CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE STOP CALCulate TRACe...

Page 2590: ...Programming 2817 Right click on the time domain active trace and select Switch Gating State ...

Page 2591: ...ery Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAR 2e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STOP 6e 9 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE TYPE BPAS 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAT ON 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STOP 60 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE STARt CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE TYPE CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE STATe Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Gating Stop virtual k...

Page 2592: ...String Range BPASs Band Pass NOTCh Notch Preset Value BPASs Unit Resolution Query Response BPASs NOTCh newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAR 2e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STOP 6e 9 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE TYPE BPAS 40 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE STAT ON 50 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 GATE TYPE 60 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr GATE STARt CALCulate TRACe Tr GA...

Page 2593: ...function This is different than tracking mode because moving the marker to another point the marker does not point back to Max or Min that is previously set Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE MAX 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC EXEC Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TRACking CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TYPE Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is avail...

Page 2594: ...e to move to other desire point Parameter Description Status for the marker tracking mode Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE MAX 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC TRAC ON 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC TRAC 40 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer M...

Page 2595: ...escription Marker function type Data Type Character string type String Range MAX The marker moves to the maximum value of the trace MIN The marker moves to the minimum value of the trace Preset Value MAXimum Unit Resolution Query Response MAXimum MINimun newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC TYPE MAX 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC TRAC ON 30 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 FUNC...

Page 2596: ...Programming 2823 Marker Search Max or Min CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk FUNCtion TRACking is used together when equivalent GUI is clicked ...

Page 2597: ...he reference marker display Parameter Description Status of the reference marker display Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 REF STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 REF STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk STATe Equivalent GUI Marker Ref OR Setup Advan...

Page 2598: ...or the marker display Parameter Description Status for the marker display Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk REFerence STATe Equivalent GUI Marker OR Setup Advanced Mode Marker ...

Page 2599: ...ameter Description Marker stimulus value X Axis Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 10n Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 X 50 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 X 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk Y Equivalent GUI Setup Advanced Mode Marker Select Marker Entry box above the graph p...

Page 2600: ...lues of the marker Parameter Description Marker response value Y axis Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MARK1 Y 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr MARKer Mk X Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2601: ... Type Command Only Syntax CALCulate TRACe Tr MATH MEMorize Description This command copies measurement data to memory trace Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 MATH MEM Related Commands DISPlay TRACe Tr DMEMory TYPE Equivalent GUI Data Mem Data Mem ...

Page 2602: ...urement parameter See Measurement Parameters of Balanced Devices for balanced parameters Parameter Description Measurement parameter Data Type Character string type String Range For Time Domain Txy Tddxy Tdcxy Tcdxy Tccxy For S parameter Sxy Sddxy Sdcxy Scdxy Sccxy x 1 to 4 y 1 to 4 Preset Value Depending on Trace and Selected DUT topology Unit Resolution Query Response ...

Page 2603: ...E5071C 2830 String newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 PAR T11 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 PAR 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr FORMat Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Parameter ...

Page 2604: ...ng STATe Description This command sets state for smoothing Parameter Description Status for smoothing Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 SMO STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 SMO STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Parameters Smoothing ...

Page 2605: ...tion Parameter Description Transform function impulse width value Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 30 2p to 20 8n Preset Value 35p Unit sec Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME IMP WIDT 17e 12 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME IMP WIDT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STIMulus Equivalent GUI TDR TDT Param...

Page 2606: ...cription Transform function rise time value Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 15 9p to 20 8n Preset Value 35p Unit sec Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME STEP RTIM DATA 0 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME STEP RTIM DATA 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STEP RTIMe THReshold CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STIMulu...

Page 2607: ...rameter Description Transform function rise time threshold Data Type Character string type String Range T1_9 10 90 T2_8 20 80 Preset Value T1_9 Unit Resolution Query Response T1_9 T2_8 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME STEP RTIM THR T1_9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME STEP RTIM THR 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STEP RTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STIMu...

Page 2608: ...ata Type Character string type String Range LPSTep Lowpass Step LPIMpulse Lowpass Impulse Preset Value LPSTep Unit Resolution Query Response LPSTep LPIMpulse newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME STIM LPSTep 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TIME STIM 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME IMPulse WIDTh CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STEP RTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr TIME STEP RTIMe...

Page 2609: ...CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe STATe is off Parameter Description Value of transition time result Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TTIM DATA 20 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe STATe CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe THReshold Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is availa...

Page 2610: ...eter Description Status of display of rise time marker Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TTIM STAT ON 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TTIM STAT 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe THReshold Equivalent GUI Marker Search Rise Time 10 90 or Rise T...

Page 2611: ...nction Parameter Description Transition time function rise time threshold Data Type Character string type String Range T1_9 10 90 T2_8 20 80 Preset Value T1_9 Unit Resolution Query Response T1_9 T2_8 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TTIM THR T1_9 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC TRAC1 TTIM THR 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe DATA CALCulate TRACe Tr TTIMe STATe Equivalent GU...

Page 2612: ...y ATRaces SCALe AUTO Description This command executes auto scale for all traces Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP ATR SCAL AUTO Related Commands DISPlay TRACe Tr X SCALe AUTO DISPlay TRACe Tr Y SCALe AUTO Equivalent GUI Auto Scale All Traces OR Right click on the graph plot Auto Scale All ...

Page 2613: ...rement Parameter Description Sets x axis reference position for the time domain measurement Data Type Character string type String Range LEFT The reference position is left edge CENTer The reference position is center Preset Value LEFT Unit Resolution Query Response LEFT CENTer newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP ATR SCAL RPOS LEFT 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP ATR SCAL RPOS 30 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI...

Page 2614: ...ter Description Back ground color Data Type Character string type String Range NORMal Black background color INVert While background color Preset Value NORMal Unit Resolution Query Response NORMal INVert newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISPlay IMAGe NORMal 20 OUTPUT 717 DISPlay IMAGe 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands MMEMory STORe IMAGe Equivalent GUI File Invert Color ...

Page 2615: ...cter string type String Range OFF Nothing is displayed on the graph plot DATA Data only is displayed on the graph plot MEMory Memory only is displayed on the graph plot DMEMory Data and Memory are displayed on the graph plot Preset Value DATA Unit Resolution Query Response OFF DATA MEMory DMEMory newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 DMEM TYPE OFF 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 DMEM TYPE 30 ENTE...

Page 2616: ...SPlay TRACe Tr X SCALe AUTO Description This command executes x axis auto scaling Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 X SCAL AUTO Related Commands DISPlay ATRaces SCALe AUTO DISPlay TRACe Tr Y SCALe AUTO Equivalent GUI Auto Scale X OR Right click on the graph plot Auto Scale X ...

Page 2617: ...division Parameter Description X axis scale per division Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 2n Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 X SCAL PDIV 1e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 X SCAL PDIV 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands DISPlay TRACe Tr Y SCALe PDIVision Equivalent GUI TDR TDT input box under the left knob Under Ho...

Page 2618: ...ne Parameter Description Value at X axis reference line Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 10n Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 X SCAL RLEV 20e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 X SCAL RLEV 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands DISPlay TRACe Tr Y SCALe RLEVel Equivalent GUI TDR TDT input box under the right knob Under Hor...

Page 2619: ...lay TRACe Tr Y SCALe AUTO Description This command executes y axis auto scaling Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 Y SCAL AUTO Related Commands DISPlay ATRaces SCALe AUTO DISPlay TRACe Tr X SCALe AUTO Equivalent GUI Auto Scale Y OR Right click on the graph plot Auto Scale Y ...

Page 2620: ...r division Parameter Description Y axis scale per division value Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 20 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 Y SCAL PDIV 20 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 Y SCAL PDIV 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands DISPlay TRACe Tr X SCALe PDIVision Equivalent GUI TDR TDT input box under the left knob Un...

Page 2621: ...e Parameter Description Value at Y axis reference line Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 100 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 Y SCAL RLEV 0 01 20 OUTPUT 717 DISP TRAC1 Y SCAL RLEV 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands DISPlay TRACe Tr X SCALe RLEVel Equivalent GUI TDR TDT input box under the right knob Under Verti...

Page 2622: ...Programming 2849 IEEE CLS Type Command Only Syntax CLS Description This command clears the status Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 CLS Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2623: ...071C TDR application Parameter Description Gets model information Data Type Character string type String Range Preset Value Agilent Technologies ENA TDR revision number Unit Resolution Query Response String newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 IDN 20 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI E5071C OPT TDR logo at the upper left corner on GUI ...

Page 2624: ... complete Parameter Description Operation complete Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 is returned when all pending operations are complete Preset Value Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 OPC 20 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2625: ...xt The bit pattern editing is not available through the command Parameter Description File name of user bit pattern txt Data Type Character string type String Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD EYE BPAT D TDR userbit txt 20 OUTPUT 717 CALC EYE INP BPAT TYPE USER Related Commands CALCulate EYE INPut BPATtern TYPE Equivalent GUI Eye Mask User Pattern Under Bit Patter...

Page 2626: ... extension of file should be msk The MASK pattern editing is not available through the command Parameter Description File name of eye mask msk Data Type Character string type String Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples See the example in CALCulate EYE MASK STATe Related Commands CALCulate EYE MASK STATe CALCulate EYE EXECute CALCulate EYE STATe Equivalent GUI Eye Mask Mask Pattern under Eye...

Page 2627: ...his command stores measurement trace data Parameter Description File name of data file csv Data Type Character string type String Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEMory STORe FDATa D TDR dataresult csv Related Commands MMEMory STORe SNP Equivalent GUI File Save Trace Data ...

Page 2628: ...is command stores a display image into a bmp png format file Parameter Description File name of image bmp or png Data Type Character string type String Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR IMAG D TDR figure1 png Related Commands DISPlay IMAGe Equivalent GUI File Save Image ...

Page 2629: ...tting of DUT topology File Extension DUT Topology s1p Single Ended 1 s2p Single Ended 2 Differential 1 s4p Single Ended 4 Differential 2 Parameter Description File name of touchstone file snp Data Type Character string type String Range Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR SNP D TDR touchstone s2p Related Commands MMEMory STORe FDATa Equivalent GUI File Save Touchstone ...

Page 2630: ... CLEar Type Command Only Syntax SENSe AVERage CLEar Description This command clears average count Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER CLE Related Commands SENSe AVERage COUNt SENSe AVERage STATe Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2631: ...scription Number of Averaging factor Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 999 Preset Value 16 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER COUN 16 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER STAT ON Related Commands SENSe AVERage STATe SENSe AVERage CLEar Equivalent GUI Setup Averaging Type in the average factor in to entry box beside Averaging ...

Page 2632: ...e averaging Parameter Description Status of averaging on or off Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER COUN 16 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER STAT ON Related Commands SENSe AVERage CLEar SENSe AVERage COUNt TRIGger AVERage Equivalent GUI Setup Averaging ...

Page 2633: ...ption This command clears the calibration in the basic mode and allows you to use the Advance Calibration Mode Before you perform the calibration such as TRL calibration for channel 1 TDR this command should be executed Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL ADV IMM Equivalent GUI Advanced Mode check box on of Advanced Calibration Methods ...

Page 2634: ...ere the load measurement is executed Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC LOAD 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC SAVE Related Commands SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp OPEN SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp THRU SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp SAVE Equivalent GUI Setup Deskew Loss Compensation under Basic Measur...

Page 2635: ... the open measurement is executed Data Type Long integer type Long Range 1 to 4 Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC OPEN 1 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC SAVE Related Commands SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp LOAD SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp THRU SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp SAVE Equivalent GUI Setup Deskew Loss Compensation under Basic Measure T...

Page 2636: ...aves the result of Loss Compensation sequence Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC SAVE Related Commands SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp OPEN SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp LOAD SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp THRU Equivalent GUI Setup Deskew Loss Compensation under Basic Measure Port 1 and or Port 2 and or Port 3 and or Port 4 Apply ...

Page 2637: ...ing type String Range TH12 Thru between ports 1 and 2 TH13 Thru between ports 1 and 3 TH24 Thru between ports 2 and 4 Preset Value Unit Resolution Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC THRU TH12 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL DLC SAVE Related Commands SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp OPEN SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp LOAD SENSe CORRection COLLection DLComp SAVE Equivalent GUI Setup Deske...

Page 2638: ...CAL FCOMp Type Command Only Syntax SENSe CORRection COLLection ECAL FCOMp Description This command executes fixture compensation after ECal Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL ECAL FCOM Equivalent GUI Setup ECal under Basic Calibrate Fixture Comp ...

Page 2639: ... IMMediate Type Command Only Syntax SENSe CORRection COLLection ECAL IMMediate Description This command executes full calibration using the ECal module Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR COLL ECAL IMM Equivalent GUI Setup ECal under Basic Calibrate ...

Page 2640: ...alue Parameter Description Dielectric constant value Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 10m to 100 Preset Value 1000m Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR DCON 0 01 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR DCON 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands SENSe CORRection RIMPedance Equivalent GUI Setup Dielectric Const under More Functions ...

Page 2641: ...Se CORRection EXTension AUTO IMMediate Description This command executes deskew auto port extension Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR EXT AUTO IMM Related Commands SENSe CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT pt SENSe CORRection EXTension AUTO STANdard Equivalent GUI Setup Deskew under Basic ...

Page 2642: ...n Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value ON Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR EXT AUTO PORT1 ON 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR EXT AUTO PORT1 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands SENSe CORRection EXTension AUTO IMMediate SENSe CORRection EXTension AUTO STANdard Equivalent GUI Setup Deskew under Basic Option Port1 and or Port2 and or Port3 and...

Page 2643: ...haracter string type String Range OPEN Open termination SHORt Short termination Preset Value OPEN Unit Resolution Query Response OPEN SHORt newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR EXT AUTO STAN OPEN 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR EXT AUTO STAN 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands SENSe CORRection EXTension AUTO PORT pt SENSe CORRection EXTension AUTO IMMediate Equivalent GUI Setup Deskew under Basic Opti...

Page 2644: ...Programming 2871 ...

Page 2645: ...dance value Parameter Description Reference impedance value Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 1m to 10M Preset Value 50 Unit Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR RIMP 0 001 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS CORR RIMP 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands SENSe CORRection DCONstant Equivalent GUI Setup Ref Z under More Functions ...

Page 2646: ...Type Command Only Syntax SENSe DLENgth AUTO IMMediate Description This command executes auto DUT length setting Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS DLEN AUTO IMM Related Commands SENSe DLENgth DATA Equivalent GUI TDR TDT DUT Length Auto under Basic Measure ...

Page 2647: ...on DUT length value Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range 6 26n to 416n Preset Value 6 26n Unit sec Resolution Query Response numeric newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SENS DLEN DATA 6 26e 9 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS DLEN DATA 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands SENSe DLENgth AUTO IMMediate Equivalent GUI TDR TDT DUT Length under Basic Enter the DUT length ...

Page 2648: ...s command gets error code description Parameter Description Error code Data Type Double precision floating point type Double Range Preset Value 0 No error Unit Resolution Query Response newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST ERR 30 ENTER 717 A Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2649: ...76 SYSTem PRESet Type Command Only Syntax SYSTem PRESet Description This command presets the E5071C setting Calibration data will be lost Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 SYST PRES Equivalent GUI Setup Preset under Basic ...

Page 2650: ... factor is set at 16 one trigger makes a measurement for 16 times Parameter Description Status of Averaging trigger Data Type Boolean type Boolean Range ON OFF 1 0 Preset Value OFF Unit Resolution Query Response 1 0 newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG MODE HOLD 20 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER COUN 16 30 OUTPUT 717 SENS AVER STAT ON 40 OUTPUT 717 TRIG AVER ON 50 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SING Related Commands SE...

Page 2651: ...E5071C 2878 No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2652: ... string type String Range HOLD Trigger is on hold until the conditions are meet the trigger event starts SINGle Trigger event is run once RUN Trigger event is running continuous Preset Value RUN Unit Resolution Query Response HOLD SINGle RUN newline END Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG MODE HOLD 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG MODE 30 ENTER 717 A Related Commands TRIGger SINGle Equivalent GUI Stop Single or Run ...

Page 2653: ... TRIGger SINGle Type Command Only Syntax TRIGger SINGle Description This command executes single trigger Examples 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SING Related Commands TRIGger MODE Equivalent GUI No equivalent GUI is available ...

Page 2654: ...ort Test Set Overview This section provides information about controlling multiport test set E5092A E5091A with E5071C Connecting E5071C and Multiport Test Set Setting Multiport Test Set Performing Measurement Controlling Multiport Test Set by Programming ...

Page 2655: ...60 465 480 485 E5092A option 020 Type N to SMA coaxial adapter included in the E5092A 08C for connection with the E5071C Agilent part number 1250 2879 SMA semi rigid cable included in the E5092A 08C for connection with the E5071C Agilent part number E5092 61652 USB cable supplied with the E5092A Agilent part number 8121 1695 For the rackmount usage it is recommended to use semi rigid cable Agilent...

Page 2656: ...Controlling Multiport Test Set 2883 4 Click Finish ...

Page 2657: ...E5071C 2884 5 The Found New Hardware Wizard appears again Select install the software automatically then click Next 6 Click Finish ...

Page 2658: ...once the multiport test set driver is updated RF Cable Connection 1 Connect the type N to SMA adapter on the test ports PORT 1 to 4 of the E5071C 2 Connect the SMA semi rigid cables between the adapters on the E5071C and the test ports PORT 1 to 4 of the multiport test set Make the connection so that the numbers of the ENA ports and the test set ports match ...

Page 2659: ...luded in the E5092A 20C for connection with the E5071C Agilent part number 85027 60005 Semi rigid cable included in the E5092A 20C for connection with the E5071C Agilent part number E5092 61653 USB cable supplied with the E5092A Agilent part number 8121 1695 For the rackmount usage it is recommended to use semi rigid cable Agilent part number E5092 61655 included in the E5092A 20C for connection w...

Page 2660: ...t ports match Connecting E5071C Option 440 445 460 465 480 485 and E5091A Required Devices The devices required to connect the E5071C option 440 445 460 465 480 485 to the E5091A multiport test set are listed below E5071C option 440 445 460 465 480 485 E5091A option 009 016 Type N to Type N cable supplied with the E5091A option 009 or 016 for connection with the E5071C Agilent part number 8120 478...

Page 2661: ... 1 Connect the USB cable between one of USB ports on the E5071C rear panel and that of the E5091A 2 Turn on the E5071C and the E5091A 3 The Found New Hardware Wizard appears Select No not this time then click Next ...

Page 2662: ...Controlling Multiport Test Set 2889 4 Select Install the software automatically then click Next ...

Page 2663: ...E5071C 2890 5 Click Finish 6 The Found New Hardware Wizard appears again Select No not this time then click Next ...

Page 2664: ...Controlling Multiport Test Set 2891 ...

Page 2665: ...E5071C 2892 7 Select Install the software automatically then click Next 8 Select Agilent E5091A of Location C windows inf oemxx inf xx is numeric number e g oem29 inf then click Next ...

Page 2666: ...Controlling Multiport Test Set 2893 ...

Page 2667: ...o the USB ports while the E5071C is measuring with the E5091A Even if you install the driver on a USB port you will be asked to install driver again if you connect E5091A with a different USB port RF Cable Connection Connect the type N cables between the test ports PORT 1 to 4 of the E5071C and the test ports PORT 1 to 4 of the multiport test set Make the connection so that the numbers of the ENA ...

Page 2668: ...Controlling Multiport Test Set 2895 Connecting Two Multiport Test Sets Up to two multiport test sets can be connected to one ENA for measurements with more multiple test ports ...

Page 2669: ... the multiport test set setup menu 3 Select Test Set 1 for the test set with ID 1 and Test Set 2 for ID 2 4 The E5091A option 009 and 016 and the E5092A option 020 can be used at the same time Recommended Wrench When using a semi rigid cable connect the semi rigid cable to a test port of the multiport test set with a specified torque using a torque wrench Specified torque 5 7 kgf cm 56 N cm 5 in l...

Page 2670: ...t Ports Assigns test ports of the E5071C and those of the multiport test set Displaying the Properties Displays the multiport test set property to check the port setting Setting Control Line Makes the setting of the control line that controls the DUT Other topics about Controlling Multiport Test Set Selecting ID for Multiport Test Set Operational Procedure 1 Set the target ID to the ID of the conn...

Page 2671: ...91A option 009 and 016 and the E5092A option 020 can be used at the same time Selecting the Configuration of the Multiport Test Set Select the configuration of the multiport test set you want to set Operational Procedure 1 Press System Multiport Test Set Setup Test Set 1 or Test Set 2 2 Click Select Test Set 3 Select the configuration of the multiport test set from the following selection Test set...

Page 2672: ... of the E5091A E5091A 009 E5091_13 Select the 13 port configuration of the E5091A 016 E5091_16 Select the 16 port configuration of the E5091A 016 4 Click Control to enable ON control of the multiport test set 5 The enable ON disable OFF setting of the control function of the multiport test set is executed for all channels If the model you use and the selected softkey is different the configuration...

Page 2673: ...corresponding softkey to assign the connected test port of the multport test set 4 Execute Step 2 through Step 3 for all channels for which you want to perform sweep When the E5091_9 is Selected Softkey Function Port 1 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 1 You can select the port from A or T1 Port 2 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port...

Page 2674: ... T1 T2 T3 or T4 Port 3 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 3 You can select the port from R1 R2 R3 or R4 Port 4 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 4 You can select the port from R1 R2 R3 or R4 Port 5 Selects a test port of the switch 13 SW13 You can select the port from X1 or X2 Port 6 Selects a test port of the switch 14 SW14 You ca...

Page 2675: ...he port 2 You can select the port from A7 A8 A9 A10 or A11 Port 3 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 3 You can select the port from B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 or B6 Port 4 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 4 You can select the port from B7 B8 B9 B10 or B11 When the E5092_28 is Selected Softkey Function Port 1 Selects a test port of the switch ...

Page 2676: ...rt 1 You can select the port from 1 3 5 or 7 Port 2 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 2 You can select the port from 2 4 6 or 8 Port 3 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 3 You can select the port from 2 4 6 or 10 Port 4 Selects a test port of the multiport test set connected to the port 4 You can select the port from 1 3 5 or 9 Dis...

Page 2677: ...play the multiport test set s properties The enable ON disable OFF setting of the multiport test set properties display is executed for all channels Setting Control Line The E5071C can control the output from the control line of the multiport test set and control the DUT for example switching the frequency band of the front end module E5092A Front Panel ...

Page 2678: ...Controlling Multiport Test Set 2905 E5092A Control Line ...

Page 2679: ...E5071C 2906 ...

Page 2680: ... want to set the control line 3 Click Control Lines for E5091A or Control Line A B C D for E5092A to display the settings menu for the DUT control line 4 Use the corresponding softkey to set the control line of the multiport test set Softkey Function Line 1 to Line 8 Set High Low of each line of the control line DC source only for E5092A Set DC source voltage 5 Execute Step 3 through Step 4 for al...

Page 2681: ... measurements with multiport test set is the same as E5071C standalone measurement Perform operations by referring to Making Measurements Trigger state and switching the setting of the Multiport test set The following table shows how the setting in the multiport test set is switched from when the trigger state is the stop state Trigger state Switching the setting of multiport test set Stop The set...

Page 2682: ...annel 4 Set the connections of the test ports and the output of the control line according to the setting of the channel swept last 5 Execute a sweep for the last channel Stop or trigger wait The setting is not switched for the stop state it is switched for the trigger wait state ...

Page 2683: ... the test set Multiport Test Set Option E5092A E5092_13 Option 020 13 port measurement E5092_16 Option 020 16 port measurement E5092_22 Option 020 22 port measurement E5092_28 Option 020 28 port measurement E5092_X10 Option 020 X10 port measurement E5091A E5091_9 Option 009 E5091_13 Option 013 13 port measurement E5091_16 Option 016 16 port measurement Checking the name of available test set To ch...

Page 2684: ...igned to Port 1 to Port n multiport test set properties in the lower right part in the window for each channel To turn ON OFF the properties display use the following command SENS MULT 1 2 DISP Checking number of ports To check the number of the multiport test set connected ports use the following command SENS MULT 1 2 COUN Checking the available port name To check the name of the multiport test s...

Page 2685: ...a voltage and switch To set the value of output data voltage and switch use the following command CONT MULT 1 2 OUTP A D DATA CONT MULT 1 2 OUTP A D VOLT DATA CONT MULT 1 2 PORT 1 20 SEL SENS 1 160 MULT 1 2 OUTP DATA SENS 1 160 MULT 1 2 OUTP A D DATA SENS 1 160 MULT 1 2 OUTP A D VOLT DATA SENS 1 160 MULT 1 2 PORT 1 20 SEL Selecting test set To select the test set use the following command SENS 1 1...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for E5071C

Brand: 2B Technologies Pages: 4

Brand: Bacharach Pages: 64

Brand: NARDA Pages: 64

AccuPoint 2 ATP

Brand: Neogen Corporation Pages: 16

Brand: Keller Pages: 4

Brand: Datakom Pages: 2

KINGFISHER PLUS+

Brand: semaphore Pages: 247

Brand: Parker Pages: 16

Brand: Waterproof Pages: 51

WD-35606-00, WD-35606-05

Brand: Oakton Pages: 10

Brand: Fuji Electric Pages: 85

Energy Tech 401

Brand: CODEL Pages: 131

Brand: SAND Pages: 15

Brand: SNV Engineering Pages: 43

Brand: National Instruments Pages: 23

Brand: LaMotte Pages: 136

Brand: Brüel & Kjær Pages: 85

Brand: TriBrer Pages: 28

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands